all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photo |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 3.28 MiB | December 01 2016 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
RF Safety Manual | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB | December 01 2016 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual I | Users Manual | 2.93 MiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual II | Users Manual | 276.70 KiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual III | Users Manual | 2.93 MiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 2.00 MiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 122.58 KiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 123.75 KiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
FCC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 401.17 KiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Frequencies Justification Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 108.28 KiB | January 30 2019 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Operating Description | Operational Description | January 30 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Parts List | Parts List/Tune Up Info | January 30 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Schematics | Schematics | January 30 2019 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | January 30 2019 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | January 30 2019 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Attestation Statements | December 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | December 01 2016 |
1 2 3 4 | Manual | Users Manual | 3.28 MiB | December 01 2016 |
PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e COLOR DISPLAY MOBILE USER GUIDE Contents Declaration of Conformity.......................14 Important Safety Information........16 Software Version............................17 Version logicielle........................... 18 Computer Software Copyrights....19 Getting Started...............................20 How to Use This Guide..................................20 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................20 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......22 Powering Up the Radio..................................22 Adjusting the Volume.....................................22 Identifying Radio Controls............24 Radio Controls...............................................24 Using the Volume/Channel Knob.................. 24 Non-Connect Plus Operations......25 Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode.................................... 26 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................26 Programmable Buttons....................... 26 Assignable Radio Functions.....27 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions............................ 30 Accessing the Programmed Functions....................................... 30 C o n t e n t s 1 English Identifying Status Indicators................31 Display Icons............................31 Call Icons................................. 34 Advanced Menu Icons..............34 Mini Notice Icons......................35 Sent Item Icons
....................35 Bluetooth Device Icons............ 36 Job Tickets Icons..................... 36 LED Indicator........................... 36 Alert Tones...............................37 Indicator Tones........................ 38 Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital Mode................38
...............................39
..................................39
...................... 40 IP Site Connect Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode.................................... 42 Selecting a Zone.................................42 Selecting a Channel............................42 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call...................................... 43 s t n e t n o C 2 English Receiving and Responding to a Group Call....................43 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
.............. 44 Receiving an All Call ............... 44 Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call
...........45 Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call
............... 46 Making a Radio Call............................47 Making a Group Call................ 48 Making a Private Call
...........49 Making an All Call ................... 50 Making a Selective Call
....... 50 Making a Phone Call................51 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button........52 Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key .....................................53 Stopping a Radio Call
.....................54 Talkaround..........................................55 Advanced Features in Non-
Connect Plus Mode............ 56 Radio Check....................................... 56 Sending a Radio Check........... 56 Remote Monitor.................................. 57 Initiating Remote Monitor......... 58 Stopping Remote Monitor........ 59 Scan Lists........................................... 59 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List............................. 59 Editing the Scan List................ 60 Scan....................................................62 Starting and Stopping Scan..... 62 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan....................................63 Deleting a Nuisance Channel...63 Restoring a Nuisance Channel...............................63 Vote Scan
.......................................64 Contact Settings..................................64 Making a Group Call from Contacts..............................65 Making a Private Call from Contacts
..........................66 Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key
..................................66 C o n t e n t s Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key
..................................67 Adding a New Contact............. 68 Setting a Default Contact
.....69 Call Indicator Settings.........................69 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert
.........................................69 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls
................................70 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Call
..................................71 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message............................. 71 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for 3 English Telemetry Status with Text..................................... 72 Assigning Ring Styles.............. 72 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume................................73 Call Log Features................................73 Viewing Recent Calls............... 73 Deleting a Call from a Call List...................................... 74 Viewing Details from a Call List...................................... 74 Call Alert Operation.............................75 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert...................... 75 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List......................... 75 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button..................................76 Emergency Operation.........................76 Receiving an Emergency Alarm...................................77 Responding to an Emergency Alarm............... 77 Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm............... 78 s t n e t n o C 4 English Sending an Emergency Alarm...................................78 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call.................... 79 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Reinitiating an Emergency
............................. 80 Mode................................... 82 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm............... 82
..................83 Text Message Features Sending a Quick Text Message............................. 83 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button.......... 84 Accessing the Drafts Folder.....84 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages............................85 Managing Sent Text Messages............................86 Receiving a Text Message.......90 Managing Received Text Messages............................91 Job Tickets..........................................94 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder..................................95 Logging In and Out of the Remote Server....................96 Creating and Sending a Job Ticket.................................. 96 Responding to the Job Ticket...97 Deleting a Job Ticket................98
............................................99
........................ 100 Privacy Multi-Site Controls Starting an Automatic Site Search...............................100 Stopping an Automatic Site Search...............................101 Starting a Manual Site Search...............................102 Security.............................................103 Radio Disable.........................103 Radio Enable..........................104 Lone Worker..................................... 106 Bluetooth Operation..........................107 Turning Bluetooth On and Off..................................... 107 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device...............108 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode).........109 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device...............109 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device............................... 110 Viewing Device Details...........110 Deleting Device Name........... 110 Bluetooth Mic Gain.................111 Notification List..................................111 Accessing the Notification List.................................... 112 Auto-Range Transponder System
(ARTS)
.....................................112 Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 112 Wi-Fi Operation.................................113 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........113 Connecting to a Network Access Point..................... 114 Refreshing the Network List...114 Adding a Network...................115 Viewing Details of Network Access Points................... 116 English C o n t e n t s 5 Removing Network Access Points................................ 116 Third Party Peripherals Connection Modes.......................................... 117 Utilities.............................................. 118 Setting the Squelch Level...... 118 Setting the Power Level......... 118 Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off..........119 Identifying Cable Type........... 119 Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off..............120 Turning the Radio Tones/
Alerts On or Off................. 121 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..........121 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................. 122 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off.................. 122 Setting the Text Message Alert Tone......................... 123 Changing the Display Mode...124 Adjusting the Display Brightness......................... 124 Language............................... 125 s t n e t n o C 6 English Turning Horns/Lights On or Off..................................... 126 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off........................... 126 Turning the Public Address System On or Off.............. 127 Turning the External Public Address System On or Off..................................... 127 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference........127 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off...............128 Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off.. 128 Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature..............................128 Call Forwarding
..................129 Menu Timer............................130 Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-
A)...................................... 130 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-
D)...................................... 131 Intelligent Audio......................131 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off
..........132 Setting the Audio Ambience...133 Setting the Audio Profiles.......134 Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off..................................... 134 Flexible Receive List.............. 135 Accessing General Radio Information........................ 136 Keypad Microphone Features.............................140 Using the Keypad..............................140 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off................................. 141 Additional Advanced Features..........142 Selecting a Zone by Alias Search...............................142 Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial
...................143 Initiating a Remote Monitor by Manual Dial
.............. 144 Making a Private Call by Manual Dial
...................145 Making a Phone Call by Manual Dial
...................146 Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button Making a Group, Private or
........................... 147 All Call with the Programmable Number Key
................................149 Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button
................ 150 Making a Phone Call from Contacts
........................152 Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search
.......................... 154 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search. 156 Editing the Scan List.............. 157 Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List............................. 160 Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial
...................160 RSSI Values...........................161
............................ 161 Text Messaging C o n t e n t s 7 English Writing and Sending a Text Message........................... 162 Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox................... 163 Editing a Quick Reply Message........................... 164 Accessing the Drafts Folder...165 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages..........................166 Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 168 Security
.........................................168 Radio Disable via Manual Dial....................................168 Radio Enable via Manual Dial....................................169 Password Lock Features.................. 170 Accessing the Radio from Password.......................... 170 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State..................... 171 Turning the Password Lock On or Off........................... 171 Changing the Password.........172 Text Entry Configuration................... 173 Word Correct..........................173 Word Predict.......................... 174 Sentence Cap........................ 174 Viewing Custom Words..........175 Editing Custom Word............. 175 Adding Custom Words........... 176 Deleting a Custom Word........177 Deleting All Custom Words.... 178 Front Panel Configuration (FPC)...... 179 Entering FPC Mode................179 Editing FPC Mode Parameters....................... 179 Connect Plus Operations............180 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode...... 181 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............181 Programmable Buttons..................... 181 Assignable Radio Functions...182 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions.......................... 183 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode..................... 183 Display Icons..........................183 Call Icons............................... 185 s t n e t n o C 8 English Advanced Menu Icons............186 Sent Item Icons ..................... 186 Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 186 LED Indicator......................... 187 Indicator Tones...................... 188 Alert Tones.............................188 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes.....188 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode...... 190 Selecting a Site.................................190 Roam Request....................... 190 Site Lock On/Off.....................190 Site Restriction.......................190 Selecting a Zone...............................191 Using Multiple Networks................... 191 Selecting a Call Type........................192 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call.................................... 192 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call..................192 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call.................193 Receiving a Site All Call.........193 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call............ 194 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call....... 195 Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call....................................195 Making a Radio Call..........................196 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob..... 196 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button......198 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button........................ 199 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button........................ 199 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu................................. 200 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts. 201 Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call............ 202 C o n t e n t s 9 English Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call....................................202 Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call............ 203 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode.......... 204 Auto Fallback.................................... 204 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode................................. 204 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode...................204 Returning to Normal Operation.......................... 205 Radio Check..................................... 205 Sending a Radio Check......... 206 Remote Monitor................................ 206 Initiating Remote Monitor....... 207 Scan..................................................208 Starting and Stopping Scan... 208 s t n e t n o C 10 English Responding to a Transmission During a Scan..................................208 User Configurable Scan....................209 Turning Scan On or Off.....................209 Editing the Scan List......................... 210 Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu............................211 Understanding Scan Operation.........213 Scan Talkback.................................. 214 Contacts Settings..............................214 Making a Private Call from Contacts............................215 Making a Call Alias Search.... 215 Adding a New Contact........... 216 Call Indicator Settings.......................217 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert .217 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls.................................. 217 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message........................... 218 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..............................218 Call Log Features..............................219 Viewing Recent Calls............. 219 Deleting a Call from a Call List.................................... 219 Viewing Details from a Call List.................................... 220 Call Alert Operation...........................220 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert.................... 220 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List....................... 221 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button................................221 Emergency Operation.......................222 Receiving an Incoming Emergency........................224 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List.... 224 Deleting the Emergency Details............................... 224 Responding to an Emergency Call.................225 Responding to an Emergency Alert............... 225 Initiating an Emergency Call.. 226 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow.......... 226 Initiating an Emergency Alert. 227 Exiting Emergency Mode....... 227 Text Message Features.................... 228 Sending a Quick Text Message........................... 228 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button........ 229 Accessing the Drafts Folder...229 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages..........................231 Managing Sent Text Messages..........................232 Receiving a Text Message.....235 Reading a Text Message....... 236 Managing Received Text Messages..........................236 Privacy.............................................. 239 Making a Privacy-Enabled
(Scrambled) Call............... 240 Security.............................................240 Radio Disable.........................241 Radio Enable..........................242 Bluetooth Operation..........................243 Turning Bluetooth On and Off..................................... 244 C o n t e n t s 11 English Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device...............245 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode).........246 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device...............246 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device............................... 247 Viewing Device Details...........247 Deleting Device Name........... 247 Bluetooth Mic Gain.................248 Notification List..................................248 Accessing the Notification List.................................... 249 Wi-Fi Operation.................................249 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........249 Connecting to a Network Access Point..................... 250 Refreshing the Network List...250 Adding a Network...................251 Viewing Details of Network Access Points................... 252 Removing Network Access Points................................ 252 Utilities.............................................. 253 Turning the Radio Tones/
Alerts On or Off................. 253 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..........254 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................. 254 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off.................. 255 Setting the Power Level......... 255 Changing the Display Mode...256 Adjusting the Display Brightness......................... 257 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off...............257 Language............................... 258 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off........................... 258 Identifying Cable Type........... 259 Voice Announcement.............259 Menu Timer............................260 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off..................................... 260 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference........261 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-
D)...................................... 261 s t n e t n o C 12 English Intelligent Audio......................262 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off..............263 Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off..................................... 264 Accessing General Radio Information........................ 265 Accessories..................................276 Authorized Accessories List..................................... 277 Antennas...........................................277 Audio.................................................279 Cables...............................................280 Desktop Accessories........................ 280 Mounting Kits.................................... 281 Speakers...........................................281 Miscellaneous Accessories...............281 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range...............................282 Special Channel Assignments.....................282 Emergency Channel......................... 282 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 282 Operating Frequency Requirements............282 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............285 Technical Parameters for Interfacing C o n t e n t s External Data Sources............................285 Limited Warranty....................................286 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 286 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 286 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 287 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................287 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.287 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................288 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 288 VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................290 13 English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 14 English Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 15 English D c a r a l t i o n d e c o n f o r m i t Appareil numrique de Classe B En tant que priphrique d'ordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux stipulations de la partie 15 des r-
glements de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :
1 Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence nuisible. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonction-
nement indsirable. Remarque Ce matriel a fait l'objet de tests et a t dclar conforme aux limites tablies pour un appareil numrique de classe B, comme il est stipul la section 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixes afin d'offrir une protection suffisante contre des interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Ce matriel gnre, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install ni utilis confor-
mment aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant, on ne peut garantir qu'il n'y aura aucune interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si cet appareil cause une interfrence nuisible de la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant l'appareil, vous tes encourag remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :
Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher l'appareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter un revendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision chevronn pour obtenir de l'aide. Franais
(Canada) and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type n o i t a m r o n f I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 16 English antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!
Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :
http://www.motorolasolutions.com Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans l'autorisation explicite de Motorola peut annuler l'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil. Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i 2 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.50.00 or later. See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version on page 137 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. S o f t w a r e V e r s o n i 17 English Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R02.50.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Consultez la section Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version on page 137 pour connatre la version logicielle de votre radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. e l l i i e c g o l n o s r e V i 18 English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-
exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. C o m p u t e r S o f t w a r e C o p y r i g h t s 19 English Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the MOTOTRBO Mobiles. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Throughout this publication, the icons described next are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional Analog mode or conventional Digital mode:
Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-
Only feature. Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-
Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional Analog and Digital modes, no icon is shown. Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are not available in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Connect Plus Operations on page 180 for more information. For features that are available in a conventional multi-
site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 39 for more information. Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on page 39 for more information. Selected features are also available in the multi-site trunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 40 for more information. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:
Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?
Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?
What optional accessories may suit your needs?
d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 20 English What are the best radio usage practices for effective communication?
What maintenance procedures will help promote longer radio life?
G e t t i n g S a r t t e d 21 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Powering Up the Radio Turn off the radio by pressing and holding the On/Off Button until you see Powering Down on the display of the radio. Note:
Your radio may take up to 7 seconds to completely turn off. Adjusting the Volume
) briefly. You see Press the On/Off Button (
MOTOTRBO (TM) on the display of the radio momentarily, followed by a welcome message or welcome image. The green LED and the Home screen lights up. A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up test is successful. Note:
There is no power up tone if the radio tones/
alerts function is disabled (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 121). If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer.
) clockwise. Increase the volume by turning the Volume/Channel Knob (
Decrease the volume by turning this knob counterclockwise. Note:
Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 22 English AP1A minimum volume. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 23 English Identifying Radio Controls Radio Controls 8 Front Programmable Buttons[1]
9 Accessory Connector 10 LED Indicators Using the Volume/Channel Knob The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed as dual purpose for both volume and channel or as a volume-only control. To adjust the volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 22. To change channels, push and hold the knob until channel selection screen is displayed, then turn the knob to the required channel. To exit the channel selection state, do one of the following:
Push the Volume/Channel Knob again. Press
. Press
. Wait for the menu timer to expire. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 1 On/Off/Information Button 2 Volume/Channel Knob 3 Display 4 Menu/OK Button 5 Scroll Up/Down Buttons 6 Speaker 7 Return/Home Button 24 1 These buttons are programmable. English 12346591078 Non-Connect Plus Operations N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s O p e r a t i o n s 25 English Additional Radio Controls in Non-
Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (
two basic purposes:
) serves While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 47). If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, if your call is interrupted, indicating that you should release the PTT button, for example when the radio receives an Emergency Call. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:
Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 26 English A Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Press and hold Keeping the button pressed. Call Forwarding Note:
The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 76 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. Assignable Radio Functions Audio Ambience Audio Profiles Bluetooth Audio Switch Call Alert Allows the user to select an environment the radio is operating in. Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a Call Log Contacts Emergency Ext PA On/Off Intelligent Audio Manual Dial contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 27 English Manual Site Roam[2]
Mic AGC On/Off Monitor Notifications Nuisance Channel Delete[2]
Starts the manual site search. Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control (AGC) on or off. Monitors a selected channel for activity. Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 28 English Option Board Feature PA On/Off Permanent Monitor Phone Radio Enable Radio Disable Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Toggles the radios internal public address (PA) system on or off. Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Toggles privacy on or off. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Privacy Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Radio Check Remote Monitor Scan[2]
Site Info Repeater/
Talkaround[2]
Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Toggles scan on or off. Displays current Linked Capacity Plus site name and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site (this function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled). Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a Text Message local or remote radio. Selects the text message menu. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Trill Enhancement On/Off Voice Announcement for Channel Voice Announcement On/Off Voice Operating Transmission
(VOX) Zone Stops the transmission of a remote monitored radio without giving any indicators, or an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Toggles VOX on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 29 English Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:
All Tones/
Alerts Backlight Channel Up/
Down Display Mode Power Level Squelch Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Toggles squelch level between tight and normal. Accessing the Programmed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:
A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. 2 Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 30 English 1 Press appropriate Menu Scroll button (
access the menu functions. to access the menu. Press the or
) to 2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press the button. 3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the button. Long previous screen, press the press the screen. button to return to the Home Note:
The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad microphone (see Keypad Microphone Features on page 140). Note:
Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to your Home screen. Identifying Status Indicators Display Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar, arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and are channel specific. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-
sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Monitor Selected channel is being monitored. Bluetooth The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device con-
nected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Sign In Radio is signed in to the remote server. Sign Out Radio is signed out of the remote server. Job Ticket Notification Notification List has items to review. Power Level or A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 31 English Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-
er Indicates time left before automatic re-
start of radio. GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-
able. GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. Scan[3][4]
Scan feature is enabled. Scan- Priority 1[3][4]
Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 1. Scan- Priority 2[3][4]
Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 2. Vote Scan Vote scan feature is enabled. Flexible Receive List Flexible receive list is enabled. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 32 English Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good[5]
Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average[5]
Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor[5]
Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable[5]
Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming[3]
The site roaming feature is enabled. Talkaround[3][4]
In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently configured for direct radio to ra-
dio communication. Wi-Fi Excellent[5]
3 Not applicable in Capacity Plus 4 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus 5 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 33 English Call Icons The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-
cates a group alias (name) or ID
(number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-
cates a phone alias (name) or ID
(number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group/All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID
(number). Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-
ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID
(number). Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 34 English Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the radios display after an action to perform task is taken. Successful Transmission (Posi-
tive) Successful action taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-
tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-
cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. A d d i t i o n a l OR OR OR Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. Send Failed The text message has not been sent. i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. l P u s M o d e 35 English New Jobs Indicates new jobs. LED Indicator The LED indicator (
your radio.
) shows the operational status of Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Job Tickets Icons All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving or sending an emergency transmission, has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Auto-Range Transponder System. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 36 English A Solid yellow Blinking yellow Double blinking yellow Radio is monitoring a conventional channel or in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is scanning for activity or receiving a Call Alert, flexible receive list is enabled or all local Linked Capacity Plus channels are busy. Radio is no longer connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus; all Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus channels are currently busy. Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Blinking green Radio is powering up, receiving a non-
privacy-enabled call or data, or detecting activity, or retrieving Over-
the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Double blinking green Note:
While in conventional mode, when the LED blinks green, it indicates the radio detects activity over the air. Due to the nature of the digital protocol, this activity may or may not affect the radio's programmed channel. For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air. Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously un-
til termination. Sounds periodically de-
pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that re-
peats itself until it is ter-
minated by the user. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 37 English Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a short period of time de-
fined by the radio. Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital Mode Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. To switch between an analog or a digital channel, use the Scroll Up/Down (
Volume/Channel Knob (
Programmed Channel Up or Channel Down
) buttons.
). buttons. When switching from digital to analog mode, certain features are unavailable. Icons for the digital features
(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing grayed out. Disabled features are hidden in the menu. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital mode. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Note:
Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on page 62). To use the Scroll Up/Down buttons, while in the Home Screen of the required Zone, press to select the required channel. or e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 38 English AB To use the programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons, while in the Home Screen of the required Zone, press Channel Up or Channel Down to select the required channel. IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Note:
Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s) in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels
(including the Selected Channel). Note:
You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 39 English You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. Note:
You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 40 English Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 41 English Making and Receiving Calls in Non-
Connect Plus Mode 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 99 channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 channels per zone. 3 1 Access the Zone feature. Steps Radio Con-
trols Programmed Zone button Radio menu Press the programmed Zone button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
. or or and scroll to the required zone. to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Selecting a Channel Transmissions are sent and received on a channel. Depending on your radios configuration, each channel may have been programmed differently to support different groups of users or supplied with different features. Select a channel by using:
Scroll Up or Scroll Down buttons. Volume/Channel Knob. The programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 42 English Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note:
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 99 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 43 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i The PTT Sidetone 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note:
See Making a Group Call on page 48 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. 44 English If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. See Making a Private Call on page 49 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving an All Call An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined time before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. You cannot respond to an All Call. Note:
See Making an All Call on page 50 for details on making an All Call. Note:
The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During an All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinks green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call. The first text line shows the Private Call icon. The radio displays Selective Call or Alert with Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 49 for details on making a Private Call. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 45 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call Note:
If Phone Call capability is enabled, you are able to respond to a Phone Call. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Phone Call as Private Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. 46 English If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Phone Call as Group Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, the Phone Group Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the group alias and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call. Phone Call as All Call When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows All Call and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. Note:
When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to the call or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows All Call and Call Ended. Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Group or Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The programmed number keys This method is for Group, Private and All Calls only and is used with the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 53). The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page 64). Manual Dial This method is for Private and Phone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad
(see Making a Private Call by Manual Dial on page M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 47 English 145, and Making a Phone Call by Manual Dial on page 146). Note:
Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-
enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note:
See Privacy on page 99 for more information. Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:
You can also make a Group Call via Contacts
(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on page 65). e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 48 English Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, where a radio presence check is performed prior to setting up the call, while the other sets up the call immediately. Only one of these call types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the Menu, One Touch Access button, the programmed number keys, or the Volume/Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. See Text Message Features on page 83 or Call Alert Operation on page 75 for more information. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 49 English If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. You can also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a Private Call from Contacts on page 66). Making an All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the channel. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows All Call. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone Making a Selective Call Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or respond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. 1 Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 50 English 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Phone Call 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Phone Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press to proceed. The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, enter the extra digits using the keypad and press to proceed. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 51 English The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the radio returns to the previous screen. to end the call. Press If de-access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Do one of the following. Enter the de-access code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press the One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:
When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success. During the call, if you press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note:
Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. 4 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 52 English The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a keypad. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. 1 Long press the programmed number key, when you are on the Home screen, to make a Group, Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds. l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 53 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on page 66 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on the keypad. Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio experiences a stuck microphone condition where the PTT button is inadvertently pressed by the user. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button, while on the relevant channel. The display shows Remote Dekey. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Success, indicating that the channel is now free. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Failed. 54 English 2 3 4 5 Talkaround You can continue to communicate when your repeater is not operating, or when your radio is out of the repeaters range but within talking range of other radios. This is called talkaround. Note:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. The Talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. You can toggle between talkaround and repeater modes by pressing the programmed Repeater/
Talkaround button or using the radio menu as described next. Note:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 1 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to M a k n g i to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Talkaround and press to to enable/disable the Talkaround. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 55 English Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps Radio Control Pro-
gram-
med Ra-
dio Check button 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. or to the required sub-
scriber alias or ID and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Radio Control Menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-
scriber alias or ID:
Select the subscriber alias or ID directly. or to the re-
quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. or to Manual Dial and press lect. to se-
Radio Control Steps The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. or to Radio 2 Wait for acknowledgement. to Number and press select. If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the key-
pad to edit/enter the ID, and press to select. 4 5 or to the required sub-
scriber alias or ID and press to select. or to Radio Check and press to select. button is pressed when the radio is If the waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 57 English Radio Control Steps 3 4 or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or and press to Remote Mon. to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. to select. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. to access the menu or to Contacts and press to select If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Initiating Remote Monitor 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press Steps Radio Control Program-
med Re-
mote Mon-
itor Button Menu 2 1 2 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows negative mini notice. Stopping Remote Monitor Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. Follow the steps below to manually stop Remote Monitor. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/
group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front Panel Programming. Note:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List 1 2 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 59 English 3 4 or select. to Scan List and press to or to view each member on the Use list. The Priority icon appears left of the members alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Editing the Scan List Adding a New Entry to the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English 4 5 6 7 or select. to Add Member and press to or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice, followed immediately by Add Another?. 8 Do one of the following:
or or to Yes and press and repeat Steps 5 to 7. to No and press the current list. to select, to save Deleting an Entry from the Scan List 1 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan List 2 3 4 5 6 or select. to Scan List and press to or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or select. to Delete and press to 7 Do one of the following:
or or to Yes and press to delete entry. The display shows positive mini notice. to No and press to return to the previous screen. 8 Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to delete other entries. After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press to return to the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to select. to Edit Priority and press or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 61 English Note:
The Priority icon appears left of the name of the member. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Scan When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity. The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears on the status bar. During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. There are two ways of initiating scan:
Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans all the channels/groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may (depending on the settings) automatically start on the last scanned active channel/group or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel/group that has Auto Scan enabled. Note:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Starting and Stopping Scan 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan State and press to to required scan state and press or to select. The display shows Scan On when Scan is enabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English The display shows Scan Off if Scan is disabled. The LED turns off and the scan icon disappears. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed time period known as hang time. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other channels/groups. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Deleting a nuisance channel is only possible through the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is not accessible through the menu. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:
Turn the radio off and then power it on again. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 63 English Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan Change the channel via the Channel Up/Down button or menu. buttons. Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio unmutes to transmissions from that base station. The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan icon appears on the status bar. To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan, follow the same procedures as Responding to a Transmission During a Scan on page 63. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Contact Settings Contacts provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each entry, depending on context, associates with one of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for more information. Note:
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call, and All Call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 99 for more information. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog contacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximum of 500 members for Analog and 1000 for Digital on each Contacts list respectively. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
Call Type Call Alias Call ID Note:
You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the Digital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view the subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate a Call Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can only be performed by your dealer. Making a Group Call from Contacts 1 to access the menu. 2 3 or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required group alias or ID. 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When any user in the group responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and the users ID on your display. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 65 English Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. 1 2 Note:
See Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 53 for details on making a Group, Private or All Call with the programmed number key(s). to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English 3 4 5 to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or select. to Program Key and press to or to the desired number key and to select. press If the number key is currently assigned to another entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first line of the display shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following. to Yes and press to overwrite the number key assignment. to No and press to return to the previous step. Each entry can be associated to different number before each number key that is keys. You see a assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that number key is not assigned. or or If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key 1 Access the required alias or ID via:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t Steps Radio Control Program-
med number key Menu Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID; press to select. l P u s M o d e 1 to access the menu. 67 English Radio Control Steps 2 3 or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. or to the required sub-
scriber alias or ID and press to select. or select. to Program Key and press to or to Empty and press to select. The first line of the display shows Clear from all keys? . or to Yes and press to select. Note:
When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Adding a New Contact 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to New Contact and press to or to the required contact type, either Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 2 3 4 68 English 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and 4 press to confirm. 6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 7 If adding a Radio Contact, required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. to select. to the or Setting a Default Contact 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to to the required alias or ID and press or to select. to Set as Default and press or to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. A ID. appears beside the selected default alias or Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 1 2 3 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to Radio Settings and press or to select. 69 English 4 5 6 7 or select. or to select. to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press or to Call Alert and press to select. The current tone is indicated by a
. or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 2 3 4 5 6 7 70 English or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press to Private Call and press to enable/disable the Private Call beside Enabled, if Private Press ringing tones. The display shows Call ringing tones are enabled. The Call ringing tones are disabled. disappears from beside Enabled, if Private Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Call You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Selective Call. 7 or to select. The current tone is indicated by a
. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to Selective Call and press or to select. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 71 English 5 6 7 or to select. to Call Ringers and press to Text Message and press or to select. The current tone is indicated by a
. or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Telemetry Status with Text. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 3 4 5 6 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press or to Telemetry and press to select. The current tone is indicated by a
. Assigning Ring Styles You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 1 to access the menu. 72 English 2 3 4 5 6 or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or to Edit and press to select. or to select. to Edit Ringtone and press or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. to Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
Store alias or ID to Contacts Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to or to preferred list and press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 73 English 4 or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. 5 or to select. to Delete Entry? and press 6 Do one of the following:
e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press or to select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 74 English Press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. or to No, and press the button to return to the previous screen. Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 5 to View Details and press or to select. Display shows details. See Notification List on page 111 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 73 for details about the Missed Call List. Call Alert Operation Making a Call Alert from the Contact List Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:
Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press alert is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 75 English If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. Note:
If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Note:
Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button. In addition, each alarm has the following types:
Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the radios speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the radios speaker. Receiving an Emergency Alarm On receiving an emergency alarm the emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red and the radio displays the emergency caller alias. If more than one alarm has occurred all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. 1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one of the following:
to view more details. Press If a single emergency call alias is displayed, press again to view your action details. If the multiple emergency caller aliases are displayed in the Alarm List, the required alias and press details. Press items. again to view your action or to view more to 2 Press To revisit the Alarm List, press menu and select Alarm List. and select Yes to exit the Alarm List. to access the Responding to an Emergency Alarm A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 In the Alarm List, alias. or to the required 77 English 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group that the Emergency Alarm was targeted to. Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios
(including the emergency receiving radio) transmit non-emergency voice. The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. 4 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 78 English When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. 6 Your radio displays the Alarm List. Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm Exit the Emergency mode by performing one of the following actions:
Delete the alarm items, see Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List for more information. Power down the radio. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode. Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows one of the following:
Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. If your radio does not receive an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement, and after all retries have been exhausted, a tone sounds and the display shows Alarm Failed. Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the speaker of the radio, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker of the radio. The indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or respond to, the call. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. The display shows Sending Alarm, which alternates with your radio ID. Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 79 English 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green and the Group icon appears on the display. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 5 Release the PTT button to listen. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 6 Press the PTT button to respond. 7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. The microphone of your radio is e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:
Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. See the table for examples. Type of microphone connected to... Rear Front Connec-
Connec-
tor tor Any mi-
Non-IM-
PRES crophone Radio uses... Program-
med Connec-
tor*
Rear Rear mi-
crophone Radio uses... Program-
med Connec-
tor*
Type of microphone connected to... Rear Front Connec-
Connec-
tor tor Non-IM-
Any mi-
crophone PRES IMPRES Non-IM-
Rear Front Front mi-
crophone Front mi-
crophone Rear mi-
Non-IM-
PRES crophone
*Check with your dealer or system adminis-
trator for more information. PRES IMPRES Front If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergency mode. Note:
If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the speaker of the radio, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over, and you press the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when you are making the call with hot mic, but allow sound through the speaker of the radio when the target radio responds after the programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only appear when you press the PTT button. Note:
If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 81 English 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency On footswitch. The display shows one of the following:
Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon is displayed. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. When hot mic has been enabled, the radio automatically transmits without a PTT button press until the hot mic duration expires. While transmitting, the LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the display. 3 The radio automatically stops transmitting when the cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. 4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio automatically stops transmitting. To transmit again, press the PTT button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English Reinitiating an Emergency Mode Note:
This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. There are two instances where this can happen:
You change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. This exits the Emergency mode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this new channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency. You press the programmed Emergency On button during an Emergency initiation/transmission state. This causes the radio to exit this state, and to reinitiate Emergency. Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the following occurs:
Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received
(for Emergency Alarm only). All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. The Emergency Off button is pressed. Note:
If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. If you change channels when your radio is in Emergency mode to a channel that has no emergency system configured, No Emergency is shown on your display. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or an e-mail application. Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 4 or select. to Quick Text and press to or to the required and press to select. Press to select. to the required alias or ID and press or to select. The display shows the transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 83 English If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows the negative mini notice. Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or ID. The display shows the transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows the negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 85). Accessing the Drafts Folder The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:
You can edit saved text message before sending it. Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 165. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English 2 3 or select. to Drafts and press to to the required message and press or to select. 3 4 to the required message and press or to select. or to Delete and press to delete the text message. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 or select. to Drafts and press to You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:
Resend Forward Edit (only available with a keypad microphone. See Editing a Text Message on page 167 for more information). Note:
If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-
to-Send message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 85 English Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 2 or select. to Forward and press to or to to select. Select the message recipient by the required alias or ID and press The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
You can also manually select a target radio address (see Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial on page 166). Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:
Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:
e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or select. to Sent Items and press to to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 35). Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:
Resend Forward Edit Delete Note:
If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and press Op-
tion For ward to select. Steps Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 87 English Op-
tion Steps Op-
tion Steps De lete Re send group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 86). Select Delete to delete the text mes-
sage. Select Resend to resend the selected text message to the same subscriber/
group alias or ID. The display shows transitional mini no-
tice, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows posi-
tive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows neg-
ative mini notice. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. Note:
Changing the volume, and pressing any button, except for
, returns
, or
, you to the message. The radio exits the Resend op-
tion screen if you press the PTT button to initiate a Private or Group Call, or to respond to a Group Call. The radio also exits the screen when it receives a text message, an emergency call or alarm, or a call alert. The display returns to the Re send option screen if you press the PTT button to respond to a Private Call (except when the ra-
dio is displaying the Missed Call e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English Op-
tion Steps screen), and at the end of an All Call. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-
Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-
Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or to Sent Items and press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). or select. to Delete All and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 4 Choose one of the following. 89 English or or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. to No and press to return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:
Read Read Later Delete Note:
If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the 2 Reading a Text Message 1 or and press Option Read?
to one of the options described next to select. Steps Choosing this option, opens the se-
lected message in the Inbox. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to return to the Inbox. Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. Read Later Choosing this option, returns you to the screen you were on prior to receiv-
ing the text message. Delete Choosing this option, deletes the se-
lected text message. or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 3 Do one of the following:
Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:
Reply (via Quick Text) Forward Delete Delete All Note:
If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Note:
Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or or to Messages and press to to Inbox and press to select. to view the messages. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 5 Do one of the following:
91 English Press press that message. to select the current message, and again to reply, forward, or delete Long press to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Messages and press to or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 4 5 6 7 Press once more to access the sub-menu. or to Reply and press to select. or select. to Quick Reply and press to to the required message and press or to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 85). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 93 English 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l Press once more to access the sub-menu. or select. to Delete and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English 2 3 4 or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). or select. to Delete All and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. Job Tickets Your radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which are messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks that need to be performed. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets, all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Note:
Job Tickets are retained even after radio is powered down and powered up again. Your radio will automatically detect and discard the duplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Steps Access the Job Ticket folder. Radio Control Pro-
gram-
med Job Ticket button or and press button. 2 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket to the required folder to select. Radio Control Steps Menu Note:
You can also press and the corresponding num-
ber key (19) to access the required folder. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. or and press to the required folder to select. Note:
You can also press and the corresponding num-
ber key (19) to access the required folder. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 95 English Radio Control Steps 4 or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. Logging In and Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID via the menu. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Log In and press to select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that you have been logged in successfully. If you have failed to log in, the display shows a negative mini notice. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Creating and Sending a Job Ticket Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which is based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. Note:
CPS is required to configure the Job Ticket template. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Job Tickets and press to to Create Ticket and press 4 Depending on how your radio is configured, do one of the following:
If If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket tem-
plate, Then 2 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number and press to select. or to Room Sta tus and press lect. to se-
or to the re-
quired option and press 3 to select. or to the required to se-
option and press lect. 5 or to Send and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is sent. If the message is not sent, the display shows negative mini notice. Responding to the Job Ticket 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Job Tickets and press to to the required folder and press or to select. You can also press the corresponding number key
(19) to access the required folder. or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. once more to access the sub-menu. Press You can also press the corresponding number key
(19) to Quick Reply. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 97 English 6 or to the required Job Ticket and to select. press You can also press the corresponding number key
(19) to respond to the job ticket. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Job Ticket Steps Delete a Job Ticket. Radio Control Pro-
gram-
med Job Ticket button 2 button. 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket to All and press or to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Radio Control Menu Steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. to All and press or to select. or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. Note:
At Step 4, while viewing the Job Ticket, press delete. to Press Job Ticket. again while viewing the to Delete and press or to select. Radio Control Steps Note:
You can also press delete. to Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports two types of privacy:
Basic Privacy. Enhanced Privacy. Only one of the privacy types above can be assigned to the radio. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or a different Key Value and Key ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission
(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). Note:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:
Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. 99 English Note:
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Privacy and press to to enable/disable Privacy. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Linked Capacity Plus configuration. See IP Site Connect on page 39 and Linked Capacity Plus on page 40 for more details about these configurations. Starting an Automatic Site Search Note:
The radio only scans for a new site if the current signal is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. If the RSSI value is strong, the radio remains on the current site. Radio Controls Site Lock On/Off button Steps Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button to toggle the start/stop automatic site search. 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English Radio Controls Radio menu Steps 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or and press or and press to Radio Settings to select. to Site Roaming to select. or to Site Lock and press to select. If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list and is out of range, the radio also performs an automatic site search (site is unlocked) during:
a PTT button press. data transmission. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. The display shows the Site Roaming icon and channel alias. The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is actively searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks on to a site. Stopping an Automatic Site Search Steps When your radio is actively searching for a new site, you can stop the search by Radio Controls Site Lock On/Off button Radio menu to access the menu. 1 2 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to Utilities and press to select. 101 English Radio Controls Steps 3 4 5 or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or and press to Site Roaming to select. or to Site Lock and press to select. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Locked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. and the display shows the channel alias. Starting a Manual Site Search Start a Manual Site Search by e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English Radio Controls Manual Site Roam button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button to start the manual site search. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or and press or and press to Site Roaming to select. to Active Search to select. A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site, and the LED blinks green. If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Site <Alias>
Found. If there is no available site within range, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Out of Range. If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Channel Busy. The radio returns to the Home screen. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. Note:
Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Steps Radio Con-
trols Radio Disable button Radio menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Disa-
ble button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:
Select the required alias or ID di-
rectly. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 103 English Steps Radio Con-
trols or to the required to alias or ID and press select. Use the Manual Dial menu. or al and press to Manual Di to select. or to Radio Num to select. ber and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-
scriber alias or ID and press Steps Radio Con-
trols 4 or and press to Radio Disable to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Disable
. Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Radio Con-
trols Radio Enable button Radio menu Steps 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena-
ble button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID di-
rectly. Steps Radio Con-
trols or to the required to alias or ID and press select. Use the Manual Dial menu. or al and press to Manual Di to select. or to Radio Num to select. ber and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-
scriber alias or ID and press
. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 105 English Steps Radio Con-
trols 4 or and press to Radio Enable to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Enable Lone Worker This feature raises an emergency if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Before raising the emergency, when the inactivity timer expires, the radio warns the user via an audio indicator. If there is still no acknowledgement by the user before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can be assigned to this feature:
Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 76 on ways to exit Emergency. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English Note:
This feature is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Bluetooth Operation Note:
If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-
Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-
meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-
enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 107 English 3 or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a
. 4 Do one of the following:
or to On and press The display shows On and a the selected status. to select. appears left of or to Off and press The display shows Off and a the selected status. to select. appears left of Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the operation. 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-
enabled devices user manual. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A On your radio, press to access the menu. 2 108 English 3 4 or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to 5 Do one of the following:
6 to the required device and press or to select. or to Find Devices to locate available devices. device and press to the required or to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. If successful, the radio display shows <Device>
Connected. A tone sounds and the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. appears besides Note:
If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 107. 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to 4 or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device On your radio, press to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to 1 2 3 4 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to the required device and press or to select. 109 English 5 or to Disconnect and press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. Viewing Device Details 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. or to select. to View Details and press Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 or select. to BT Mic Gain and press to or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. To edit values, press to select. or and press to increase or to decrease values to select. or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Notification List A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages and missed calls. Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notification list. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events, the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missed calls/call alerts. This maximum number depends on l P u s M o d e 111 English individual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/
call alerts) list capability. Note:
After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. Accessing the Notification List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to select. to Notification and press to the required event and press or to select. Long press to return to the Home Screen. Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-
equipped radios. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your dealer can program your radio to transmit or receive the ARTS signal. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:
First-Time Alert A tone sounds and the display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed, and the display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert A tone sounds, the LED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternates between Out of Range and the home screen. Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely, via OTAP, without needing to be physically connected. Additionally, some settings can also be configured via OTAP. While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green. Note:
When the radio is receiving high volume data, the High Volume Data icon appears and channel is busy. A PTT button press at this time may cause a negative tone to sound. Once the programming is complete, depending on your radios configuration:
A tone sounds, the display shows Updating Restarting, and your radio restarts (powers off and on again). Select between Restart Now or Postpone. Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return to the previous display, with an OTAP Timer icon visible, for a period of time before the automatic restart occurs. Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, the display shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP update is successful or Sw Update Failed if the OTAP update is unsuccessful. See Software Update on page 138 for your updated software version. Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-
Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Wi-Fi Operation Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Access this feature via the menu. a) Press to access the menu. 113 English b) c) Press to select. Press press or to WiFi and press to WiFi Status and or to select. Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled. Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. You can also connect to a network access point via the menu. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press and press Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press or to a network access point to select. or to Connect and press Enter the password and press When the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. Refreshing the Network List Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English Perform the following actions to refresh the network list. a) Press Press to select. b) c) Press or to select. to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. a) to Refresh and press Press or to select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. Adding a Network Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. 6 7 If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press
. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press
. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 115 English The radio displays network is successfully saved. to indicate that the Viewing Details of Network Access Points Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Perform the following actions to view details of network access points. 5 Press or to select. to View Details and press For a connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address are displayed. For a non-connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode are displayed. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Removing Network Access Points Press select. Press to select. Press and press or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Enterprise network access points that are added via CPS can only be removed via CPS. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. or to a network access point 1 to select. Press to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press or Press access point and press to the selected network to select. Press select. Press select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays selected network access point is successfully removed. to indicate that the Third Party Peripherals Connection Modes You can select one of the third party peripherals connection modes:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Motorola PC and Audio Data Accessory Telemetry Generic to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Cable Type and press to 1 2 3 4 5 to the required connection mode to select. or and press The display shows the selected connection mode. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 117 English Note:
You cannot change the connection mode while the cable of the third party peripheral is still attached to your radio. Utilities Setting the Squelch Level You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted) calls and/or background noise; however, calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. Note:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle squelch level between normal and tight. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radios menus. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English 2 3 4 5 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Squelch and press to to the required setting and press or to select. appears besides selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Setting the Power Level Note:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. You can customize the power setting of the radio to high or low for each channel. High enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with radios in closer proximity. Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. Press press to Radio Settings and or to select. or to Power and press to to the required setting and or to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, to return to the Home screen. long press Screen returns to the previous menu. Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Refer to your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press the programmed Option Board Feature button to toggle the feature on or off. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 119 English 4 or select. to Cable Type and press to 5 The current cable type is indicated by a
. Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. Note:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Pressing the PTT button during radio operation will disable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of the following:
Turn the radio off and power it on again. Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down buttons. Change the channel via Volume/Channel Knob. Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the feature on or off. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English Follow the steps described next to access this feature via the radio menu. If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 122), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. Note:
Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to VOX and press to select. 5 Press to disable/enable VOX. Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press 5 6 or select. to All Tones and press to to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/
alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. l P u s M o d e 121 English 4 5 6 or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:
Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press volume offset settings. to exit without changing the current Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English 2 3 4 5 6 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Talk Permit and press to to enable/disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Power Up and press to to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Text Message Alert Tone You can customize your radios text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to Message Alert and press or to select. The display shows Momentary and Repetitive. to the required setting and press or to enable. appears besides selected setting. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 123 English Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. Steps Change the Display Mode:
Radio Control Program-
med Dis-
play Mode Button Menu Press the programmed Display Mode button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and 3 press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English Radio Control Steps 4 5 or to Display and to select. press The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. or to the required set-
ting and press appears besides selected setting. to enable. Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. Note:
Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. Adjust the Display Brightness by performing one of the following actions:
Radio Control Program-
med Dis-
play Bright-
ness Button Menu Steps Radio Control Steps 1 Press the programmed Bright-
ness button. 2 Decrease display brightness by or increase the dis-
pressing play brightness by pressing
. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or and press to Radio Settings to select. or to Brightness and press to select. The display shows a progress bar. 5 Decrease display brightness by or increase the dis-
pressing
. play brightness by pressing Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 1 2 3 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to Radio Settings and press or to select. 125 English 4 5 or select. to Languages and press to or to enable. language. to the required language and press appears beside selected Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through your radios rear accessory connector by your dealer. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English 3 4 5 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Horn/Lights and press to to enable/disable Horns/Lights. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. 4 5 or to select. to LED Indicator and press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Public Address System On or Off You can enable and disable the radios internal public address (PA) system. Press the programmed PA On/Off button to toggle the feature on or off. Turning the External Public Address System On or Off You can enable or disable the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. Press the programmed Ext PA On/Off button to toggle the feature on or off. Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a Volume Knob only. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Dual Knob and press to 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume &
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Ch. press or to the required setting and to select. appears beside selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. 127 English Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off The disappears from beside Enabled. You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Display and press to to Intro Screen and press to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature Note:
The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO Customer Programming Software. If enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled, and vice versa. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:
Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. to change the selected A d v a n c e d F e a t or You can also use option. All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to appears beside the selected setting. to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Voice Announcement and press or to select. or to any of the following features and press to select. Call Forwarding You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Utilities and press to to Call Forward and press u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 4 Do one of the following:
129 English Press display shows to enable Call Forwarding. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Call Forwarding. The Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Display and press to 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A or select. or select. 130 English 6 to the required setting and press or to select. Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on an analog system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Mic AGC-A and press to to Menu Timer and press to 5 Do one of the following:
Press shows to enable Mic AGC-A. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-A. The Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Mic AGC-D and press to 5 Do one of the following:
Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Note:
This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. Steps Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off. Radio Control Program-
med In-
telligent Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 131 English Steps Radio Control Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or to Intelligent to select. Audio and press 5 Do one of the following:
Press gent Audio. The display shows to enable Intelli-
beside Enabled. Press gent Audio. The from beside Enabled. to disable Intelli-
disappears Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Steps Toggle the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off by performing one of the following actions:
Radio Control Program-
med Acoustic Feedback Suppres-
sor Button Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. Radio Control Audio Button Menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English Steps Setting the Audio Ambience Radio Control Menu 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or and press to AF Suppressor to select. 5 Do one of the following:
Press to enable Acous-
tic Feedback Suppressor. The display shows beside Ena-
bled. Press to disable Acous-
tic Feedback Suppressor. The disappears from beside En-
abled. You can customize the audio ambience of the radio according to your environment. Default enables the default factory settings. Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Audio Ambience and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 133 English 5 to the required setting and press or to select. appears beside the selected setting. Setting the Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles of the radio according to your preference. Default disables the previously selected audio profile and the radios audio profile returns to normal. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English 3 4 5 to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Audio Profiles and press or to select. to the required setting and press or to select. appears beside the selected setting. Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radios precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System
(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System
(BDS). Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. Note:
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. to Radio Settings and or to select. or to GPS and press to to enable/disable GPS/GNSS. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page 137 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information. Flexible Receive List Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currently supported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus) feature that allows you to add, delete or edit members on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive List if needed. Steps Enable the Flexible Receive List by performing one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trol Programmed Flexible Re-
ceive List Button Menu Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 135 English Radio Con-
trol Steps 2 3 e d o M s u P l or to Flexible Rx to select. List and press Press to enable or disa-
ble the Flexible Receive List feature. Previous display Current display Turn On Flexible Rx List On Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:
Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GPS Information Software Update Site Information t c e n n o C
-
n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Press screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Checking the Radio Alias and ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to check your radio alias and ID. You hear a positive indicator tone. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to My ID and press to select. The first line of the display shows the radio alias. The second line of the display shows the radio ID. You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Versions and press to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. Checking the GPS/GNSS Information Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:
Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to GPS Info and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 137 English 5 to the required item and press or to select. The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS information. See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 134 for details on GPS/GNSS. Software Update Displays the date and time of the latest software update carried out via Over-the-Air Programming. Note:
Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP session. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C
-
n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 138 English 4 or to SW Update and press to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 112 for details on OTAP session. Site Information Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site name your radio is on. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the current Linked Capacity Plus site name. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 40 for details on Linked Capacity Plus. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n
-
C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 139 English Keypad Microphone Features Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola part number RMN5127_) to access your radios features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The next table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 5 1 1
!
2
. 3
, 4
?
6
@
7
&
8
'
9
%
10 11
:
12
*
13
#
A D G J M B E H K N C F I L O 2 3 4 5 6 t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 140 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 5 1 P 7 2 Q 3 R 4 S 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 T W 0
* or del
# or space U X V Y 8 Z 9 Note:
Press to enter 0 and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. Note:
Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a *. Note:
Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a #. Long press to change text entry method. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 141 English to access the menu. or or or or to Utilities and press to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to select. to Keypad Tones and press to select. to enable/disable keypad tones. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 142 English Additional Advanced Features Selecting a Zone by Alias Search to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
. 3 Key in the first character of the required zone. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type the required zone. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters.Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. Note:
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more zones with the same name, the radio displays the zone that is listed first in the zone list. 3 4 or select. or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press to 5 Do one of the following:
If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press to select. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 5 to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 6 Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to
. or to Radio Check and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. 143 English If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
If the button is pressed when the radio is waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. 6 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Initiating a Remote Monitor by Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press to t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 5 Do one of the following:
144 English If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press to select. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press
. or to Remote Mon. and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
If the button is pressed when the radio is waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Making a Private Call by Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press to 5 Do one of the following:
If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press to select. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press
. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display show the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the green LED blinks. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 145 English Making a Phone Call by Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Phone Number and press to 5 Do one of the following:
The display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number and press to proceed. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press to proceed. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 146 English The green LED lights up. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Do one of the following:
to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the step above or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:
When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to During the channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Phone Call to the predefined alias or ID. 147 English If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to proceed. 2 If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and The green LED lights up. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 3 Do one of the following:
148 English to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the step above or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:
During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 1 Long press the programmed number key to make a Group, Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status for a Private Call or All Call for All Call. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a keypad microphone. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. When you are on the Home Screen:
3 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only). 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the green LED blinks. The display shows the destination alias. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, 149 English indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on page 66 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on the keypad. Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 or to the required subscriber alias or to select. ID, and press If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 150 English button to proceed. shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If successful, The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon, If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Press the PTT to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 4 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the Step 5 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:
During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. 151 English During channel access and access/
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Phone Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 4 5 to 3 Do one of the following:
or to the required subscriber alias or ID. or to select. to Manual Dial and press t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 152 English to Phone Number and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. Press If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. button to proceed. If successful, The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon, If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 8 Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the Step 8 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. 153 English When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:
During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 154 English Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Do one of the following:
or to the required subscriber alias or ID. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to Phone Number and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. 4 5 to select. Press If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and press to button to proceed. select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon, If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 8 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The 155 English to second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the Step 8 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:
During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/
deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search 1 2 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 156 English 3 or select. to Scan List and press to Editing the Scan List Adding a New Entry to the Scan List 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. or select. to Scan List and press to to Add Member and press to 5 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 157 English to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 7 8 Press to select. or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice, followed immediately by Add Another?. 9 Do one of the following:
or or to Yes and press to select, to add another entry, and repeat Steps 5 to 8. to No and press to select to save the current list. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 158 English Deleting an Entry from the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 6 7 Press to select. or select. to Delete and press to 8 Do one of the following:
or to Yes and press to select, to delete the entry. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. to select Repeat Steps 4 to 8 to delete other entries. After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press the button to return to the Home Screen. Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Press to delete any unwanted characters. to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. 159 English The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 6 7 8 Press to select. or to select. to Edit Priority and press or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears left of the name of the member. There is no priority icon if priority is set to None. Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List 1 to access the menu. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 160 English 2 3 4 5 or select. or to select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or to Store and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 6 If needed, key in the alias for the ID and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. You can also store an ID without an alias. Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial 1 to access the menu. 2 3 or select. to Contacts and press to or to Manual Dial and press select. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Enter the subscriber ID you want to send the Call Alert to and press
. 5 or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. RSSI Values Your radio shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. This feature allows you to view the RSSI values. When you are on the Home screen:
to 1 2 three times ( _ _ ) and immediately three times ( _ _ ), all within 5 Press press seconds. The display shows the current RSSI values. button to return to the Home Long press the screen. See Display Icons on page 31 for details on the RSSI Icon. Text Messaging The maximum length of characters for sending a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), depends on CPS configuration which can be configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 161 English can receive a text message with maximum length of 280 characters. If user forwards a text message with characters more than the maximum length, the text message will be truncated to the maximum length. Note:
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Any text message in the writing/editing screen is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. Writing and Sending a Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 162 English 2 or select. to Compose and press to 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press the right. or the key to move one space to Press to delete any unwanted characters. 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Do one of the following:
to the required or ID and press or to select. or to Manual Dial and press to select. Key in the subscriber ID and press
. to edit the message. again to discard the message or save it to the Drafts folder. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
If the text message fails to send, the radio return you to the Resend option screen
(see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 85). Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. Radio Con-
trols Menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. or to Inbox and press to select. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. Press options. once more to access the additional 2 3 4 5 or to Reply and press A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use the keypad to type your message. to select. 163 English Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. 7 Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press once message is composed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
If the text message fails to send, the radio return you to the Resend option screen
(see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 166). t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 164 English If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. Editing a Quick Reply Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or select. to Quick Reply and press to or to the required Quick Text and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 5 Press once message is composed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice.
(see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 166). Accessing the Drafts Folder You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 84. Note:
Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message Note:
If the text message fails to send, the radio return you to the Resend option screen 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 165 English A blinking cursor appears. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Do one of the following:
or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to Manual Dial and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 166 English The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
If the text message fails to send, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:
Forward Edit Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. or select. to Forward and press to 1 or to Edit and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 1 2 3 or to Manual Dial and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:
Key in the subscriber ID and press
. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Editing a Text Message Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Note:
If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. 2 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Do one of the following:
or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to select to Manual Dial and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 167 English 5 Key in the subscriber ID and press
. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to telephone systems. To initiate a DTMF call. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Enter the desired number, You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 121). or
. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 168 English Security Radio Disable via Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Private Call and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. Key in the subscriber ID and press
. or to select. to Radio Disable and press The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:
Do not press Disable operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio 3 4 5 6 or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Private Call and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. Key in the subscriber ID and press
. to Radio Enable and press or to select. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED blinks. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Radio Enable via Manual Dial 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. to 169 English Note:
Do not press Enable operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio to enter the selected digit and value and move to the next digit. Each digit changes to Press to confirm your selection. Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. You can use a keypad microphone or Scroll Up/
Down buttons to enter password. Accessing the Radio from Password 1 Power up your radio. You hear a continuous tone. 2 Do one of the following:
Enter your current four-digit password via keypad microphone. The display shows Press to proceed. Enter your current four-digit password. Press or to edit each digits numeric t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 170 English on the to remove each when the line is empty, or if you press You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit entered. Press display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you press more than four digits. If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page 22. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2. After the third incorrect password, the display shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes, and responds to inputs from On/Off Button and programmed Backlight button only. Note:
The radio is unable to receive any call, including emergency calls, in locked state. The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access radio. Unlocking the Radio from Locked State Do one of the following. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Steps 1 to 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. Power up the radio, if you have powered down the radio during locked state. A tone sounds and the yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Turning the Password Lock On or Off 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter a four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. 6 If the password is correct, do one of the following. Press display shows to enable Password Lock. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Password Lock. The 171 English to access the menu. to select. 7 If the password is incorrect:
The display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. Changing the Password 1 2 3 4 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter your current four-digit password via keypad microphone. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 6 Press to proceed. 172 English If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If the password entered in the previous step is correct, or to Change Pwd and press 8 Enter a new four-digit password via keypad microphone. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. 9 Re-enter the new four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. 10 to proceed. Press If the reentered password matches the new password entered earlier, the display shows Password Changed. If the reentered password does NOT match the new password entered earlier, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Text Entry Configuration Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-
built dictionary. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:
Word Correct Word Predict Sentence Cap My Words Note:
Press previous screen. at any time to return to the at any time to return to the Long press Home screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Text Entry and press to to Word Correct and press You can also use option. or to change the selected i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 6 Do one of the following:
173 English Press display shows to enable Word Correct. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Correct. The Word Predict 5 or to select. to Word Predict and press You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:
Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. Press display shows to enable Word Predict. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Predict. The to access the menu. Sentence Cap or select. to Utilities and press to Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. to Radio Settings and press or to select. 1 2 or select. to Text Entry and press to to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 1 2 3 4 174 English 3 4 5 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Text Entry and press to to Sentence Cap and press You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:
Press display shows to enable Sentence Cap. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Sentence Cap. The i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to List of Words and press or to select. Display shows the list of custom words. Viewing Custom Words Editing Custom Word You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. You can edit the custom words saved in your radio. 1 to access the menu. 175 English 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to List of Words and press or to select. Display shows the list of custom words. Press to move one space to the left. Press right. or to move one space to the Press characters. to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 10 once your custom word is complete. Press The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. to the required word and press or to select. Adding Custom Words You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. or to Edit and press to select. 1 to access the menu. 176 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. English or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Text Entry and press to method. Press completed. once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. to My Words and press to Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 2 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. to Add New Word and press or to select. Display shows the list of custom words. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press 1 2 3 or to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to change text entry 177 English 4 5 6 7 or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to the required word and press or to select. or select. to Delete and press to 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from your radios in-
built dictionary. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 178 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to Delete All and press to 7 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows All Entries Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Front Panel Configuration (FPC) Your radio is able to customize certain feature parameters to enhance the use of your radio. Entering FPC Mode Note:
Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Utilities and press to to Program Radio and press 1 2 3 Editing FPC Mode Parameters Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters.
,
,
, Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 179 English Connect Plus Operations s n o i t a r e p O s u P l t c e n n o C 180 English Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (
two basic purposes:
) serves While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 196). If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:
Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Press and hold Keeping the button pressed. Note:
The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 222 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 181 English A Assignable Radio Functions Manual Dial Bluetooth Audio Switch Busy Queue Cancellation e d o M s u P l Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Call Log Contacts Emergency On/Off Depending on the t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i Horns/Lights Intelligent Audio l a n o i t i d d A 182 English Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. Radio Enable Privacy Radio Check One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. Toggles privacy on or off. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Requests to search for a different site. Toggles scan on or off. Remote Monitor Roam Request Radio Disable Scan Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Selects the text message menu. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. Text Message Voice Announcement for Channel Voice Announcement On/Off Zone All Tones/Alerts Backlight Brightness Channel Up/
Down Display Mode Global Positioning System (GPS) Power Level Unassigned Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Adjusts the brightness level. A d d i t i o n a l Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned. i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Assignable Settings or Utility Functions AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off. Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode Display Icons 183 English The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-
sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Bluetooth The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device con-
nected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Notification List has items to review. Power Level or Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-
able. GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 184 English Scan Scan feature is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Call Icons Wi-Fi Average[6]
Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor[6]
Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable[6]
Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Wi-Fi Excellent[6]
Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good[6]
Wi-Fi signal is good. 6 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 185 English Group Call/Site All Call Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-
cates a group alias (name) or ID
(number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatch-
er PC through a third-party Text Mes-
sage Server. Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. OR Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 186 English Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). LED Indicator The LED indicator (
your radio.
) shows the operational status of Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-
test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is config-
ured with Auto-Range Transponder System. Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-
ceived a text message or Scan is en-
abled and is receiving activity. Blinking green and yellow Rapidly blinking red A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 187 English A Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Double blinking yel-
low Blinking yel-
low e d o M s u P l Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Blinking green Double blinking green Radio is powering up, receiving a non-privacy- enabled call or data. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone Momentary Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously un-
til termination. Sounds periodically de-
pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that re-
peats itself until it is ter-
minated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time de-
fined by the radio. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-
Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your l a n o i t i d d A 188 English dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-
Connect Plus zones. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 189 English Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. Selecting a Site Site Lock On/Off A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available, The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. Note:
This is programmed by your dealer. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Site Restriction Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:
e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 190 English Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. Selecting a Zone Radio Con-
trols Steps 2 The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:
Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Private Call 1 Access the Zone feature by performing one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Zone button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Zone button. 1 to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps or or and scroll to the required zone. 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Using Multiple Networks If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different 191 English network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-
zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note:
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). Note:
See Privacy on page 239 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 192 English When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note:
See Making a Group Call on page 196 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 197 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving a Site All Call A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 193 English When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. You cannot respond to an Site All Call. Note:
See Making a Site All Call on page 197 for details on making a Site All Call. Note:
The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 194 English followed by within 2 seconds to Press insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the entered digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the Live Dial digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Call1. Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio's speaker. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 195 English Making a Radio Call Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
The Channel Selector Knob. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 214). Note:
Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-
enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note:
See Privacy on page 239 for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 196 English Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 192. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 192. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the target subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. Making a Site All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 197 English Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 192. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Site All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Note:
Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-group Call. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 198 English 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note:
Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. 199 English The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 3 Long press to end the call. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 200 English The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Phone and press to select. to select Manual Dial. Press The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 5 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts Note:
If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the Phone Number item will not be displayed in the Menu. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Phone Number and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to place a call to the entered number. If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 201 English If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 6 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Long press The display returns to the previous screen. to end the call. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits. Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line of the display shows the telephone number. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first text line of the display shows Extra Digits, the second text line of the display shows the entered extra digits. 2 Press the button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 202 English If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 3 Do one of the following. Press to return to the Phone Call screen. Long press to end the call. Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 203 English Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain types of Connect Plus system failures. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-
emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 204 English Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode Note:
Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-equipped radios also show the message, Feature not available. Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time
(or at almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say Channel Busy. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration beep when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site
(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode
(display indicates Searching). Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 205 English Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps Radio Control Program-
med Ra-
dio Check button Menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 206 English 2 1 2 3 4 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or and press to Radio Check to select. The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available. If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when initiated via Menu. Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the programmable button. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Radio Control Steps Initiating Remote Monitor Note:
Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any attempt to initiate transmission, change channels or power down the radio. 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Steps Radio Control Program-
med Re-
mote Monitor Button Menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. or to the required sub-
scriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 3 4 5 or to the required sub-
scriber alias or ID and press to select. or and press or and press to Manual Dial to select. to Remote Mon. to select. The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by 207 English target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed. Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle. Starting and Stopping Scan Note:
This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on page 210 for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 208 English You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and press or to select. The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled. The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is enabled. The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is disabled. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list. Turning Scan On or Off User Configurable Scan If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone's Scan List. Note:
This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See the next section for more information. If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your display. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 209 English The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu, follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and press or to select. The display shows Scan On momentarily if scan is disabled. The display shows Scan Off momentarily if scan is enabled. Editing the Scan List Note:
If the scan list entry happens to be the radios currently selected group, the radio listens for activity on this group regardless of whether the e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 210 English list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for activity on enabled Zone Scan List members. Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can, Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list. Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu on page 211. Note:
A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/
Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. 1 2 3 4 The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone's Scan List. to access the menu. to View/Edit List and press or to select. or to the desired Group name. If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group. to select the desired Group. The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group. 5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) to select. and press Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name. Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a scan candidate). Thus, the list of scan candidates described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently 211 English selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list of the currently selected zone. 5 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Scan option and press to to <Add Members> and press or to select. The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n
= the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone). 4 Do one of the following. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in that zone, go to step 6. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in a different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 212 English or to scroll a list of Connect Plus zones that have the same Network ID as the currently selected zone. to select. 6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector position, press Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel position in that zone. The groups on the list are called scan candidates, because they can be added to the scan list of your currently selected zone (or they are already on the zone scan list). If the zone does not have any groups that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays No Candidates. 7 or to scroll through the list of candidate groups. If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the group alias, this indicates the group is currently on the scan list for the selected zone. 8 9 If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before the alias, the group is not currently on the scan list, but can be added. when the desired group alias is Press displayed. If this group is not currently on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias) message is displayed. If this group is already on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias) message is displayed. to accept the displayed message (Add Press or Delete). If deleting a group from the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will no longer display immediately before the alias. If adding a group to the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will display before the alias. If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is already full, the radio displays List Full. If this should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group from the scan list prior to adding a new one. 10 When finished, press necessary to return to the desired menu. as many times as A d v a n c e d F e a t Understanding Scan Operation Note:
If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer expires before you are able to respond, in order to respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new call. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon on the display). Scan list member has been disabled via the menu
(see Editing the Scan List on page 210). You are participating in a call already. u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 213 English No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). Scan Talkback If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. For more information on how your radio is programmed, contact your radio dealer (or your radio system administrator). Scan Talkback Disabled Scan Talkback Enabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 214 English the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. Note:
If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. Contacts Settings Note:
You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission. Contacts provide address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:
Private Call Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Voice Site All Call Text Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Making a Private Call from Contacts The LED lights up solid green. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. Making a Call Alias Search to You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to 215 English A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e The entries are alphabetically sorted. Adding a New Contact 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and then press alias. or to locate the required 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to New Contact and press to 4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 6 If adding a Radio Contact, required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. to select. to the or e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 216 English Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to Call Alert and press to The current tone is indicated by a
. 7 or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. A d v a n c e d F e a t Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 217 English 5 6 7 e d o M s u P l or to select. or to select. to Call Ringers and press to Private Call and press to enable/disable the Private Call beside Enabled, if Private Press ringing tones. The display shows Call ringing tones are enabled. The tones are disabled. is not displayed when Private Call ringing Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 3 4 5 6 7 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press to Text Message and press or to select. The current tone is indicated by a
. or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 218 English Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to or to preferred list and press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. 4 or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. Deleting a Call from a Call List A d v a n c e d F e a t 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to u r e s i n C o n n e c t to the required list and press or to select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). l P u s M o d e to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 219 English 5 or select. to Delete and press to 6 Do one of the following:
5 to View Details and press or to select. Display shows details. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A Press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. or to No, and press the button to return to the previous screen. Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 220 English Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible through the menu via Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch Access button. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:
Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press alert is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The See Notification List on page 248 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 219 for details about the Missed Call List. Making a Call Alert from the Contact List 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to 4 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:
select the subscriber alias directly or to the required subscriber alias and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu to Manual Dial and press or to select. The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and press
. or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. 221 English The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Emergency Operation Note:
If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 222 English information see the Auto Fallback on page 204. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:
Emergency Call Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Emergency Alert You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:
Regular Silent Silent with Voice Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 223 English Receiving an Incoming Emergency Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact. At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency. Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radios display even after the Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details as described in the following sections. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 224 English Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu. 1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press The Exit Alarm List screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
to save the Select Yes and press emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Deleting the Emergency Details 1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, press The Delete screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
Select Yes and press emergency details. Select No and press Emergency Details screen. to delete the to return to the Responding to an Emergency Call Note:
If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group. 1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. Responding to an Emergency Alert Note:
The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a 225 English designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation. Initiating an Emergency Call Note:
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 226 English 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. Initiating an Emergency Alert Note:
If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice, it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for Silent, the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. If programmed for Silent with Voice, the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Press the orange Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radios display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds and the radios display shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed. Exiting Emergency Mode A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t Note:
If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. l P u s M o d e If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be 227 English assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. The maximum length of characters for sending a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), depends on CPS configuration which can be configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 228 English can receive a text message with maximum length of 280 characters. If user forwards a text message with characters more than the maximum length, the text message will be truncated to the maximum length. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Note:
Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. If you are sending the message, select the recipient by to the required alias and press or to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press
. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231). Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-
Send Text Messages on page 231). Accessing the Drafts Folder The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:
You can edit saved text message before sending it. Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 165. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 229 English Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. to Drafts and press to 5 Select the message recipient by or select. 2 3 to the required message and press or to select. Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. to the required alias and press or to select. to Manual Dial, and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press
. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 230 English The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. 2 3 4 or select. to Drafts and press to to the required message and press or to select. or to Delete and press to delete the text message. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:
Resend Forward Edit Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 231 English If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 2 or select. to Forward and press to to or Select the message recipient by the required alias or ID and press to select. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:
Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program-
med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-
sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 232 English 2 3 or select. to Sent Items and press to to the required message and press or to select. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 186). Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:
Resend Forward Edit Delete 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and press to select. Option Forward Delete Resend Steps Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/
group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 232). Select Delete to delete the text message. Select Resend to resend the select-
ed text message to the same sub-
scriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Mes sage, confirming that the same mes-
sage is being sent to the same tar-
get radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 233 English Option Steps Option Steps If the message fails to send, the ra-
dio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/
group alias or ID. Note:
If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without provid-
ing any indication in the dis-
play or via sound. Note:
If the radio changes mode or powers down before the sta-
tus of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-
Progress messages and au-
tomatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Note:
The radio supports a maxi-
mum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. Dur-
ing this period, the radio cannot send any new mes-
sage and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-
Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-
Progress messages at one time. During this e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 234 English period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 3 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing or select. to Delete All and press to Steps one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 or to Sent Items and press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned 4 Choose one of the following. or or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. to No and press to return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:
Read Read Later Delete A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 235 English Reading a Text Message 1 or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. 2 Do one of the following:
Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:
Reply (via Quick Text) Forward Delete Delete All Note:
If the channel type is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or or to Messages and press to to Inbox and press to select. toview the messages. 5 Do one of the following:
Press press that message. to select the current message, and again to reply, forward, or delete e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 236 English Long press to return to the Home screen. 4 Press once more to access the sub-menu. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program-
med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-
sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. 5 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. 6 once message is composed. Press The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 237 English Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 4 5 6 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. Press once more to access the sub-menu. 2 or select. to Delete and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 238 English
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). or select. to Delete All and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Inbox Cleared. 3 4 Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:
Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 239 English Note:
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency Alert. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings or or to Connect Plus and press or to select. or to Enhanced Privacy. If the display shows Turn On, press enable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. to to If the display shows Turn Off, press disable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 240 English Note:
Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Steps Radio Controls Radio Dis-
able but-
ton Radio menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. or to the required alias or ID and press lect. to se-
to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. Radio Controls Steps 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-
scriber alias or ID:
Select the required alias or ID directly. or to the re-
quired alias or ID and to select. press Use the Manual Dial menu A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to Manual to Dial and press select. or to Radio Number and press select. to 241 English Radio Controls Steps Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-
play shows a blinking cur-
sor. Use the keypad to en-
ter the subscriber alias or ID and press
. 4 or ble and press to Radio Disa to select. Radio Con-
trols Radio Enable button Radio menu The display shows Radio Disable: <Target Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Failed. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 242 English Steps 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena-
ble button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID di-
rectly. Steps Radio Con-
trols or to the required to alias or ID and press select. Use the Manual Dial menu or al and press to Manual Di to select. or to Radio Num to select. ber and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-
scriber alias or ID and press
. Steps Radio Con-
trols 4 or and press to Radio Enable to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. Bluetooth Operation Note:
If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 243 English This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-
Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-
meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 244 English Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-
enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a
. 4 Do one of the following:
or to On and press The display shows On and a the selected status. to select. appears left of or to Off and press The display shows Off and a the selected status. to select. appears left of Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-
enabled devices user manual. 2 3 4 On your radio, press to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to 5 Do one of the following:
6 to the required device and press or to select. or to Find Devices to locate available devices. device and press to the required or to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. If successful, the radio display shows
<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and besides the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. appears A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 245 English Note:
If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device
(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 107. 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 246 English 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 2 3 4 5 On your radio, press to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. or to Disconnect and press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. or to select. to View Details and press Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 247 English or select. to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. 4 5 or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to BT Mic Gain and press to t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. To edit values, press to select. or and press to increase or to decrease values to select. Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread events. When it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. Note:
After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l 248 English Accessing the Notification List Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to select. to Notification and press to the required event and press or to select. Long press to return to the Home Screen. Wi-Fi Operation Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Access this feature via the menu. Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-
Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. a) b) c) Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press press or to WiFi and press to WiFi Status and or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 249 English Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled. Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. You can also connect to a network access point via the menu. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press 4 5 6 Press and press Press to select. or to a network access point to select. or to Connect and press Enter the password and press When the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. Refreshing the Network List Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list. a) Press b) Press to select. to access the menu. or to WiFi and press e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 250 English c) Press or to select. to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. a) to Refresh and press Press or to select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. Adding a Network Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 6 7
. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press
. The radio displays network is successfully saved. to indicate that the A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 251 English Viewing Details of Network Access Points Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Perform the following actions to view details of network access points. Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address are displayed. For a non-connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode are displayed. Removing Network Access Points Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to Note:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Enterprise network access points that are added via CPS can only be removed via CPS. or to Networks and press Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. or to a network access point to select. Press or to select. to View Details and press For a connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press to select. Press and press e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 252 English 4 5 6 or Press access point and press to the selected network to select. Press select. Press select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays selected network access point is successfully removed. to indicate that the Utilities Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 described next to access this feature via the radio menu. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to All Tones and press to l P u s M o d e to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 253 English Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/
alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:
Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press volume offset settings. to exit without changing the current Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. 254 English 4 5 6 or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Talk Permit and press to to enable/disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 3 4 5 6 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Power Up and press to to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Power Level You can customize your radios power setting to high or low for each Connect Plus zone. High enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 255 English Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. Press press to Radio Settings and or to select. or to Power and press to to the required setting and or to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, to return to the Home screen. long press Screen returns to the previous menu. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 256 English to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to Display and press to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. or to enable. setting. to the required setting and press appears besides selected Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. Note:
Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Display and press to or to Brightness and press to select. The display shows a progress bar. 6 Decrease display brightness by pressing increase the display brightness by pressing Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. or
. A d v a n c e d F e a t Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Display and press to u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 257 English 5 6 or to select. to Intro Screen and press to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 258 English 4 5 or select. to Languages and press to or to enable. language. to the required language and press appears beside selected Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to LED Indicator and press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. 5 Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Cable Type and press to 5 The current cable type is indicated by a
. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Voice Announcement and press or to select. You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 259 English Press The display shows to enable Voice Announcement. beside Enabled. Press The to disable Voice Announcement. disappears from beside Enabled. Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. to Display and press to to Menu Timer and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 260 English 6 to the required setting and press or to select. Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through your radios rear accessory connector by your dealer. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Horn/Lights and press to 4 or select. to Dual Knob and press to 4 5 to enable/disable Horns/Lights. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a Volume Knob only. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume &
Ch. press or to the required setting and to select. appears beside selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. l P u s M o d e 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 261 English 3 4 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Mic AGC-D and press to 5 Do one of the following:
Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. 1 to access the menu. Radio Con-
trol Menu Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or and press or and press to Radio Settings to select. to Radio Settings to select. or to Intelligent Au dio and press to select. Note:
You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following:
Press Audio. The display shows side Enabled. to enable Intelligent be-
e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 262 English Steps Radio Con-
trol Press Audio. The side Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from be-
2 3 4 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Intelligent Audio and press or to select. 5 Do one of the following:
Press display shows to enable Intelligent Audio. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent Audio. The See Authorized Accessories List on page 277 for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. l P u s M o d e or to select. to AF Suppressor and press 263 English You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following. Press Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Press Suppressor. The Enabled. to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radios precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System
(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System
(BDS). Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. 1 2 3 4 5 system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. to Radio Settings and or to select. or to GPS and press to to enable/disable GPS/GNSS. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Note:
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page 137 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 264 English Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:
Battery Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Radio Model Number Index Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC Site Number Site Info Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GPS Information at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Press screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Checking the Radio Model Number Index This index number identifies your radios model-
specific hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Model Index and press to select. The display shows the Model Number Index. Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File Follow the instructions below if your radio system administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This menu option only appears if the Option Board received its last codeplug update OTA. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 265 English 2 3 4 or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to OB OTA CPcrc and press or to select. The display shows some letters and numbers. Communicate this information to your radio system administrator exactly as shown. Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) Note:
If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not generally indicate the Site number. To display the registered Site number, do the following:
1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 266 English 2 3 4 or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Site Number and press to select. The display shows the Network ID and the Site Number. Checking the Site Info Note:
If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The Site Info feature provides information that can be useful to a service technician. It consists of the following information:
Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater. RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control Channel repeater. Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater
(five numbers separated by commas). If you are requested to use this feature, please report the displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the Site Info. Checking the Radio ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to My ID and press to select. The display shows the radio ID. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to 267 English 4 e d o M s u P l or to Versions and press to
(Radio) Firmware Version
(Radio) Codeplug Version select. The display a list with the following information:
Option Board Firmware Version Option Board Frequency Version Option Board Hardware Version Option Board Codeplug Version t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 268 Checking for Updates Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air. Note:
Check with the dealer or network administrator to determine whether this feature has been enabled for your radio. Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file version via a menu option. In addition, display radios that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer English can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of the files packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:
See the version number of the pending file. See what percentage of packets has been collected so far. Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file packets. If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air file transfer, there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home Screen status bar. Note:
The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at a later time. There are several things that can make the file transfer process start again. The first example applies to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:
The radio system administrator re-initiates the over-the-air file transfer. The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires, which causes the Option Board to automatically resume the process of collecting packets. The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user requests the file transfer to resume via the menu option. After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board firmware file depends on how the radio has A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e been configured by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on. Note:
Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be able to make or receive calls until the process is completed. Firmware File Firmware Up to Date Note:
If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. 269 English 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to 3 4 5 6 or to Firmware and press to select. The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. Pending Firmware Version 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to or select. or select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to to Firmware and press to or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows the pending firmware version number. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows Firmware is Up to Date. Pending Firmware % Received 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 270 English 2 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to to Firmware and press to or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of firmware file packets collected so far. Note:
When at 100%, the radio needs to be power cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware upgrade. Pending Firmware Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t or select. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to l P u s M o d e to Updates and press to to Firmware and press to 271 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 or to Download and press to select. The display shows the following:
Download Available No Download Availa-
ble Start Download Download not availa ble to start the 7 Do one of the following:
Select Yes and press download. Select No and press previous menu. Frequency File Frequency File Up to Date Note:
If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent frequency file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Frequency and press to select. The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to return to the Frequency File Pending Version e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 272 English 4 5 6 1 2 3 or select. or select. to Updates and press to to Frequency and press to 4 5 or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Frequency File, the display shows the pending Frequency File version number. Frequency File Pending % Received to access the menu. or select. to Updates and press to or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of frequency file packets collected so far. Frequency File Pending Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 273 English 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to to Frequency and press to to Download and press to Download Currently Unavailable Download Currently Available Download not avail able Start Download 7 Do one of the following:
Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press to return to the previous menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 274 English Checking the GPS/GNSS Information Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:
Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to GPS Info and press to 5 to the required item and press or to select. The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS information. See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 134 for details on GPS/GNSS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 275 English Accessories s e i r o s s e c c A 276 English Authorized Accessories List Antennas VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4006_) VHF, 146 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4007_) VHF, 150.8 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4008_) VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4009_) VHF, 132 174 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4022_) UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4002_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4003_) UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4004_) UHF, 406 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4010_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4011_) UHF, 470 494 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4012_) UHF, 494 512 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4013_) Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4000_) Window Mount GPS Active Antenna
(PMAN4001_) Magnetic Mount GPS Active Antenna
(PMAN4002_) Combination GPS+RF, Base Only, Through-hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAN4004_) UHF, 403 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6022_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4029_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4030_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4032_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4033_) UHF, 445 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Moun, Mini-U (with base) (RAE4004_RB) UHF, 445 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (without base) (RAE4004_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t 277 English Combination GPS/VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4214_) Combination GPS/VHF, 146 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4215_) Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4216_) Combination GPS/VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4217_) Combination GPS/VHF, 146 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4218_) Combination GPS/UHF, 403 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6019_) Combination GPS/UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6020_) Combination GPS/UHF, 470 494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6024_) Combination GPS/UHF, 494 512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6026_) Combination GPS/UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4030_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4031_) Combination GPS/UHF, 406 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4032_) t s L i s e i r o s s e c c A d e z i r o h t u A 278 English Combination GPS/UHF, 450 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4033_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4034_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4025_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, 3.0dB Gain, Through-
Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4026_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, Stubby Antenna, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4013_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, 5.0dB Gain, Through-
Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4027_) For use with base PMAN4004_ only:
UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4039_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4041_) UHF, 406 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4040_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4042_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain (PMAE4043_) VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4223_) VHF, 150.8 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4224_) VHF, 146 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4225_) VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4226_) VHF, 146 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain (RAD4227_) UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6030_) UHF, 403 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6029_) UHF, 470 494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6028_) UHF, 494 512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6027_) Audio Telephone Style Handset (HMN4098_) Desktop Microphone (RMN5050_) Compact Microphone (RMN5052_) IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone
(RMN5127_) Heavy Duty Microphone with Enhanced Audio
(RMN5053_) Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio
(RMN5054_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 12 Cable
(NNTN8125_) Operations Critical Wireless Push-to-Talk POD
(NNTN8127_) Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable
(NNTN8189_) Bluetooth Accessory Kit, SP, 9.5 Cable
(NNTN8190_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 9.5 Cable
(NNTN8126_) Wireless Covert Kit, includes two sets of 2-Wire Earbuds (1 Black and 1 White), 1-Wire Earbud
(Black), and a 3.5 mm Adapter to plug into any off-
the-shelf headphones (NNTN8296_) [7]
Wireless Neckloop Y-adapter and retention hook for Completely Discreet Kit (NNTN8385_) [7]
HK200 Bluetooth Headset (89409N) Compact Microphone Replacement Cable
(3075336B07) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t Heavy Duty/Keypad Microphone Replacement Cable (3075336B10) Completely Discreet Earpiece Kit (RLN4922_) [7]
XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-Secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6490_) XBT Overhead, Non-Secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6491_) MOTOTRBO Bluetooth Accessory Kit with NA Power Supply (RLN6500_) 279 English Swivel Earpiece with In-Line Microphone for Bluetooth Accessory Kit Pod, Pack of 3
(RLN6550_) [7]
Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic
(PMLN7181_) [7]
Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic, Multipack (PMLN7203_) [7]
Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet
(PMKN4034_) Mobile Front (MMP) Programming Cable
(HKN6184_) MAP Programming Cable (PMKN4010_) MAP Programming and Test Cable (PMKN4016_) Remote Mount (3-metre) Cable (PMKN4143_) Remote Mount (5-metre) Cable (PMKN4144_) Cables Desktop Accessories Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, 15 amp (1 25 Watt) (HKN4137_) Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, 20 amp (1 45 Watt) (HKN4191_) Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-metre) Cable, 20 amp (1 45 Watt) (HKN4192_) Mobile and Repeater Rear Accessory Connector Universal Cable (PMKN4018_) Ignition Sense Cable (RKN4136_) Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet
(PMKN4033_) Radio Power Cable for GPN6145 (GKN6266_) Desktop Tray without Speaker (GLN7318_) Desktop Tray with Speaker (RSN4005_) Switchmode Power Supply (1 25 Watt Models)
(CE marked) (GPN6145_) Power Supply and Cable (HPN4007_) Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector
(PMLN5072_) US Line Cord (3060665A04) Euro Line Cord (3060665A05) Power Cable, UK Plug (Straight) (3002695B05) 7 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. t s L i s e i r o s s e c c A d e z i r o h t u A 280 English Mounting Kits In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit (RLN6465_) Low Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6466_) High Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6467_) Key Lock Trunnion Kit (RLN6468_) Low Profile Trunnion Bag (RLN6469_) Remote Mount Transceiver Interface
(PMLN6402_) Remote Mount Control Head Interface
(PMLN6403_) Speakers 13-Watt External Speaker (RSN4002_) 7.5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4003_) 5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4004_) Miscellaneous Accessories PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8-foot (2.4-metre) Cable (HKN9557_) Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)
(HLN9073_) Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones) (HLN9414_) Push Button PTT (RLN5926_) Emergency Footswitch (RLN5929_) IMPRES Mobile MMP Non-PC Adapter
(PMKN4072_) IMPRES Mobile MAP Non-PC Adapter
(PMKN4070_) Surge Protector, Tower Mount Kit (DQT1) Surge Protector, Coax Protector Bulkhead
(DSISB50LNC2MA) Generic Option Board (PMLN5718_S) Operations Critical Wireless 1-Wire Surveillance Kit with translucent tube (PMLN7052_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t 281 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:
1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
bearing (state whether you are using true or latitude and longitude magnetic north) e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 282 English distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:
on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:
in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note:
Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-
ber Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive 1 2
*
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**
14 15**
16 17**
156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 283 English 18 19 20
*
22
*
24 25 26 27 28 60
*
62 63
*
65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**
68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**
78 79 80
*
*
*
156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725
***
***
156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725
***
***
161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 284 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 Note:
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.
** Low power (1 W) only.
*** Guard band. Note:
A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. M a r i t i Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s Input Volt-
age (Volts Peak-to-
peak) Max Data Rate Impedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 285 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
Digital Mobile Radios Product Accessories 24 Months 12 Months MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 286 English applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:
III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 287 English V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:
y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 288 English any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 289 English VII. GOVERNING LAW:
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 290 English Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20112015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. November 2015 www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo
*68009504001*
68009504001-GC
1 2 3 4 | RF Safety Manual | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB | December 01 2016 |
6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed in Vehicles, Vessels or as Fixed Site Control Stations ATTENTION!
BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS BOOKLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE AND RF ENERGY AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to January 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.
*NNTN7851D*
NNTN7851D
*6881095C99*
6881095C99-J English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information, and Operational Instructions for FCC Occupational Use Requirements NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Please refer to the following Web sites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Federal Communication Commission Regulations The FCC rules require manufacturers to comply with the FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed in the U.S. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF exposure product label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet, includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standard Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/
controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50%
listen and is authorized by the FCC for occupational use only. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting
(during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:
United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6 Industry Canada RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANATEL ANNEX to Resolution No. 303 et seq. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions To control exposure to yourself and others and to ensure compliance with the RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. Guidelines:
User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. DO NOT use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. English 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Instructions:
Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit
(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button or, for radios equipped with VOX, speak into the microphone. The red LED will illuminate when the radio is transmitting. To receive calls, release the PTT button, or, for radios equipped with VOX, stop talking. The red LED will extinguish when the radio stops transmitting. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). Transmit only when people outside the vehicle are at least the recommended minimum lateral distance away, as shown in Table 1, from the body of a vehicle with a properly installed antenna. This separation distance will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed
(according to installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the RF exposure requirements in the standards listed above. NOTE: Table 1 below lists the recommended lateral distance for people in an uncontrolled environment from the body of a vehicle with an approved, properly installed transmitting antenna (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at several different ranges of rated radio power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Table 1. Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Mobile Two-Way Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Note) Less than 7 watts 7 to 14 watts 15 to 39 watts 40 to 110 watts Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body 8 inches (20 centimeters) 1 foot (30 centimeters) 2 feet (60 centimeters) 3 feet (90 centimeters) 5 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM When a mobile radio is used in conjunction with another co-located transmitter such as a Vehicular Repeater, it is the vehicle operators responsibility to take appropriate steps to keep bystanders at the required separation distance from the vehicle to ensure compliance with the FCC's RF energy exposure limits for the general population. See the co-located transmitters user manual for more details. NOTE: If you are not sure of the rated power of your radio, contact your Motorola representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you can not determine the rated power out, then assure 3-feet separation from the body of the vehicle. Users of multi-band radios subject to different separation distances in different operating bands according to Table 1 should select the larger applicable distance as the minimum lateral distance for bystanders outside the vehicle. The maximum power shown on the FCC Grant may be higher than the rated power allowing for production variation. Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes. Antennas should be installed in the center area of the roof or the trunk lid taking into account exposure conditions of backseat passengers and according to the specific instructions and restrictions in the Radio Installation Manual along with the requirements of the antenna supplier. Trunk lid installations are limited to vehicles with clearly defined flat trunk lids, and in some cases, to specific radio models and antennas. See the Radio Installation Manual for specific information on how and where to install specific types of approved antennas to facilitate recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons. Use only the Motorola-approved, supplied antenna or a Motorola-
approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or English 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Approved Accessories This radio has been tested and meets RF Safety Standards when used with the Motorola accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and accessories, refer to the user manual for your radio model. Additional Information For additional information on exposure requirements or other training information, visit: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/
ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:
The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 7 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances provided above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed on Maritime Vessels If mobile radio equipment is installed on a vessel and operated as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:
An antenna intended for Maritime operation should be chosen and installed according to the manufacturers recommendations. The antennas should be mounted solidly to the vessel structure at the highest location possible. As with all radio antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the operator to maintain adequate distances from the antenna and all personnel on board the vessel or adjacent to the vessel. For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances proved above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed site antenna is sensitive to external RF energy or if any procedures need to be followed to eliminate or mitigate the potential for interaction between the radio transmitter and the equipment or device. English 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles To avoid possible interaction between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission controls, the radio should be installed only by an experienced installer and the following precautions should be used when installing the radio:
1. Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2. Before installing the radio, determine the location of the electronic control modules and their harnesses in the vehicle. 3. Route all radio wiring, including the antenna transmission line, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated wiring. Driver Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your radio while driving, please:
Give full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. 9 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:
Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. English 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicles with an Air Bag DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. For radios installed in vehicles fueled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA 58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. For a copy of the LP-gas standard, NFPA 58, contact the National Fire Protection Association, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. 11 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM English 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Folleto de normas de seguridad y de exposicin a la energa de RF al usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en vehculos, embarcaciones o estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos ATENCIN ANTES DE USAR EL RADIO LEA ESTE FOLLETO, EL CUAL CONTIENE INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACIN IMPORTANTES PARA SU USO SEGURO, AS COMO INFORMACIN SOBRE LA ENERGA DE RF Y SU CONTROL, PARA GARANTIZAR SU CONFORMIDAD CON LOS LMITES DE EXPOSICIN A LA ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA ESTABLECIDOS EN LAS NORMAS NACIONALES E INTERNACIONALES APLICABLES. La informacin incluida en este documento reemplaza la informacin de seguridad general contenida en los manuales de usuario publicados antes de enero de 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS y el logotipo estilizado M son marcas de fabrica o marcas registradas de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC y son usadas bajo licencia. Todas otras marcas registradas son la propiedad de sus dueos respectivos. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos los derechos estn reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EE.UU.
*NNTN7851D*
NNTN7851D
*6881095C99*
6881095C99-J Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Informacin sobre exposicin a la energa de RF y su control, e instrucciones operacionales para satisfacer los requisitos de la FCC sobre el uso como herramienta ocupacional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para uso en ambientes ocupacionales controlados, donde los usuarios estn plenamente conscientes de la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia a la que estn sujetos, y pueden ejercer control sobre dicha exposicin para mantenerse dentro de los lmites establecidos por la FCC. Esta unidad de radio NO est aprobada para la venta al pblico en general en el mercado de consumo masivo, ni para uso en entornos diferentes al aqu descrito. Este radio bidireccional usa energa electromagntica en el espectro de radiofrecuencia (RF) para permitir las comunicaciones a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. El mismo emplea la energa de radiofrecuencia u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Este tipo de energa se presenta en otras formas, entre las que se encuentran la luz solar y los rayos X. La energa de RF, sin embargo, no debe confundirse con estas otras formas de energa electromagntica que, cuando son usadas indebidamente, pueden ocasionar daos biolgicos. Niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden producir daos en tejidos y en material gentico. Expertos en las ciencias, la ingeniera, la medicina, la salud y la industria trabajan conjuntamente con diferentes organizaciones con el fin de desarrollar normas que definan lmites prudentes de exposicin a la energa de RF. Estas normas proporcionan los niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF incluyen mrgenes de seguridad suficientemente amplios. Todos los radios bidireccionales Motorola son diseados, fabricados y probados de manera que aseguren el cumplimiento de los niveles de exposicin a la RF establecidos por los organismos pblicos reguladores. Asimismo, los fabricantes recomiendan a los usuarios de radios bidireccionales seguir instrucciones de operacin especficas. Estas instrucciones son importantes, ya que informan a los usuarios acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y proporcionan procedimientos sencillos para su control. Espaol Latinoamericano 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Visite los siguientes sitios Web para obtener ms informacin acerca de qu es la exposicin a la energa de RF y cmo controlar dicha exposicin para garantizar la observancia de los lmites de exposicin establecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. Las normas de la FCC estipulan que los fabricantes de radios mviles bidireccionales no podrn comercializar sus productos en los EE.UU., a menos que los mismos cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC. Cuando la naturaleza del trabajo requiere el uso de radios bidireccionales, la FCC exige que los usuarios estn totalmente conscientes de los efectos de la exposicin, y que sean capaces de controlar el nivel de exposicin al que se someten, a fin de satisfacer los requisitos laborales. La informacin sobre exposicin puede facilitarse mediante el uso de una etiqueta que remita a los usuarios a la fuente de informacin apropiada. Su radio bidireccional Motorola tiene una etiqueta con informacin acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF. Adems, en el manual de usuario del producto Motorola, o en un folleto de seguridad separado, se incluye la informacin e instrucciones de operacin necesarias para controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF y para garantizar el cumplimiento de las normas. Conformidad con la normativa sobre exposicin a la RF Este radio bidireccional Motorola ha sido diseado y verificado con el fin de garantizar su compatibilidad con las siguientes normas y recomendaciones nacionales e internacionales relacionadas con la exposicin de seres humanos a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin establecidos por el IEEE y por la ICNIRP para entornos ocupacionales o con control de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia, a ciclos de trabajo de hasta 50% (50% transmisin y 50% recepcin) y ha sido aprobado por la FCC para uso como herramienta ocupacional solamente. En lo que respecta a la medicin de energa de RF para la determinacin de conformidad con las directrices de exposicin de la FCC, la antena del radio irradia energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (cuando el usuario est hablando), no cuando est recibiendo (cuando el usuario est oyendo) o cuando se encuentra en espera. 3 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Este radio bidireccional Motorola satisface las siguientes normas y recomendaciones relacionadas con la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia:
Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Cdigo de Reglamentos Federales; 47 CFR y siguientes Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Boletn OET 65 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE), C95.1 Comisin Internacional para la Proteccin contra la Radiacin No Ionizante
(ICNIRP) Ministerio de Sanidad (Canad), Cdigo de seguridad 6 Industria Canad, RSS-102 Direccin Australiana de Comunicaciones, Normativa de Radiocomunicaciones y siguientes ANATEL, Anexo a la Resolucin n 303 y siguientes. Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF e instrucciones de operacin Para controlar la exposicin a la que tanto Ud. como otras personas se someten, y para asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la RF, observe siempre los siguientes procedimientos. Pautas:
El aparato debe ser acompaado de la informacin sobre la energa de RF cuando el mismo sea transferido a otros usuarios. No use este dispositivo sin antes satisfacer los requisitos operacionales aqu descritos. Espaol Latinoamericano 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Instrucciones:
No transmita ms del 50% del tiempo, a fin de no sobrepasar el mximo ciclo de trabajo especificado del 50%. Para transmitir (hablar) presione el botn de transmisin (PTT); si el radio est equipado con VOX, hable hacia el micrfono. El LED rojo se enciende cuando el radio est transmitiendo. Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Si el radio est equipado con VOX, deje de hablar. El LED rojo se apaga cuando el radio termina de transmitir. Es importante no transmitir ms del 50% del tiempo, ya que este radio emite energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (en trminos de conformidad con las normas de medicin). Transmita nicamente cuando las personas que se encuentran fuera del vehculo estn apartadas por lo menos la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (indicada en la Tabla 1) de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena debidamente instalada. Esta separacin asegura que haya suficiente distancia entre una antena exterior debidamente instalada (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para satisfacer los requisitos de exposicin a la energa de RF estipulados en las normas antes mencionadas. NOTA: La Tabla 1 presentada a continuacin indica la distancia lateral recomendada, en un entorno no controlado, a la que los transentes deben mantenerse de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena transmisora aprobada y debidamente instalada (es decir, monopolos sobre un plano de tierra, o bipolos) para diferentes niveles de potencia nominal de radios mviles instalados en un vehculo. Tabla 1. Potencia nominal del radio bidireccional mvil instalado en un vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada de la carrocera del vehculo Potencia nominal del radio mvil
(ver nota) Menos de 7 vatios 7 a 14 vatios 15 a 39 vatios 40 a 110 vatios Distancia lateral mnima de la carrocera del vehculo 20 centmetros (8 pulg.) 30 centmetros (1 pie) 60 centmetros (2 pies) 90 centmetros (3 pies) 5 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Cuando se usa un radio mvil conjuntamente con otro transmisor ubicado en el mismo sitio como, por ejemplo, un repetidor vehicular, el operador del vehculo es responsable de tomar las medidas necesarias para mantener a los transentes alejados del vehculo la distancia mnima requerida, a fin de garantizar la conformidad con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC para la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el manual de usuario de los transmisores ubicados en el mismo sitio. NOTA: Si no est seguro de cul es la potencia nominal de su radio, comunquese con el representante o concesionario Motorola e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que aparece en la etiqueta del radio. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal de salida, asegrese de mantener una separacin de un metro (3 pies) de la carrocera del vehculo. Los usuarios de radios multibanda sujetos a diferentes distancias de separacin en diferentes bandas de operacin conforme a la Tabla 1 deben seleccionar la distancia ms grande aplicable como la distancia lateral mnima para los transentes cercanos al vehculo. La potencia mxima mostrada en la autorizacin de la FCC puede ser mayor que la potencia nominal, tomando en consideracin las variaciones que ocurren a nivel de produccin. Pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles Las siguientes pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles son aplicables nicamente a vehculos automotores con carrocera metlica o a vehculos con planos de tierra apropiados. Las antenas deben ser instaladas en el rea central del techo o de la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje, tomando en consideracin las condiciones de exposicin de los pasajeros que viajen en el asiento trasero, as como las instrucciones y restricciones especficas mencionadas en el manual de instalacin del radio y los requisitos establecidos por el proveedor de la antena. La instalacin en la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje queda limitada a aquellos vehculos cuya tapa del compartimiento de equipaje sea una superficie plana claramente definida y, en algunos casos, a modelos especficos de radios y antenas. Consulte en el manual de instalacin del radio la informacin especfica sobre la ubicacin y la forma de instalar los diferentes tipos de antenas aprobados para satisfacer las distancias de operacin recomendadas entre las antenas y toda persona que pueda quedar expuesta. Espaol Latinoamericano 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Use nicamente la antena Motorola suministrada o una antena de reemplazo aprobada por Motorola. El uso de antenas, modificaciones o accesorios no aprobados podra daar el radio y constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Accesorios aprobados Este radio ha sido probado y se ha determinado que satisface las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF siempre que se use con los accesorios Motorola suministrados o designados para este producto. El uso de otros accesorios puede constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Para obtener una lista de antenas y accesorios Motorola aprobados, consulte el manual de usuario para el modelo de radio. Informacin adicional Para obtener informacin adicional sobre los requisitos de exposicin o informacin sobre capacitacin, visite: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/
ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Pautas de control y conformidad, e instrucciones de operacin de radios bidireccionales mviles instalados como estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos Si un equipo de radio mvil se instala en un lugar fijo y se hace funcionar como estacin de control o como unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena deber satisfacer los siguientes requisitos, a fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y de cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia establecidos en las normas y pautas enumeradas en la pgina 4:
La antena se debe montar fuera del edificio, en el techo o en una torre, siempre que sea posible. Como en todas las instalaciones de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es responsabilidad del portador de la licencia mantener el emplazamiento de conformidad con los reglamentos aplicables, y es posible que existan requisitos adicionales como mediciones de propagacin, colocacin de letreros y restricciones de acceso al emplazamiento. 7 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Para obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices relativas a las distancias de separacin antes mencionadas en la seccin de este documento titulada Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF, e instrucciones de operacin. Pautas de Cumplimiento y Control e Instrucciones de Uso para usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en embarcaciones martimas Si el equipo de radio mvil est instalado en una embarcacin y funciona como una unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos con el fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF en las normas y pautas que figuran en la pgina 4:
Una antena destinada a la operacin Martima se debe elegir e instalar de acuerdo con las recomendaciones de los fabricantes. Las antenas se deben montar firmemente a la estructura de la embarcacin en el lugar ms alto posible. De la misma forma que con todas las instalaciones de antena de radio, es responsabilidad del operador mantener una distancia adecuada hasta la antena y de todo el personal a bordo del barco o que se encuentre en sus proximidades. Si desea obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices sobre distancias de separacin mnimas indicadas anteriormente en la seccin Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF einstrucciones de operacin de este documento. Interferencia y compatibilidad electromagntica NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a la interferencia electromagntica si no cuentan con el debido blindaje, o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Puede que sea necesario realizar pruebas de compatibilidad para determinar si alguno de los equipos electrnicos usados en los vehculos, cerca de ellos o cerca de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es sensible a la energa de radiofrecuencia externa, o si hay que ejecutar algn procedimiento para eliminar o reducir la posibilidad de interaccin entre el radio transmisor y el equipo o dispositivo. Espaol Latinoamericano 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Edificaciones Para evitar problemas de interferencia y/o compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todos los lugares donde haya letreros que as lo establezcan. Por ejemplo, en hospitales e instalaciones de asistencia mdica podran estar usando aparatos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Vehculos Para evitar una posible interaccin entre el radio transmisor y cualquiera de los mdulos de control electrnico del vehculo (por ejemplo, el control del sistema antibloqueo de frenos (ABS), el control del motor o el control de la transmisin), se debe contratar a un instalador experimentado para realizar la instalacin del radio, as como tomar las siguientes precauciones:
1. Consulte las instrucciones proporcionadas por el fabricante y dems boletines tcnicos que contengan recomendaciones para la instalacin del radio. 2. Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y del tendido de los cables del vehculo. 3. Haga pasar todo el cableado del radio, incluida la lnea de transmisin de la antena, lo ms lejos posible de las unidades de control electrnico y del tendido de cables correspondiente. Seguridad al conducir Consulte las leyes y reglamentos para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Obedzcalas siempre. Cuando utilice el radio al conducir un vehculo:
Preste atencin al camino y a las condiciones de conduccin. Salga del camino y estacione el vehculo antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si la situacin lo amerita. Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos intensos provenientes de cualquier fuente por perodos de tiempo prolongados podran afectar su capacidad auditiva de forma temporal o permanente. Mientras ms alto sea el volumen del radio, ms pronto podra resultar afectada su capacidad auditiva. El dao auditivo producido por ruidos 9 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM intensos a veces puede que sea imperceptible al principio, pero puede tener un efecto acumulativo. Para proteger su capacidad auditiva:
Use el menor volumen que le permita realizar sus tareas. Aumente el volumen nicamente cuando est en un entorno ruidoso. Disminuya el volumen antes de conectar un audfono o un auricular. Lmite el tiempo de uso de audfonos o auriculares a alto volumen. Cuando use el radio sin un audfono o auricular, no se coloque el parlante del radio pegado a la oreja. Espaol Latinoamericano 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Advertencias operacionales ADVERTENCIA ADVERTENCIA Vehculos con bolsas de aire No instale ni coloque un radio mvil sobre una bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de la misma. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se coloca un radio en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa de aire, cuando sta se infle el radio podra salir proyectado con gran velocidad y ocasionar lesiones graves a los pasajeros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Apague el radio antes de entrar en reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas. Las chispas en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas pueden desencadenar explosiones o incendios, y ocasionar lesiones e incluso la muerte. Entre los entornos potencialmente explosivos se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos, instalaciones de transferencia y almacenamiento de combustible o de productos qumicos, y reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como polvo de cereales, polvo comn o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. reas de voladuras y explosivos Para evitar una posible interferencia con las operaciones de detonacin, apague el radio cuando est cerca de detonadores elctricos, en un rea de detonaciones o donde haya letreros que indiquen apagar los radios bidireccionales. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Para el caso de radios instalados en vehculos propulsados por gas licuado de petrleo, consulte la norma NFPA 58 de la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association) para obtener informacin sobre almacenamiento, manejo y/
o contenedores. Para obtener una copia de la norma NFPA 58 comunquese con la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EE. 11 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Espaol Latinoamericano 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Guia de Exposio Energia RF e de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis de Duas Vias Instalados em Veculos, Embarcaes ou como Estaes de Controle de Local Fixo ATENO ANTES DE UTILIZAR O RDIO PROCURE LER ESTE FOLHETO, QUE CONTM IMPORTANTES INSTRUES DE OPERAO PARA O USO SEGURO, BEM COMO INFORMAES SOBRE A ENERGIA DE RF E SEU CONTROLE, COM A FINALIDADE DE GARANTIR A CONFORMIDADE COM OS LIMITES DE EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RADIOFREQNCIA ESTABELECIDOS NAS NORMAS NACIONAIS E INTERNACIONAIS APLICVEIS. As informaes contidas neste documento substituem as informaes a respeito de segurana geral contidas nos manuais do usurio publicados antes de janeiro de 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS e o logotipo do M estilizado so marcas registradas ou marcas comerciais da Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC e so usadas mediante licena. Todas as outras marcas registradas so de propriedade de seus respectivos proprietrios. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EUA.
*NNTN7851D*
NNTN7851D
*6881095C99*
6881095C99-J Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e seu controle, e instrues operacionais para satisfazer os requisitos da FCC sobre o uso como ferramenta ocupacional AVISO: Este rdio foi projetado para ser usado em ambientes ocupacionais controlados, onde os usurios estejam plenamente conscientes da exposio energia de radiofreqncia a que esto sujeitos e podem exercer o controle sobre tal exposio de modo a satisfazer as exigncias de limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo FCC. Esta unidade de rdio NO se destina a venda ao pblico em geral no mercado de consumo de massa, nem se destina ao uso em ambientes diferentes daqueles aqui descritos. Este rdio bidirecional utiliza energia eletromagntica no espectro de radiofreqncia (RF) para permitir a comunicao distncia entre dois ou mais usurios. O rdio utiliza a energia de radiofreqncia ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Este tipo de energia se apresenta sob outras formas, dentre as quais se incluem a luz solar e os raios X. A energia de RF, contudo, no deve ser confundida com estas outras formas de energia eletromagntica que, quando so usadas indevidamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito elevados de raios X, por exemplo, podem produzir danos aos tecidos e ao material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstria tm trabalhado conjuntamente com as diferentes organizaes com a finalidade de desenvolver normas que definem os limites prudentes de exposio energia de RF. Estas normas proporcionam os nveis recomendveis de exposio RF, tanto para os trabalhadores quanto para o pblico em geral. Estes nveis recomendados de exposio energia de RF incluem margens de segurana suficientemente amplas. Todos os rdios bidirecionais Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados de maneira segura de modo a assegurar o cumprimento dos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelos organismos pblicos reguladores. Alm disto, os fabricantes recomendam aos usurios de rdios bidirecionais que sigam as instrues de operao especficas. Estas instrues so importantes uma vez que informam aos usurios a respeito da exposio energia de RF e oferecem procedimentos simples para seu controle. Portugus Brasileiro 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Visite os websites indicados a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre o que se trata a exposio energia de RF e de como controlar esta exposio de modo a garantir a observncia dos limites de exposio estabelecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulamentos da Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos As normas do FCC estipulam que os fabricantes de rdios mveis bidirecionais no podero comercializar seus produtos nos Estados Unidos exceto se tais produtos cumprirem com as exigncias de limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pelo FCC. Quando a natureza do trabalho requer o uso de rdios bidirecionais, o FCC exige que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes dos efeitos da exposio e que sejam capazes de controlar o nvel de exposio a que esto submetidos de modo a satisfazer as exigncias do trabalho. As informaes sobre exposio podem ser facilitadas por meio do uso de uma etiqueta que remeta os usurios fonte de informaes apropriadas. Seu rdio bidirecional Motorola contm uma etiqueta com informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF. Alm disto, no manual do usurio do produto Motorola, ou em um folheto de segurana publicado em separado, esto includas as informaes e instrues de operao necessrias para controlar a exposio energia de RF e para garantir o cumprimento das normas. Conformidade com a normativa sobre a exposio RF Este rdio bidirecional Motorola foi projetado e testado com a finalidade de garantir a sua compatibilidade com as normas e recomendaes nacionais e internacionais descritas a seguir no que se refere a exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofreqncia. Este rdio atende aos limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo IEEE e pela ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais ou com controle de exposio energia de radiofreqncia, em ciclos de trabalho de at 50% (50% transmisso/50% recepo) e foi aprovado pelo FCC para uso somente como ferramenta ocupacional. No que se refere medio da energia de RF para a determinao de conformidade com as diretrizes de exposio do FCC, a antena do rdio irradia energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est transmitindo (quando o usurio est falando) e no quando est recebendo
(quando o usurio est ouvindo) ou quando se encontra em espera. 3 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Este rdio bidirecional Motorola satisfaz s seguintes normas e recomendaes relacionadas exposio energia de radiofreqncia:
Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (FCC), Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais; 47 CFR e seguintes Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (FCC), Boletim OET 65 Instituto de Engenheiros Eltricos e Eletrnicos (IEEE) C95.1 Comisso Internacional para Proteo contra Radiao no Ionizante (ICNIRP) Ministrio da Sade (Canad), Cdigo de segurana 6 Indstria Canad, RSS-102 Autoridade Australiana de Comunicaes, Normativa de Radiocomunicaes e seguintes ANATEL, Anexo Resoluo N. 303 e seguintes. Orientaes gerais de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao Para controlar a exposio a que tanto o usurio como outras pessoas se submetem, e para assegurar o cumprimento dos limites de exposio RF, deve-se observar sempre os procedimentos descritos a seguir. Orientaes gerais:
O equipamento deve estar acompanhado das informaes relacionadas com a energia de RF quando o mesmo for transferido a outros usurios. No utilize este dispositivo sem antes satisfazer os requisitos operacionais aqui descritos. Portugus Brasileiro 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Instrues:
No transmita mais de 50% do tempo, de modo a no ultrapassar o mximo ciclo de trabalho especificado de 50%. Para transmitir (falar) pressione o boto de transmisso (PTT); se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, fale junto ao microfone. O LED vermelho acende quando o rdio est transmitindo. Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. Se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, pare de falar. O LED vermelho se apaga quando o rdio encerra a transmisso. importante no transmitir mais de 50% do tempo, uma vez que o rdio emite energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est em transmisso (em termos da conformidade com as normas de medio). Transmita somente quando as pessoas de fora do veculo se encontrarem afastadas pelo menos distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme mostrado na tabela 1) da carroceria de um veculo equipado com antena devidamente instalada. Esta separao assegura que haja distncia suficiente entre uma antena exterior devidamente instalada (conforme as instrues de instalao) para satisfazer os requisitos de exposio energia de RF estipulados nas normas acima mencionadas. NOTA: A tabela 1 mostrada a seguir indica a distncia lateral recomendada, em um ambiente no controlado, que deve ser mantida pelos transeuntes em relao carroceria de um veculo equipado com uma antena transmissora aprovada e devidamente instalada (isto , monopolos sobre um plano de terra, ou bipolos) para diferentes nveis de potncia nominal de rdios mveis instalados em um veculo. Tabela 1. Potncia nominal do rdio bidirecional mvel instalado em um veculo e distncia lateral mnima recomendada da carroceria do veculo Potncia nominal do rdio mvel (ver nota) Distncia lateral mnima da carroceria do veculo Menos de 7 watts 20 centmetros (8 polegadas) 7 a 14 watts 15 a 39 watts 40 a 110 watts 30 centmetros (1 p) 60 centmetros (2 ps) 90 centmetros (3 ps) 5 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Quando um rdio mvel utilizado juntamente com outro transmissor co-localizado como, por exemplo, um repetidor veicular, o operador do veculo ser responsvel por tomar as medidas necessrias para manter os transeuntes distncia mnima exigida do veculo, de modo a garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pela FCC para a populao em geral. Para obter mais detalhes, consulte o manual do usurio dos transmissores co-localizados. NOTA: Se no tiver certeza sobre o valor da potncia nominal de seu rdio, entre em contato com o representante ou a concessionria Motorola e informe o nmero de modelo do rdio que aparece na etiqueta do rdio. Se no for possvel determinar a potncia de sada nominal, assegure-se de manter a separao de 1 metro (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. Usurios de rdios multi-banda sujeitos a diferentes distncias de separao em diferentes bandas operacionais de acordo com a Tabela 1 devem selecionar a maior distncia aplicvel como a mnima distncia lateral para expectadores fora do veculo. A energia mxima exibida da Garantia FCC pode ser maior que a energia nominal permitida para a variao de produo. Orientaes gerais para a instalao das antenas de rdios mveis As orientaes gerais descritas a seguir para a instalao de antenas de rdios mveis se aplicam somente a veculos automotores com carroceria metlica ou a veculos com planos de terra apropriados. As antenas devem ser instaladas na rea central do teto ou da tampa do porta-
malas, levando em considerao as condies de exposio aplicveis aos passageiros do banco traseiro, bem como as instrues e restries especficas mencionadas no manual de instalao do rdio e os requisitos estabelecidos pelo fornecedor da antena. A instalao na tampa do porta-malas limitada a veculos cujas tampas do compartimento de porta-malas sejam planas e claramente definidas e, em alguns casos, a modelos especficos de rdios e antenas. Consulte no manual de instalao do rdio as informaes especficas sobre a localizao e a forma de instalar os diferentes tipos de antenas aprovados para satisfazer deste modo as exigncias de operao recomendadas e assim proteger as pessoas que possam estar expostas. Portugus Brasileiro 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Use somente a antena Motorola fornecida ou uma antena de reposio aprovada pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no aprovados poder resultar em dano ao rdio e se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Acessrios aprovados Este rdio foi testado e constatou-se que satisfaz as normas de segurana em relao energia de RF sempre que utilizado com os acessrios Motorola fornecidos ou destinados a este produto. O uso de outros acessrios pode se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Para uma lista de aprovados Motorola antenas e acessrios, consulte o manual do usurio manual para o seu modelo de rdio. Informaes adicionais Para obter informaes adicionais sobre os requisitos de exposio ou sobre treinamento, visite o seguinte website: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/
index.php/ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Orientaes gerais de controle e conformidade e instrues de operao de rdios mveis bidirecionais instalados como estaes de controle em locais fixos Se um equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado em um local fixo e o mesmo for colocado em funcionamento como uma estao de controle ou como uma unidade fixa, a instalao da antena dever satisfazer os requisitos descritos a seguir, de modo a garantir um rendimento otimizado e para atender aos limites de exposio energia de radiofreqncia estabelecidos nas normas e orientaes mencionadas na pgina 4:
Sempre que for possvel, a antena dever ser instalada fora do edifcio em um teto ou torre. Como acontece em todas as instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos, responsabilidade do licenciado manter o local em conformidade com os regulamentos aplicveis. Tambm possvel que existam requisitos adicionais tais como medies de propagao, colocao de sinalizao de aviso e outras restries de acesso ao local. 7 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Para obter informaes adicionais sobre a instalao, consulte as orientaes relativas s distncias mnimas de separao mencionadas anteriormente na seo denominada Orientaes de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao, constantes nesse documento. Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle e Instrues Operacionais para Rdios Portteis de Duas Vias Instalados em Embarcaes Martimas Se o equipamento de rdio porttil estiver instalado em uma embarcao e operado como unidade fixa, a instalao da antena deve estar em conformidade com os seguintes requerimentos para assegurar desempenho excelente e conformidade com os limites de exposio energia RF nos padres e diretrizes listadas na pgina 4:
Uma antena destinada para operao Martima deve ser escolhida e instalada de acordo com as recomendaes do fabricante. As antenas devem ser montadas solidamente estrutura da embarcao no local mais alto possvel. Como com todas as instalaes de antena de rdio, responsabilidade do operador manter distncias adequadas da antena e todo o pessoal a bordo da embarcao ou adjacente embarcao. Para informaes adicionais de instalao, veja as diretrizes para distncias de separao mnimas provadas acima na seo Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle e Instrues Operacionais deste documento. Interferncia e compatibilidade eletromagntica NOTA: Quase todos os dispositivos eletrnicos so susceptveis interferncia eletromagntica se no estiverem devidamente blindados ou se no tiverem sido projetados ou configurados de maneira a serem compatveis com estes tipos de sinais eletromagnticos. possvel que seja necessrio realizar testes de compatibilidade para se determinar se algum dos equipamentos eletrnicos usados nos veculos, prximo a eles ou prximo s instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos sensvel energia de radiofreqncia externa, ou se h necessidade de executar algum procedimento para eliminar ou reduzir a possibilidade de interao entre o rdio transmissor e o referido equipamento ou dispositivo. Portugus Brasileiro 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Edificaes Para evitar problemas de interferncia e/ou compatibilidade eletromagntica, desligue o rdio em todos os locais onde houver avisos instruindo neste sentido. Por exemplo, em hospitais e estabelecimentos de assistncia mdica podem estar sendo utilizados equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interao entre o rdio transmissor e qualquer um dos mdulos de controle eletrnico do veculo (por exemplo, o controle do sistema anti-
bloqueio de freios (ABS), o controle do motor ou o controle da transmisso), recomenda-se que se contrate um instalador experiente para realizar a instalao do rdio, bem como tomar as seguintes precaues:
1. Consulte as instrues fornecidas pelo fabricante e as demais documentaes tcnicas que contenham recomendaes para a instalao do rdio. 2. Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento no veculo. 3. Passe toda a fiao do rdio, incluindo a linha de transmisso da antena, o mais distante possvel das unidades de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento correspondente. Segurana ao dirigir Consulte as leis e regulamentos de trnsito referentes ao uso de rdios nos locais em que estiver dirigindo. Obedea sempre estas leis. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio ao dirigir:
Preste ateno ao volante quando estiver dirigindo. Saia da pista e estacione antes de fazer ou receber uma chamada, se as condies de trnsito assim o exigirem. Segurana acstica A exposio a rudos intensos provenientes de qualquer fonte durante perodos de tempo prolongados poder afetar a sua capacidade auditiva temporariamente ou de forma permanente. Quanto mais alto for o volume sonoro do rdio, mais rapidamente sua capacidade auditiva poder ser afetada. O dano auditivo produzido por rudos intensos s vezes poder ser imperceptvel em um primeiro momento. Porm, ele tende a se tornar um efeito cumulativo. 9 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Para proteger a sua capacidade auditiva:
Use a menor intensidade de volume que permita a realizao de suas tarefas. Aumente o volume somente quando estiver em um ambiente ruidoso. Abaixe o volume antes de conectar um fone de ouvido ou acessrio auricular. Limite o tempo de uso de fones de ouvido ou de acessrios auriculares em volume alto. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio sem um fone de ouvido ou acessrio auricular, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio muito prximo ao ouvido. Portugus Brasileiro 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM ADVERTNCIA ADVERTNCIA Advertncias operacionais Veculos com air bag No instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag nem na rea prxima expanso do mesmo. O air bag se expande com grande intensidade. Se houver um rdio porttil na rea de expanso do air bag quando da expanso do mesmo, o rdio poder ser lanado com grande velocidade e causar leses graves aos passageiros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em reas com atmosferas potencialmente inflamveis. As fascas lanadas em ambientes potencialmente explosivos podem causar uma exploso ou incndio e resultar em leses graves ou inclusive fatais. Entre os ambientes potencialmente explosivos esto as reas com combustveis situadas, por exemplo, na parte inferior de embarcaes, instalaes de transferncia e armazenamento de combustveis ou de produtos qumicos, e reas onde o ar possa conter produtos qumicos ou partculas tais como cereais, poeira comum ou poeira metlica. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos geralmente contm avisos de advertncia, embora nem sempre seja assim. reas de detonao e exploso Para evitar uma possvel interferncia com as operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo de detonadores eltricos, em reas de detonao ou onde houver avisos indicando para desligar os rdios bidirecionais. Siga todos os avisos e instrues. No caso de rdios instalados em veculos movidos a gs liqefeito de petrleo, consulte a norma NFPA 58 da Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios dos EUA (National Fire Protection Association) para obter informaes a respeito do armazenamento, manuseio e/ou recipientes. Para obter uma cpia da norma NFPA 58 entre em contato com a Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EUA. 11 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Portugus Brasileiro 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Guide dexposition aux frquences radio (RF) et de scurit des produits pour radios mobiles bidirectionnelles installes dans des vhicules, des navires ou comme stations fixes de surveillance de sites ATTENTION AVANT DUTILISER CETTE RADIO, LISEZ CETTE BROCHURE QUI CONTIENT DIMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS SUR LE MODE DEMPLOI SCURITAIRE DU PRODUIT AINSI QUE DES INFORMATIONS RELATIVES LNERGIE DE RF ET SON CONTRLE, AFIN DASSURER LA CONFORMIT AUX LIMITES DEXPOSITION LNERGIE DE RADIOFRQUENCE TABLIES PAR LES NORMES NATIONALES ET INTERNATIONALES APPLICABLES. Les informations contenues dans ce document remplacent les informations gnrales de scurit des manuels de lutilisateur publis avant janvier 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logo M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques enregistres de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce appartiennent leurs propritaires respectifs. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, tats-Unis.
*NNTN7851D*
NNTN7851D
*6881095C99*
6881095C99-J Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Sensibilisation lexposition lnergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes dutilisation pour conformit aux normes du FCC en matire dusage professionnel de cette radio AVIS: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de lexposition lnergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par le FCC. Ce dispositif radio Nest PAS autoris pour lensemble de la population, les consommateurs en gnral, ni pour une utilisation autre que celle dcrite ici. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de lnergie lectromagntique dans le spectre des radiofrquences (RF) pour permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise lnergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. Lnergie de RF est une forme dnergie lectromagntique. Ce type dnergie se prsente sous dautres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre lnergie de RF avec dautres formes dnergie lectromagntique qui, lorsquelles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Les experts en science, en ingnierie, en mdecine, en sciences de la sant et lindustrie travaillent en collaboration avec diffrentes organisations afin dlaborer des normes dfinissant les limites acceptables dexposition lnergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF comprennent des marges de scurit apprciables. Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux dexposition aux RF tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisquelles informent les utilisateurs sur lexposition lnergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Franais Canadien 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce quest lnergie de RF et sur les mesures de contrles observer afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire dexposition aux RF. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Rglements du Conseil Fdral Amricain des Communications
(FCC) Les rglements du FCC stipulent que les fabricants de radios mobiles bidirectionnelles ne peuvent commercialiser leurs produits aux tats-Unis quaprs avoir vrifi leur conformit aux limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies par le FCC. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, le FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de lexposition et quils soient capables de contrler le niveau dexposition auquel ils se soumettent, afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation lexposition aux RF en apposant des tiquettes renvoyant les utilisateurs vers la source dinformation approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur lexposition lnergie de RF. Dautre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de lutilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment, les informations requises et le mode demploi permettant de contrler lexposition lnergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. Conformit aux normes sur lexposition aux RF Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies lexposition des tres humains lnergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites dexposition tablies par l'IEEE et la ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle dexposition lnergie de radiofrquence, des cycles de travail allant jusqu 50% (50% transmission/50% rception) et est approuv par le FCC pour un usage exclusivement professionnel. En ce qui concerne la mesure de lnergie de RF afin dvaluer la conformit aux normes dexposition du FCC, la radio met de lnergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsquelle est en cours de transmission
(conversation), et non pas lorsquelle reoit (coute) ni quand elle est en mode Attente. 3 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives lexposition lnergie de RF:
Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Code de la rglementation fdrale ; 47CFR et suiv. Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Bulletin OET 65 Institut des ingnieurs lectriciens et lectroniciens (IEEE), C95.1 Comit international pour la protection contre les radiations non ionisantes
(ICNIRP) Ministre de la sant (Canada), Code de scurit 6 Industrie Canada, RSS-102 Direction australienne de communications, norme de radiocommunications, et suiv. Annexe dANATEL la rsolution No. 303 et suiv. Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle dexposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement Pour contrler lexposition laquelle vous-mme et dautres personnes se soumettent et garantir le respect des limites dexposition aux RF, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. Consignes:
Lorsque lappareil est cd dautres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs. Nutilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites ici ne sont pas runies. Franais Canadien 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Consignes:
Nmettez pas plus de 50% du temps afin de ne pas dpasser le cycle maximal de travail spcifi de 50%. Pour mettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT) ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, parlez dans le microphone. La DEL rouge sallume lorsque la radio met. Pour recevoir des appels, relchez le bouton PTT, ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, arrtez de parler. La DEL rouge steint lorsque la radio arrte dmettre. Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50% du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont lexposition nest mesurable que lors de lmission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure). Lmission ne doit se faire que lorsque les personnes situes lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (indique dans le tableau 1) de la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne convenablement installe. Cette sparation garantit une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences en matire dexposition lnergie de RF stipules dans les normes mentionnes plus haut. REMARQUE: Le tableau 1 ci-dessous indique la distance latrale minimum recommande, dans un environnement non contrl, pour les passants par rapport la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne mettrice agre et convenablement installe (cest--dire, antenne unipolaire plan de sol, ou doublet) pour diffrents niveaux de puissance nominale de radios mobiles installes dans un vhicule. Tableau 1. Puissance nominale de la radio bidirectionnelle mobile installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande de la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile (voir Remarque) Moins de 7 watts 7 14 watts 15 39 watts 40 110 watts Distance latrale minimale de la carrosserie du vhicule 20 centimtres (8 pouces) 30 centimtres (1 pied) 60 centimtres (2 pieds) 90 centimtres (3 pieds) 5 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Lorsqu'une radio mobile est utilise avec un autre metteur ayant la mme position, par exemple un rpteur vhiculaire, il incombe l'oprateur du vhicule de prendre les mesures ncessaires pour maintenir les tiers la distance requise du vhicule de faon garantir la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie de RF tablies par la FCC pour le public en gnral. Pour plus de renseignements, consultez le guide de l'utilisateur relatif aux metteurs ayant la mme position. REMARQUE: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola et indiquez-
lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de celle-ci. Si vous narrivez pas dterminer la puissance de sortie nominale, conservez une distance dun mtre (3 pieds) par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule. Les utilisateurs de radio multi-bandes soumises diffrentes distances de sparation dans diffrentes bandes de fonctionnement selon le tableau 1 devront slectionner la plus grande distance applicable comme distance latrale minimale pour les personnes se trouvant l'extrieur du vhicule. La puissance maximale indique sur lautorisation de la FCC peut tre suprieure la puissance nominale si lon tient compte des variations de production. Consignes dinstallation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Les consignes suivantes pour linstallation dantennes de radios mobiles sont applicables uniquement aux vhicules automobiles carrosserie mtallique ou aux vhicules plans de sol appropris. Les antennes doivent tre installes au centre du toit ou du capot du coffre, en tenant compte des conditions dexposition des passagers du sige arrire, ainsi que des consignes et restrictions spcifiques mentionnes dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio et des exigences tablies par le fournisseur de lantenne. Les installations sur le capot du coffre sont rserves aux vhicules quips de coffres surfaces planes clairement dfinies et dans la plupart des cas, des modles spcifiques de radios et dantennes. Consultez dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio les informations spcifiques relatives lemplacement et au mode dinstallation des diffrents types dantennes agrs, destines fournir toute personne risquant dtre expose les distances de fonctionnement recommandes. Utilisez uniquement lantenne agre fournie par Motorola ou une antenne de rechange agre Motorola. Lutilisation dantennes, de modifications ou Franais Canadien 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM daccessoires non agrs peut endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Accessoires agrs Cette radio a t teste et dclare conforme aux normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF lorsquelle est utilise avec les accessoires Motorola fournis ou dsigns pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires peut constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Pour obtenir une liste de Motorola antennes approuves et accessoires, reportez-
vous l'utilisateur manuel de votre modle de radio. Informations complmentaires Pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur les exigences en matire dexposition ou des informations de formation, visitez le site: http://
responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Directives de contrle et de conformit et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes. Si un appareil de radio mobile est install dans un endroit fixe et quil est utilis comme station de contrle ou comme unit fixe, linstallation de lantenne doit rpondre aux exigences ci-dessous afin de garantir un rendement optimal et de respecter les limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies dans les normes et directives numres page 4 :
Dans la mesure du possible, lantenne doit tre monte sur le toit ou sur une tour, lextrieur du btiment. Comme pour toutes les installations dantennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir lemplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Par ailleurs, dautres exigences peuvent sappliquer, telles que des mesures de propagation, la pose de panneaux et des restrictions de laccs lemplacement afin dtre certain que les limites dexposition mentionnes ne sont pas dpasses. Pour toute information d'installation supplmentaire, consultez les directives relatives aux distances de sparation minimum fournies ci-dessus dans la section de ce document intitule Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle d'exposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement. 7 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Directivesdeconformitetdecontrleetconsignes d'exploitationpourlesradiosmobilesbidirectionnelles installssurlesnavires Si un appareil de radio mobile est install sur un navire et utilis comme appareil fixe, l'installation de l'antenne devra tre conforme aux exigences suivantes en vue d'assurer une performance optimale et le respect des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio
(RF) stipules dans les normes et lignes directrices figurant la page 4:
Une antenne usage maritime devra tre choisie et installe conformment aux Les antennes devront tre montes solidement la structure du navire et places le recommandations du fabricant. plus haut possible. Comme avec toutes les installations d'antennes de radio, il est de la responsabilit de l'exploitant de maintenir des distances suffisantes entre l'antenne et tout le personnel bord ou proximit du navire. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation, voir les recommandations pour les distances de sparation minimales exposes ci-dessus dans les Recommandations pour la conformit et le contrle de lexposition aux RF, ainsi que la section Instructions dutilisation de ce document. Interfrence et compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE: La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles leffet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) sils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou sils ne sont pas conus ou configurs de telle sorte quils soient compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Il se peut que des tests de compatibilit soient ncessaires afin de dterminer si lun des appareils lectroniques utiliss lintrieur ou proximit des vhicules ou proximit dantennes emplacements fixes est sensible lnergie de RF externe ou sil faut prendre des mesures quelconques pour liminer ou attnuer le risque dinteraction entre la radio mettrice et lappareil ou le dispositif. Btiments Afin dviter des problmes dinterfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio dans tous les tablissements o des panneaux daffichage vous invitent le faire. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles lnergie de RF externe. Franais Canadien 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Vhicules Afin dviter une ventuelle interaction entre la radio mettrice et lun des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule (par exemple, le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou le contrle de la transmission) il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser linstallation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :
1. Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour linstallation de la radio. 2. Avant dinstaller la radio, dterminez lemplacement des modules de contrle lectronique et du cblage lintrieur du vhicule. 3. Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris la ligne de transmission de lantenne, le plus loin possible des units de contrle lectronique et du cblage correspondant. Scurit lors de la conduite Consultez la lgislation et les rglements en vigueur sur lutilisation des radios dans les zones o vous conduisez. Respectez toujours ces rgles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio en conduisant:
Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route. Rangez-vous sur le bas-ct et stationnez votre vhicule avant de faire ou de rpondre un appel, si les conditions de conduite lexigent. Scurit acoustique L'exposition des bruits forts de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes peut affecter temporairement ou de manire permanente votre audition. Plus le volume de la radio est lev, plus votre audition risque de se dtriorer rapidement. Les dommages auditifs causs par des bruits forts sont parfois indtectables au dbut et peuvent avoir un effet cumulatif. 9 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Pour protger votre audition:
Rglez le volume au plus bas niveau possible ncessaire pour effectuer votre travail. volumes. N'augmentez le volume que si vous tes dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des oreillettes. Utilisez le moins longtemps possible un casque ou des oreillettes de forts Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ou oreillettes, ne placez pas le haut-parleur de la radio directement sur votre oreille. Franais Canadien 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Avertissements de fonctionnement Vhicules quips de sac gonflable vitez de monter ou de placer une radio mobile au-dessus dun sac gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Les sacs gonflables se dploient avec une force considrable. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors doccasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives teignez la radio avant de pntrer dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. La moindre tincelle dans ce type d'atmosphre peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles ou mme la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives, citons les zones davitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles lair est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce nest pas toujours le cas. Dtonateurs et zones de dynamitage Afin dviter toute interfrence ventuelle avec les oprations de dtonation, teignez la radio proximit de dtonateurs lectriques, dans une zone de dtonations ou l o sont affichs des panneaux vous invitant teindre les radios bidirectionnelles. Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. En ce qui concerne les radios installes dans des vhicules fonctionnant au GPL, consultez la norme NFPA 58 de lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association) pour obtenir des informations sur le stockage, la manipulation et/ou les conteneurs. Pour obtenir une copie de la norme GPL, NFPA 58, contactez lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. 11 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Franais Canadien 12
1 2 3 4 | User Manual I | Users Manual | 2.93 MiB | January 30 2019 |
PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 5550/XPR 5550e, XPR 5580/XPR 5580e ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY MOBILE RADIO USER GUIDE en-US fr-CA OCTOBER 2018 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
@MN003677A01@
MN003677A01-AD English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device 2 Send Feedback English As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Send Feedback 3 English Contents Declaration of Conformity...............................................2 Important Safety Information........................................ 28 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)................29 Software Version.......................................................... 30 Copyrights.................................................................... 31 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 33 Handling Precautions................................................... 34 Chapter 1: Basic Operations........................................ 35 Powering Up the Radio......................................35 Powering Off the Radio..................................... 35 Adjusting the Volume.........................................35 Chapter 2: Radio Controls............................................37 Volume/Channel Knob.......................................37 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference.............................................. 38 Keypad Microphone Buttons............................. 39 Chapter 3: WAVE......................................................... 41 Setting Active WAVE Channel ..........................41 Viewing WAVE Channel Information................. 42 4 Viewing WAVE Endpoints Information.............. 42 Changing WAVE Configuration......................... 43 Making Group Calls........................................... 43 Part I: Capacity Max Operations.................................. 45 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................... 45 Programmable Buttons......................................45 Assignable Radio Functions.............................. 46 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions............ 48 Accessing Programmed Functions....................48 Status Indicators................................................49 Icons....................................................... 49 LED Indicator.......................................... 55 Tones......................................................55 Audio Tones.................................56 Indicator Tones............................ 56 Registration....................................................... 56 Zone and Channel Selections........................... 58 Selecting Zones ..................................... 58 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search.................................................... 58 Selecting a Call Type..............................59 Selecting a Site.......................................59 Send Feedback Roam Request........................................59 Site Lock On/Off..................................... 60 Site Restriction........................................60 Site Trunking ..........................................61 Calls...................................................................61 Group Calls.............................................62 Making Group Calls..................... 62 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List.......................... 63 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key
..................................................... 64 Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search ..........................65 Responding to Group Calls..........67 Broadcast Call........................................ 68 Making Broadcast Calls............... 68 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List............................ 69 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable Number Key.. 70 Receiving Broadcast Calls........... 70 Private Call............................................. 71 Send Feedback English Making Private Calls.................... 71 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key
..................................................... 72 Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search ..........................73 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button.................74 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial ........................... 75 Receiving Private Calls................ 76 Accepting Private Calls................ 77 Declining Private Calls................. 77 All Calls...................................................78 Making All Calls........................... 78 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ....... 78 Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search.................................79 Receiving All Calls....................... 81 Phone Calls............................................ 81 Making Phone Calls..................... 82 5 English 6
.............83 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List ......................... 85 Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search...........................87 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial............................ 89 Dual Tone Multi Frequency..........92 Initiating DTMF Calls.........92 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls........................................ 92 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls.................................. 92 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls.................................93 Call Preemption...................................... 94 Voice Interrupt........................................ 94 Enabling Voice Interrupt...............94 Advanced Features........................................... 95 Call Queue..............................................95 Priority Call............................................. 96 Talkgroup Scan.......................................96 Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off................................................ 97 Receive Group List................................. 97 Priority Monitor........................................98 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup.....99 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation..................... 100 Adding Talkgroup Affiliation....... 100 Removing Talkgroup Affiliation.. 101 Talkback............................................... 101 Bluetooth...............................................102 Turning Bluetooth On and Off.... 103 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................................... 103 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode...104 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................................... 105 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device........................106 Viewing Device Details.............. 106 Deleting Device Name............... 106 Bluetooth Mic Gain.....................107 Send Feedback Indoor Location..................................... 107 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.............................................. 108 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information.................. 109 Multi-Site Controls................................ 109 Starting Manual Site Search...... 109 Site Lock On/Off.........................110 Accessing Neighbor Sites List... 110 Home Channel Reminder..................... 111 Muting the Home Channel Reminder................................... 111 Setting New Home Channels.....111 Remote Monitor.................................... 112 Initiating Remote Monitor........... 112 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List ............. 113 Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual Dial................113 Contacts Settings..................................114 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys.....115 Send Feedback English Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys.....116 Adding New Contacts ............... 117 Call Indicator Settings...........................118 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls............ 118 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages ....... 118 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts................ 119 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls.........120 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text.....................................120 Assigning Ring Styles................ 121 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..122 Call Log Features................................. 122 Viewing Recent Calls................. 122 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List...................................... 123 Deleting Calls from the Call List.123 7 English 8 Deleting All Calls from the Call List ............................................ 124 Viewing Details from the Call List............................................. 125 Call Alert Operation.............................. 125 Making Call Alerts...................... 126 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List.............................. 126 Responding to Call Alerts ......... 127 Mute Mode............................................127 Turning On Mute Mode.............. 128 Setting Mute Mode Timer...........128 Exiting Mute Mode..................... 129 Emergency Operation...........................129 Sending Emergency Alarms...... 130 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call.............................................131 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow...........................133 Receiving Emergency Alarms ...134 Responding to Emergency Alarms .......................................135 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call......................... 136 Status Message.................................... 137 Sending Status Messages......... 137 Sending Status Message by Using Programmable Button......138 Sending a Status Message by Using the Contacts List.............. 139 Sending Status Message by Using Manual Dial......................139 Viewing Status Messages..........140 Responding to Status Messages
................................................... 141 Deleting a Status Message........ 142 Deleting All Status Messages ... 142 Text Messaging.................................... 143 Text Messages...........................143 Viewing Text Messages . 143 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages................144 Responding to Text Messages........................144 Send Feedback Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text................................. 145 Resending Text Messages .......................146 Forwarding Text Messages........................147 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial..................... 147 Editing Text Messages....148 Writing Text Messages....149 Sending Text Messages..149 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox................. 150 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox151 Sent Text Messages.................. 152 Viewing Sent Text Messages........................152 Sending Sent Text Messages........................153 Send Feedback English Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder.................... 154 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder ................... 154 Saved Text Messages............... 155 Viewing Saved Text Messages........................155 Editing Saved Text Messages........................155 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder.............................. 156 Quick Text Messages ............... 157 Sending Quick Text Messages .......................157 Text Entry Configuration....................... 158 Enabling or Disabling Word Correct....................................... 158 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict........................................159 Sentence Cap............................ 160 Viewing Custom Words..............160 9 English 10 Editing Custom Words............... 161 Adding Custom Words............... 162 Deleting a Custom Word............163 Deleting All Custom Words........ 164 Job Tickets............................................164 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder 165 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server........................................ 166 Creating Job Tickets.................. 166 Responding to Job Tickets.........167 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template...................168 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template..168 Deleting Job Tickets...................169 Deleting All Job Tickets..............170 Privacy.................................................. 170 Turning Privacy On or Off.......... 171 Stun/Revive.......................................... 172 Stunning a Radio....................... 172 Stunning a Radio by Using the Contacts List ............................. 173 Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual Dial................................ 174 Reviving a Radio........................174 Reviving a Radio by Using the Contacts List.............................. 175 Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Dial................................ 176 Radio Kill...............................................177 Lone Worker......................................... 177 Password Lock Features...................... 177 Accessing Radios by Using Passwords................................. 177 Unlocking Radios in Locked State...........................................178 Turning Password Lock On or Off.............................................. 178 Changing Passwords................. 179 Notification List .................................... 180 Accessing Notification List ........ 181 Over-the-Air Programming ...................181 Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes................................182 Received Signal Strength Indicator...... 182 Send Feedback Viewing RSSI Values................. 182 Front Panel Configuration.....................183 Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode....................183 Editing FPC Mode Parameters.. 183 Wi-Fi Operation.....................................183 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..............184 Connecting to a Network Access Point...........................................185 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status ........................................186 Refreshing the Network List.......186 Adding a Network.......................187 Viewing Details of Network Access Points............................ 188 Removing Network Access Points......................................... 189 Utilities............................................................. 189 Power Levels........................................ 189 Setting Power Levels................. 190 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.. 190 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off..........191 Send Feedback English Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels................................................... 192 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off..... 192 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off........193 Setting Text Message Alert Tones........194 Changing Display Modes......................194 Adjusting Display Brightness................ 195 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off ............195 Turning LED Indicators On or Off......... 196 Turning Public Address System On or Off......................................................... 197 Turning External Public Address System On or Off.................................. 197 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off..198 Setting Languages................................199 Identifying Cable Type.......................... 199 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off ........................................................ 200 Turning Option Board On or Off............200 Text-to-Speech..................................... 200 Setting Text-to-Speech.............. 201 Setting Menu Timer.............................. 201 11 English Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off ........................................................ 202 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off....... 202 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 203 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off....204 Audio Ambience....................................205 Setting Audio Ambience.............205 Audio Profiles........................................206 Setting Audio Profiles.................206 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................................. 207 General Radio Information ...................207 Checking Radio Alias and ID .... 208 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions.....................208 Checking Software Update Information................................. 209 Checking GNSS Information......209 Displaying Site Information........ 210 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details...................................................210 Part II: Connect Plus Operations................................212 12 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode................................................................212 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...................212 Programmable Buttons......................... 212 Assignable Radio Functions...... 213 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions................................... 214 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode.............................................215 Display Icons..............................215 Call Icons................................... 217 Advanced Menu Icons............... 218 Sent Item Icons ......................... 218 Bluetooth Device Icons.............. 219 LED Indicator............................. 220 Indicator Tones.......................... 220 Alert Tones.................................221 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes.....................221 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode................................................................221 Selecting a Site.....................................221 Send Feedback Roam Request........................... 222 Site Lock On/Off.........................222 Site Restriction...........................222 Selecting a Zone...................................223 Using Multiple Networks....................... 224 Selecting a Call Type............................224 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call........................................................224 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call..................................225 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call.................................225 Receiving a Site All Call.............226 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call................................. 227 Making a Buffered Over-
Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call......................227 Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call......................228 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call............................228 Send Feedback English Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call228 Making a Radio Call..............................228 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob............................ 229 Making a Group Call....... 229 Making a Private Call...... 230 Making a Site All Call...... 230 Making a Multi-group Call
........................................ 231 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button...............231 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.........................................232 Making a Private Call...... 232 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.........................................233 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu 234 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts.......... 234 13 English 14 Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call
................................................... 236 Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call................................. 236 Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call................................. 237 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode..... 237 Home Channel Reminder..................... 237 Auto Fallback........................................ 238 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode.......................................... 238 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode............................239 Returning to Normal Operation.. 239 Radio Check......................................... 240 Sending a Radio Check............. 240 Remote Monitor.................................... 241 Initiating Remote Monitor........... 241 Scan......................................................242 Starting and Stopping Scan....... 242 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan............................ 243 User Configurable Scan........................243 Turning Scan On or Off.........................244 Editing the Scan List............................. 245 Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu.....................................246 Understanding Scan Operation............ 248 Scan Talkback...................................... 249 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup............. 249 Contacts Settings..................................250 Making a Private Call from Contacts.....................................251 Making a Call Alias Search........ 251 Adding a New Contact............... 252 Call Indicator Settings...........................253 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert..................253 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls............ 254 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message..........254 Selecting a Ring Alert Type....... 255 Send Feedback Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..255 Call Log.................................................256 Viewing Recent Calls................. 256 Deleting a Call from a Call List...256 Viewing Details from a Call List. 257 Call Alert Operation.............................. 257 Responding to Call Alerts ......... 258 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List................................ 258 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button................. 259 Mute Mode............................................259 Turning On Mute Mode.............. 260 Setting Mute Mode Timer...........260 Exiting Mute Mode..................... 261 Emergency Operation...........................261 Receiving an Incoming Emergency.................................263 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List......................... 263 Deleting the Emergency Details.264 Send Feedback English Responding to an Emergency Call.............................................264 Responding to an Emergency Alert............................................265 Ignore Emergency Revert Call...265 Initiating an Emergency Call...... 266 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow................... 266 Initiating an Emergency Alert..... 267 Exiting Emergency Mode........... 267 Text Messaging.................................... 268 Sending a Quick Text Message. 268 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button.........................................269 Accessing the Drafts Folder.......269 Viewing a Saved Text Message..........................269 Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message...... 270 Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts.......271 15 English 16 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages...................................272 Resending a Text Message..........................272 Forwarding a Text Message..........................272 Managing Sent Text Messages. 273 Viewing a Sent Text Message..........................273 Sending a Sent Text Message..........................274 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items............................... 275 Receiving a Text Message.........276 Reading a Text Message........... 276 Managing Received Text Messages...................................276 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox................. 277 Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox..277 Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox................. 278 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox279 Privacy.................................................. 280 Making a Privacy-Enabled
(Scrambled) Call........................ 281 Security.................................................281 Radio Disable.............................282 Radio Enable............................. 283 Bluetooth Operation..............................285 Turning Bluetooth On and Off.... 285 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device........................286 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device (Discoverable Mode).........................................287 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device........................................ 287 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device........................288 Viewing Device Details.............. 288 Deleting Device Name............... 289 Bluetooth Mic Gain.....................289 Send Feedback Indoor Location..................................... 290 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.............................................. 290 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information.................. 291 Notification List..................................... 292 Accessing the Notification List... 292 Wi-Fi Operation.....................................292 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..............293 Connecting to a Network Access Point...........................................294 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status ........................................295 Refreshing the Network List.......295 Adding a Network.......................296 Viewing Details of Network Access Points............................ 297 Removing Network Access Points......................................... 298 Utilities.................................................. 298 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.................................... 298 Send Feedback English Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level................................299 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................................... 300 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off........................... 301 Setting the Power Level............. 301 Changing the Display Mode.......302 Adjusting the Display Brightness
................................................... 303 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off.................................... 303 Language................................... 304 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off.............................................. 305 Identifying Cable Type............... 305 Voice Announcement.................305 Menu Timer................................306 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off..307 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference................................. 307 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D).... 308 Intelligent Audio......................... 308 17 English Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off... 310 Turning GNSS On or Off............311 Accessing General Radio Information................................. 311 Checking the Radio Model Number Index.......312 Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File.................. 312 Displaying the Site ID
(Site Number)..................313 Checking the Site Info..... 313 Checking the Radio ID.... 314 Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version............................ 314 Checking for Updates......315 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details.......................322 Part III: Other Systems............................................... 324 Push-To-Talk Button .......................................324 Programmable Buttons....................................324 18 Assignable Radio Functions................. 324 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions327 Accessing Programmed Functions....... 328 Status Indicators..............................................328 Icons..................................................... 328 LED Indicators ..................................... 335 Tones....................................................336 Indicator Tones.......................... 336 Audio Tones...............................336 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes..........337 Icon Information...............................................337 IP Site Connect
.......................................... 337 Capacity PlusSingle-Site
.......................... 338
............................ 339 Capacity PlusMulti-Site Zone and Channel Selections......................... 339 Selecting Zones ................................... 340 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search.................................................. 340 Selecting Channels...............................341 Calls.................................................................341 Group Calls...........................................342 Send Feedback Making Group Calls................... 342 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List ....................... 343 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Private Calls
.......................................... 343 Responding to Group Calls........344
.................................... 345
............. 345 Making Private Calls Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key
.....................347
................... 346 Responding to Private Calls
.......................................... 348
. 349 All Calls.................................................349 Receiving All Calls..................... 349 Making All Calls......................... 350 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key
. 351 English Selective Calls Phone Calls
.................................352 Making Selective Calls...............352 Responding to Selective Calls
................................................... 352
..................................... 353
..............354 Making Phone Calls Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Making Group, Private, Phone or All Calls by Using the Alias
.............................. 360 Search Dual Tone Multi Frequency........362 Initiating DTMF Calls.......362
.....................357
................... 355
...........................362 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls
.................................363
..........................363
....................... 364 Stopping Radio Calls Send Feedback 19 English Talkaround............................................365 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes..................... 365 Advanced Features......................................... 365 Home Channel Reminder..................... 366 Radio Check Muting the Home Channel Reminder................................... 366 Setting New Home Channels.....366
.................................... 367
......... 367 Sending Radio Checks Sending Radio Checks by Using the Manual Dial
.....................368 Remote Monitor.................................... 369 Initiating Remote Monitor........... 369 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List ............. 370 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Manual Dial
...........370 Scan Lists............................................. 371 Viewing Entries in the Scan List 372 Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Alias Search .........372 Adding New Entries to the Scan List............................................. 373 Adding New Entries to the Scan List by Using the Alias Search
................................................... 374 Deleting Entries from the Scan List............................................. 375 Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List.................................... 375 Scan......................................................376 Turning Scan On or Off .............377 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning........................ 377 Deleting Nuisance Channels......378 Restoring Nuisance Channels... 378 Vote Scan
........................................378 Contacts Settings..................................379 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List ....................... 379 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List
................... 380 20 Send Feedback Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys
................................................... 381 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys
................................................... 382 Adding New Contacts ............... 383
.........383 Setting Default Contact Call Indicator Settings...........................384
....... 385 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts................ 384 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text.....................................387 Assigning Ring Styles................ 387 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..388
....385
...386 English Call Log Features................................. 388 Viewing Recent Calls................. 389 Deleting Calls from the Call List
...............................................389
....... 390 Viewing Call List Details Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List
................................. 390 Call Alert Operation ............................. 391 Making Call Alerts...................... 391 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List.............................. 391 Making Call Alerts by Using the Manual Dial................................ 392 Responding to Call Alerts ......... 393 Mute Mode............................................393 Turning On Mute Mode.............. 394 Setting Mute Mode Timer...........394 Exiting Mute Mode..................... 395 Emergency Operation ..........................395 Receiving Emergency Alarms....396 Responding to Emergency Alarms........................................397 Send Feedback 21 English Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm398 Sending Emergency Alarms ..... 398 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call ............................................399 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow ........................................400 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow
..................... 401 Reinitiating Emergency Mode.... 401 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm.. 402 Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List................................... 402 Text Messaging.................................... 403
..................... 403 Viewing Text Messages . 403 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages................404 Responding to Text Messages
...................404 Text Messages
...................407
............................ 405 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text Resending Text Messages .......................406 Forwarding Text Messages Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial
................ 407 Editing Text Messages....408 Writing Text Messages....409 Sending Text Messages..409 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox................. 410 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
.................................... 411
............. 412 Sent Text Messages Viewing Sent Text Messages Sending Sent Text Messages
...................412
...................413 22 Send Feedback Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder ................... 414 Saved Text Messages............... 415
............... 414 Viewing Saved Text Messages........................415 Editing Saved Text Messages........................415 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder.............................. 416
........... 417 Quick Text Messages Sending Quick Text Messages
...................417 Text Entry Configuration....................... 418 Enabling or Disabling Word Correct....................................... 418 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict........................................419 Sentence Cap............................ 420 Send Feedback English Viewing Custom Words..............420 Editing Custom Words............... 421 Adding Custom Words............... 422 Deleting a Custom Word............423 Deleting All Custom Words........ 424 Job Tickets............................................424 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder 425 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server........................................ 426 Creating Job Tickets.................. 426 Responding to Job Tickets.........427 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template...................428 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template..428 Deleting Job Tickets...................429 Deleting All Job Tickets..............430
.............................................430
..... 431 Multi-Site Controls................................ 432 Starting Manual Site Search...... 432 Site Lock On/Off.........................432 23 Turning Privacy On or Off Privacy English 24 Security Accessing Neighbor Sites List... 433
............................................433
...................433
......................... 434 Disabling Radios Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Enabling Radios Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial
...........................435
....................435
......................... 436
...........................437 Lone Worker......................................... 438 Bluetooth...............................................438 Turning Bluetooth On and Off.... 439 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................................... 439 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode...441 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................................... 441 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device........................442 Viewing Device Details.............. 442 Deleting Device Name............... 443 Bluetooth Mic Gain.....................443 Indoor Location..................................... 444 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.............................................. 444 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information.................. 445 Notification List .................................... 446 Accessing Notification List ........ 446
...446
.............. 447 Auto-Range Transponder System Over-the-Air Programming Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes................................447 Received Signal Strength Indicator...... 448 Viewing RSSI Values................. 448 Password Lock Features...................... 449 Accessing Radios by Using Passwords................................. 449 Send Feedback Unlocking Radios in Locked State...........................................449 Turning Password Lock On or Off.............................................. 450 Changing Passwords................. 451 Front Panel Configuration.....................451 Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode....................452 Editing FPC Mode Parameters.. 452 Wi-Fi Operation.....................................452 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..............453 Connecting to a Network Access Point...........................................453 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status ........................................454 Refreshing the Network List.......455 Adding a Network.......................456 Viewing Details of Network Access Points............................ 456 Removing Network Access Points......................................... 457 Utilities............................................................. 458 Squelch Levels .................................... 458 Send Feedback English Setting Squelch Levels ............. 458 Power Levels........................................ 459 Setting Power Levels................. 459 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.. 460 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off..........461 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels................................................... 461 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off..... 462 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off........463 Setting Text Message Alert Tones........463 Changing Display Modes......................464 Adjusting Display Brightness................ 465 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off ............465 Turning LED Indicators On or Off......... 466 Turning Public Address System On or Off......................................................... 466 Turning External Public Address System On or Off.................................. 467 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off..468 Setting Languages................................468 Identifying Cable Type.......................... 469 Voice Operating Transmission .............469 25 English Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off..............470 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off ........................................................ 470 Turning Option Board On or Off............471 Text-to-Speech..................................... 471 Setting Text-to-Speech.............. 471 Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off.....................................................472 Setting Menu Timer.............................. 473 Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off ....................................................473 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off ........................................................ 474 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off....... 475 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 475 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off....476 Audio Ambience....................................477 Setting Audio Ambience.............477 Audio Profiles........................................478 Setting Audio Profiles.................478 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................................. 479 Flexible Receive List
........................479 Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off.......................................... 480 General Radio Information ...................480 Checking Radio Alias and ID .... 480 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions.....................481 Checking Software Update Information................................. 481 Checking GNSS Information......482 Displaying Site Information........ 483 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details...................................................483 Part IV: Authorized Accessories List.......................... 484 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 489 Special Channel Assignments.........................489 Emergency Channel............................. 489 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 489 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 490 26 Send Feedback English Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................492 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................492 Limited Warranty........................................................ 493 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 493 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 493 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS............................ 494 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................494 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE......494 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER............................................................494 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS495 VII. GOVERNING LAW................................... 496 Send Feedback 27 that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. English Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the user's authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum
(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen 28 Send Feedback English Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Send Feedback 29 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.09.00.0000 or later. See Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions on page 208 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 30 Send Feedback English Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Send Feedback Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries 31 English should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 32 Send Feedback English patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including Send Feedback 33 English Handling Precautions The MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meets IP67 specifications, allowing your radio to withstand adverse field conditions such as being submersed in water. This section describes some basic handling precautions. CAUTION:
Do not disassemble your radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Radio maintenance should only be done in service depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal on the radio. If your radio has been submersed in water, shake your radio well to remove any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio performance. If your radio's battery contact area has been exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts on both your radio and the battery before attaching the battery to radio. The residual water could short-circuit the radio. If your radio has been submersed in a corrosive substance (for example, saltwater), rinse radio and battery in fresh water then dry radio and battery. To clean the exterior surfaces of your radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (for example, one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water). Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak path into radio and your radio's submersibility may be lost. Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label. Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the vent. Your radio with antenna attached properly is designed to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft) and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna may result in damage to your radio. When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure jet spray on radio as this will exceed the 1 m depth pressure and may cause water to leak into your radio. 34 Send Feedback Basic Operations This chapter explains the operations to get you started on using the radio. Powering Up the Radio Follow the procedure to power up your radio. Press the On/Off button. If successful:
A tone sounds. The green LED lights up. The display shows MOTOTRBO (TM), followed by a welcome message or image. The Home screen lights up. If the Tones/Alerts function is disabled, there is no tone upon powering up. Check your battery if your radio does not power up. Make sure that it is charged and properly attached. Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power up. English Powering Off the Radio Follow the procedure to power off your radio. Press and hold the On/Off button. The radio may take up to seven seconds to completely turn off. The display shows Powering Down. Adjusting the Volume Follow the procedure to change the volume level of your radio. Do one of the following:
Turn the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise to increase the volume. Turn the On/Off/Volume Control Knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Send Feedback 35 English NOTICE:
Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 36 Send Feedback Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. 7 Return/Home Button 8 Front Programmable Buttons 9 Accessory Connector 10 LED Indicators English Volume/Channel Knob The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed for dual volume and channel control, or for volume control only. To adjust the volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 35. To change the channels, press and hold the Volume/
Channel Knob until the channel selection state is displayed. Turn the Volume/Channel Knob to select the channel. Do one of the following to exit the channel selection state:
Press the Volume/Channel Knob. Press
. Press Wait for the menu timer to expire. 37 1 On/Off/Information Button 2 Volume/Channel Knob 3 Display 4 Menu/OK Button 5 Scroll Up/Down Buttons 6 Speaker Send Feedback 12346591078 4 5 English Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Follow the procedure to set the dual knob operation preference of the radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 38 or to Dual Knob. Press Press select. The display shows Volume Only and Volume &
Channel. to Press to the required setting. Press or to select. appears beside the selected settings. The A screen returns to the previous menu. Send Feedback Keypad Microphone Buttons You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola Solutions part number RMN5127_) to access your radio features. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 5
!
1 2
. 3
, 4
?
6
@
7
&
8
'
9
%
10 11
:
12
*
13
#
A D G J B E H K C F I L 2 3 4 5 Send Feedback 39 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 5 M 3 O 2 N 4 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 P T W 0
* or del
# or spac e Q U X R V Y S 8 Z 7 9 NOTICE:
Press to enter "0" and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. NOTICE:
Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a "*". NOTICE:
Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a "#". 40 Send Feedback WAVE Wide Area Voice Environment (WAVE) provides a new method of making calls between two radios. This feature also supports calls between radios and other devices with WAVE capabilities. However, a WAVE channel must be set up to use this feature. When in a WAVE channel, the radio is unable to receive calls from other systems and can only receive WAVE calls. If the radio is in a WAVE channel, the radio enables Wi-Fi automatically and proceeds to log into the WAVE server. WAVE calls are made when the radio is connected to an IP network through Wi-Fi. NOTICE:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Table 1: WAVE Display Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display when WAVE is enabled. WAVE Connected WAVE is connected. Send Feedback English WAVE Disconnected WAVE is disconnected. Setting Active WAVE Channel WAVE channels are configured through CPS. Follow the procedure to select the required WAVE channel. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press Press Press to select. or to WAVE Channels. Press to the required WAVE channel. or to select. or to Set As Active. Press The display shows beside the selected channel. 41 English Viewing WAVE Channel Information Follow the procedure to view WAVE channel information. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed WAVE Channel List button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press to select. Press Press Press to select. or to WAVE Channels. Press to the required WAVE channel. or to select. or to View Details. Press Viewing WAVE Endpoints Information Follow the procedure to view WAVE Endpoints information. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Contact button. Skip to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Endpoints. Press to Press or Endpoint. Press to the required WAVE to select. Press to select View Details. The display shows the WAVE channel details. The display shows the WAVE Endpoint details. 42 Send Feedback Changing WAVE Configuration Follow the procedure to set the WAVE server IP address, user ID, and password. Press to access the menu. English 7 8 to Password. Press Press change the WAVE password. Press to view or to select. Press changes made. to Apply. Press to apply all the Press select. or to Utilities. Press to The display shows the positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Radio Settings screen. Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or to WAVE. Press to select. to select Server Address. Press Press to change the server address. Press to select. Press user ID. Press to User ID. Press to select. to change the Making Group Calls Follow the procedure to make group calls on a WAVE Channel. 1 Select the WAVE channel with the required group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line displays the Group Call icon and alias. The second text line displays the WAVE group alias. 3 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 English Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds.The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 44 Send Feedback Capacity Max Operations Capacity Max is a control channel-based trunked radio system. Features that are available to the radio users under this system are available in this chapter. Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button serves two basic purposes. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Send Feedback English You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call is interrupted, for example when the radio receives an Emergency call. You should release the PTT button. Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:
See Emergency Operation on page 395 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 45 English Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons by your dealer or system administrator. Audio Ambience Allows the user to select an environment the radio is operating in. Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Contacts Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Call Alert Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Call Log Selects the call log list. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Ext Public Address (PA) Toggles audio routing between the connected PA loudspeaker amplifier and the internal PA system of the radio. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. 46 Send Feedback English Manual Site Roam Starts the manual site search. Mic AGC Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control
(AGC) on or off. Notifications Provides direct access to the Notifications list. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Broadcast, Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, or a Quick Text message. Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Site Info Displays the current Capacity Max site name and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Site Lock When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Phone Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Public Address (PA) Toggles the internal PA system of the radio on or off. Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Toggle Call Priority Level Enables your radio to enter Call Priority Level High/
Normal. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Send Feedback 47 English Voice Announcement for Channel Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. Zone Selection Assignable Settings or Utility Functions The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off. Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. 48 Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Power Level Accessing Programmed Functions Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to the menu function, and press to select a function or enter a sub-menu. 3 Do one of the following:
Press to return to the previous screen. Long press Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. to return to the Home screen. Send Feedback The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad microphone. See Keypad Microphone Buttons on page 39. Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. Icons The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. Table 2: Display Icons The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Blue-
tooth device is connected. English Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. GNSS Available GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-
ble. GNSS Not Available GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Indoor Location Available1 Indoor location status is on and avail-
able. 1 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Send Feedback 49 English 50 Indoor Location Unavailable1 Indoor location status is on but un-
available due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Blue-
tooth. Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. Notification Notification List has one or more missed events. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-
er Indicates time left before automatic restart of radio. Priority 1 Indicates Priority Talkgroup 1. Priority 2 Indicates Priority Talkgroup 2. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-
sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while re-
ceiving. Response Inhibit Response Inhibit is enabled. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Shared Frequency Indicates radio is locking to shared control channel. Send Feedback Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Status Indicates a new status message. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Wi-Fi Excellent2 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good2 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average2 Wi-Fi signal is average. English Wi-Fi Poor2 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable2 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Table 3: Advance Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates that the option is selected. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates that the option is not select-
ed. Solid Black Box Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. 2 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e. Send Feedback 51 English Table 4: Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Table 5: Call Icons The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type. Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-
ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID
(number). Call Priority High Indicating Call Priority Level High is enabled. Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dis-
patcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
scriber alias (name) or ID (number). 52 Send Feedback Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). Table 6: Job Tickets Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder. All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. English In Progress Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Successfully. Send Failed Jobs cannot be sent. Sent Successfully Jobs have been successfully sent. Priority 1 Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. Priority 2 Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. Priority 3 Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. Send Feedback 53 English Table 7: Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Successful Transmission (Positive) Successful action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-
tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-
cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Table 8: Sent Items Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder. or In Progress The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledge-
ment. The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Send Failed The text message cannot be sent. Sent Successfully The text message has been success-
fully sent. or or or or 54 Send Feedback LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Radio is transmitting. Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is detecting activity over the air. English NOTICE:
This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Solid Yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Blinking Yellow Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. Tones The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. High Pitched Tone Send Feedback 55 English Low Pitched Tone Audio Tones Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. Indicator Tones Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Registration There are a number of registration-related messages that you may receive. Registering Typically, registration is sent to the system during power-
up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. If a radio fails registration on a site, the radio automatically attempts to roam to another site. The radio temporarily removes the site where registration was attempted from the roaming list. The indication means that the radio is busy searching for a site to roam, or that the radio has found a site successfully but is waiting for a response to the registration messages from the radio. 56 Send Feedback When Registering is displayed on the radio, a tone sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. If the indications persist, the user should change locations or if allowed, manually roam to another site. Out of Range A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio is unable to detect a signal from the system or from the current site. Typically, this indication means that the radio is outside of the geographic outbound radio frequency (RF) coverage range. When Out of Range is displayed on the radio, a repetitive tone sounds and the red LED flashes. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still receives out of range indications while being in an area with good RF coverage. Talkgroup Affiliation Failed A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in the channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during registration. English A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make or receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is trying to affiliate to. When a radio fails to affiliate with a Talkgroup, UKP Alias is displayed in the home screen with a highlighted background. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio receives affiliation failure indications. Register Denied Registration denied indicators are received when the registration with the system is not accepted. The radio does not indicate to the radio user the specific reason the registration was denied. Normally, a registration is denied when the system operator has disabled the access of the radio to the system. When a radio is denied registration, Register Denied is displayed on the radio and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. Send Feedback 57 English Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 250 Capacity Max Zones with a maximum of 160 Channels per zone. Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions. Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press The display shows or to Zone. Press and the current zone. to select. 2 58 3 Press or to select. to the required zone. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press The display shows or to Zone. Press and the current zone. to select. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Send Feedback English The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. 5 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position
(that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Capacity Max System. The radio registers with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a multi-site network, the Capacity Max radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available:
The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites. Send Feedback 59 English The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. NOTICE:
This is programmed by your dealer. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
Site Restriction In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. The radio does not have to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, your radio receives indication that the site is denied. The radio then searches for a different network site. When experiencing site restrictions, your radio displays Register Denied and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. 60 Send Feedback Site Trunking A site must be able to communicate with the Trunk Controller to be considered as System Trunking. If the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller in the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode. While in Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic audible and visual indication to the user to inform the user of their limited functionality. When a radio is in Site Trunking, the radio displays Site Trunking and a repetitive tone sounds. The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make group and individual voice calls as well as send text messages to other radios within the same site. Voice consoles, logging recorders, phone gateways, and data applications cannot communicate to the radios at the site. Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls across multiple sites will only be able to communicate with other radios within the same site. Communication to and from other sites would be lost. English NOTICE:
If there are multiple sites that cover the current location of the radio and one of the sites enters Site Trunking, the radio roams to another site if within coverage. Calls This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:
Alias Search This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Contacts List This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. Manual Dial (by using Contacts) This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone. Programmed Number Keys This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Send Feedback 61 English NOTICE:
You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. Volume/Channel Selector Knob This method manually selects a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. 62 NOTICE:
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 430 for more information. Group Calls Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. Making Group Calls To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 59. Send Feedback Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the Group Call icon and alias. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. English The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press to end a Group Call. Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. Send Feedback 63 English The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon. 5 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press Call. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. to end the Group Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 64 Send Feedback 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Group See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make any calls by using the alias search. English 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows to Call Phone and Press Send Feedback 65 English Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF 8 tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to proceed. The Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits 66 Send Feedback requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Group English button or NOTICE:
During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit alias search. Press to exit alias search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Responding to Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Group Call:
The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Send Feedback 67 English The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 68 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. Broadcast Call A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond. The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast call. To receive a call from a group of users, or to call a group of users, the radio must be configured as part of a group. Making Broadcast Calls Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 59. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Send Feedback 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and alias. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Broadcast Call. to end the Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio using the Contacts list. 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED blinks. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon. 5 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Broadcast Call. to end the Send Feedback 69 English Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio using the programmable number key. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Broadcast Call. to end the 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. Receiving Broadcast Calls Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on your radio. When you receive a Broadcast Call:
The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 70 Send Feedback NOTICE:
Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback Prohibit. The Talkback Prohibit Tone will sound momentarily if the PTT button is pressed during a Broadcast Call. Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first call type is called Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU). OACSU sets up the call after performing a radio presence check and completes the call automatically. The second type is called Full Off Air Call Set-Up
(FOACSU). FOACSU also sets up the call after performing a radio presence check. However, FOACSU calls require user acknowledgment to complete the call and allows the user to either Accept or Decline the call. The type of call is configured by the system administrator. English NOTICE:
Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
. Making Private Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, you hear a negative indicator tone when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio. If the target radio is not available, a short tone sounds and the display show Party Not Available. 1 Do one of the following:
Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 59. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. Send Feedback 71 English 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. 5 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. 72 If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 4 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. Send Feedback Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured to Call Phone and Press or Send Feedback English in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF 73 English tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. 8 Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to proceed. The Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits 74 9 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
. NOTICE:
to dismiss During the channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit alias search. Press to exit alias search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. button or Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This Send Feedback feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. English Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
. Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback 75 English Enter the subscriber ID, and press proceed. to Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
. Receiving Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU):
The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 76 Send Feedback NOTICE:
Depending on how your radio is configured, either OACSU or Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU), responding to Private Calls may or may not require user acknowledgment. For the OACSU configuration, your radio unmutes and the call connects automatically. Accepting Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):
The green LED blinks. 1 To accept a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:
Press or to Accept and press to answer a Private Call. Press the PTT button on any entry. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Send Feedback English 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. NOTICE:
Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing
. Declining Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):
The green LED blinks. To decline a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:
Press or to Reject and press to decline a Private Call. Press to decline a Private Call. 77 English All Calls An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site or every radio at a group of sites, depending on system configuration. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the system cannot respond to an All Call. Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All Call. The system administrator may configure one or both of these in your radio. NOTICE:
Subscribers can support System-Wide All Calls but Motorola Solutions infrastructure does not support System-Wide All Calls. Making All Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 59. 78 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up.The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. to end the All Call. The call initiator can press Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. Send Feedback If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press to end the All Call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. English Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. to Press select. If the access code was not preconfigured in to Call Phone. Press or Send Feedback 79 English the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF 8 tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to proceed. The Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits 80 Send Feedback English requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:
The call initiator can press to end the All Call. Receiving All Calls When you receive an All Call, the following occur:
A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the Send Feedback NOTICE:
The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the call ends during an All Call. Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call in between an individual radio or a group of radios and a telephone. Depending on how the radio is configured, the following features may or may not be made available:
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone De-access code Displaying of caller alias or ID on receiving a phone call Ability to reject or accept a phone call The Phone Call capability can be enabled by assigning and setting up phone numbers on the system. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 81 English Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code is not preconfigured in the Contact List, the display shows Access Code:. 2 Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 6 Press to end the call. 7 Do one of the following:
If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 82 Send Feedback If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls with the programmable button. 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press the proceed. The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, and call status. If the call-setup is successful:
button to English The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, Phone Call, and call status. If call-setup is unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 4 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call. Do one of the following:
Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The display shows Extra Digits:
and a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and Send Feedback 83 English button to proceed. The DTMF press the tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Enter the deaccess code and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. 5 84 When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to NOTICE:
During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Offbutton, Volume On/Off Volume Knob , and Channel Up/Down Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Send Feedback Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Press OK to Place Call. If the selected entry is empty:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. English 4 5 or to Call Phone. Press Press select. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. to Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The display shows Calling, subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is successful:
The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the Phone Call icon, and Phone Call. If the call is unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. Send Feedback 85 English The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the to proceed. call, and press If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. Press to end the call. 9 86 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter to proceed. the deaccess code when the display shows De-
Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Send Feedback to dismiss NOTICE:
During the channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the alias search. 2 3 4 5 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback English or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to Press or ID. or to the required subscriber alias to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. to or to Call Phone. Press Press select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the If successful:
The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone button to proceed. user. 87 English The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the RSSI icon, Phone Call, and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 8 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The display shows Extra Digits:
and a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the tone sound button to proceed. The DTMF Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:
and a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful:
Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. 88 Send Feedback When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. English button or NOTICE:
During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit alias search. Press to exit alias search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 89 English Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or Press to select. The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. to Phone Number. Press Enter the telephone number, and press proceed. The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. to to proceed. Enter the access code, and press The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status. If the call is successful:
2 3 4 5 6 90 The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows subscriber alias and the Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 7 Press to end the call. 8 Do one of the following:
If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. Send Feedback Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 7, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. English NOTICE:
When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, Send Feedback 91 English and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Dual Tone Multi Frequency The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 190 for more information. Initiating DTMF Calls Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Do one of the following:
Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. 92 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the receiving radio is unable to talkback or respond. The recipient user is also not allowed to end the All Call. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:
The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration and Phone Call. The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:
The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone Call. Send Feedback The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. NOTICE:
Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Send Feedback English Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:
The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone Call. The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. NOTICE:
Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. 93 English If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Call Preemption Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-progress voice transmission and initiate a priority transmission. With the Call Preemption feature, the system interrupts and preempts ongoing calls in instances where trunked channels are unavailable. Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an All Call preempt the transmitting radio to accommodate the higher priority call. If no other Radio Frequency (RF) channels are available, an Emergency Call preempts an All Call as well. Voice Interrupt Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in-progress voice transmission. This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop the in-
progress voice transmission of a radio, if the interrupting radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and the transmitting radio is configured to be Voice Call Interruptible. The interrupting radio is then allowed to make a voice transmission to the participant in the stopped call. The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the probability of successfully delivering a new transmission to the intended parties when a call is in progress. Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this feature has been set up in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Enabling Voice Interrupt Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on your radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 94 Send Feedback 1 To interrupt the transmission during an on-going call, press the PTT button. On the interrupted radio, the display shows Call Interrupted. The radio sounds a negative indicator tone until the PTT button is released. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Send Feedback English Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Call Queue When there are no resources available to process a call, Call Queue enables the call request to be placed in the system queue for the next available resources. You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT button and radio screen displays Call In Queue indicating that the radio has entered Call Queue State. The PTT button may be released once the Call Queue Tone is heard. If the call setup is successful, the following occur:
The green LED blinks. The display shows the call type icon, ID or alias. The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the PTT If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds. button to begin voice transmission. If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:
The display shows the failure notice screen If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds. momentarily. 95 English The call is terminated and the radio exits the call setup. Priority Call Priority Call allows the system to preempt one of the ongoing non-priority calls and initiate the requested high priority call when all channels are busy. With all channels occupied with high priority calls, the system does not preempt any calls, and places the requesting high-priority call into call queue. If the system fails to place the requesting high-priority call into call queue, it declares failure. The default settings for Priority Call are preconfigured. Press the programmable button to toggle between normal and high priority level. When you use the following features, the call priority level reverts automatically to the preconfigured setting. All voice calls DMR Text Message/Text Message Remote monitor Job Ticket NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The following are the types of Priority Call:
High Priority The radio displays Next Call: High Priority. Call Priority High icon appears at the top of your radio display. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: High Priority. Normal Priority The radio displays Next Call: Normal Priority. Call Priority High icon disappears. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: Normal Priority. Talkgroup Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined by a Receive Group List. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow. Your radio unmutes to any member in its Receive Group List. 96 Send Feedback When scan is disabled, your radio does not receive transmission from any members of the Receive Group List, except for All Call and the selected Talkgroup. Press select. or to Turn Off. Press to English NOTICE:
Talkgroup Scan can be configured by using CPS. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talkgroup Scan on or off on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. 3 Do one of the following:
Press select. or to Turn On. Press to Send Feedback If scan is enabled:
The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. The yellow LED blinks. A positive indicator tone sounds. If scan is disabled:
The display shows Scan Off. The Scan icon disappears. The LED turns off. A negative indicator tone sounds. Receive Group List Receive Group List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the talkgroup scan list. This list is created when your radio is programmed and it determines which groups can be scanned. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in this list. If your radio has been programmed to edit the scan list, you can:
97 English Add/remove talkgroups. Add, remove, and/or edit priority for talkgroups. Refer to Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 99. Add, remove, and/or edit affiliation talkgroups. Refer to Adding Talkgroup Affiliation on page 100 and Removing Talkgroup Affiliation on page 101. Replace the existing scan list with a new scan list. IMPORTANT:
To add member into the list, the talkgroup must first be configured in the radio. NOTICE:
Receive Group List is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Priority Monitor The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from talkgroups with higher priority even when radio is in a talkgroup call. Radio leaves lower priority talkgroup call for higher priority talkgroup call. NOTICE:
This feature can only be accessed when Talkgroup Scan feature is enabled. Priority Monitor feature applies only to members in the Receive Group List. There are two Priority Talkgroups:
Priority 1 (P1) and Priority 2 (P2). P1 has higher priority than P2. In Capacity Max system, the radio receives transmission according to the priority order below:
1 Emergency Call for P1 Talkgroup 2 Emergency Call for P2 Talkgroup 3 Emergency Call for non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List 4 All Call 5 P1 Talkgroup Call 6 P2 Talkgroup Call 7 Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List See Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 99 for more information on how to add, remove, and/or edit the priority of the talkgroups in the scan list. 98 Send Feedback NOTICE:
This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Editing Priority for a Talkgroup In the Talkgroup Scan Menu, you can view or edit the priority of a talkgroup. 5 6 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to View/Edit List. Press to the required talkgroup. Press The current priority is indicated by a Priority 1 or Priority 2 icon beside the talkgroup. English Press to select. or to Edit Priority. Press or to select. to the required priority level. Press Press If another talkgroup has been assigned to Priority 1 or Priority 2, you can choose to overwrite the current priority. When the display shows Overwrite Existing?, press options:
No to return to the previous step. Yes to overwrite. The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears beside the talkgroup. to the following or Send Feedback 99 English Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation In a Capacity Max system, your radio can be configured for up to seven talkgroups at a site. Of the 16 talkgroups in the Receive Group List, up to seven talkgroups can be assigned as affiliation talkgroups. The selected talkgroup and the priority talkgroups are automatically affiliated. NOTICE:
This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Adding Talkgroup Affiliation Follow the procedure to add a talkgroup affiliation. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press or to select. to View/Edit List. Press 1 2 3 100 4 5 or to the required talkgroup ID or Press alias. Press The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows talkgroup ID or alias. beside the selected to select. Press or to select. to Edit Affiliation. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press Press select. or or to On. Press to select. to Off. Press to When On is selected, talkgroup ID or alias. appears beside the If affiliation is successful, the display shows selected talkgroup ID or alias. If affiliation is unsuccessful, ID or alias. remains beside the talkgroup beside the Send Feedback NOTICE:
The radio displays List Full when a maximum of seven talkgroups are selected for affiliation in the scan list. To select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. See Removing Talkgroup Affiliation on page 101 for more information. Removing Talkgroup Affiliation When the affiliation list is full and you want to select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. Follow the procedure to remove a talkgroup affiliation. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press or to select. to View/Edit List. Press 4 5 6 English or to the required talkgroup ID or Press alias. Press The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows talkgroup ID or alias. beside the selected to select. Press or to select. to Edit Affiliation. Press or Press When Off is selected, talkgroup ID or alias. to Off. Press to select. disappears from beside the Talkback The Talkback feature allows you to respond to a transmission while scanning. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio Send Feedback 101 English programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. NOTICE:
If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and the call ends, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth 102 connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-
establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-
enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. Send Feedback NOTICE:
If disabled through CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. Turning Bluetooth On and Off Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to My Status. Press Press select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a to
. 4 Do one of the following:
Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or to Off. Press select. The display shows beside Off. English to Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to 4 Do one of the following:
Press Press to the required device. or to select. Send Feedback 103 English Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press required device. Press or to the to select. 5 to or to Connect. Press Press select. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. beside the connected device. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:
If pin code is required, see Accessing Radios by Using Passwords on page 177. Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Find Me. Press Press select. The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
104 Send Feedback A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. beside the connected device. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to 4 5 English Press or to select. to the required device. Press or to Disconnect. Press Press select. The display shows Disconnecting from
<Device>. to NOTICE:
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective user manuals of any Bluetooth-
enabled devices. Wait for acknowledgment. A tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. The disappears beside the connected device. Send Feedback 105 English Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. The display shows one of the following results:
A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to Press or to select. to the required device. Press Press to select. or to View Details. Press Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to 106 Send Feedback Press select. or to Devices. Press to Press or to select. to the required device. Press 4 5 3 4 5 Press select. The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete. Press or to Indoor Location English or Press current values. Press the values here. to the BT Mic Gain type and the to select. You can edit Press or values. Press to increase or to decrease to select. Bluetooth Mic Gain This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device. NOTICE:
Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to BT Mic Gain. Press to Indoor Location is be used to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. Send Feedback 107 English Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Access this feature through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press or to select. to Bluetooth and press c. Press press to Indoor Location and or to select. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. 108 Send Feedback If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. English 2 3 4 Press to select. Press press Press select. or to Bluetooth and press to Indoor Location and or to select. or to Beacons and press to The display shows the beacons information. Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your current radio channel is configured to a Capacity Max system. Starting Manual Site Search Follow the procedure to start manual site search when the received signal strength is poor in order to attempt to find a site with better signal. 1 Press to access the menu. If the radio finds a new site:
Send Feedback 109 English A positive indicator tone sounds. If the radio fails to find a new site:
A negative indicator tone sounds. Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Accessing Neighbor Sites List This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:
1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to select. to Neighbor Sites. Press 110 Send Feedback Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:
The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound. The first line of the display shows Non. The second line shows Home Channel. Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder programmable button. The first line of the display shows HCR and the second line shows Silenced. English Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Home Channel. Press Send Feedback 111 English 5 or Press channel alias. Press The display shows channel alias. to the desired new home to select. 2 beside the selected home Remote Monitor This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target radio. This feature automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 112 Send Feedback Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Remote Mon.. Press Press select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. to 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
Send Feedback English A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to 113 English 3 4 Press select. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press to proceed. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press proceed. to 6 or to Remote Mon.. Press Press select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. to 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. 114 The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Contacts Settings Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, Broadcast Call, Site All Call, Multi-site All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad Send Feedback English microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. NOTICE:
You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
Call Type Call Alias Call ID NOTICE:
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, All Calls, and Phone Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to decrypt the transmission. Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable number keys on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press Press select. or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Program Key. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press number key. Press or to select. to the desired Send Feedback 115 English If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Press select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press or to Press or previous step. to No to return to the Each entry can be associated to different number before each number key that is keys. You see a assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that number key is not assigned. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. Press Press Press select. or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Program Key. Press to 116 Send Feedback 5 6 Press The first text line shows Clear from all keys. to Empty. Press or to select. Press to select. to Yes. Press or NOTICE:
When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. English Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to New Contact. Press to or Press Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select contact type Radio to select. 2 3 4 A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press to proceed. 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press Adding New Contacts Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. 7 1 Press to access the menu. to proceed. or to select. to the required ringer type. Press Press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. Send Feedback 117 English Call Indicator Settings This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text message ringing tones. Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on your radio. 5 6 7 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 1 2 3 4 118 Press to select. Press to select. or to Call Ringers. Press or to Private Call. Press Press or to select. to the required tone. Press If enabled, disappears beside Enabled. appears beside Enabled. If disabled, Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press or Press to select. The display shows to Text Message. Press and the current tone. Press or to select. The display shows to the required tone. Press beside the selected tone. Send Feedback English Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alerts on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press or to Call Alert. Press to 119 English 7 Press or selected tone. to select. The display shows to the required tone. Press beside the Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 1 2 3 4 120 5 6 7 Press to select. or to Call Ringers. Press Press or to select. to Selective Call. Press The display shows and the current tone. Press or to select. The display shows to the required tone. Press beside the selected tone. Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. Follow the procedure to assign ring styles on your radio. English Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press or Press select. The current tone is indicated by a
. to Telemetry. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Assigning Ring Styles The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The Press to access the menu. or Press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to Contacts. Press to Press Press Press select. to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to View/Edit. Press to Press A until display shows Ringer menu indicates the current selected tone. Send Feedback 121 English 6 Press to the required tone. Press or to select. appears beside the selected tone. A Delete All Calls View Details Viewing Recent Calls Follow the procedure to view recent calls on your radio. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
Store Alias or ID to Contacts Delete Call 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to Press options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. to the preferred list. The or Press The display shows the most recent entry. to select. or Press You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button. to view the list. 122 Send Feedback Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list. You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice. English 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. Press Press or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. to Store. Press Press The display shows a blinking cursor. or to select. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Press to select. Send Feedback Deleting Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio from the Call list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to to the required list. Press or Press to select. If the list is empty:
A tone sounds. The display shows List Empty. 123 English 4 5 Press Press Press to select. to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Delete Entry?. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. Deleting All Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete all calls on your radio from the Call list. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press to select. Press Press Press select. or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Delete All. Press to 6 Do one of the following:
Press to select Yes to delete all entries. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 124 Send Feedback Viewing Details from the Call List Follow the procedure to view details on your radio from the Call list. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. Press Press or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. or Press to select. The display shows the details. to View Details. Press English Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button. In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio user or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio user requesting the radio user to call back the initiating radio user when available. Voice communication is not involved in this feature. The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the dealer or the system administrator in two ways:
The radio is configured to allow the user to press the PTT button to respond directly to the call initiator by making a Private Call. The radio is configured to allow the user to press the PTT button and continue with other Talkgroup communication. Pressing the PTT button on the call alert entry will not allow the user to respond to the call initiator. The user must navigate to the Missed Call Log option at the Call Log menu and respond to the Call Alert from there. Send Feedback 125 English An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows the user to respond immediately while a Full Off Air Call Set-Up
(FOACSU) private call requires user acknowledgment for the call. OACSU type calls are therefore, recommended being used for the call alert feature. See Private Call on page 71. Making Call Alerts Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Call Alert. Press Press select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. to 126 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. Send Feedback If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. Responding to Call Alerts Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on your radio. When you receive a Call Alert:
A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:
Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. English The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. See Notification List on page 180 and Call Log Features on page 122 for more information. Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to the user to silence all audio indicators of the radio. Once Mute Mode feature is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as Emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, the radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. NOTICE:
This is a purchasable feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback 127 English Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. 1 2 3 4 5 Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured. Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. 128 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Mute Timer. Press to or Press each digit, and press to edit the numeric value of
. Send Feedback Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:
Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. English Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Your dealer or system administrator can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long Press Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. Send Feedback 129 English NOTICE:
If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow In addition, each alarm has the following types:
Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. 130 Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. NOTICE:
Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:
The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. Send Feedback English The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:
If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by the dealer or system administrator. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:
A tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. NOTICE:
When configured for Emergency Alarm only, the emergency process consists only of the Emergency Alarm delivery. The emergency ends when an acknowledgment is received from the system, or when channel access attempts have been exhausted. No voice call is associated with the sending of an Emergency Alarm when operating as Emergency Alarm Only. Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios or a dispatcher. Upon acknowledgment by the infrastructure within the group, a group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. The radio must be configured for Emergency Alarm and Call to perform an emergency call after the alarm process. Send Feedback 131 English 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The Emergency icon appears.The green LED lights up. NOTICE:
If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is successfully received:
The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is not successfully received:
All retries are exhausted. A low-pitched tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. The green LED lights up.The display shows the Group Call icon. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows the caller and group aliases. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 132 Send Feedback 6 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:
Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not hear a Talk Permit tone. Your radio dealer or system administrator can provide more information on how your radio has been programmed for Emergency. The Emergency Call initiator may press to end an on-going emergency call. The radio returns to a call idle state but the emergency call screen remains open. Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Send Feedback English NOTICE:
Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. 133 English NOTICE:
Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice to follow on your radio. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. You see one of these results:
The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:
The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. Receiving Emergency Alarms The receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. Follow the procedure to receive and view Emergency Alarms on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Alarm:
A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows the Emergency Alarm List, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. 1 Press to view the alarm. 134 Send Feedback 2 3 4 Press the entry in the Alarm List. to view the action options and details of and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. Press The radio returns to the home screen with an Emergency Icon displayed at the top, indicating the unresolved Emergency Alarm. The Emergency Icon disappears once the entry in the Alarm List is deleted. Press to access the menu. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list. 6 The tone sounds and the red LED blinks until you exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can be silenced. Do one of the following:
Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm. Press any programmable button. English Responding to Emergency Alarms When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 If the Emergency Alarm Indication is enabled, the Emergency Alarm List appears when the radio receives an Emergency Alarm. Press or to the required alias or ID. 2 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Send Feedback 135 English Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:
The red LED blinks. The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. NOTICE:
If the Emergency Call Indication is not enabled, the display shows the Group Call icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms with Call on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Call:
136 The Emergency Call Tone sounds if the Emergency Call Indication and Emergency Call Decode Tone is enabled. The Emergency Call Tone will not sound if only the Emergency Call Indication is enabled. The display shows the Emergency Call icon at the top right corner. The text line shows the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:
The red LED blinks. Send Feedback The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. Sending Status Messages Follow the procedure below to send a status message. NOTICE:
If the Emergency Call Indication is not enabled, the display shows the Group Call icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. English Status Message This feature allows the user to send status messages to other radios. The Quick Status list is configured by using CPS-RM and comprises up to a maximum of 99 statuses. The maximum length for each status message is 16 characters. NOTICE:
Every status has a corresponding digital value ranging from 099. An alias can be specified to each status for ease of reference. 2 3 4 5 Send Feedback If successful:
Press select. Press to select. Press Press or to Status. Press to or to Quick Status. Press to the required status message. or to select. or Press or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to the required subscriber alias to select. 137 English A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. beside the sent status message. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. Sending Status Message by Using Programmable Button Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the programmable button. 1 Press the programmed Status Message button. 2 Press Press 138 to the required status message. or to select. The contact list is displayed. 3 or Press or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to the required subscriber alias to select. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. beside the sent status message. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. Send Feedback Sending a Status Message by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the contacts list. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or Press or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to the required subscriber alias to select. Press select. Press Press or to Send Status. Press to to the required status message. or to select. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. Send Feedback English The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. beside the sent status message. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. Sending Status Message by Using Manual Dial Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the manual dial. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to 139 English 3 4 Press select. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. 5 Enter the required subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID, and press to proceed. Viewing Status Messages Follow the procedure to view status messages. 6 7 Press select. Press Press or to Send Status. Press to to the required status message. or to select. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. 140 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Status. Press to or to Inbox. Press to Send Feedback 4 to the required status message. or to select. Press Press The content of the status message is displayed to the radio user. Received status messages can also be viewed by accessing the Notification List. See Notification List on page 180 for more information. Responding to Status Messages Follow the procedure to reply status messages. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Status. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Send Feedback English 4 5 6 7 Press Press to the required status message. or to select. The content of the status is displayed. Press select. to Press or to Reply. Press to select. Press Press to the required status message. or to select. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the Inbox screen. beside the sent status message. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. 141 English The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Inbox screen. Deleting a Status Message Follow the procedure to delete a status message from your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Status. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press Press to the required status message. or to select. The content of the status is displayed. Press select. to 1 2 3 4 5 142 6 7 Press select. or to Delete. Press to Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the Inbox screen. Deleting All Status Messages Follow the procedure to delete all status messages from your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press select. or to Status. Press to or or to Inbox. Press to select. to Delete All. Press to Send Feedback 5 Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows List Empty. Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio
(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:
The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English Text Messages The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted according to the most recently received. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Viewing Text Messages Follow the procedure to view text messages on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Inbox. Press Press If the Inbox is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. to select. Send Feedback 143 English 4 Press or to select. to the required message. Press The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to select. to the required message. Press 1 2 3 4 144 You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. Responding to Text Messages Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio. When you receive a text message:
The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender. The display shows the Message icon. NOTICE:
The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed. 1 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback or to Read. Press Press select. The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-
mail application. to Press or to Read Later. Press to select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message. Press select. or to Delete. Press to 2 Do one of the following:
Press to return to inbox. Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. English Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text Follow the procedure to respond to text messages with Quick Text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to select. to the required message. Press The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Send Feedback 145 English 5 6 7 8 Press Press select. or or Press or to select. Press to access the sub-menu. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. to Reply. Press to select. to Quick Reply. Press to Resending Text Messages Follow the procedure to resend text messages on your radio. When you are at the Resend option screen:
to the required message. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. 9 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber or group alias or ID. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 146 Send Feedback Forwarding Text Messages Follow the procedure to forward text messages on your radio. When you are at the Resend option screen:
The display shows a negative mini notice. NOTICE:
You can also manually select a target radio address (see Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial on page 407). English 1 2 or Press send the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID. to Forward, and press to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. Send Feedback to Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to forward text messages by using the manual dial on your radio. 1 2 3 Press select. or to Forward. Press to Press subscriber or group alias or ID. to send the same message to another or Press select. The display shows Radio Number:. to Manual Dial. Press to 147 English 4 Enter the subscriber ID, and press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. to proceed. 1 Press to Edit. Press The display shows a blinking cursor. or to select. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Editing Text Messages Select Edit to edit the message. NOTICE:
If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Do one of the following:
Press or to Send and press send the message. Press or to Save and press save the message to the Drafts folder. to to 148 Press to edit the message. Send Feedback Press to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. Writing Text Messages Follow the procedure to write text message on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to 2 3 English Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 5 Press Do one of the following:
once message is composed. Press to send the message. Press
. Press or to choose among editing, deleting, or saving the message. Press to select. or Press select. A blinking cursor appears. to Compose. Press 4 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Send Feedback to Sending Text Messages Follow the procedure to send text message on your radio. It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message. Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:
149 English Press Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press or to Manual Dial. Press to select.Key in the subscriber ID. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press
. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A low tone sounds. The display shows negative mini notice. The message is moved to the Sent Items folder. The message is marked with a Send Failed icon. NOTICE:
For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Inbox. Press Press If the Inbox is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. to select. 150 Send Feedback to the required message. Press Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. English 4 5 6 7 Press or to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press select. or to Delete. Press to or Press The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox. to Yes. Press to select. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Inbox. Press Press If the Inbox is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. to select. Press select. or to Delete All. Press to Press The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press or to select. 151 English Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent text message. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. at any time, the radio returns to the If you long press Home screen. 152 NOTICE:
If the channel type, for example a conventional digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. Viewing Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Messages. Press to to Sent Items. Press or Press select. If the Sent Items folder is empty:
The display shows List Empty. to Send Feedback English to Forward. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 146 for more information. A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. 4 Press or to select. to the required message. Press The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Sent Item Icons. Sending Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to send a sent text messages on your radio. When you are viewing a Sent message:
1 Press
. 2 You can either resend or forward the sent text message. Do one of the following:
to Resend. Press to select. Send Feedback 153 English Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. When you are viewing a Sent message:
1 2 Press
. Press select. or to Delete. Press to 2 3 4 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to to Sent Items. Press or Press select. If the Sent Items folder is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. to Press select. or to Delete All. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 154 Send Feedback Saved Text Messages You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of 10 last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Viewing Saved Text Messages Follow the procedure to view saved text message on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Send Feedback English 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to Press or to select. to the required message. Press Editing Saved Text Messages Follow the procedure to edit saved text message on your radio. 1 2 Press while viewing the message. Press A blinking cursor appears. or to Edit. Press 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to select. 155 English Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press to access the menu. Long press to change text entry method. 4 Press Do one of the following:
once message is composed. Press or to Send. Press to send the message. Press
. Press or to choose between saving or deleting the message. Press to select. Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder Follow the procedure to delete saved text message from drafts on your radio. 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to Press or to select. to the required message. Press Press delete the text message. or to Delete. Press to 156 Send Feedback Quick Text Messages Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 3 4 Press select. or to Quick Text. Press to Press or message. Press to the required Quick Text to select. English Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Proceed to step 6. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Messages. Press to 5 Do the following to select the recipient and send the message. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that your message is being sent. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Send Feedback 157 English The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 146 for more information. Text Entry Configuration Your radio allows you to configure different text. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:
Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Your radio supports the following text entry methods:
Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) 158 NOTICE:
Press screen or long press Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Enabling or Disabling Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-built dictionary. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to Send Feedback 5 Press to select. or to Word Correct. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press or to select. to Word Correct. Press Press to enable Word Correct. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Word Correct. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Enabling or Disabling Word Predict Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Word Predict. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press enabled, to enable the Word Predict. If appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. Send Feedback 159 English Sentence Cap This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Sentence Cap. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 160 Send Feedback 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or Press to select. The display shows the list of custom words. to List of Words. Press Editing Custom Words You can edit custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 3 4 5 6 7 8 English Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or Press to select. Display shows the list of custom words. to List of Words. Press Press or to select. to the required word. Press Press or to Edit. Press to select. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Send Feedback 161 English Press to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 10 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or Press to select. Display shows the list of custom words. to Add New Word. Press Adding Custom Words You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. 1 162 Press to access the menu. Press key to move one space to the right. Send Feedback Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 8 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. Deleting a Custom Word Follow the procedure to delete the custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback English 3 4 5 6 7 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to Press or to select. to the required word. Press Press select. or to Delete. Press to 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to the previous screen. to return 163 English Deleting All Custom Words Follow the procedure to delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio. 7 Do one of the following:
At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows All Entries Deleted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 164 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or to Delete All. Press to Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. Job Tickets This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform. NOTICE:
This feature can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:
My Tasks folder Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID. Shared Tasks folder Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals. Send Feedback English You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. NOTICE:
Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is powered down and powered up again. All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID. Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority. Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:
Modify content of Job Tickets. Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets. Move Job Tickets from folder to folder. Canceling of Job Tickets. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to select. to the required folder. Press Send Feedback 165 English 4 Press Press to the required Job Ticket. or to select. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Logging In or Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID. 1 2 Press to access the menu. or to Log In. Press Press select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. Creating Job Tickets Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Job Tickets. Press to or to Create Ticket. Press 166 Send Feedback English 6 Press or to select. to the required job ticket. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Responding to Job Tickets Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to select. Press or to select. to the required folder. Press to the required job ticket. Press once more to access the sub-menu. Press You can also press the corresponding number key
(19) to Quick Reply. Send Feedback 167 English Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket. 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. Press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Room Status. Press to Press or to select. to the required option. Press or Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to Send. Press to select. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
168 A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets. 1 2 Press or to select. to the required option. Press or Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to Send. Press to select. Send Feedback 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Deleting Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4 Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Send Feedback 3 4 5 6 7 English Press or to select. to the required folder. Press Press select. Press Press or to All folder. Press to to the required Job Ticket. or to select. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. or to Delete. Press Press select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. to 169 English If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Deleting All Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to All folder. Press to or to Delete All. Press to 6 Do one of the following:
or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 2 3 170 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to select. to the required folder. Press Privacy This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-
based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While Send Feedback on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Your radio only supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. NOTICE:
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback English Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Privacy. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. 171 English Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. Stun/Revive This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, the dealer or system administrator may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. A radio can be disabled (stunned) or enabled (revived) either through the console or through a command initiated by another radio. Once a radio is disabled, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the home screen shows Channel Denied. When a radio is stunned, the radio cannot request nor receive any user initiated services on the system that performed the Stun procedure. However, the radio can switch to another system. The radio continues to send GNSS location reports and can be monitored remotely when it was stunned. 172 NOTICE:
The dealer or system administrator may permanently disable a radio. See Radio Kill on page 177 for more information. Stunning a Radio Follow the procedure to disable a radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. 2 or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
Send Feedback A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4 Stunning a Radio by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the Contacts List. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. English or to Radio Disable. Press Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Send Feedback 173 English Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the manual dial. 6 or to Radio Disable. Press Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or Press to select. The first text line shows Radio Number:. to Radio Number. Press Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 1 2 3 4 5 174 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Reviving a Radio Follow the procedure to enable a radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. Send Feedback 2 or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Reviving a Radio by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Contacts List. Send Feedback 1 2 3 4 English Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Radio Enable. Press Press to select. The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Radio Enable Successful. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. 175 English The display shows Radio Enable Failed. Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Manual Dial. 5 6 Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. or to Radio Enable. Press Press to select. The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 1 2 3 4 176 Press to access the menu. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or Press to select. The first text line shows Radio Number:. to Private Call. Press If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Radio Enable Successful. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Radio Enable Failed. Send Feedback English Radio Kill This feature is an enhanced security measure to restrict unauthorized access to a radio. Radio Kill causes a radio to be rendered inoperable. For example, the dealer or system administrator may want to kill a stolen or misplaced radio to prevent unauthorized usage. When powered on, a killed radio displays Radio Killed on the screen momentarily to indicate the killed state. NOTICE:
A killed radio can only be revived at a Motorola Solutions service depot. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an emergency condition as programmed by the dealer or system administrator. See Emergency Operation on page 129 for more information. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Password Lock Features This feature allows you to restrict access to the radio by asking for a password when the device is turned on. You can use a keypad microphone or Scroll Up/Down buttons to enter the password. Accessing Radios by Using Passwords Follow the procedure to access your radio by using a password. 1 Enter the current four-digit password. Send Feedback 177 English NOTICE:
The use of Emergency footswitch cancels out password input to access the radio. Use a keypad microphone. Press or each digit, and press the next digit. to edit the numeric value of to enter and move to 2 Press to enter the password. If successful, the radio powers up. If unsuccessful:
After the first and second attempt, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat step 1. After the third attempt, the display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. NOTICE:
In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:
If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using Passwords on page 177 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using Passwords on page 177 to access the radio. Turning Password Lock On or Off Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 178 Send Feedback 2 3 4 Press or to select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. English to Radio Settings. Press 7 Do one of the following:
Press select. or to Passwd Lock. Press to 5 Enter the current four-digit password. Use a keypad microphone. Press or to edit the numeric value of to enter and move to each digit, and press the next digit. A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit pressed. 6 Press to enter the password. or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Turn On. Press to beside Turn On. to Turn Off. Press to beside Turn Off. Changing Passwords Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback 179 English 3 4 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Passwd Lock. Press to 5 Enter the current four-digit password, and press to proceed. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. 6 7 Press select. or to Change PWD. Press to Enter a new four-digit password, and press proceed. to 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press to proceed. If successful, the display shows Password Changed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Notification List Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The display shows the Notification icon when the Notification list has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification list. For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages or missed calls or call alerts) list capability. 180 Send Feedback Accessing Notification List Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Notification. Press Press or to select. to the required event. Press Long press to return to the Home screen. Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio by using Over-
the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:
Send Feedback English The display shows the High Volume Data icon. The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:
A tone sounds. The display shows Updating Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on again. You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart occurs. When your radio powers up after automatic restart:
If successful, the display shows Sw Update Completed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update Failed. See Checking Software Update Information on page 209 for the updated software version. 181 English Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes Follow the procedure to select one of the following third-
party peripherals connection modes:
Motorola Solutions PC and Audio Data Accessory Telemetry Generic Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 5 or to the required connection Press mode. Press The display shows the selected connection mode. The screen returns to the previous menu. to select. Received Signal Strength Indicator This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner. See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon. Viewing RSSI Values Follow the procedure to view RSSI values on your radio. When you are at the Home screen:
Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 1 Press select. or to Cable Type. Press to three times and immediately press Press three times, all in 5 seconds. The display shows the current RSSI values. Send Feedback 1 2 3 4 182 2 Long press to return to the Home screen. Front Panel Configuration You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Configuration (FPC) to enhance the use of your radio. 3 Press to select. or to Program Radio. Press Editing FPC Mode Parameters Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters. English Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode Follow the procedure to enter front panel programming mode on your radio. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen.
, Scroll through options, increase/
decrease values, or navigate vertically. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, Send Feedback 183 English codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/
WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Access this feature using the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. c. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to WiFi On and press 184 Send Feedback Press beside Enabled. to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:
You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to WiFi and press to English or to Networks and press to to a network access point and or to select. NOTICE:
For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 3 4 5 Press select. Press press Press select. 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and press
. 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. Send Feedback 185 English If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Follow the procedure to check the Wi-Fi Connection status. Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:
The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Refreshing the Network List Follow the procedure to refresh the network list. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to WiFi and press to 186 Send Feedback c. Press or to select. to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. 2 3 4 or to Refresh and press Press select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. to Adding a Network NOTICE:
This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 6 7 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback English Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press
. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. 187 English Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press press or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to to a network access point and or to select. 1 2 3 4 188 5 Press or to select. to View Details and press NOTICE:
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. Send Feedback Removing Network Access Points 6 NOTICE:
This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or point and press to the selected network access to select. Press select. or to Remove and press to English or to Yes and press Press select. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. to Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Power Levels You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. High This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Low This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. Send Feedback 189 English NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Setting Power Levels Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Power. Press to select. or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to High. Press to beside High. to Low. Press to beside Low. 6 Long press to return to the Home screen. Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip the following steps. 5 Do one of the following:
Press to access the menu. 190 Send Feedback 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to All Tones. Press to to enable or disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Turning Keypad Tones On or Off Follow the procedure to turn keypad tones on or off on your radio. Send Feedback 1 2 3 4 5 6 English Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Keypad Tones. Press to enable or disable keypad tones. The Press display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, 191 English Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio. 6 or to the required volume offset Press level. A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level. 7 Do one of the following:
1 2 3 4 5 192 Press to access the menu. Press to select. The required volume offset level is saved. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press to exit. The changes are discarded. Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Vol. Offset. Press to Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback 3 4 5 6 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Talk Permit. Press to to enable or disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio. English Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Power Up. Press to to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. Press The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Send Feedback 193 English Setting Text Message Alert Tones You can customize the text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press Press to select. or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Message Alert. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Press or to select. The display shows to Momentary. Press beside Momentary. Press or to select. The display shows to Repetitive. Press beside Repetitive. Changing Display Modes You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 194 Send Feedback 4 5 or Press select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. to Display. Press to Press or to select. to the required setting. Press The display shows beside the selected setting. Adjusting Display Brightness Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio. Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 English Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press or Press select. The display shows the progress bar. to Brightness. Press to to decrease or increase the or Press display brightness. Press The setting value is varied from 1 to 8. to select. Turning Horns/Lights On or Off Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call through the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed through your radio rear Send Feedback 195 English accessory connector by your dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and lights on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Horns/Lights. Press to enable or disable Horns/Lights. The Press display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, 2 3 4 5 196 Turning LED Indicators On or Off Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to LED Indicator. Press to enable or disable the LED indicator. Press The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Send Feedback Turning Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal public address (PA) system of your radio. 5 Press English to enable or disable Public Address. If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Turning External Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external public address (PA) system of your radio. or to Utilities. Press to 1 Do one of the following:
2 3 4 Press select. Press or to select. Press or to select. Send Feedback to Radio Settings. Press Press the programmed Ext Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. to Public Address. Press 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 197 English 3 4 5 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or Address. Press to External Public to select. Press address. If enabled, If disabled, to enable or disable external public appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. Turning Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure. Press to access the menu. 1 198 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Display. Press to or to Intro Screen. Press to enable or disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Send Feedback Setting Languages Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Languages. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 English Identifying Cable Type Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Cable Type. Press to Press or to select. to the required language. Press 5 The current cable type is indicated by a
. The display shows beside the selected language. Send Feedback 199 English Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Option Board button. Text-to-Speech The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer or system administrator. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-
to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:
Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 200 Send Feedback Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press Press to Voice Announcement. or to select. to any of the following features. or to select. Press Press The available features are as follows:
All Messages English Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button appears beside the selected setting. Setting Menu Timer You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Send Feedback 201 English 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. or to Display. Press to or to Menu Timer. Press to Press or to select. to the required setting. Press Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 202 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Mic AGC-D. Press to to enable or disable Digital Microphone Press AGC. The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect Send Feedback transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. 5 Do one of the following:
NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to to Radio Settings. Press to Intelligent Audio. Press Press or to select. Press or to select. Send Feedback English to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or The display shows Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press 203 English 4 Press or to select. to AF Suppressor and press You can also use or buttons to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following. Press to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Suppressor. The Enabled. Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill
(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
204 Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Trill Enhance. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. Send Feedback Audio Ambience You can customize the audio ambience for your radio according to your environment. Default This is the default setting. Loud This setting enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group This setting enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. Setting Audio Ambience Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English to Radio Settings. Press to Audio Ambience. Press to the required setting. Press 3 4 5 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. The settings are as follows. Choose Default for the default factory settings. Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings. Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other. The display shows beside the selected setting. Send Feedback 205 English Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles for your radio according to your preference. Default This is the default setting. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 These settings are intended to compensate for noise-
induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost These settings are intended for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. Setting Audio Profiles Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 206 3 4 5 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press to Audio Profiles. Press to the required setting. Press The settings are as follows. Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings. Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-
induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your Send Feedback preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds. The display shows beside the selected setting. Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio. Press the programmed GNSS button. English 2 3 4 5 Press next step. to access the menu. Proceed to the Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press If enabled, If disabled, to enable or disable GNSS. appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. General Radio Information Your radio contains information on various general parameters. The general information of your radio is as follows:
Send Feedback 207 English Radio alias and ID. Firmware and Codeplug versions. Software update. GNSS information. Site information. NOTICE:
Press press exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. to return to the previous screen. Long to return to the Home screen. The radio Checking Radio Alias and ID Follow the procedure to check the radio alias and ID on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or Press to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID. to My ID. Press Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions Follow the procedure to check the firmware and codeplug versions on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 208 Send Feedback or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to 3 4 Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 or to Versions. Press Press select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. to Checking Software Update Information This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback English Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to or to SW Update. Press Press select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. to Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air Programming on page 447 for more information. Checking GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:
Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) 209 English Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or Press to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. to the required item. Press Displaying Site Information Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or to Site Info. Press to Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. 1 Press to access the menu. or to GNSS Info. Press to The display shows the current site name. 210 Send Feedback English 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Certificate Menu. Press appears beside ready certificates. Press Press to the required certificate. or to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:
For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. Send Feedback 211 English Connect Plus Operations Connect Plus is a full trunking solution based on DMR technology. Connect Plus uses a dedicated control channel for channel requests and allocations. Features that are available to the radio users under this system are available in this chapter. Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode This chapter explains the additional radio controls available to the radio user through preprogrammed means such as programmable buttons and assignable radio functions. Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic purposes:
While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 228). If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:
Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:
The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 261 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 212 Send Feedback Assignable Radio Functions Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Busy Queue Cancellation Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Call Log Selects the call log list. Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Contacts Provides direct access to the Contacts list. English Emergency On/Off Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Radio Check Determines if a radio is active in a system. Send Feedback 213 English Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Zone Allows selection from a list of zones. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Ring Alert Type Provides direct access to the Ring Alert Type Setting. Roam Request Requests to search for a different site. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Text Message Selects the text message menu. 214 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Backlight Brightness Adjusts the brightness level. Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Send Feedback Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off. Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Unassigned Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned. Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode Display Icons The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indi-
English cate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Indoor Location Available 3 Indoor location status is on and available. Indoor Location Unavailable 3 Indoor location status is on but unavailable due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Bluetooth. 3 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware Send Feedback 215 English or 216 Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is mut-
ed. Notification Notification List has items to review. Power Level Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-
ble. GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. Scan Scan feature is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Contact Radio contact is available. Call Log Radio call log. Send Feedback Message Incoming message. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Vibrate Vibrate mode is enabled. Vibrate and Ring Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled. Wi-Fi Excellent 4 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good 4 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average 4 Wi-Fi signal is average. English Wi-Fi Poor 4 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable 4 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Call Icons The following icons appear on your radio display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscrib-
er alias (name) or ID (number). Group Call/Site All Call Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). 4 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e Send Feedback 217 English Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-
ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Blue-
tooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (num-
ber). Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. OR Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radio display in the Sent Items folder. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. 218 Send Feedback In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Send Failed The text message has not been sent. OR OR OR OR English Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Send Feedback 219 English LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Au-
to-Range Transponder System. Mute Mode is enabled. Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-
ceived a text message or Scan is ena-
bled and is receiving activity. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Blinking red Rapidly blinking red Blinking green and yellow Solid yellow 220 Double blinking yel-
low Blinking yel-
low Solid green Blinking green Double blinking green Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). Radio is powering up or transmitting. Radio is powering up, receiving a call or data. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. Indicator Tones The following are the tones that sound through the radio speaker. High pitched tone Low pitched tone Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Send Feedback Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone Momentary Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Sounds periodically de-
pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time de-
fined by the radio. English Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones. Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode This section explains general radio operations and call features that are available in your radio. Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. Send Feedback 221 English Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available:
The radio displays Searching and Selected Channel Alias and continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. NOTICE:
This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. 222 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Site Restriction Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, Send Feedback you see a brief message stating: Site <number given>
Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. Selecting a Zone The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:
Group Call Multi-group Call Site All Call Private Call 1 Access the Zone feature by performing the following:
Radio Con-
trols Programmed Zone Selec-
tion button Radio menu English Steps Press the programmed Zone Selection button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or Zone and press select. to to The current zone is displayed and indicated by a
. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps or Press to the required zone. or and scroll Send Feedback 223 English 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Using Multiple Networks If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. 224 Send Feedback NOTICE:
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID
(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 280 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. English Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. NOTICE:
See Making a Group Call on page 229 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Send Feedback 225 English When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 230 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving a Site All Call A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the user's full attention. When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. You cannot respond to a Site All Call. NOTICE:
See Making a Site All Call on page 230 for details on making a Site All Call. The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. 226 Send Feedback Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. English 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the button. followed by within 2 seconds to Press insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the entered digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Send Feedback 227 English Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Call1. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the Live Dial digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. 228 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio speaker. Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:
The Channel Selector Knob. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned Send Feedback to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 250). NOTICE:
Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 280 for more information. Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob This feature allows the radio users to make different call types : Group Call, Private Call, Site All Call, Multi-group Call. Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. English 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 224. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Send Feedback 229 English Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call using the One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 224. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the target subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 230 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. Making a Site All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 224. Send Feedback 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Site All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. NOTICE:
Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-
group Call. 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-
group alias or ID. English 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button NOTICE:
Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. Send Feedback 231 English You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button This feature allows the radio users to make private calls using the programmable manual dial button. Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 232 Send Feedback 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press English Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert a followed by pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 3 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Send Feedback 233 English Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Phone and press to to select Manual Dial. Press The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 5 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert a followed by pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts NOTICE:
If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the Phone Number item will not be displayed in the Menu. 234 Send Feedback Press to access the menu. Press 1 2 3 4 Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press or to select. Press or to select. to Manual Dial and press to Phone Number and press The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 6 5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. English to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert a followed by pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Send Feedback 235 English Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line of the display shows the telephone number. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. Long press The display returns to the previous screen. to end the call. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert a followed by pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first text line of the display shows Extra Digits, the second text line of the display shows the entered extra digits. 2 button. Press the If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display Send Feedback 236 shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 3 Do one of the following. Press to return to the Phone Call screen. Long press to end the call. Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. English 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled by using the CPS, the Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound, the first line of the display shows Non and the second line shows Home Channel periodically when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:
Send Feedback 237 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact
(Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. English Return to the home channel. Mute the reminder temporarily by using the programmable button. Set a new home channel by using the programmable button. Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain types of Connect Plus system failures. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. 238 Send Feedback Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode NOTICE:
Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-
equipped radios also show the message, Feature not available. Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time (or at Send Feedback English almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say Channel Busy. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration "beep"
when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site (that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on 239 English an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode (display indicates Searching). Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps a Press the programmed Radio Check button. Radio Control Program-
med Ra-
dio Check button 240 Radio Control Steps b Press or to the re-
quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. Menu a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Con tacts and press to select. c Press or to the re-
quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. d Press or to Radio Check and press to select. The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. Send Feedback 2 Wait for acknowledgment. Initiating Remote Monitor English If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available. If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when initiated via Menu. Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the programmable button. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. NOTICE:
Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any attempt to initiate transmission, change channels or power down the radio. 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Radio Control Pro-
gram-
med Re-
mote Monitor Button Menu Steps a Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. b Press or to the re-
quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Con tacts and press to select. Send Feedback 241 English Radio Control Steps c Press or to the re-
quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed. d Press or Dial and press e Press or Mon. and press to Manual to select. to Remote to select. The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking green. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle. Starting and Stopping Scan NOTICE:
This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some
(or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on page 245 for more information. 242 Send Feedback 1 2 3 You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. Press to access the menu. English Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel. Press select. or to Scan and press to 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. or to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and Press press The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled. The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is enabled. The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is disabled. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. User Configurable Scan If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Send Feedback 243 English Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (for example, not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone Scan List. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list. 244 Turning Scan On or Off NOTICE:
This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See the next section for more information. If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your display. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu, follow the procedure described next. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Scan and press to Send Feedback 3 or to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and Press press The display shows Scan On momentarily if scan is disabled. The display shows Scan Off momentarily if scan is enabled. Editing the Scan List NOTICE:
If the scan list entry happens to be the currently selected group, the radio listens for activity on this group regardless of whether the list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multi-group, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for activity on enabled Zone Scan List members. Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your Send Feedback English radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can:
Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list. Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu on page 246. NOTICE:
A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone Scan List. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to View/Edit List and press Press or to the desired Group name. 245 English If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group. 4 to select the desired Group. The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group. 5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) and to select. press Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation. The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name. Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a "scan candidate"). Thus, the list of "scan candidates" described in step 6 and step 7 sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently selected zone, or to delete a group from the scan list of the currently selected zone. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Scan option and press 246 Send Feedback 3 Press or to select. to <Add Members> and press The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n =
the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone). 4 Do one of the following. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in that zone, go to step 6. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in a different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5. 5 or Press zones that have the same Network ID as the currently selected zone. to scroll a list of Connect Plus 6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector position, press to select. Send Feedback English Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel position in that zone. The groups on the list are called "scan candidates", because they can be added to the scan list of your currently selected zone (or they are already on the zone scan list). If the zone does not have any groups that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays No Candidates. 7 8 or to scroll through the list of Press candidate groups. If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the group alias, this indicates the group is currently on the scan list for the selected zone. If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before the alias, the group is not currently on the scan list, but can be added. Press displayed. when the desired group alias is 247 English If this group is not currently on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias) message is displayed. If this group is already on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias) message is displayed. 9 to accept the displayed message (Add or Press Delete). If deleting a group from the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will no longer display immediately before the alias. If adding a group to the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will display before the alias. If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is already full, the radio displays List Full. If this should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group from the scan list prior to adding a new one. When finished, press necessary to return to the desired menu. as many times as 10 248 Understanding Scan Operation NOTICE:
If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer expires before you are able to respond, in order to respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new call. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon on the display). Scan list member has been disabled via the menu (see Editing the Scan List on page 245). You are participating in a call already. No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). Send Feedback Scan Talkback If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Scan Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Scan Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. English NOTICE:
If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. Editing Priority for a Talkgroup The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from the talkgroup with higher priority when it is in another call. A tone sounds when the radio switches to the call with higher priority. There are two levels of priority for the talkgroups: P1 and P2. P1 has higher priority than P2. NOTICE:
If Default Emergency Revert Group ID is configured in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, there are three levels of priority for talkgroups: P0, P1, and P2. P0 is the permanent Emergency Revert Group ID and the highest priority. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 249 English 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Scan and press to Press or to select. to View/Edit List and press Press press to the required talkgroup and or to select. Press or to select. to Edit Priority and press to the required priority level and or to select. Press press The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears on the left of the talkgroup. Contacts Settings NOTICE:
You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission. Access to Contact Lists depends on the zone configuration:
If only one zone is configured in the radio, the Contact List directly displays the list from the current selected zone. If multiple zones are configured in the radio, the Zone Contact Folder displays all zones with identical network IDs as the current selected zone. The user can access the contacts in these zones. Contacts provide address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:
250 Send Feedback Private Call Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Voice Site All Call Text Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to Contacts and press English 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. to Making a Call Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. Send Feedback 251 English This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 1 2 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to Contacts and press When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. to Adding a New Contact 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and button to locate the or then press the required alias. 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 252 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press or to select. to New Contact and press 4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. Send Feedback 6 or to If adding a Radio Contact, press the required ringer type and press to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. Call Indicator Settings This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text message ringing tones. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 3 4 5 6 7 English to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alert and press to Call Ringers and press Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. or Press to select. The current tone is indicated by a
. to Call Alert and press Press or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Send Feedback 253 English Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 6 7 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press 1 2 3 4 5 254 Press or to select. to Private Call and press to enable/disable the Private Call ringing beside Enabled, if Private Call Press tones. The display shows ringing tones are enabled. The tones are disabled. is not displayed when Private Call ringing Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Send Feedback 3 4 5 6 7 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press to Text Message and press The current tone is indicated by a
. Press or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. English Selecting a Ring Alert Type NOTICE:
The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can program the radio calls to one predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed. The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator tone or missed call. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by Send Feedback 255 English automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Call Log Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
Delete View Details Store Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log and press to 1 2 256 3 4 or to preferred list and press Press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. or Press Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. to view the list. Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log and press to Press or to select. to the required list and press Send Feedback When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on . 4 5 Press press Press select. to the required alias or ID and or to select. or to Delete and press to 6 Do one of the following:
Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No, and press the button to return to the previous screen. Viewing Details from a Call List 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Call Log and press to Press or to select. to the required list and press Press press to the required alias or ID and or to select. Press or to select. to View Details and press Display shows details of call list. Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch Access button. Send Feedback 257 English Responding to Call Alerts Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on your radio. When you receive a Call Alert:
A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:
Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. See Notification List on page 180 and Call Log Features on page 122 for more information. 258 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts and press to 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:
select the subscriber alias directly Press or to the required subscriber alias and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu Press press to Manual Dial and or to select. The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and press
. Send Feedback 4 or to Call Alert and press Press to select. The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. English The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to the user to silence all audio indicators of the radio. Once Mute Mode feature is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as Emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, the radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. NOTICE:
This is a purchasable feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback 259 English Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. 1 2 3 4 5 Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured. Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. 260 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Mute Timer. Press to or Press each digit, and press to edit the numeric value of
. Send Feedback Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:
Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. Send Feedback English Emergency Operation NOTICE:
If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto Fallback on page 238. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. 261 English Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. Emergency Call with Voice to Follow For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:
Emergency Call You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. Emergency Alert An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert by using the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:
Regular Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. 262 Send Feedback Silent Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. Silent with Voice The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions. Receiving an Incoming Emergency Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact. At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency. English Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radio display even after the Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details as described in the following sections. Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu. 1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press The Exit Alarm List screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
Select Yes and press to save the emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Send Feedback 263 English Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Deleting the Emergency Details 1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,
. press The Delete screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
Select Yes and press emergency details. to delete the Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details screen. Responding to an Emergency Call NOTICE:
If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group. 1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green. 264 Send Feedback 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. Responding to an Emergency Alert NOTICE:
The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group. An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation. Ignore Emergency Revert Call This feature enhancement is to provide an option for the radio to ignore an active Emergency Revert Call. Send Feedback English To enable Ignore Emergency Revert Call, the radio must be configured at the Connect Plus Customer Programming Software (CPCPS). When the feature is enabled, the radio does not display Emergency Call indications and does not receive any audio on the default Emergency Revert Group ID. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 265 English Initiating an Emergency Call NOTICE:
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as "hot mic". The "hot mic" applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. 2 The microphone remains active for the "hot mic" time specified in your radio codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 266 Send Feedback English 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed. Initiating an Emergency Alert NOTICE:
If your radio is programmed for "Silent" or "Silent with Voice", it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for "Silent", the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for "Emergency Off". If programmed for "Silent with Voice", the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Press the orange Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radio display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Sent. If the Send Feedback Exiting Emergency Mode NOTICE:
If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. 267 English If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio
(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:
The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. If you are sending the message, perform the following to select a recipient:
Press press to the required alias and or to select. Press or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press
. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. 268 Send Feedback If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-
to-Send Text Messages on page 272). Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button You can send Quick Text messages using the programmable button programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent . If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed . English If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 272). Accessing the Drafts Folder The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. NOTICE:
You can edit saved text message before sending it. Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 270. Long press the Home screen. at any time to return to Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Send Feedback 269 English Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Mes-
sage button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 Press select. Press press or to Drafts and press to to the required message and or to select. Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or Press select. A blinking cursor appears. to Edit and press to 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press the the Long press to move one space to the left. Press or key to move one space to the right. Press key to delete any unwanted characters. to change text entry method. 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Select the message recipient by:
270 Send Feedback Press press to the required alias and or to select. Press or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press
. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. English Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Mes-
sage button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 Press select. or to Drafts and press to Send Feedback 271 English 3 4 Press press to the required message and or to select. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. Press delete the text message. or to Delete and press to Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:
Resend Forward Edit 1 2 Press select. or to Forward and press to To select the message recipient, press or to the required alias or ID and press select. to Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. 272 Send Feedback Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. NOTICE:
Long press screen. at any time to return to the Home Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-
sage button. Radio Controls Pro-
gram-
med Text 2 3 Radio Controls Message button Menu English Steps a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Messag es and press to select. Press to select. or to Sent Items and press or to select. to the required message and Press press The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 218). Send Feedback 273 English Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:
Resend Forward Edit Delete 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and press to select. Option Forward Delete Steps Select Forward to send the select-
ed text message to another sub-
scriber/group alias or ID (see For-
warding a Text Message on page 272). Select Delete to delete the text message. Option Resend Steps Select Resend to resend the select-
ed text message to the same sub-
scriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Mes sage, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message fails to send, the ra-
dio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/
group alias or ID. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status 274 Send Feedback of the message in the Sent Items folder without any audio or visual indication. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Mes-
sage button Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. English Radio Con-
trols Menu Steps a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 or to Sent Items and press Press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on. Press to select. or to Delete All and press 4 Choose one of the following. Press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. to Yes and press or Send Feedback 275 English Press or to No and press to Press to return to the Inbox. return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:
Read Read Later Delete Reading a Text Message 1 or Press select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. to Read? and press to 2 Do one of the following:
276 Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:
Reply (via Quick Text) Forward Delete Delete All NOTICE:
If the channel type is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Send Feedback Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Messages and press to or to Inbox and press to Press or to view the messages. 5 Do one of the following:
Press press message. to select the current message, and again to reply, forward, or delete that Long press to return to the Home screen. English Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Pro-
gram-
med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-
sage button. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Messag es and press to select. 2 Press select. or to Inbox and press to Send Feedback 277 English 3 4 Press press to the required message and or to select. Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Press once more to access the sub-menu. 5 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. 6 once message is composed. Press The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-
Send Text Messages on page 272). 278 Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Mes-
sage button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 Press select. Press press or to Inbox and press to to the required message and or to select. Send Feedback 4 5 6 Press once more to access the sub-menu. Press select. or to Delete and press to Radio Con-
trols Menu Steps a Press menu. to access the English or to Yes and press Press select. The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox. to b Press or to Messages and press to select. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-
trols Programmed Text Mes-
sage button Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 2 3 or to Inbox and press Press select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on
(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 191). to Press to select. or to Delete All and press Send Feedback 279 English 4 or Press select. The display shows Inbox Cleared. to Yes and press to Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-
based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:
Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. NOTICE:
Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Press to access the menu. 280 Send Feedback 2 3 4 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings or or to Connect Plus and press to select. Press or to Enhanced Privacy. If the display shows Turn On, press Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. to enable If the display shows Turn Off, press to disable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency Alert. English Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. NOTICE:
Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback 281 English Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by performing one of the following actions:
Steps a Press the programmed Radio Disable button. b Press or to the re-
quired alias or ID and press to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Con tacts and press The entries are alphabetically sorted. to select. Radio Controls Radio Disable button Radio menu 282 Radio Controls Steps c Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-
scriber alias or ID:
Select the required alias or ID directly. Press or to the required alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. Press to Manual Dial and press or to select. Press or to Radio Number and press to select. Send Feedback Radio Controls Steps The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-
play shows a blinking cur-
sor. Use the keypad to en-
ter the subscriber alias or ID and press
. d Press or Disable and press lect. to Radio to se-
The display shows Radio Disable: <Target Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Failed. English Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by performing one of the following actions:
Radio Con-
trols Radio Enable button Radio menu Steps a Press the programmed Radio En-
able button. b Press or to the re-
quired alias or ID and press to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Contacts to select. The en-
and press tries are alphabetically sorted. Send Feedback 283 English Steps Radio Con-
trols Steps Radio Con-
trols c Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-
scriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID directly. Press or to the required alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. Press to Manual Dial and press or to select. Press or to Ra dio Number and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-
play shows a blinking cur-
sor. Use the keypad to en-
ter the subscriber alias or ID and press
. d Press or to Radio Enable and press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 284 Send Feedback 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. Bluetooth Operation NOTICE:
If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. Send Feedback English At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radio's Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW
(4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device
(POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device's user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device's full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press 285 English 3 or to My Status and press Press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a
. 4 Do one of the following:
Press or to On and press to select. The display shows On and a of the selected status. appears left Press or to Off and press select. The display shows Off and a left of the selected status. to appears Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the operation. 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-
enabled device user manual. 2 3 4 On your radio, press to access the menu. Press to select. Press select. or to Bluetooth and press or to Devices and press to 5 Do one of the following:
Press press to the required device and or to select. Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press required device and press to the or to select. 286 Send Feedback 6 or to Connect and press Press select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. to 2 3 4 If successful, the radio display shows
<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and besides the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. appears Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device (Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 285. Send Feedback English Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press or to Find Me and press Press select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-
enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 On your radio, press to access the menu. 287 English 2 3 4 5 Press to select. Press select. Press press or to Bluetooth and press or to Devices and press to to the required device and or to select. or to Disconnect and press Press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears beside the Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press 288 Send Feedback 3 4 5 Press select. Press press or to Devices and press to to the required device and or to select. Press or to select. to View Details and press 3 4 5 English Press select. Press press or to Devices and press to to the required device and or to select. or Press select. The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete and press to Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device microphone gain value. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press Send Feedback 289 English Press or to select. Press or current values. 3 4 5 To edit values, press to select. or Press values and press to increase or to decrease to select. Indoor Location NOTICE:
Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is be used to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. to BT Mic Gain and press Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. to the BT Mic Gain type and the Access this feature through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press or to select. to Bluetooth and press c. Press press to Indoor Location and or to select. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. 290 Send Feedback If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. English e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 291 English 2 3 4 Press to select. Press press Press select. or to Bluetooth and press NOTICE:
After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. to Indoor Location and or to select. Accessing the Notification List Follow the procedure to access the notification list. or to Beacons and press to The display shows the beacons information. Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your
"unread" events on the channel, such as unread text messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Notification and press to the required event and press Long press to return to the Home Screen. Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, 292 Send Feedback codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/
WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. English Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Access this feature using the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. c. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to WiFi On and press Send Feedback 293 English Press beside Enabled. to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:
You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to WiFi and press to 1 2 294 3 4 5 Press select. Press press Press select. or to Networks and press to to a network access point and or to select. NOTICE:
For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and press
. 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. Send Feedback If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Follow the procedure to check the Wi-Fi Connection status. Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. English The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:
The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Refreshing the Network List Follow the procedure to refresh the network list. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to WiFi and press to Send Feedback 295 English c. Press or to select. to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. 2 3 4 or to Refresh and press Press select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. to Adding a Network NOTICE:
This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 6 7 Press to access the menu. 1 296 Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press
. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. Send Feedback Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press press or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to to a network access point and or to select. English 5 Press or to select. to View Details and press NOTICE:
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. Send Feedback 297 English Removing Network Access Points 6 NOTICE:
This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. or to Yes and press Press select. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. to 1 2 3 4 5 298 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or point and press to the selected network access to select. Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts
(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. Press select. or to Remove and press to 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 2 3 4 5 6 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alerts and press Press to select. or to All Tones and press to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. English Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alerts and press to Vol. Offset and press Send Feedback 299 3 4 5 6 English 6 or Press The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. to the required volume value. 7 Do one of the following:
Press to keep the required displayed volume value. Press to exit without changing the current volume offset settings. Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 1 2 300 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alerts and press to Talk Permit and press to enable/disable the Talk Permit Tone. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Send Feedback English Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. 6 to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to Tones/Alerts and press Setting the Power Level You can customize your radio power setting to high or low for each Connect Plus zone. High enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. Press select. or to Power Up and press to 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 301 English 2 3 4 5 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press select. Press press or to Power and press to to the required setting and or to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, long to return to the Home screen. press Screen returns to the previous menu. 302 Changing the Display Mode You can change radio display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press or Press select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. to Display and press to Press press setting. or to enable. to the required setting and appears besides selected Send Feedback Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. NOTICE:
Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 5 6 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press select. or to Display and press to English or Press to select. The display shows a progress bar. to Brightness and press Decrease display brightness by pressing increase the display brightness by pressing Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press your entry. or
. to confirm Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Send Feedback 303 English 3 4 5 6 Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press select. or to Display and press to Press or to select. to Intro Screen and press to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press to select. Press press language. or to Languages and press or to enable. to the required language and appears beside selected 304 Send Feedback Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. English 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to LED Indicator and press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press to select. or to Cable Type and press 5 The current cable type is indicated by a
. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically Send Feedback 305 English useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Voice Announcement and Press press You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following:
Press to enable Voice Announcement. The display shows beside Enabled. Press to disable Voice Announcement. The disappears from beside Enabled. 306 Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press select. Press to select. Press press or to Display and press to or to Menu Timer and press to the required setting and or to select. Send Feedback Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through the rear accessory connector of your radio by your dealer. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. 4 5 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press English Press or to select. to Horn/Lights and press to enable/disable Horns/Lights. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a Volume Knob only. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to Send Feedback 307 English 3 4 or to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to Dual Knob and press to 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume & Ch. or to select. to the required setting and press appears beside selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Press to access the menu. 1 308 2 3 4 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Press to select. or to Mic AGC-D and press 5 Do one of the following:
Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D . The display beside Enabled . Press to disable Mic AGC-D . The disappears from beside Enabled . Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This Send Feedback feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. 1 Press to access the menu. Radio Con-
trol Menu Steps a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Radio Settings and press lect. to se-
c Press or to Radio Settings and press lect. to se-
d or Press gent Audio and press lect. to Intelli to se-
English Steps Radio Con-
trol NOTICE:
You can also use or to change the selected op-
tion. e Do one of the following:
Press to enable Intelligent be-
Audio. The display shows side Enabled. Press Audio. The beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from 2 3 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press Send Feedback 309 English 4 Press press to Intelligent Audio and or to select. 5 Do one of the following:
Press to enable Intelligent Audio. The display shows beside Enabled. Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The disappears from beside Enabled. See Authorized Accessories List for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Press to access the menu. 1 310 2 3 4 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to AF Suppressor and press You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following. Press to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Suppressor. The Enabled. Send Feedback Turning GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English 3 4 5 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press If enabled, If disabled, to enable/disable GNSS. appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. See Checking the GNSS Information on page 322 for details on retrieving GNSS information. Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:
Battery Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Radio Model Number Index Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC Site Number Send Feedback 311 English Site Info Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GNSS Information Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press to return to the Home screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Checking the Radio Model Number Index This index number identifies your radio model-specific hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for your radio. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 1 2 312 3 4 Press to select. or to Radio Info and press Press or to select. to Model Index and press The display shows the Model Number Index. Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File Follow the instructions below if your radio system administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This menu option only appears if the Option Board received its last codeplug update OTA. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Send Feedback 3 4 Press to select. or to Radio Info and press Press or to select. to OB OTA CPcrc and press The display shows some letters and numbers. Communicate this information to your radio system administrator exactly as shown. 2 3 4 English Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press Press or to select. to Site Number and press The display shows the Network ID and the Site Number. Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) NOTICE:
If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not generally indicate the Site number. To display the registered Site number, do the following:
1 Press to access the menu. Checking the Site Info NOTICE:
If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The Site Info feature provides information that can be useful to a service technician. It consists of the following information:
Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater. Send Feedback 313 English RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control Channel repeater. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater (five numbers separated by commas). If you are requested to use this feature, please report the displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or Press to select. The display shows the Site Info. to Site Info and press Checking the Radio ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. 314 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or Press select. The display shows the radio ID. to My ID and press to Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Versions and press
(Radio) Firmware Version
(Radio) Codeplug Version Press select. The display a list with the following information:
Option Board Firmware Version Option Board Frequency Version Option Board Hardware Version Option Board Codeplug Version English Checking for Updates Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files
(Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File, and Option Board Firmware File) Over-The-Air (OTA). NOTICE:
Check with the dealer or network administrator to determine whether this feature has been enabled for your radio. to Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file version by using a menu option. In addition, display radios that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio knows about through system messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of the file packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:
See the version number of the pending file. See what percentage of packets has been collected so far. Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file packets. Send Feedback 315 English If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus OTA file transfer, there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home Screen status bar. NOTICE:
The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at a later time. There are several things that can make the file transfer process start again. The first example applies to all OTA file types. The other examples apply only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:
The radio system administrator re-initiates the OTA file transfer. The Option Board pre-defined timer expires, which causes the Option Board to automatically resume the process of collecting packets. The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user requests the file transfer to resume through the menu option. After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board firmware file depend on how the radio has been configured by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, the radio user will not be able to make or receive calls until the process is completed. During the process, radio display prompts user to not turn off the radio. 316 Send Feedback English Firmware File The following section provides information on the radio firmware. 5 Firmware Up to Date or Press select. The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. to Firmware and press to NOTICE:
If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date
(and if the radio has partially collected a more recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version,
%Received, and Download. Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. Press select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to 1 2 3 4 Send Feedback Pending Firmware Version 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to or to Firmware and press to 317 English 6 or to Version and press Press select. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows the pending firmware version number. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows Firmware is Up to Date. to 5 6 Press select. or to Firmware and press to or to %Received and press Press to select. The screen displays the percentage of firmware file packets collected so far. Pending Firmware % Received Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. Press select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to 1 2 3 4 318 NOTICE:
When at 100%, the radio needs to be power cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware upgrade. Pending Firmware Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to Send Feedback expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. No Download Availa-
ble Download not avail able English 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to 7 Do one of the following:
Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press previous menu. to return to the Frequency File The following section provides information on the frequency file of the radio. or to Firmware and press to Frequency File Up to Date or Press select. The display shows the following:
to Download and press to NOTICE:
If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent frequency file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. Download Available Start Download 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 319 English 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or Press to select. The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date. to Frequency and press 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. or to Updates and press to or to Frequency and press or to Version and press Press select. If there is a pending Frequency File, the display shows the pending Frequency File version number. to Frequency File Pending Version Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press 1 2 3 320 Frequency File Pending % Received 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press Send Feedback 4 5 Press select. or to Updates and press to or to %Received and press Press to select. The screen displays the percentage of frequency file packets collected so far. Frequency File Pending Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. English 3 4 5 6 Press to select. Press select. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to or to Frequency and press or to Download and press to Download Currently Unavailable Download Currently Available Download not available Start Download 1 2 Press to access the menu. 7 Do one of the following:
Press to select. or to Utilities and press Select Yes and press to start the download. Send Feedback 321 English Select No and press to return to the previous menu. Checking the GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:
Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version Press to access the menu. 1 2 322 3 4 5 Press to select. Press to select. or to Radio Info and press or to GNSS Info and press Press or to select. to the required item and press The display shows the requested GNSS information. See Turning GNSS On or Off on page 311 for details on GNSS. Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback English 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Certificate Menu. Press appears beside ready certificates. Press Press to the required certificate. or to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:
For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. Send Feedback 323 English Other Systems Features that are available to the radio users under this system are available in this chapter. Push-To-Talk Button The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes:
While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. is enabled, If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 324 You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call is interrupted. You should release the PTT button if you hear a continous Talk Prohibit Tone. Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:
See Emergency Operation on page 395 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Audio Ambience Allows the user to select an environment the radio is operating in. Send Feedback Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Call Alert Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. Call Log Selects the call log list. 5 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. Send Feedback English Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Contacts Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Ext Public Address (PA) Toggles audio routing between the connected PA loudspeaker amplifier and the internal PA system of the radio. Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. Manual Site Roam 5 Starts the manual site search. 325 English Mic AGC Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control
(AGC) on or off. Monitor Monitors a selected channel for activity. Notifications Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Nuisance Channel Delete5 Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Permanent Monitor5 Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Phone Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Public Address (PA) Toggles the internal PA system of the radio on or off. Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Radio Check Determines if a radio is active in a system. Radio Disable Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Radio Enable Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Repeater/Talkaround5 Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. 326 Send Feedback Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Scan 6 Toggles scan on or off. Site Info Displays the current site name and ID of Capacity Plus-
Multi-Site. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Site Lock5 When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Stops an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. 6 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site. Send Feedback English Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Toggles VOX on or off. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Selection Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off. Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. 327 English Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Accessing Programmed Functions Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to the menu function, and press to select a function or enter a sub-menu. 3 Do one of the following:
Press to return to the previous screen. Long press to return to the Home screen. 328 Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad microphone. See Keypad Microphone Buttons on page 39. Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. Icons The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. Table 9: Display Icons The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Blue-
tooth device is connected. Send Feedback Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Call Log Radio call log. Contact Radio contact is available. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Flexible Receive List Flexible receive list is enabled. GNSS Available GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-
ble. English GNSS Not Available GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Indoor Location Available 7 Indoor location status is on and avail-
able. Indoor Location Unavailable7 Indoor location status is on but un-
available due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Blue-
tooth. Message Incoming message. Monitor Selected channel is being monitored. 7 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Send Feedback 329 English Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. Notification Notification List has one or more missed events. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only.) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-
er Indicates time left before automatic restart of radio. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-
sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while re-
ceiving. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Scan 8 Scan feature is enabled. Scan-Priority 18 Radio detects activity on channel/
group designated as Priority 1. Scan-Priority 28 Radio detects activity on channel/
group designated as Priority 2. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Sign In Radio is signed in to the remote serv-
er. 8 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. 330 Send Feedback English Wi-Fi Excellent 10 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good10 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average10 Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor10 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable10 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Sign Out Radio is signed out of the remote server. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Site Roaming 9 The site roaming feature is enabled. Talkaround8 In the absence of a repeater, the ra-
dio is configured for direct radio to ra-
dio communication. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Vote Scan Vote scan feature is enabled. 9 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site. 10 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e . Send Feedback 331 English Table 10: Advance Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates that the option is selected. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates that the option is not select-
ed. Solid Black Box Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Table 11: Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. 332 Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Table 12: Call Icons The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type. Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-
ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID
(number). Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dis-
patcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Send Feedback Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-
scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). English Table 13: Job Tickets Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder. All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. In Progress Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Succesfully. Send Failed Jobs cannot be sent. Sent Successfully Jobs have been successfully sent. Priority 1 Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. Send Feedback 333 English Priority 2 Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. Priority 3 Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. Table 14: Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Successful Transmission (Positive) Successful action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-
tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-
cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Table 15: Sent Items Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder. In Progress The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledge-
ment. The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. or or or 334 Send Feedback or or Send Failed The text message cannot be sent. Sent Successfully The text message has been success-
fully sent. LED Indicators LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Send Feedback English Radio is transmitting. Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions. Radio is detecting activity over the air. NOTICE:
This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. There is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air in Capacity Plus. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Solid Yellow Radio is monitoring a conventional channel. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Blinking Yellow Radio is scanning for activity. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. 335 English Radio has Flexible Receive List enabled. All Capacity Plus-Multi-Site channels are busy. Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. Radio is not connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus. All Capacity Plus channels are busy. Tones The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. High Pitched Tone Low Pitched Tone 336 Indicator Tones Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Audio Tones Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Send Feedback Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. Conventional Analog and Digital Modes Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. Use the Channel Rocker to switch between an analog or a digital channel. Certain features are unavailable when switching from digital to analog mode. The icons for digital features reflect this change by appearing grayed out. The disabled features are hidden in the menu. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital modes. The minor differences in the way each feature works do not affect the performance of your radio. English NOTICE:
Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan. See Scan on page 376 for more information. Icon Information Throughout this publication, the icons described are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional analog or conventional digital mode, or made available with a keypad-enabled microphone. Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature. Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional analog and digital modes, both icons are not shown. IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site by Send Feedback 337 English connecting to different available sites by using an Internet Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional multi-site mode. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, the radio connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls or data transmissions. This is done either automatically or manually depending on your settings. In an automatic site search, the radio scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. The radio then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range but which may not have the strongest signal and locks on to the repeater. NOTICE:
Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channels in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the 338 best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels, including the selected channel. NOTICE:
You cannot manually add or delete an entry in the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Capacity PlusSingle-Site Capacity PlusSingle-Site is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusSingle-Site by using a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. Send Feedback Capacity PlusMulti-Site Capacity PlusMulti-Site is a multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Capacity PlusMulti-Site allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected with an IP network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest RSSI value. English In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Capacity PlusMulti-Site enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. NOTICE:
You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Similar to Capacity PlusSingle Site, icons of features not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site by using a programmable button press. Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 99 channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 channels per zone. Send Feedback 339 English Each channel can be programmed with different features and/or support different groups of users. Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press The display shows or to Zone. Press and the current zone. to select. Press or to select. to the required zone. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 2 3 340 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press The display shows or to Zone. Press and the current zone. to select. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. Send Feedback 5 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Alias Search This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Contacts List This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. English Selecting Channels Follow the procedure to select the required channel on your radio after you have selected a zone. Do one of the following:
Press the Scroll Up/Down button. Use the Volume/Channel Knob. Press the programmed Channel Up/Down buttons. Calls This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:
Manual Dial (by using Contacts) This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone. Programmed Number Keys This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. NOTICE:
You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable Send Feedback 341 English button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. Volume/Channel Selector Knob This method manually selects a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. NOTICE:
The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 430 for more information. Group Calls Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 342 Making Group Calls Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and the group call alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Send Feedback English The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. Send Feedback 343 English If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. 344 Responding to Group Calls To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Group Call:
The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the Send Feedback English transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. If the radio receives a Group Call while not on the Home screen, it remains on its current screen prior to answering the call. Private Calls A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first type sets up the call after performing a radio presence check, while the second type sets up the call immediately. Only one of these types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. Making Private Calls Your radio must be programmed to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, a negative indicator tone sounds when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. For more information, see Text Messaging on page 143 or Call Alert Operation on page 391. Long press caller alias before replying. to return to the Home screen to view the 1 Do one of the following:
Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. Send Feedback 345 English Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 346 Send Feedback 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Enter the subscriber ID, and press proceed. to Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Send Feedback 347 English 8 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The radio 348 Send Feedback returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. ongoing interruptible call and free the channel for you to respond. English See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. Responding to Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Private Call:
The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop an The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. All Calls An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. Receiving All Calls When you receive an All Call:
A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. Send Feedback 349 English The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:
The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of an All Call. Making All Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and All Call. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 350 Send Feedback English 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 381 for more information. Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. You cannot respond to an All Call at the moment. Send Feedback 351 English Selective Calls A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. Making Selective Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. Follow the procedure to make Selective Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6 The display shows Call Ended. Responding to Selective Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Selective Calls on your radio. When you receive a Selective Call:
The green LED blinks. The first text line shows the Private Call icon and the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call. 352 Send Feedback English During the Phone Call, your radio attempts to end the call when:
You press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured. You enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits. During channel access, access or deaccess code, or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to the On/Off , Volume Control, and Channel Selector buttons or knobs only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. During channel access, press attempt. A tone sounds. to dismiss the call NOTICE:
The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call from an individual radio to a telephone. If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio:
The display shows Unavailable. Your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. Send Feedback 353 English Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code is not preconfigured in the Contact List, the display shows Access Code:. 2 Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. 354 If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 5 Press to end the call. 6 Do one of the following:
If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Send Feedback If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:
Send Feedback English The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. If the selected entry is empty:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. 4 5 or to Call Phone. Press Press select. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. to Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The first text line shows Calling. The second text line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is successful:
The DTMF Tone sounds. 355 English You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second text line shows Phone Call, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 9 Press to end the call. 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter to proceed. the deaccess code when the display shows De-
Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. 356 Send Feedback When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. English to dismiss NOTICE:
During the channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/ deaccess code or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or Press to select. The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. to Phone Number. Press Send Feedback 357 English 5 6 Enter the telephone number, and press proceed. The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. to The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. to proceed. Enter the access code, and press The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 8 Press to end the call. 9 Do one of the following:
7 The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call status. If the call is successful:
The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The display continues to show the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. If the call is unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. 358 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Send Feedback If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 8, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. English NOTICE:
When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, Send Feedback 359 English and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Making Group, Private, Phone or All Calls by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to make any calls by using the alias search. 4 5 Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. to Contacts. Press to or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. 1 2 3 360 to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and Press Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. Send Feedback 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 8 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone to proceed. The English Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. or to exit alias NOTICE:
to dismiss During the channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit alias search. Press search. During the call, when you press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/ deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Send Feedback 361 English Dual Tone Multi Frequency The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts. See Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 190 for more information. Initiating DTMF Calls Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Do one of the following:
Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. 362 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:
The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows the group alias and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Send Feedback If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as All Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:
The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows All Call and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. English 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows All Call and Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:
The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. Send Feedback 363 English If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Follow the procedure to stop calls on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button. The display shows Remote Dekey. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:
A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Stopping Radio Calls This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio experiences a "stuck microphone" condition where the PTT button is inadvertently pressed by the user. 364 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Remote Dekey Success. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Remote Dekey Failed. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback Talkaround This feature allows you to continue communication when your repeater is not operational, or when your radio is out of range from the repeater but within talking range of other radios. The talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus Single-Site, Capacity PlusMulti-Site, and Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and Talkaround modes on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 English Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press to or to Talkaround. Press Press select. If enabled, If disabled, The screen automatically returns to the previous screen. appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback 365 English Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled through CPS, when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:
The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound. The first line of the display shows Non. The second line shows Home Channel. You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:
Return to the home channel. Mute the reminder temporarily using the programmable button. Set a new home channel using the programmable button. Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. 366 Press the Silence Home Channel Reminder programmable button. The first line of the display shows HCR and the second line shows Silenced. Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press English Sending Radio Checks Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. Press to select. or to Home Channel. Press 2 3 4 5 or Press channel alias. Press The display shows channel alias. to the desired new home to select. beside the selected home Radio Check This feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the radio user. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. or to select. to the required alias or ID. Press Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.The green LED lights up. when the radio is waiting for Wait for acknowledgment. If you press acknowledgment, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Send Feedback 367 English The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Sending Radio Checks by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio by using the manual dial. 6 Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press to proceed. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press proceed. to or to Radio Check. Press Press select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. to when the radio is waiting for If you press acknowledgement, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. or to Contacts. Press to 7 Wait for acknowledgment. 368 Send Feedback The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. 3 Remote Monitor This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. This feature stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. English to select. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Send Feedback 369 English Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to Remote Mon.. to select. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 1 2 3 4 5 370 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Contacts. Press to 7 or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press to proceed. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press proceed. to 6 Press or to Remote Mon.. Send Feedback English to select. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels or groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling 371 English through the channel or group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel or group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio by using Front Panel Programming. See Front Panel Configuration on page 183 for more information. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. Viewing Entries in the Scan List Follow the procedure to view the entries in the Scan list on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press Press select. Press list. or or to Scan. Press to select. to Scan List. Press to or to view each member on the Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to view entries in the Scan list on your radio by using the alias search. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. 372 Send Feedback 3 Press select. or to Scan List. Press to 4 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 5 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 3 4 5 6 Adding New Entries to the Scan List Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Send Feedback English Press select. Press select. Press Press or to Scan List. Press to or to Add Member. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to select. to the required priority level. Press Press The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?. 7 Do one of the following:
Press Press or to Yes to add another entry. to select. Repeat step 5 and step 6. 373 English Press Press to No to save the current list. or to select. Adding New Entries to the Scan List by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on your radio by using the alias search. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press Press select. Press select. or or to Scan. Press to select. to Scan List. Press to or to Add Member. Press to 5 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 7 8 Press to select. or to select. to the required priority level. Press Press The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?. 9 Do one of the following:
Press Press step 8. or to Yes to add another entry. to select. Repeat Step step 5 to Step 374 Send Feedback Press Press to No to save the current list. or to select. Deleting Entries from the Scan List Follow the procedure to delete entries from the Scan list. Press to access the menu. 6 Do one of the following:
English Press Press The display shows a positive mini notice. or to select. to Yes to delete the entry. Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. 7 Repeat step 4 to step 6 to delete other entries. Press Press select. Press Press or or to Scan. Press to select. 8 to Scan List. Press to Long press deleting all required aliases or IDs. to return to the Home screen after to the required alias or ID. or to select. Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List Follow the procedure to set priorities for entries in the Scan list on your radio. or Press select. The display shows Delete Entry?. to Delete. Press to 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 375 1 2 3 4 5 English 2 3 4 5 6 Press Press select. Press Press Press to select. or or to Scan. Press to select. to Scan List. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Edit Priority. Press or to select. to the required priority level. Press Press The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias. Scan Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity when you start a scan. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. During a dual-mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. There are two ways of initiating scan:
Main Channel Scan (Manual) Your radio scans all the channels or groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may, depending on the settings, automatically start on the last scanned active channel or group, or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic) Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel or group that has Auto Scan enabled. 376 Send Feedback English NOTICE:
When you configure Receive Group Message In Scan, your radio is able to receive group messages from non-home channels. Your radio is able to reply the group messages on home channel but is not able to reply on non-home channels. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. The yellow LED blinks. If scan is disabled:
The display shows Scan Off. The Scan icon disappears. The LED turns off. Turning Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press Press select. Press press or or to Scan. Press to select. to Scan State. Press to to the required scan state and or to select. If scan is enabled:
Send Feedback Responding to Transmissions During Scanning During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed duration known as hang time. Follow the procedure to respond to transmissions during scanning. 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button during hang time. The green LED lights up. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 377 English The radio returns to scanning other channels or groups if you do not respond within the hang time. Deleting Nuisance Channels If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise,
(termed a "nuisance" channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Follow the procedure to delete nuisance channels on your radio. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 2 Release the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. Restoring Nuisance Channels Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on your radio. Do one of the following:
Turn the radio off and then power it on again. Stop and restart a scan using the programmed Scan button or menu. Change the channel using the Channel Up/
Down button. Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio receives transmissions from that base station. During a vote scan, the yellow LED blinks and the display shows the Vote Scan icon. Follow the same procedures as Responding to Transmissions During Scanning on page 377, to respond to a transmission during a vote scan. 378 Send Feedback Contacts Settings Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. NOTICE:
You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
Call Type Call Alias Send Feedback English Call ID NOTICE:
If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, and All Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to decrypt the transmission. Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 379 English 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 380 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the Send Feedback transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable number keys on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. English 4 Press select. or to Program Key. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
to the desired or to select. If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press number key. Press If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:
Press select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press or to Press or previous step. to No to return to the Each entry can be associated to different number keys. You see a before each number key that is Send Feedback 381 3 4 5 6 English is before Empty, that assigned to an entry. If the number key is not assigned. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to 2 Press select. 382 Press Press Press select. to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Program Key. Press to Press The first text line shows Clear from all keys. to Empty. Press or to select. Press to select. to Yes. Press or NOTICE:
When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Send Feedback Adding New Contacts Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. 7 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to New Contact. Press to or Press Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select contact type Radio to select. 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press to proceed. 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press to proceed. Send Feedback English or to select. to the required ringer type. Press Press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. Setting Default Contact Follow the procedure to set the default contact on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 383 English 4 Press or to select. to Set as Default. Press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows beside the selected default alias or ID. Call Indicator Settings This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text message ringing tones. Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Call Alerts on your radio. 3 4 5 6 7 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 384 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press or to Call Alert. Press to Press or to select. The display shows to the required tone. Press beside the selected tone. Send Feedback Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press English 6 7 or Press to select. The display shows tones are enabled. The display shows ringing tones are disabled. to Private Call. Press beside On if Private Call ringing beside Off if Private Call Press or to select. to the required tone. Press If enabled, disappears beside Enabled. appears beside Enabled. If disabled, Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 385 English Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press Press or to select. to Selective Call. Press The display shows and the current tone. Press or to select. The display shows to the required tone. Press beside the selected tone. 2 3 4 5 6 7 386 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press Send Feedback 6 7 or Press to select. The display shows to Text Message. Press and the current tone. Press or to select. to the required tone. Press The display shows beside the newly selected tone. Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 3 4 5 6 English Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press or Press select. The current tone is indicated by a
. to Telemetry. Press to Assigning Ring Styles The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through Send Feedback 387 English the list. Follow the procedure to assign ring styles on your radio. 6 Press to access the menu. A to the required tone. Press Press or to select. appears beside the selected tone. or Press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to Contacts. Press to Press Press Press select. to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to View/Edit. Press to Press A until display shows Ringer menu indicates the current selected tone. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
Store Alias or ID to Contacts Delete Call Send Feedback 1 2 3 4 5 388 Delete All Calls View Details Deleting Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete calls from the Call list. English Viewing Recent Calls Follow the procedure to view recent calls on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to Press options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. to the preferred list. The or Press The display shows the most recent entry. to select. or Press You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button. to view the list. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to to the required list. Press or Press to select. If the list is empty:
A tone sounds. The display shows List Empty. Press Press Press to select. to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Delete Entry?. Press Send Feedback 389 English 6 Do one of the following:
Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press The radio returns to the previous screen. to No. Press or to select. 4 5 Press Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. or Press to select. The display shows the call details. to View Details. Press Viewing Call List Details Follow the procedure to view call details on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press 1 2 3 390 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press Send Feedback English 4 5 Press Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press to Store. Press The display shows a blinking cursor. or to select. Making Call Alerts Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. to select. Press You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button. Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 391 English 2 3 4 Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. or to Call Alert. Press Press select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. to 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. Making Call Alerts by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or Press select. The display shows a blinking cursor. to Manual Dial. Press to Enter the subscriber ID and press to proceed. or to Call Alert. Press Press select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. to 392 Send Feedback 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. Responding to Call Alerts Follow the procedure to respond to Call Alerts on your radio. When you receive a Call Alert:
A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:
Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. English Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. See Notification List on page 180 and Call Log Features on page 122 for more information. Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to the user to silence all audio indicators of the radio. Once Mute Mode feature is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as Emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, the radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. NOTICE:
This is a purchasable feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Send Feedback 393 English Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. 1 2 3 4 5 Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:
Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured. Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. 394 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Mute Timer. Press to or Press each digit, and press to edit the numeric value of
. Send Feedback Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:
Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:
Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:
Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. English Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:
Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long Press Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. NOTICE:
If a short press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a long press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. If a long press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a short press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
Emergency Alarm Send Feedback 395 English Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow NOTICE:
Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. In addition, each alarm has the following types:
Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. Receiving Emergency Alarms Follow the procedure to receive Emergency Alarms on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Alarm:
A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows the Emergency icon, and the Emergency caller alias or if there is more than one alarm, all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. 1 Do one of the following:
If only one alarm, press details. to view more If more than one alarm, press the required alias, and press details. or to to view more 2 Press to view the action options. 396 Send Feedback 3 4 Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. Press to access the menu. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list. 6 The tone sounds and the LED blinks red until you exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can be silenced. Do one of the following:
Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm. Press any programmable button. Exit Emergency mode. See Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm on page 398. Responding to Emergency Alarms Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms on your radio. English 1 Make sure the display shows the Alarm List. Press or to the required alias or ID. 2 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted. The green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. 3 Do one of the following:
Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:
The green LED blinks. Send Feedback 397 English The display shows the Group Call icon and ID, transmitting radio ID, and the Alarm list. Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios, including the emergency receiving radio, transmit non-emergency voice. Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm Do one of the following to exit Emergency mode after receiving Emergency alarm:
Delete the alarm items. Power down the radio. Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. 398 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:
The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. NOTICE:
If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed through CPS. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. Send Feedback If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:
A tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. English NOTICE:
If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. The display shows Sending Alarm, which alternates with your radio ID. You see the following:
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. Send Feedback 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon. 4 Do one of the following:
399 English Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows the caller and group aliases. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 7 To exit the Emergency mode once the call ends, press the Emergency Off button. The radio returns to the Home screen. Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:
Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 400 Send Feedback English If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. NOTICE:
Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice to follow on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. You see one of these results:
The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. Send Feedback 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:
The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. Reinitiating Emergency Mode This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. Follow the procedure to reinitiate Emergency mode on your radio. Do one of the following:
Change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. The radio exits the Emergency 401 English mode, and reinitiates Emergency, if Emergency Alarm is enabled on the new channel. Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode on your radio. Press the programmed Emergency On button during an Emergency initiation or transmission state. The radio exits this state, and reinitiates Emergency. Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. Your radio exits Emergency mode when:
An acknowledgment is received (for Emergency Alarm only). All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. NOTICE:
If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio does not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. 402 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Emergency Off button. Change the channel to a new channel that has no emergency system configured. The display shows No Emergency. Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List Follow the procedure to delete the alarm items from the Alarm List, to exit Emergency mode. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Alarm List. Press to to the required alarm item. or to select. Send Feedback 4 Press select. or to Delete. Press to Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio
(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:
The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English Text Messages The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted according to the most recently received. Viewing Text Messages Follow the procedure to view text messages on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Inbox. Press Press If the Inbox is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. to select. Send Feedback 403 English 4 Press or to select. to the required message. Press The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to select. to the required message. Press 1 2 3 4 404 You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. Responding to Text Messages Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio. When you receive a text message:
The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender. The display shows the Message icon. NOTICE:
The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed. 1 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback or to Read. Press Press select. The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-
mail application. to Press or to Read Later. Press to select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message. Press select. or to Delete. Press to 2 Do one of the following:
Press to return to inbox. Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. English Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text Follow the procedure to respond to text messages with Quick Text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to select. to the required message. Press The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Send Feedback 405 English 5 6 7 8 Press Press select. or or Press or to select. Press to access the sub-menu. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. to Reply. Press to select. to Quick Reply. Press to Resending Text Messages Follow the procedure to resend text messages on your radio. When you are at the Resend option screen:
to the required message. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. 9 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber or group alias or ID. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 406 Send Feedback Forwarding Text Messages Follow the procedure to forward text messages on your radio. When you are at the Resend option screen:
The display shows a negative mini notice. NOTICE:
You can also manually select a target radio address (see Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial on page 407). English 1 2 or Press send the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID. to Forward, and press to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. Send Feedback to Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to forward text messages by using the manual dial on your radio. 1 2 3 Press select. or to Forward. Press to Press subscriber or group alias or ID. to send the same message to another or Press select. The display shows Radio Number:. to Manual Dial. Press to 407 English 4 Enter the subscriber ID, and press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. to proceed. 1 Press to Edit. Press The display shows a blinking cursor. or to select. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Editing Text Messages Select Edit to edit the message. NOTICE:
If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Do one of the following:
Press or to Send and press send the message. Press or to Save and press save the message to the Drafts folder. to to 408 Press to edit the message. Send Feedback Press to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. Writing Text Messages Follow the procedure to write text message on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to 2 3 English Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 5 Press Do one of the following:
once message is composed. Press to send the message. Press
. Press or to choose among editing, deleting, or saving the message. Press to select. or Press select. A blinking cursor appears. to Compose. Press 4 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Send Feedback to Sending Text Messages Follow the procedure to send text message on your radio. It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message. Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:
409 English Press Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press or to Manual Dial. Press to select.Key in the subscriber ID. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press
. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If successful:
A tone sounds. The display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A low tone sounds. The display shows negative mini notice. The message is moved to the Sent Items folder. The message is marked with a Send Failed icon. NOTICE:
For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Inbox. Press Press If the Inbox is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. to select. 410 Send Feedback to the required message. Press Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. English 4 5 6 7 Press or to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press select. or to Delete. Press to or Press The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox. to Yes. Press to select. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Inbox. Press Press If the Inbox is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. to select. Press select. or to Delete All. Press to Press The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press or to select. 411 English Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent text message. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. at any time, the radio returns to the If you long press Home screen. 412 NOTICE:
If the channel type, for example a conventional digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. Viewing Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Messages. Press to to Sent Items. Press or Press select. If the Sent Items folder is empty:
The display shows List Empty. to Send Feedback English to Forward. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 146 for more information. A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. 4 Press or to select. to the required message. Press The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Sent Item Icons. Sending Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to send a sent text message on your radio. When you are viewing a Sent message:
1 Press while viewing the message. 2 You can either resend or forward the sent text message. Do one of the following:
to Resend. Press to select. Send Feedback 413 English Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. When you are viewing a Sent message:
1 2 Press
. Press select. or to Delete. Press to 2 3 4 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to to Sent Items. Press or Press select. If the Sent Items folder is empty:
The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. to Press select. or to Delete All. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 414 Send Feedback Saved Text Messages You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of 10 last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Viewing Saved Text Messages Follow the procedure to view saved text message on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Send Feedback English 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to Press or to select. to the required message. Press Editing Saved Text Messages Follow the procedure to edit saved text message on your radio. 1 2 Press while viewing the message. Press A blinking cursor appears. or to Edit. Press 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to select. 415 English Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press to access the menu. Long press to change text entry method. 4 Press Do one of the following:
once message is composed. Press or to Send. Press to send the message. Press
. Press or to choose between saving or deleting the message. Press to select. Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder Follow the procedure to delete saved text message from drafts on your radio. 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to Press or to select. to the required message. Press Press delete the text message. or to Delete. Press to 416 Send Feedback Quick Text Messages Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 6. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Proceed to step 6. Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Quick Text. Press to Press or message. Press to the required Quick Text to select. 5 Do the following to select the recipient and send the message. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that your message is being sent. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. Send Feedback 417 English The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 146 for more information. Text Entry Configuration Your radio allows you to configure different text. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:
Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Your radio supports the following text entry methods:
Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) 418 NOTICE:
Press screen or long press Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Enabling or Disabling Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-built dictionary. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to Send Feedback 5 Press to select. or to Word Correct. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press or to select. to Word Correct. Press Press to enable Word Correct. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Word Correct. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Enabling or Disabling Word Predict Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Word Predict. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press enabled, to enable the Word Predict. If appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. Send Feedback 419 English Sentence Cap This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Sentence Cap. Press 6 Do one of the following:
Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 420 Send Feedback 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or Press to select. The display shows the list of custom words. to List of Words. Press Editing Custom Words You can edit custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 3 4 5 6 7 8 English Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or Press to select. Display shows the list of custom words. to List of Words. Press Press or to select. to the required word. Press Press or to Edit. Press to select. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Send Feedback 421 English Press to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 10 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or Press to select. Display shows the list of custom words. to Add New Word. Press Adding Custom Words You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. 1 422 Press to access the menu. Press key to move one space to the right. Send Feedback Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 8 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. Deleting a Custom Word Follow the procedure to delete the custom words saved in your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback English 3 4 5 6 7 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to Press or to select. to the required word. Press Press select. or to Delete. Press to 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to the previous screen. to return 423 English Deleting All Custom Words Follow the procedure to delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio. 7 Do one of the following:
At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows All Entries Deleted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 424 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or to Delete All. Press to Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. Job Tickets This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform. NOTICE:
This feature can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:
My Tasks folder Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID. Shared Tasks folder Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals. Send Feedback English You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. NOTICE:
Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is powered down and powered up again. All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID. Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority. Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:
Modify content of Job Tickets. Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets. Move Job Tickets from folder to folder. Canceling of Job Tickets. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to select. to the required folder. Press Send Feedback 425 English 4 Press Press to the required Job Ticket. or to select. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Logging In or Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID. 1 2 Press to access the menu. or to Log In. Press Press select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. Creating Job Tickets Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Job Tickets. Press to or to Create Ticket. Press 426 Send Feedback English 6 Press or to select. to the required job ticket. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Responding to Job Tickets Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to select. Press or to select. to the required folder. Press to the required job ticket. Press once more to access the sub-menu. Press You can also press the corresponding number key
(19) to Quick Reply. Send Feedback 427 English Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket. 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. Press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Room Status. Press to Press or to select. to the required option. Press or Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to Send. Press to select. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
428 A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets. 1 2 Press or to select. to the required option. Press or Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to Send. Press to select. Send Feedback 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Deleting Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4 Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Send Feedback 3 4 5 6 7 English Press or to select. to the required folder. Press Press select. Press Press or to All folder. Press to to the required Job Ticket. or to select. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. or to Delete. Press Press select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. to 429 English If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Deleting All Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to All folder. Press to or to Delete All. Press to 6 Do one of the following:
or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 2 3 430 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to select. to the required folder. Press Privacy This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-
based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While Send Feedback English on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Some radio models may not offer Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio supports two types of privacy, but only one can be assigned to your radio. They are:
Basic Privacy Enhanced Privacy To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key for Basic Privacy, or the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or different Key Value and Key ID, you either hear a garbled transmission for Basic Privacy or nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Send Feedback 431 English 4 Press select. or to Privacy. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus Multi-Site configuration. Starting Manual Site Search Follow the procedure to start manual site search when the received signal strength is poor in order to attempt to find a site with better signal. If the radio finds a new site:
432 A positive indicator tone sounds. If the radio fails to find a new site:
A negative indicator tone sounds. Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:
You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:
You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Send Feedback English Accessing Neighbor Sites List This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:
1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to select. to Neighbor Sites. Press Security This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. You will not receive an acknowledgment if you press during Radio Enable or Radio Disable operation. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Disabling Radios Follow the procedure to disable your radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. 2 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. to select. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. Send Feedback 433 English 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to 1 2 434 3 4 5 Press Press to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press or to Radio Disable. to select. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Send Feedback Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the manual dial. 7 to select. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. English 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to access the menu. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or Press to select. The first text line shows Radio Number:. to Radio Number. Press If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Enabling Radios Follow the procedure to enable your radio. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. Press or to Radio Disable. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Send Feedback 435 English 3 to select. Press The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. 1 436 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. Press or to Radio Enable. to select. Press The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. Send Feedback English 6 7 Press or to Radio Enable. to select. Press The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or Press to select. The first text line shows Radio Number:. to Private Call. Press 1 2 3 4 5 Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Send Feedback 437 English Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or channel selection, for a predefined time. Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to this feature:
Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state, allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 395 for more information on ways to exit Emergency. NOTICE:
This feature is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-
establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. 438 Send Feedback Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-
enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. NOTICE:
If disabled through CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. Turning Bluetooth On and Off Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. Press to access the menu. 1 2 English 3 or to My Status. Press Press select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a to
. 4 Do one of the following:
Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 439 English 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to 4 Do one of the following:
Press Press to the required device. or to select. Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press required device. Press or to the to select. 5 Press select. or to Connect. Press to Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. beside the connected device. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:
If pin code is required, see Accessing Radios by Using Passwords on page 177. 440 Send Feedback Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Find Me. Press Press select. The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:
A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. Send Feedback English beside the connected device. The display shows If unsuccessful:
A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to Press or to select. to the required device. Press 441 English 5 or to Disconnect. Press Press select. The display shows Disconnecting from
<Device>. NOTICE:
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective user manuals of any Bluetooth-
enabled devices. Wait for acknowledgment. A tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. The disappears beside the connected device. Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. 442 to Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. The display shows one of the following results:
A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to Send Feedback 4 5 Press or to select. to the required device. Press 5 Press select. The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete. Press or to Press to select. or to View Details. Press Bluetooth Mic Gain This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device. English Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to to the required device. Press Press or to select. Send Feedback 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to BT Mic Gain. Press to or Press current values. Press the values here. to the BT Mic Gain type and the to select. You can edit 443 English 5 Press or values. Press to increase or to decrease to select. Indoor Location NOTICE:
Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is be used to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Access this feature through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. 444 b. Press or to select. to Bluetooth and press c. Press press to Indoor Location and or to select. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. Send Feedback If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. English Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press press Press select. or to Bluetooth and press to Indoor Location and or to select. or to Beacons and press to The display shows the beacons information. Send Feedback 445 English Notification List Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The display shows the Notification icon when the Notification list has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification list. For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages or missed calls or call alerts) list capability. Accessing Notification List Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio. 2 3 Press to select. or to Notification. Press Press or to select. to the required event. Press Long press to return to the Home screen. Auto-Range Transponder System The Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios. ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:
First-Time Alert A tone sounds. The display shows In Range after the channel alias. 1 446 Press to access the menu. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed. Send Feedback The display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert A tone sounds. The red LED rapidly blinks. The display shows Out of Range alternating with the Home screen. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio through Over-
the-Air Programming (OTAP) without any physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:
The display shows the High Volume Data icon. The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:
English A tone sounds. The display shows Updating Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on again. You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart occurs. When your radio powers up after automatic restart:
If successful, the display shows Sw Update Completed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update Failed. See Checking Software Update Information on page 209 for the updated software version. Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes Follow the procedure to select one of the following third-
party peripherals connection modes:
Motorola Solutions PC and Audio Data Accessory Send Feedback 447 English Telemetry Generic Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Cable Type. Press to or to the required connection Press mode. Press The display shows the selected connection mode. The screen returns to the previous menu. to select. 1 2 3 4 5 448 Received Signal Strength Indicator This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner. See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon. Viewing RSSI Values Follow the procedure to view RSSI values on your radio. When you are at the Home screen:
1 2 three times and immediately press Press three times, all in 5 seconds. The display shows the current RSSI values. Long press to return to the Home screen. Send Feedback Password Lock Features This feature allows you to restrict access to the radio by asking for a password when the device is turned on. You can use a keypad microphone or Scroll Up/Down buttons to enter the password. Accessing Radios by Using Passwords Follow the procedure to access your radio by using a password. 1 Enter the current four-digit password. NOTICE:
The use of Emergency footswitch cancels out password input to access the radio. Use a keypad microphone. Press or each digit, and press the next digit. to edit the numeric value of to enter and move to 2 Press to enter the password. If successful, the radio powers up. Send Feedback English If unsuccessful:
After the first and second attempt, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat step 1. After the third attempt, the display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. NOTICE:
In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:
If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using Passwords on page 177 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. 449 English A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing Radios by Using Passwords on page 177 to access the radio. Turning Password Lock On or Off Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on your radio. 6 Press to access the menu. Press select. 1 2 3 4 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Passwd Lock. Press to Use a keypad microphone. Press or to edit the numeric value of to enter and move to each digit, and press the next digit. A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit pressed. to enter the password. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Turn On. Press to beside Turn On. to Turn Off. Press to beside Turn Off. or to Utilities. Press to 7 Do one of the following:
5 Enter the current four-digit password. 450 Send Feedback Changing Passwords Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Passwd Lock. Press to 1 2 3 4 English 6 7 Press select. or to Change PWD. Press to Enter a new four-digit password, and press proceed. to to proceed. If successful, the display shows Password Changed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press 5 Enter the current four-digit password, and press to proceed. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. Front Panel Configuration You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Configuration (FPC) to enhance the use of your radio. Send Feedback 451 English Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode Follow the procedure to enter front panel programming mode on your radio. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Program Radio. Press Editing FPC Mode Parameters Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters.
, Scroll through options, increase/
decrease values, or navigate vertically. Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:
This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/
WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. 452 Send Feedback WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:
Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Access this feature using the menu. Send Feedback English a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. c. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to WiFi On and press Press beside Enabled. to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:
You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 453 English 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to to a network access point and or to select. NOTICE:
For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to Press select. Press select. Press press Press select. 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Follow the procedure to check the Wi-Fi Connection status. Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice press
. 454 Send Feedback English Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:
The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Refreshing the Network List Follow the procedure to refresh the network list. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to WiFi and press to c. Press or to select. to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. or to Refresh and press Press select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. to Send Feedback 455 English Adding a Network NOTICE:
This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press
. 456 6 7 Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Send Feedback 4 5 Press or to select. Press press to a network access point and or to select. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. English to View Details and press Removing Network Access Points NOTICE:
WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. Send Feedback NOTICE:
This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to 457 English 4 5 6 Press or point and press to the selected network access to select. Press select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press Press select. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. to Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Squelch Levels You can adjust the squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels with noise higher than normal background. Normal This is the default setting. Tight This setting filters out unwanted calls and/or background noise. Calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Setting Squelch Levels Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Squelch button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 458 Send Feedback 3 4 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Squelch. Press to 5 Do one of the following:
or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Normal. Press to beside Normal. to Tight. Press to beside Tight. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. English High This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Low This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Setting Power Levels Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Power Levels You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback 459 to Radio Settings. Press the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. English Press or to select. 3 4 Press or to Power. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:
or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to High. Press to beside High. to Low. Press to beside Low. 6 Long press to return to the Home screen. Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to All Tones. Press to 460 Send Feedback 6 to enable or disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, 5 6 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off Follow the procedure to turn keypad tones on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English Press to select. or to Keypad Tones. Press to enable or disable keypad tones. The Press display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio. Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback 461 1 2 3 4 English 3 4 5 6 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio. Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Vol. Offset. Press to or to the required volume offset Press level. A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level. 7 Do one of the following:
Press to select. The required volume offset level is saved. Press to exit. The changes are discarded. 462 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Talk Permit. Press to to enable or disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows one of the following results:
Send Feedback If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. 6 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Power Up. Press to Send Feedback English to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. Press The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Setting Text Message Alert Tones You can customize the text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press Press or to Contacts. Press to to the required alias or ID. or to select. 463 or to Message Alert. Press Press to access the menu. English 4 Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:
Press or to select. The display shows Press or to select. The display shows to Momentary. Press beside Momentary. to Repetitive. Press beside Repetitive. Changing Display Modes You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps. 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press or Press select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. to Display. Press to Press or to select. to the required setting. Press The display shows beside the selected setting. 464 Send Feedback English Adjusting Display Brightness Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio. Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 5 to decrease or increase the or Press display brightness. Press The setting value is varied from 1 to 8. to select. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press or Press select. The display shows the progress bar. to Brightness. Press to Turning Horns/Lights On or Off Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call through the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed through your radio rear accessory connector by your dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and lights on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback 465 English 3 4 5 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Horns/Lights. Press to enable or disable Horns/Lights. The Press display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, 3 4 5 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to LED Indicator. Press to enable or disable the LED indicator. Press The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Turning LED Indicators On or Off Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 466 Turning Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal public address (PA) system of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Send Feedback Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to to Radio Settings. Press 2 3 4 5 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press to enable or disable Public Address. If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. English Turning External Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external public address (PA) system of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Ext Public Address button. Skip the following steps. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or Address. Press to External Public to select. to Public Address. Press Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 467 English 5 Press address. If enabled, If disabled, to enable or disable external public appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. Turning Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 468 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. or to Display. Press to or to Intro Screen. Press to enable or disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Setting Languages Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Languages. Press to 3 4 Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Cable Type. Press to English to the required language. Press 5 The current cable type is indicated by a
. 3 4 5 Press or to select. The display shows beside the selected language. Identifying Cable Type Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Voice Operating Transmission The Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) allows you to initiate a hands-free voice-activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. You can enable or disable VOX by doing one of the following:
Turn the radio off and then power it on again to enable VOX. Send Feedback 469 English Change the channel by using the Scroll Up/Down buttons to enable VOX. Change the channel by using the Volume/Channel Knobto enable VOX. Turn VOX on or off by using the programmed VOX button or menu to enable or disable VOX. Press the PTT button during radio operation to disable VOX. NOTICE:
Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off Follow the procedure to turn VOX on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed VOX button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 470 2 3 4 5 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or to VOX. Press to select. Press to enable or disable VOX. NOTICE:
If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. See Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 192 for more information. Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. Send Feedback This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Option Board button. Text-to-Speech The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer or system administrator. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-
to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:
Send Feedback English Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press 471 English 4 5 Press Press to Voice Announcement. or to select. to any of the following features. or to select. Press Press The available features are as follows:
All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button appears beside the selected setting. Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Call Forward. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Press enabled, or appears beside Enabled. to enable Call Forwarding. If 472 Send Feedback Press If disabled, or disappears beside Enabled. to disable Call Forwarding. Setting Menu Timer You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Display. Press to English 5 6 Press select. or to Menu Timer. Press to Press or to select. to the required setting. Press Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off The Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on an analog system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Analog Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Send Feedback 473 to Radio Settings. Press audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. English Press or to select. 3 4 5 Press select. or to Mic AGC-A. Press to to enable or disable Analog Microphone Press AGC. The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press select. or to Mic AGC-D. Press to to enable or disable Digital Microphone Press AGC. The display shows one of the following results:
appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, If disabled, 474 Send Feedback Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. 3 4 Press or to select. Press or to select. English to Radio Settings. Press to Intelligent Audio. Press 5 Do one of the following:
NOTICE:
This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize Acoustic Feedback Suppressor in received calls. Follow the procedure to turn the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. Send Feedback 475 English 2 3 4 Press or to select. Press select.. or to Utilities. Press to 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below. to Radio Settings. Press Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to AF Suppressor. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill
(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Trill Enhance. Press 5 Do one of the following:
Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. 476 Send Feedback Audio Ambience You can customize the audio ambience for your radio according to your environment. Default This is the default setting. Loud This setting enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group This setting enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. Setting Audio Ambience Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English to Radio Settings. Press to Audio Ambience. Press to the required setting. Press 3 4 5 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. The settings are as follows. Choose Default for the default factory settings. Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings. Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other. The display shows beside the selected setting. Send Feedback 477 English Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles for your radio according to your preference. Default This is the default setting. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 These settings are intended to compensate for noise-
induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost These settings are intended for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. Setting Audio Profiles Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 478 3 4 5 Press or to select. Press or to select. Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press to Audio Profiles. Press to the required setting. Press The settings are as follows. Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings. Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-
induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your Send Feedback English preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds. The display shows beside the selected setting. Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:
Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio. Press the programmed GNSS button. 2 3 4 5 Press next step. to access the menu. Proceed to the Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Radio Settings. Press Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press If enabled, If disabled, to enable or disable GNSS. appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. Flexible Receive List Flexible Receive List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. This feature is supported in Capacity Plus. Send Feedback 479 English Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Flexible Receive List on or off. 1 Do one of the following:
Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to select. to Flexible Rx List. Press 3 Do one of the following:
or to Turn On. Press Press select. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. or to Turn Off. Press Press select. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 480 to to General Radio Information Your radio contains information on various general parameters. The general information of your radio is as follows:
Radio alias and ID. Firmware and Codeplug versions. Software update. GNSS information. Site information. NOTICE:
Press press exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. to return to the previous screen. Long to return to the Home screen. The radio Checking Radio Alias and ID Follow the procedure to check the radio alias and ID on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:
Send Feedback Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to 1 2 3 4 English Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or to Versions. Press Press select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. to 2 3 4 or Press to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID. to My ID. Press Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions Follow the procedure to check the firmware and codeplug versions on your radio. Send Feedback Checking Software Update Information This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 481 English 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version or to SW Update. Press Press select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. to Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air Programming on page 447 for more information. Checking GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:
Latitude Longitude Altitude 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or to GNSS Info. Press to or Press to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. to the required item. Press 482 Send Feedback Displaying Site Information Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or to Site Info. Press to The display shows the current site name. Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. English 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to select. to Certificate Menu. Press appears beside ready certificates. Press Press to the required certificate. or to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:
For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. Send Feedback 483 English Authorized Accessories List Motorola Solutions provides a list of accessories to improve the productivity of your radio. Antenna VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4006_) VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4007_) VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4008_) VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4009_) UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4002_) UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4003_) UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4004_) UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4010_) UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4011_) UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4012_) UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4013_) Combination GPS/UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6019_) Combination GPS/UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6020_) UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6022_) Combination GPS/UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6024_) Combination GPS/UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6026_) 800/900, 806941 MHz, 5.0dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4027_) Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4029_) Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4030_) 484 Send Feedback Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4032_) Combination GPS/VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4215_) Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4033_) Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4216_) English Combination GPS/UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4030_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4031_) Combination GPS/UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4032_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4033_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4034_) Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4000_) Window Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4001_) Magnetic Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4002_) Combination GPS+RF, Base Only, Through-hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAN4004_) Combination GPS/VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4214_) Send Feedback Combination GPS/VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4217_) Combination GPS/VHF, 146172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4218_) UHF, 445470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Moun, Mini-U (with base) (RAE4004_RB) UHF, 445470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (without base) (RAE4004_) For use with base PMAN4004_ only:
UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount
(HAE6027_) UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount
(HAE6028_) UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount
(HAE6029_) UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount
(HAE6030_) UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4039_) 485 English UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4041_) UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4040_) UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4042_) UHF, 450470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain (PMAE4043_) VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4223_) VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4224_) VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4225_) VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4226_) VHF, 146172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain (RAD4227_) Audio Accessories HK200 Bluetooth Headset (89409N) Telephone Style Handset (HMN4098_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 12 in. Cable
(NNTN8125_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 9.5 in. Cable
(NNTN8126_) Operations Critical Wireless Push-to-Talk POD
(NNTN8127_) Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable (NNTN8189_) Bluetooth Accessory Kit, SP, 9.5 in. Cable
(NNTN8190_) Wireless Covert Kit, includes two sets of 2-Wire Earbuds (1 Black and 1 White), 1-Wire Earbud (Black), and a 3.5 mm Adapter to plug into any off-the-shelf headphones (NNTN8296_) 11 Wireless Neckloop Y-adapter and retention hook for Completely Discreet Kit (NNTN8385_) 13 Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic
(PMLN7181_) 13 Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic, Multipack
(PMLN7203_) 13 Completely Discreet Earpiece Kit (RLN4922_) 13 XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6490_) XBT Overhead, Non-secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6491_) MOTOTRBO Bluetooth Accessory Kit with NA Power Supply (RLN6500_) 11 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 486 Send Feedback Swivel Earpiece with In-Line Microphone for Bluetooth Accessory Kit Pod, Pack of 3 (RLN6550_) 13 Desktop Microphone (RMN5050_) Compact Microphone (RMN5052_) IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone
(RMN5127_) Heavy Duty Microphone with Enhanced Audio
(RMN5053_) Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio (RMN5054_) Cables Compact Microphone Replacement Cable
(3075336B07) Heavy Duty/Keypad Microphone Replacement Cable
(3075336B10) Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, 15 amp (125 Watt) (HKN4137_) Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, 20 amp (145 Watt) (HKN4191_) Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-metre) Cable, 20 amp (145 Watt) (HKN4192_) Mobile Front (MMP) Programming Cable (HKN6184_) Send Feedback English MAP Programming Cable (PMKN4010_) MAP Programming and Test Cable (PMKN4016_) Mobile and Repeater Rear Accessory Connector Universal Cable (PMKN4018_) Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet (PMKN4033_) Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet (PMKN4034_) Remote Mount (3-metre) Cable (PMKN4143_) Remote Mount (5-metre) Cable (PMKN4144_) Ignition Sense Cable (RKN4136_) Desktop Accessories US Line Cord (3060665A04) Radio Power Cable for GPN6145 (GKN6266_) Desktop Tray without Speaker (GLN7318_) Switchmode Power Supply (1 25 Watt Models) (CE marked) (GPN6145_) Power Supply and Cable (HPN4007_) Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector
(PMLN5072_) Desktop Tray with Speaker (RSN4005_) 487 English Mounting Kits Screen Protector, Clear (single pack contains one unit)
(AY000269A01_) 12 In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit (RLN6465_) Low Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6466_) High Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6467_) Key Lock Trunnion Kit (RLN6468_) Low Profile Trunnion Bag (RLN6469_) Remote Mount Transceiver Interface (PMLN6402_) Remote Mount Control Head Interface (PMLN6403_) Miscellaneous Accessories Surge Protector, Tower Mount Kit (DQT1) Surge Protector, Coax Protector Bulkhead
(DSISB50LNC2MA) PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8 feet (2.4 metre) Cable
(HKN9557_) Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)
(HLN9073_) Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)
(HLN9414_) IMPRES Mobile MMP Non-PC Adapter (PMKN4072_) IMPRES Mobile MAP Non-PC Adapter (PMKN4070_) Generic Option Board (PMLN5718_S) Operations Critical Wireless 1-Wire Surveillance Kit with translucent tube (PMLN7052_) 13 Push Button PTT (RLN5926_) Emergency Footswitch (RLN5929_) Speakers 13 W External Speaker (RSN4002_) 7.5 W External Speaker (RSN4003_) 5 W External Speaker (RSN4004_) 12 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 13 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 488 Send Feedback Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:
1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
latitude and longitude Send Feedback English bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. 489 Table 16: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-
Frequency (MHz) English Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:
on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:
-
in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:
Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard.
-
490 ber 1 2
*
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**
14 15**
Transmit 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Send Feedback 16 17**
18 19 20
*
22
*
24 25 26 27 28 60
*
62 63
*
156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 65 66 67**
68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**
78 79 80
*
*
*
156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725
***
***
156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 English 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725
***
***
161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 Send Feedback 491 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources NOTICE:
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.
** Low power (1 W) only.
*** Guard band. NOTICE:
A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Input Volt-
age (Volts Peak-to-
peak) Max Data Rate Impe-
dance RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime 492 Send Feedback Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:
Motorola Solutions, Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products listed below ("Product") against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
Mobile Radios Product Accessories Two (2) Years One (1) Year Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted Send Feedback English for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of Motorola Solutions. This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola Solutions. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. 493 English II. GENERAL PROVISIONS This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED 494 WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (for example, dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-800-927-2744. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER 1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. Send Feedback 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-
Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:
any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. Send Feedback English 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola Solutions. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
1 Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 495 English 2 Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 Should the Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. 496 Send Feedback Franais (Canada) Dclaration de conformit Cette dclaration est applicable votre radio uniquement si elle porte l'tiquette du logo de la FCC ci-dessous. Dclaration de conformit Rglement CFR 47 partie 2 section 2.1077(a) de la FCC Partie responsable Nom : Motorola Solutions, Inc. Adresse : 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Numro de tlphone : 1 800 927-2744. Dclare par les prsentes que le produit :
Nom de modle : XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e sont conformes aux rglementations suivantes :
Partie 15, sous-partie B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) et section 15.109(a) des rglements de la FCC Appareil numrique de Classe B 2 Franais (Canada) En tant que priphrique d'ordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux stipulations de la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :
1 Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence nuisible. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. AVIS:
Cet quipement a fait l'objet de tests et a t dclar conforme aux limites tablies pour un appareil numrique de classe B, conformment la section 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixes afin doffrir une protection suffisante contre des interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie de radiofrquence et, sil nest pas install ou utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant, il est impossible de garantir quil ny aura aucune interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si cet appareil cause une interfrence nuisible la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant l'appareil, vous tes encourag remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :
Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre lquipement et le rcepteur. Brancher lappareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision chevronn pour obtenir de l'aide. 3 Franais (Canada) Table des matires Dclaration de conformit.............................................. 2 Consignes de scurit importantes.............................. 32 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada).......... 33 Version logicielle.......................................................... 34 Droits dauteur.............................................................. 35 Droits dauteur du logiciel............................................. 37 Prcautions de manipulation........................................ 38 Chapitre 1: Oprations de base.................................. 40 Mise en marche de la radio............................... 40 teindre la radio................................................ 40 Rglage du volume............................................40 Chapitre 2: Commandes de la radio............................42 Bouton Volume/Canal........................................42 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double..................................... 43 Touches du microphone clavier......................43 Chapitre 3: WAVE....................................................... 46 Rgler le canal actif WAVE............................... 46 Afficher l'information de canal WAVE................47 4 Afficher l'information de points d'extrmit WAVE................................................................ 47 Changer la configuration WAVE........................48 Appels de groupe.............................................. 49 Section I: Oprations Capacity Max............................ 51 Bouton dmission (PTT)................................... 51 Touches programmables...................................51 Fonctions attribuables de la radio......................52 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables................... 54 Accs aux fonctions programmes................... 55 Indicateurs d'tat............................................... 55 Icnes..................................................... 55 Voyant lumineux..................................... 62 Tonalits................................................. 63 Tonalits audio.............................63 Tonalits d'avertissement............ 63 Enregistrement.................................................. 64 Slection des zones et des canaux................... 65 Slection des zones................................65 Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias.....................................66 Slection dun type dappel.....................66 Slectionner un site................................ 67 Demande ditinrance.............................67 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv...... 67 Restriction de site................................... 68 ADF de site............................................. 68 Appels................................................................69 Appels de groupe....................................70 Appels de groupe.........................70 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts.................. 71 Appels de groupe faits laide de la touche numrique programmable .............................72 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la recherche d'alias ................ 73 Rponse un appel de groupe....76 Appel de diffusion................................... 77 Appels de diffusion.......................77 Appels de diffusion faits laide de la liste de contacts.................. 78 Appels de diffusion faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable..............................78 Franais (Canada) Rception d'appels de diffusion... 79 Appel individuel.......................................80 Excution dun appel individuel....80 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable .............................81 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la recherche d'alias ................ 82 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche.......................................... 84 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle .......85 Rception d'un appel individuel... 86 Accepter des appels individuels...86 Refus des appels individuels....... 87 Appels gnraux.....................................88 Appel gnral...............................88 Appels gnraux faits laide de la touche numrique programmable .............................89 Appels gnraux faits laide de la recherche dalias...................... 89 5 Franais (Canada) Rception dun appel gnral...... 91 Appels tlphoniques............................. 92
.............93 Excution dun appel tlphonique................................ 92 Acheminement dappels tlphoniques laide de la touche programmable Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts ........ 96 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la recherche dalias........98 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 101 Multifrquence deux tonalits. 103 Excution dun appel DTMF.............................. 103 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral....................................... 104 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe........................................104 6 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel.................................... 105 Priorit d'appel......................................106 Interruption vocale................................ 106 Activation de l'interruption vocale.........................................106 Fonctions avances.........................................107 Files dattente dappels......................... 107 Appel prioritaire.....................................108 Balayage de groupe dappels............... 109 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe................... 109 Liste de groupe de rception................ 110 Surv. prioritaire..................................... 111 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels..........................111 Affiliation de groupes multiples............. 112 Ajout d'affiliation de groupe........113 Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe........................................114 TalkBack (rponse)...............................115 Bluetooth...............................................115 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 116 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth....................................117 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection.....118 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth....................................118 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-
parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth.....................119 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils...........120 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif120 Gain du micro Bluetooth............ 121 Localisation interne...............................121 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur.....................................121 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur........ 123 Rglages multisite................................ 123 Franais (Canada) Lancer une recherche de site manuelle.................................... 123 Verrouillage de site activ/
dsactiv....................................124 Accs la liste de sites voisins..124 Rappel du canal daccueil.....................124 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil........................... 125 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil..................................... 125 coute distance................................. 126 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance................................... 126 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts ... 127 Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 128 Rglages des contacts......................... 129 Association dune entre une touche numrique programmable............................129 7 Franais (Canada) Dissociation dune entre et de la touche numrique programmable............................131 Ajout d'un nouveau contact........131 Rglages de l'indicateur d'appel........... 132 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels privs......................................... 132 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des messages textes........................ 133 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel.............. 134 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels slectifs...................................... 135 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte.. 136 Attribuer des styles de sonneries................................... 136 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme.........................137 Fonctions du Journal des appels.......... 138 Affichage des derniers appels....138 Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels.......................... 138 Suppression des appels de la liste dappel................................ 139 Suppression d'un appel gnral de la liste d'appel....................... 140 Affichage des dtails de la liste dappels......................................141 Fonction Avertissement dappel............141 Excution dune alerte dappel...142 Avis d'appels faits l'aide de la liste de contacts......................... 143 Rponse un avertissement d'appel........................................143 Mode Muet............................................144 Activation du mode muet........... 144 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet................................. 145 Quitter le mode muet................. 145 Fonctionnement durgence................... 146 Envoi des alarmes durgence.....147 8 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel.............................148 Envoi d'une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal...............150 Rception dune alarme durgence................................... 152 Rponse une alarme durgence .................................. 153 Rpondre des alarmes d'urgence par un appel.............. 154 Message d'tat......................................155 Envoi de messages d'tat..........155 Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la touche programmable....... 156 Envoi d'un message d'tat en utilisant la liste de contacts........ 157 Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la numrotation manuelle......157 Affichage des messages d'tat.. 158 Rponse des messages d'tat159 Suppression d'un message d'tat.......................................... 160 Franais (Canada) Suppression de tous les messages d'tat.........................161 Messagerie texte.................................. 161 Messages texte..........................162 Affichage des messages texte................................ 162 Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie.163 Rponse des messages texte............... 163 Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide..................... 164 Renvoi des messages texte................................ 165 Transfre des messages texte................................ 166 Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle....166 Modification de messages texte............... 167 Rdaction de messages texte................................ 168 9 Franais (Canada) 10 Envoi de messages texte 169 Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception........... 170 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception........... 171 Messages texte envoys........... 172 Affichage des messages texte envoys.................. 172 Envoi de messages texte envoys...........................173 Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys......... 174 Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys...........................174 Messages texte enregistrs....... 175 Affichage de messages texte enregistrs..............175 Modification de messages texte enregistrs...................... 176 Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons.........................177 Message texte rapide ................177 Envoi de messages texte rapides ........................... 177 Configuration de saisie de texte........... 178 Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct................................. 179 Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte......................180 Majuscule en dbut de phrase...180 Afficher des mots personnaliss 181 Modifier des mots personnaliss
................................................... 182 Ajouter des mots personnaliss.183 Supprimer un mot personnalis. 184 Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss.............................185 Tickets de tche....................................186 Accs au dossier Tickets de tche.......................................... 187 Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant........................... 188 Cration de tickets de tche...... 188 Rpondre des tickets de tche
................................................... 189 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche.......................................... 190 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche............................191 Suppression de tickets de tche 191 Supprimer tous les tickets de tche.......................................... 192 Cryptage............................................... 193 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage
................................................... 194 Interrompre/Raviver.............................. 194 Interrompre une radio................ 195 Franais (Canada) Interruption d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts................ 196 Dsactiver une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle...........196 Relance d'une radio................... 197 Relance d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts..................... 198 Rallumer une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.............. 198 Dsactivation permanente de la radio.. 200 Travailleur solitaire................................200 Fonctions de verrouillage par mot de passe.................................................... 200 Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe............................201 Dverrouillage de la radio.......... 201 Activation/dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe....202 Changement de mot de passe...203 Liste de notifications............................. 204 Accs liste de notification........204 Programmation par onde radio............. 205 11 Franais (Canada) Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers................................ 205 Indicateur dintensit du signal reu..... 206 Affichage des valeurs RSSI
(indicateur dintensit de rception du signal)....................206 Configuration du panneau avant...........207 Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant.207 Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC .................................207 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi...........................208 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi...........................................208 Connexion un point daccs rseau........................................ 209 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi......................... 210 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux...................................... 211 Ajout dun rseau....................... 212 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau...........................212 Retrait de points daccs rseau213 Utilitaires..........................................................214 Niveaux de puissance...........................214 Configuration de la puissance....214 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio.............215 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier................................................... 216 Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes.... 217 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler.............218 Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension............... 219 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte.....................................220 Changement des modes daffichage.... 220 Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage..............................................221 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares......................222 Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL.......................................................223 12 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique..................................223 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe.....................224 Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction.........................................225 Slection de la langue.......................... 226 Dterminer le type de cble..................226 Activation ou dsactivation de l'assistance parle................................ 227 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte d'option................................................. 227 Synthse texte-parole...........................227 Rglage de la synthse texte-
parole......................................... 228 Rglage du dlai menu.........................229 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique......................... 229 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent.......................230 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques231 Franais (Canada) Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration............................................ 232 Ambiance audio.................................... 233 Configuration de lambiance audio.......................................... 233 Profils audio.......................................... 234 Configuration des profils audio.. 234 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial
..............................................................235 Renseignements gnraux sur la radio 236 Vrification de l'alias et l'ID de la radio........................................... 236 Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug...237 Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel................ 237 Consulter les informations du GNSS.........................................238 Affichage de linformation sur le site............................................. 239 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise........................................... 239 13 Franais (Canada) Section II: Fonctionnement Connect Plus................. 241 Autres commandes de la radio en mode Connect Plus................................................... 241 Bouton d'mission (PTT)...................... 241 Touches programmables...................... 241 Fonctions attribuables de la radio........................................... 242 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables................................ 244 Description des indicateurs d'tat en mode Connect Plus.............................. 244 Icnes daffichage...................... 244 Icnes d'appels.......................... 247 Icnes de menu avanc.............248 Icnes de messages envoys....248 Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth.... 249 Voyant lumineux........................ 249 Tonalits d'avertissement.......... 250 Tonalits dalerte........................250 Slection des modes Connect Plus et non Connect Plus................................. 251 Recevoir et faire des appels en mode Connect Plus................................................... 251 14 Slectionner un site.............................. 251 Demande ditinrance................ 251 Verrouillage de site activ/
dsactiv....................................252 Restriction de site...................... 252 Slection d'une zone.............................252 Utilisation de rseaux multiples............ 254 Slection dun type dappel...................254 Rception et rponse un appel..........254 Recevoir un appel de groupe et y rpondre..................................255 Recevoir un appel individuel et y rpondre.....................................255 Rception d'un appel gnral.... 256 Rception d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant.. 256 Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant............................. 257 Composition surnumraire en direct lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant............................. 258 Rception d'un appel de Talkgroup entrant.......................258 Appel tlphonique multigroupe entrant........................................258 Faire un appel radio..............................258 Faire un appel l'aide du bouton slecteur de canal..........259 Pour passer un appel de groupe............................. 259 Passer un appel individuel......................... 260 Faire un appel gnral de site...................................261 Appel multigroupe........... 261 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche........................................ 262 Passer un appel au moyen de la touche programmable de composition manuelle................ 263 Franais (Canada) Passer un appel individuel......................... 263 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant l'aide du bouton programmable de numrotation manuelle.............. 264 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant au moyen du menu du tlphone.................... 264 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant partir des Contacts.....................................265 Attente d'autorisation de canal lors d'un appel individuel sortant267 Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant........................................ 267 Composition surnumraire en direct en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant.. 268 Fonctions avances en mode Connect Plus... 268 Rappel du canal daccueil.....................269 Plan de secours automatique............... 269 15 Franais (Canada) Indications de mode de reprise d'appel automatique...................269 Recevoir et passer des appels en mode de reprise.................... 270 Retour au fonctionnement normal........................................ 271 Vrification de la radio.......................... 271 Envoyer une vrification radio....272 coute distance................................. 273 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance................................... 273 Balayage...............................................275 Dmarrer et arrter le balayage.275 Rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage................. 276 Balayage configurable par l'utilisateur.. 276 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage......... 277 Modifier la liste de balayage................. 278 Ajouter ou supprimer un groupe partir du menu Ajouter membre..................... 279 Comprendre la fonction de balayage....281 Rponse de balayage...........................282 16 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels.................................................282 Rglages des contacts......................... 284 Passer un appel individuel partir des contacts......................284 Faire un appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias........................285 Ajout d'un nouveau contact........286 Rglages de lindicateur dappel...........287 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des avertissements d'appel.............. 287 Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels individuels.................................. 288 Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des messages texte..........................288 Slection dun type de sonnerie davertissement..........................289 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme.........................290 Journal des appels................................290 Affichage des derniers appels....290 Supprimer un appel d'une liste d'appels......................................291 Afficher les dtails d'une liste d'appels......................................291 Fonction Avertissement dappel............292 Rponse un avertissement d'appel........................................292 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel partir de la liste des contacts......................................293 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel au moyen de la touche d'accs direct............................. 294 Mode Muet............................................294 Activation du mode muet........... 294 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet................................. 295 Quitter le mode muet................. 295 Fonctionnement durgence................... 296 Recevoir un appel d'urgence entrant........................................298 Enregistrement des dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes...................................... 298 Franais (Canada) Supprimer les dtails de l'urgence.....................................299 Rponse un appel d'urgence.. 299 Rpondre une alerte d'urgence................................... 300 Ignorer Appel d'annulation d'urgence................................... 300 Initiation d'un appel d'urgence... 301 Lancement d'un appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal.................301 Lancement d'une alerte d'urgence................................... 302 Quitter le mode durgence..........302 Messagerie texte.................................. 303 Envoyer un message texte rapide......................................... 303 Envoyer un message texte rapide au moyen de la touche daccs direct............................. 304 Accs au dossier Brouillons.......305 Afficher un message texte enregistr............... 305 17 Franais (Canada) 18 Modifier et envoyer un message texte enregistr306 Supprimer un message texte enregistr dans les brouillons.........................307 Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte............................308 Renvoyer un message texte................................ 308 Transfrer un message texte................................ 308 Gestion de messages texte envoys......................................309 Affichage d'un message texte envoy....................309 Envoi d'un message texte envoy.............................310 Supprimer tous les messages envoys du dossier des messages envoys...........................311 Recevoir un message texte....... 312 Lire un message texte................312 Grer les messages texte reus 313 Afficher un message texte partir de la bote de rception.................... 313 Rpondre un message texte partir de la bote de rception.................... 314 Supprimer un message texte de la bote de rception......................... 315 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception........... 316 Cryptage............................................... 317 Faire un appel crypt................. 318 Scurit.................................................319 Dsactiver la radio..................... 319 Activer la radio........................... 321 Bluetooth...............................................323 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 324 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion................ 325 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion (Mode dtection)................................... 326 Se dconnecter d'un dispositif Bluetooth....................................326 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-
parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth.....................327 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils...........327 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif328 Gain du micro Bluetooth............ 328 Localisation interne...............................329 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur.....................................329 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur........ 331 Liste de notifications............................. 331 Accder la liste de notifications................................ 332 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi...........................332 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi...........................................333 Franais (Canada) Connexion un point daccs rseau........................................ 333 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi......................... 335 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux...................................... 335 Ajout dun rseau....................... 336 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau...........................337 Retrait de points daccs rseau338 Utilitaires............................................... 338 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits et les avertissements de la radio.................................. 339 Rgler l'cart de volume des tonalits d'avertissement............339 Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler...............340 Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension.....341 Rgler le niveau de puissance...342 Changer le mode d'affichage..... 342 Rgler la luminosit de l'cran... 343 19 Franais (Canada) 20 Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction..............................344 Language................................... 344 Activer ou dsactiver le voyant DEL............................................ 345 Dterminer le type de cble....... 346 Annonce vocale......................... 346 Dlai de menu............................347 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares........... 347 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double.348 Contrle de gain automatique de microphone numrique (Mic. CGA-D)...................................... 349 Audio intelligent..........................349 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques................................351 Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS.........................................352 Accs aux renseignements gnraux sur la radio................. 353 Vrifier l'index de numro de modle de la radio......354 Vrification fichier de codeplug de carte d'option OTA CRC...........354 Affichage de l'ID du site
(numro du site).............. 355 Vrification de l'info du site...................................355 Vrifier l'ID de la radio..... 356 Vrifier les versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de code........................... 357 Recherche des mises jour.................................. 357 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise........ 366 Section III: Autres systmes......................................367 Bouton PTT..................................................... 367 Touches programmables.................................367 Fonctions attribuables de la radio.........368 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables.......371 Accs aux fonctions programmes.......371 Indicateurs d'tat............................................. 372 Icnes................................................... 372 Voyants DEL.........................................379 Tonalits............................................... 380 Tonalits d'avertissement.......... 380 Tonalits audio...........................380 Mode analogique ou numrique classique...... 381 Information relative aux icnes........................381 Sites IP interconnects ................................382 Capacity Plus site unique ......................... 383 Capacity Plus multisite ............................. 383 Slection des zones et des canaux................. 384 Slection des zones..............................384 Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias...................................385 Slection des canaux............................385 Appels..............................................................386 Appels de groupe..................................387 Appels de groupe.......................387 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts................ 388 Franais (Canada) Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la touche numrique
.................. 389 programmable Rponse un appel de groupe..389
................................... 390 Appels privs Excution d'un appel individuel
...............................................391 393 Appels privs faits l'aide de la liste de contacts ..................... 392 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Appels individuels faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Rponse des appels individuels .............................. 395 Appels gnraux...................................395 Rception d'un appel gnral.... 395 Appel gnral.............................396 Appels gnraux faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable
.......................397
.................. 394 21 Franais (Canada) Appels slectifs
................................398 Excution d'un appel slectif......398 Rponse un appel slectif
. 398
...................... 399 Appels tlphoniques
......................... 400
..401 Excution d'un appel tlphonique Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts Appels tlphoniques faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Pour passer des appela de groupe, individuels, tlphoniques ou gnraux l'aide de la recherche d'alias
............................... 404
...............................................406 Multifrquence deux tonalits. 408 Excution dun appel DTMF.............................. 409 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe
...................................409 22 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel
..................................410
...............................410 Interruption dun appel radio
............411 Mode Direct.......................................... 412 Basculement entre les modes Rpteur et Direct......................412 Fonctions avances.........................................413 Rappel du canal daccueil.....................413 Vrification de la radio Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil........................... 413 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil..................................... 413
..................... 414
. 414 Envoi des vrifications radio Envoi des vrifications radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle
............................... 415 coute distance................................. 416 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance................................... 416 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts ... 417 Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle
............................... 418 Listes de balayage................................419 Affichage d'une entre de la liste de balayage............................... 420 Affichage des entres de la liste de balayage laide de la recherche dalias .......................420 Ajout dentres la liste de balayage.................................... 421 Ajout d'entres la liste de balayage l'aide de la recherche d'alias Suppression d'une entre de la liste de balayage........................ 423 Configuration de lordre de priorit des entres de la liste de balayage.................................... 424 Balayage...............................................425
...................422 Franais (Canada) Activer ou dsactiver le balayage.................................... 426 Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage................. 426 Suppression des canaux nuisibles..................................... 427 Restauration des canaux nuisibles..................................... 427 Balayage par vote :
..........................428 Rglages des contacts......................... 428 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts................ 429 Appels privs faits l'aide de la liste de contacts ..................... 430 Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable Dissociation dune entre et de la touche numrique programmable
.......................432 Ajout d'un nouveau contact........433 Configuration du contact par dfaut
....................................433
.......................431 23 Franais (Canada) Rglages de l'indicateur d'appel........... 434
.................................436
.................................... 435 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel.............. 434 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels privs Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des messages textes Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte.. 438 Attribuer des styles de sonneries................................... 438 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme.........................439 Fonctions du Journal des appels.......... 440 Affichage des derniers appels....440 Suppression des appels de la liste d'appel
...........................440
...................437 24
.................................. 441 Afficher les dtails de la liste d'appel Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels ...................... 442 Fonction Avertissement d'appel............443 Excution dune alerte dappel...443 Avis d'appels faits l'aide de la liste de contacts......................... 443 Avis d'appel fait l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.............. 444 Rponse un avertissement d'appel........................................445 Mode Muet............................................445 Activation du mode muet........... 446 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet................................. 446 Quitter le mode muet................. 447 Fonctionnement d'urgence................... 447 Rception dune alarme durgence................................... 448 Rponse une alarme durgence................................... 449 Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence.450 Envoi des alarmes d'urgence.....450 Envoi d'une alarme d'urgence avec un appel.............................451 Alarmes d'urgence suivies d'un appel vocal.................................453 Envoi d'une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal Ractivation du mode durgence
................................................... 454 Quitter le mode d'urgence aprs l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence......455 Supprimez lalarme de la liste dalarmes................................... 455 Messagerie texte.................................. 456
.....................456 Messages texte
..........454 Affichage des messages texte................................ 456 Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie.457 Rponse des messages texte
..........458 Franais (Canada)
................ 458
........................... 460 Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide Renvoi des messages texte................................ 460 Transfre des messages texte Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle
........................................ 461 Modification de messages texte............... 462 Rdaction de messages texte................................ 463 Envoi de messages texte 463 Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception........... 464 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception Messages texte envoys
...... 465
...... 466 25 Franais (Canada)
.............467
......................467 Affichage des messages texte envoys Envoi de messages texte envoys Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys...........................469 Messages texte enregistrs....... 469
.... 468 Affichage de messages texte enregistrs..............470 Modification de messages texte enregistrs...................... 470 Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons.........................471
........... 472 Message texte rapide 26 Envoi de messages texte rapides
....................... 472 Configuration de saisie de texte........... 473 Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct................................. 473 Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte......................474 Majuscule en dbut de phrase...475 Afficher des mots personnaliss 476 Modifier des mots personnaliss
................................................... 476 Ajouter des mots personnaliss.478 Supprimer un mot personnalis. 479 Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss.............................480 Tickets de tche....................................481 Accs au dossier Tickets de tche.......................................... 482 Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant........................... 482 Cration de tickets de tche...... 483 Rpondre des tickets de tche
................................................... 483 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche.......................................... 484 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche............................485 Suppression de tickets de tche 486 Supprimer tous les tickets de tche.......................................... 487
.......................................... 487 Cryptage Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage
...............................................488 Rglages multisite................................ 489 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle.................................... 489 Verrouillage de site activ/
dsactiv....................................490 Accs la liste de sites voisins..490
........................................... 490
.......491 Dsactivation des radios Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts
........... 491 Scurit Franais (Canada) 492
.............493 Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Activation des radios Activation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts Activation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle
................ 494
..... 494 Travailleur solitaire................................495 Bluetooth...............................................496 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 497 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth....................................497 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection.....499 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth....................................499 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-
parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth.....................500 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils...........500 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif501 27 Franais (Canada) Gain du micro Bluetooth............ 501 Localisation interne...............................502 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur.....................................502 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur........ 504 Liste de notifications............................. 504 Accs liste de notification........505 Systme ARTS .................................505 Programmation par onde radio
........506 Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers................................ 507 Indicateur dintensit du signal reu..... 507 Affichage des valeurs RSSI
(indicateur dintensit de rception du signal)....................507 Fonctions de verrouillage par mot de passe.................................................... 508 Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe............................508 Dverrouillage de la radio.......... 509 Activation/dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe....509 Changement de mot de passe...510 Configuration du panneau avant...........511 Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant.511 Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC .................................512 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi...........................512 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi...........................................513 Connexion un point daccs rseau........................................ 514 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi......................... 515 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux...................................... 515 Ajout dun rseau....................... 516 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau...........................517 Retrait de points daccs rseau518 Utilitaires..........................................................519 Niveau de silencieux.............................519 28 Configuration du niveau du silencieux................................... 519 Niveaux de puissance...........................520 Configuration de la puissance....520 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio.............521 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier................................................... 522 Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes.... 523 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler.............524 Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension............... 525 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte.....................................525 Changement des modes daffichage.... 526 Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage..............................................527 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares......................528 Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL.......................................................528 Franais (Canada) Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique..................................529 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe.....................530 Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction.........................................530 Slection de la langue.......................... 531 Dterminer le type de cble..................532 Transmission vocale............................. 532 Activation ou dsactivation de l'mission commande par la voix (VOX)..................................533 Activation ou dsactivation de l'assistance parle................................ 534 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte d'option................................................. 534 Synthse texte-parole...........................534 Rglage de la synthse texte-
parole......................................... 535 Activer ou dsactiver le renvoi dappel automatique.......................................... 536 Rglage du dlai menu.........................536 29 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation du microphone analogique........................ 537 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique......................... 538 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent.......................538 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques539 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration............................................ 540 Ambiance audio.................................... 541 Configuration de lambiance audio.......................................... 541 Profils audio.......................................... 542 Configuration des profils audio.. 542 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial
..............................................................543 Liste de rception flexible
................ 544 Activer ou dsactiver la liste de rception flexible........................ 544 Renseignements gnraux sur la radio 545 Vrification de l'alias et l'ID de la radio........................................... 545 Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug...546 Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel................ 546 Consulter les informations du GNSS.........................................547 Affichage de linformation sur le site............................................. 548 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise........................................... 548 Section IV: Liste des accessoires approuvs............550 Utilisation de la radio maritime dans la gamme de frquence VHF........................................................... 556 Assignations des canaux spciaux..................556 Canal d'urgence....................................556 Canal d'appel non commercial..............557 Exigences relatives la frquence de fonctionnement................................................ 557 Dclaration de conformit pour utilisation des frquences de dtresse et de scurit............ 559 30 Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes......................... 559 Garantie limite.......................................................... 561 PRODUITS DE COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS.............................. 561 I. PROTECTION ASSURE PAR LA PRSENTE GARANTIE ET DURE DE CELLE-CI :...................................................... 561 II. CONDITIONS GNRALES....................... 562 III. DROITS PRVUS PAR LES LOIS PROVINCIALES :............................................ 562 IV. ENTRETIEN COUVERT PAR LA GARANTIE...................................................... 563 V. CE QUI N'EST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE......................................... 563 VI. DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX BREVETS ET AUX LOGICIELS......................564 VII. LOI APPLICABLE..................................... 565 Franais (Canada) 31 Selon la rglementation dIndustrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis quavec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de lantenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte quil ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola Solutions offrant le gain maximal autoris et limpdance requise pour le type dantenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit dutiliser avec cet appareil tout type dantenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Franais (Canada) Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!
Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu des fins professionnelles. Avant dutiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient dimportantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur lexposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes et autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions :
http://www.motorolasolutions.com Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. 32 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence et la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC :
Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence nuisible. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans l'autorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler l'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil. Franais (Canada) 33 Franais (Canada) Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par les versions logicielles R02.09.00.0000 ou ultrieures. Reportez-vous Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug la page 237 pour dterminer la version logicielle de votre radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 34 Droits dauteur Les produits de Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce document peuvent inclure des programmes informatiques protgs par des droits dauteur de Motorola Solutions. Les lois des tats-Unis et dautres pays rservent Motorola Solutions certains droits exclusifs pour les programmes informatiques protgs par droits dauteur. Par consquent, tout programme informatique protg par droits dauteur de Motorola Solutions compris dans les produits Motorola Solutions dcrits dans le prsent document ne peut tre copi ni reproduit de quelque manire que ce soit sans lautorisation crite expresse de Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions, Inc., 2018. Tous droits rservs Aucune partie du prsent document ne peut tre reproduite, transmise, stocke dans un systme de recherche documentaire ou traduite dans une autre langue ou dans un langage informatique, sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans lautorisation crite pralable de Motorola Solutions, Inc. De plus, lachat de produits Motorola ne peut tre considr comme une transaction octroyant directement, par infrence, estoppel ou autrement une licence en vertu des droits dauteur, des droits de brevets ou dune demande de brevet de Motorola Solutions, lexception Franais (Canada) dune licence dutilisation normale et non exclusive, libre de toute redevance, prvue par la loi lors de la vente dun produit. Avis de non-responsabilit Veuillez noter que certaines fonctionnalits, installations et capacits dcrites dans ce document pourraient ne pas sappliquer ou tre accordes sous licence pour lutilisation sur un systme particulier, ou pourraient dpendre des caractristiques dune unit mobile dabonn ou dune configuration de certains paramtres. Veuillez consulter votre personne-ressource chez Motorola Solutions pour en savoir plus. Marques de commerce MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logo au M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs titulaires respectifs. 35 Franais (Canada) Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de lUnion europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de lUnion europenne exige que les produits vendus dans les pays de lUE portent ltiquette de la poubelle barre (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas). Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur fournisseur dquipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. 36 Droits dauteur du logiciel Les produits Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce manuel peuvent inclure des logiciels Motorola Solutions protgs en vertu de la loi sur le droit d'auteur enregistrs dans des mmoires semi-conducteurs ou dans d'autres supports. Les lois du Canada, des tats-Unis et d'autres pays protgent, au nom de Motorola Solutions, certains droits exclusifs visant les logiciels, notamment les droits exclusifs de copie et de reproduction sous toute forme que ce soit des logiciels protgs par la loi sur le droit d'auteur. Par consquent, la loi sur le droit d'auteur protgeant tous les logiciels de Motorola Solutions inclus avec les produits de Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce manuel interdit toute copie, reproduction, modification, ingnierie rebours ou distribution de ces logiciels sans l'autorisation crite expresse de Motorola Solutions. De plus, l'achat de produits Motorola Solutions ne peut tre considr comme une transaction octroyant directement, par infrence, estoppel ou autrement une licence en vertu des droits d'auteur, des droits de brevets ou d'une demande de brevet de Motorola Solutions, l'exception d'une licence d'utilisation normale et non exclusive prvue par la loi lors de la vente d'un produit. La technologie de codage vocal AMBE+2 incluse dans ce produit est protge par les droits de proprit Franais (Canada) intellectuelle, notamment les droits de brevet, les droits d'auteur et les secrets industriels de Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Cette technologie de codage vocal n'est concde sous licence que pour une utilisation avec cet quipement de tlcommunication. Il est explicitement interdit tout utilisateur de cette technologie de tenter de dcompiler, de faire lingnierie rebours ou de dsassembler le code excutable, ou encore de convertir de toute autre manire le code excutable dans un format lisible par lutilisateur. Brevets des tats-Unis n 5,870,405, n 5,826,222, n 5,754,974, n 5,701,390, n 5,715,365, n 5,649,050, n 5,630,011, n 5,581,656, n 5,517,511, n 5,491,772, n 5,247,579, n 5,226,084 et n 5,195,166. 37 Franais (Canada) Prcautions de manipulation La radio numrique portable de srie MOTOTRBO rpond aux normes IP67. Elle peut ainsi rsister aux conditions difficiles sur le terrain, par exemple le fait dtre plonge dans leau. Cette section dcrit certaines prcautions de base prendre. MISE EN GARDE:
Ne dsassemblez pas votre radio. Cela pourrait endommager les joints de l'appareil et occasionner des chemins de fuite vers la radio. L'entretien de la radio devrait tre effectu uniquement dans un centre de rparations quip pour mettre l'essai et replacer le joint sur l'appareil. Si la radio a t submerge, secouez-la afin d'vacuer l'eau susceptible d'tre emprisonne dans la grille du haut-parleur et le port du microphone. L'eau ainsi emprisonne risque d'entraner une rduction de la qualit audio. Si la zone de contact de la batterie de la radio est expose l'eau, nettoyez et schez les contacts de la radio et de la batterie avant de connecter cette dernire l'appareil. L'eau rsiduelle pourrait court-circuiter la radio. 38 Si la radio a t plonge dans un liquide corrosif (par exemple de l'eau sale), rincez la radio et la batterie l'eau douce, puis schez-les. Pour nettoyer les surfaces extrieures de la radio, utilisez une solution dilue d'eau et de dtergent liquide pour vaisselle (p. ex. une cuillre th de dtergent dans environ quatre litres d'eau). N'enfoncez rien dans l'ouverture situe sur le chssis de la radio, sous le contact de la batterie. Cette ouverture permet d'quilibrer la pression dans la radio. Le fait d'enfoncer un objet dans cette ouverture risque de provoquer des infiltrations d'eau dans la radio, qui ne serait alors plus submersible. N'obstruez jamais ou ne couvrez jamais cette ouverture, mme avec une tiquette. Assurez-vous qu'aucune substance huileuse n'entre en contact avec cette ouverture. La radio, dont l'antenne est correctement rattache, est conue pour tre submersible une profondeur maximale de un mtre (3,28 pieds), pendant une dure maximale de 30 minutes. Une utilisation excessive, suprieure la limite maximale, ou sans antenne pourrait endommager la radio. Lorsque vous nettoyez la radio, n'utilisez pas de jet haute pression, car la pression de l'eau serait alors suprieure la pression correspondant une profondeur de un mtre et l'eau risquerait de s'infiltrer dans la radio. Franais (Canada) 39 Franais (Canada) Oprations de base Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations de base vous permettant d'utiliser votre radio. Mise en marche de la radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour mettre votre radio sous tension. Appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrt. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche MOTOTRBO (TM), suivi d'une image ou d'un message de bienvenue. L'cran d'accueil s'allume. Si la fonction Tonalits/alertes est dsactive, il ny a aucune tonalit lors de la mise sous tension. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant si la radio ne s'allume pas. Assurez-vous que la batterie est charge et 40 correctement insre. Contactez votre dtaillant si la radio ne s'allume toujours pas. teindre la radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour teindre votre radio. Maintenez le bouton Marche/Arrt enfonc. Il peut s'couler jusqu' 7 secondes avant que votre radio soit compltement teinte. L'cran affiche Mise hors tension. Rglage du volume Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le niveau de puissance de la radio. Faites un des suivants :
Tournez le bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume dans le sens horaire pour augmenter le volume. Tournez le bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume dans le sens anti-horaire pour diminuer le volume. AVIS:
Vous pouvez programmer un cart de volume minimal afin d'empcher le rglage du volume un niveau plus faible que le niveau minimum programm. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) 41 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio Ce chapitre dcrit les touches de commande et les fonctions de la radio. 1 Bouton Marche/Arrt/Information 2 Bouton Volume/Canal 3 Affichage 4 Touche Menu/OK 5 Boutons de dfilement haut/bas 6 Haut-parleur 42 7 Bouton Retour/Accueil 8 Boutons programmables du panneau avant 9 Connecteur accessoire 10 Voyants DEL Bouton Volume/Canal Le bouton Volume/Canal peut tre programm comme un bouton double fonction pour le volume et le canal, ou comme commande de volume seulement. Pour rgler le volume, consultez la section Rglage du volume la page 40. Pour changer les canaux, appuyez et maintenez le bouton Volume/Canal jusqu' ce que l'tat de slection de canal s'affiche. Tournez le bouton Volume/Canal pour slectionner le canal. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode de slection de canal :
Appuyez sur le bouton Volume/Canal. Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur Attendez que la minuterie du menu arrive son terme. 12346591078 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou slect. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Volume uniq. et Volume & canal. jusqu' Double pour effectuer la jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'icne L'cran revient au menu prcdent. s'affiche ct des rglages slectionns. Touches du microphone clavier Le clavier alphanumrique 3 x 4 (7,6 sur 10,2 cm) du microphone clavier navigation multidirectionnelle (numro de pice Motorola Solutions RMN5127_) vous permet d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appuyez plusieurs fois sur la 43 Franais (Canada) mme touche pour entrer certains caractres. Le tableau indique le nombre de pressions requises pour la saisie du caractre voulu. Nombre de pressions sur la touche 1 1 5
!
2
. 3
, 4
?
6
@
7
&
8
'
9
%
10 11
:
12
*
13
#
A D G J M B E H K N C F I L O 2 3 4 5 6 Tou che 44 Tou che Nombre de pressions sur la touche 1 P 2 Q 3 R 4 S 5 7 Franais (Canada) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 T W 0
* ou del
# ou espa ce U X V Y 8 Z 9 AVIS:
Appuyez sur cette touche une fois pour entrer 0 et maintenez-la enfonce pour activer le verrouillage des majuscules. Pour dsactiver le verrouillage des majuscules, maintenez-
la enfonce de nouveau. AVIS:
Pour supprimer un caractre entr, appuyez sur cette touche pendant la saisie du texte. Pour entrer * , appuyez sur cette touche en mode de saisie numrique. AVIS:
Pour insrer une espace, appuyez sur cette touche pendant la saisie de texte. Pour entrer
# , appuyez sur cette touche en mode de saisie numrique. 45 Franais (Canada) WAVE Lenvironnement de voix rseau tendu (Wide Area Voice Environment [WAVE]) fournit une nouvelle mthode de faire des appels entre deux radios. Cette fonction prend galement en charge les appels entre les radios et dautres dispositifs avec les capacits WAVE. Toutefois, un canal WAVE doit tre configur pour utiliser cette fonction. Lorsque dans un canal WAVE, la radio est incapable de recevoir des appels partir d'autres systmes et ne peut recevoir des appels WAVE. Si la radio est sur un canal WAVE, la radio permet la connexion Wi-Fi et se droule automatiquement pour vous connecter au serveur WAVE. Les appels WAVE sont effectus lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau IP par Wi-Fi. AVIS:
Cette fonction s'applique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. 46 Tableau 1: Icnes d'affichage WAVE Les icnes suivantes apparaissent momentanment sur l'cran lorsque le mode WAVE est activ. WAVE connect WAVE est connect. WAVE dconnect WAVE est dconnect. Rgler le canal actif WAVE Les canaux WAVE sont configurs par le CPS. Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner le canal WAVE . 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Canaux WAVE. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au canal WAVE pour effectuer la slection. 4 Appuyez sur actif. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rgler comme pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct du canal slectionn. 3 4 Afficher l'information de canal WAVE Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher linformation de canal WAVE. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Liste de canaux WAVE. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Canaux WAVE. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au canal WAVE pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou dtails. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Afficher les pour effectuer la L'cran affiche les dtails du canal WAVE. Afficher l'information de points d'extrmit WAVE Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher linformation des points d'extrmit WAVE. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Contact. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 47 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur dextrmit. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Points pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur d'extrmit WAVE voulu. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu'au point pour Appuyez sur dtails. pour slectionner Afficher les L'cran affiche les dtails du point d'extrmit WAVE. Changer la configuration WAVE Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer ladresse IP du serveur, lID utilisateur et le mot de passe du serveur WAVE. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 48 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' WAVE. Appuyez Appuyez sur serveur. Appuyez sur du serveur. Appuyez sur slection. pour slectionner Adresse du pour changer l'adresse pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Appuyez sur pour un ID utilisateur. pour changer l'ID dutilisateur. pour effectuer la slection. jusquau Mot de passe. Appuyez pour afficher ou modifier le mot de passe Appuyez sur sur WAVE. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias s'affichent sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'alias du groupe WAVE s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Appuyez sur jusqu Appliquer. Appuyez sur 3 Faites un des suivants :
7 8 pour appliquer toutes les modifications apportes. L'cran affiche un mini-avis positif avant de revenir momentanment l'cran Paramtres de la radio. Appels de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels de groupe partir dun canal WAVE. 1 Slectionnez le canal WAVE qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe voulu. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond.L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre 49 Franais (Canada) et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. 50 Oprations Capacity Max Capacity Max est un systme radio ADF bas sur des canaux. Les fonctions qui sont disponibles pour les utilisateurs radio en vertu de ce systme sont disponibles dans le prsent chapitre. Bouton dmission (PTT) Le bouton PTT a deux fonctions principales. Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel. Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si la tonalit dautorisation ou leffet local PTT est activ, attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ (programm par le dtaillant), une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible (la radio qui reoit la Franais (Canada) transmission) relche le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. La tonalit continue dun signal dinterdiction se fait entendre si votre appel est interrompu, par exemple si la radio reoit un appel durgence. Dans ce cas, relchez le bouton PTT. Touches programmables Selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur une touche, votre revendeur peut programmer les touches programmables pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appui bref Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appui long Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:
Voir Fonctionnement d'urgence la page 447 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 51 Franais (Canada) Fonctions attribuables de la radio Les fonctions suivantes de la radio peuvent tre attribues aux boutons programmables par le dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Ambiance audio Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner un environnement dans lequel la radio fonctionne. Profils audio Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner le profil audio prfr. Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. 52 Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Contacts Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts. Avertissement d'appel Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts de la radio afin de slectionner le destinataire d'un avertissement d'appel. Journal des appels Permet d'ouvrir le journal des appels. Urgence Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Quitter la diffusion publique (PA) Faire basculer le routage de l'audio entre l'amplificateur/
haut-parleur PA connect et le systme de sonorisation interne de la radio. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Franais (Canada) Localisation interne Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de localisation interne. Tlphone Permet laccs direct la liste des contacts du tlphone. Audio intelligent Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Cryptage Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Num. manuelle Permet deffectuer un appel individuel en entrant un ID dabonn. Itinrance de site manuelle Lance une recherche de site manuelle. CGA Mic. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. Notifications Permet l'accs direct la liste des notifications. Accs direct Lance directement un appel de diffusion, individuel, tlphonique ou de groupe, un avertissement d'appel ou un message texte rapide prdfini. Fonction de carte d'option Active ou dsactive les fonctions de la carte d'option sur les canaux qui les utilisent. Diffusion publique (PA) Active/dsactive le systme PA interne de la radio. Alias et ID de la radio Indique l'alias et l'ID de la radio. coute distance Active le microphone d'une radio cible sans indication. Info site Affiche le nom et lID du site Capacity Max actuel. Transmet les messages vocaux pour le site actuel pour le site actuel lorsque lAnnonce vocale est active. Verrouillage de site Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Contrle de la tlmtrie Permet de contrler la broche de sortie sur une radio locale ou distante. 53 Franais (Canada) Message texte Slectionne le menu de la messagerie texte. Basculement entre les niveaux de priorit dappel Permet votre radio de passer au niveau de priorit dappel lev/normal. Amlioration de la vibration Permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Annonces vocales pour canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Cette fonction n'est pas accessible si les annonces vocales ne sont pas actives. Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Slection de zone Permet de slectionner une zone dans une liste. Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Les fonctions ou paramtres radio suivants peuvent tre attribus aux touches programmables. Sonneries/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Rtroclairage Active ou dsactive le rtroclairage de l'cran. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Mode d'affichage Permet d'alterner entre l'activation et la dsactivation des modes d'affichage Jour et Nuit. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. 54 Accs aux fonctions programmes Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder aux fonctions programmes de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou menu et appuyez sur fonction ou entrer dans un sous-menu. jusqu' la fonction du pour slectionner une 3 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir l'cran Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir Franais (Canada) La radio quitte automatiquement le menu et revient l'cran d'accueil aprs une priode d'inactivit. Des touches de navigation se trouvent galement sur le microphone clavier. Voir Touches du microphone clavier la page 43. Indicateurs d'tat Ce chapitre explique les indicateurs d'tat et les tonalits audio utiliss par la radio. Icnes Laffichage cristaux liquides (ACL) prsente ltat de la radio, les entres de texte et des menus. Tableau 2: Icnes daffichage Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant dans la barre dtat qui apparat au haut de lcran. Les icnes sont classes par ordre dutilisation ou dapparition partir de la gauche et sont spcifiques au canal. Bluetooth connect La fonction Bluetooth est active. Licne demeure allume tant quun 55 Franais (Canada) dispositif Bluetooth distant est connect. Bluetooth non connect La fonction Bluetooth est active, mais aucun appareil Bluetooth distance nest connect. Urgence La radio est en mode durgence. Fonction GNSS disponible La fonction GNSS est active. Licne demeure allume tant que la rception dune position est disponible. Fonction GNSS non disponible La fonction GNSS est active, mais ne reoit aucune donne du satellite. Donnes volume lev La radio reoit des donnes volume lev et le canal est occup. 1 Ne sapplique quaux logiciels et au matriel les plus rcents. 56 Localisation interne disponible1 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ et disponible. Positionnement lintrieur non disponible1 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ, mais non disponible parce que la fonction Bluetooth est dsactive ou parce que la dtection des balises a t suspendue par Bluetooth. Mode Muet Le mode Muet est activ et le haut-
parleur est coup. Notification La liste de notifications comprend au moins un vnement manqu. Carte doption La fonction Carte doption est active.
(Modles dots de la fonction Carte doption uniquement.) Absence de fonction de la carte doption La fonction Carte doption est dsactive. Retardateur de programmation par radiocommunication Indique le temps restant avant le redmarrage automatique de la radio. Priorit 1 Indique le Groupe de priorit 1. Priorit 2 Indique le Groupe de priorit 2. Indicateur de puissance de signal reu (RSSI) Le nombre de barres reprsente lintensit du signal radio. Laffichage de quatre barres indique une intensit de signal maximale. Cette icne ne saffiche quen mode de rception. Franais (Canada) Suppr. rponse La suppression de rponse est active. Sonnerie seulement Le mode sonnerie est activ. Scurise La fonction Cryptage est active. Frquence partage Indique que la radio se connecte au canal de contrle partag. Sonnerie silencieuse Le mode de sonnerie silencieuse est activ. Itinrance de site La fonction ditinrance de site est active. tat Indique un nouveau message dtat. Dsactivation des tonalits Les tonalits sont dsactives. 57 Franais (Canada) Non scurise La fonction Cryptage est dsactive. Wi-Fi Excellent2 Le signal Wi-Fi est excellent. Wi-Fi bon2 Le signal Wi-Fi est bon. Wi-Fi moyen2 Le signal Wi-Fi est moyen. Wi-Fi faible2 Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. Wi-Fi non disponible2 Le signal Wi-Fi nest pas disponible. Tableau 3: Icnes de menu avanc Les icnes suivantes saffichent prs des lments de menu qui offrent un choix entre deux options ou qui prsentent un sous-menu offrant aussi deux options. Case cocher (coche) Indique que loption est slectionne. Case cocher (vide) Indique que loption nest pas slectionne. Case noire Indique que loption slectionne dans le menu comporte un sous-
menu. Tableau 4: Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth Les icnes suivantes accompagnent les lments de la liste de dispositifs Bluetooth afin de vous informer sur le type du dispositif. Dispositif audio Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif audio compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un casque dcoute. 2 Applicable uniquement pour les modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e. 58 Dispositif de donnes Bluetooth Dispositif de transfert de donnes Bluetooth, par exemple, un lecteur de codes barres. Dispositif PTT Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif PTT
(messagerie vocale instantane) compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un dispositif fonction PTT uniquement (POD). Tableau 5: Icnes dappels Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant lcran de la radio pendant un appel. Ces icnes apparaissent galement dans la liste de contacts pour indiquer le type dalias ou dID. Appel PC par Bluetooth Indique quun appel PC par Bluetooth est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) de lappel PC par Bluetooth. Franais (Canada) Priorit dappel leve Indique que le niveau de priorit dappel lev est activ. Appel de rpartition Le type de contact dappel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais dun serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. Appel de groupe/appel gnral Cette icne saffiche lorsquun appel de groupe ou un appel gnral est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du groupe. Appel individuel Cette icne saffiche lorsquun appel individuel est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) de labonn. 59 Franais (Canada) Appel de groupe comme tant un appel de groupe/gnral Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un appel de groupe/
gnral en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du groupe. Appel tlphonique comme tant un appel individuel Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un Appel individuel en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du tlphone. Tableau 6: Icnes de tickets de tche Les icnes suivantes apparaissent momentanment sur lcran dans le dossier Tickets de tche. Toutes les tches Indique toutes les tches de la liste. 60 Nouvelles tches Indique les nouvelles tches. En cours Les travaux sont en cours de transmission. Ceci saffiche avant lindication dchec ou de russite denvoi de tickets tche. chec de lenvoi Les travaux ne peuvent tre envoys. Russite de lenvoi Les travaux ont t envoys avec succs. Priorit 1 Indique le niveau de priorit 1 pour les travaux. Priorit 2 Indique le niveau de priorit 2 pour les travaux. Priorit 3 Indique le niveau de priorit 3 pour les travaux. Tableau 7: Icnes davertissement Les icnes dcrites ci-dessous saffichent momentanment lcran de la radio lors de lexcution dune tche. chec de transmission (ngatif) Laction excute na pas russi. Transmission russie (positif) Laction excute a russi. Transmission en cours (transitoire) Transmission en cours. Cette icne saffiche avant lindication de russite ou dchec de la transmission. Tableau 8: Icnes des lments envoys Les icnes ci-dessous apparaissent dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran dans le dossier Messages envoys. Franais (Canada) En cours Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID dabonn est en attente de transmission et sera ensuite en attente de confirmation. Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID de groupe est en attente de transmission. Message personnel ou de groupe lu Le message texte a t lu. Message personnel ou de groupe non lu Le message texte na pas t lu. chec de lenvoi Le message texte ne peut tre envoy. ou ou ou ou 61 Franais (Canada) Russite de lenvoi Le message texte a t envoy. ou Voyant lumineux Le voyant DEL indique l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. Rouge clignotant La radio na pas russi lautovrification la mise sous tension. La radio reoit une transmission d'urgence. La radio effectue une transmission avec un niveau de batterie faible. La radio est maintenant hors de la zone de couverture si la fonction ARTS est configure. Mode Muet est activ. Vert continu La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio effectue une transmission. 62 La radio envoie un avertissement d'appel ou une transmission d'urgence. Vert clignotant La radio est en train de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. La radio rcupre des transmissions de programmation par radiocommunication. La radio dtecte de l'activit de radiocommunication. AVIS:
Cette activit peut influer ou non le canal programm de la radio en raison de la nature du protocole relatif aux donnes numriques. Vert clignotement double La radio reoit un appel ou des donnes cryptes. Jaune continu La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Jaune clignotant La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel. Jaune clignotement double La fonction Itinrance automatique est active. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel de groupe. La radio est verrouille. Tonalits Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-
parleur de la radio. Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Tonalits audio La fonction Tonalits audio vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Franais (Canada) Tonalit priodique Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Tonalit rptitive Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Son entendu une fois pendant une courte priode dfinie par la radio. Tonalits d'avertissement Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec 63 Franais (Canada) Enregistrement Il y a un certain nombre de messages lis l'enregistrement que vous pouvez recevoir. Enregistrement En rgle gnrale, l'enregistrement est envoy au systme lors de la mise sous tension, d'un changement de groupe d'appels ou durant l'itinrance de site. Si une radio ne parvient pas s'enregistrer sur un site, la radio tente automatiquement de se connecter un autre site. La radio supprime temporairement le site o l'enregistrement a t tent de la liste d'itinrance. L'indication signifie que la radio est occupe chercher un site pour l'itinrance ou qu'elle a russi trouver un site, mais est en attente d'une rponse aux messages d'enregistrement de la radio. Lorsque Enregistrement est affich sur la radio, une tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. Si les indications persistent, l'utilisateur doit changer d'emplacements ou s'il est autoris, manuellement se connecter un autre site. 64 Hors de porte Une radio est juge hors de porte lorsqu'elle est incapable de dtecter un signal provenant du systme ou du site actuel. Rgle gnrale, cette indication signifie que la radio est l'extrieur de plage de couverture radio de la radiofrquence sortante gographique. Lorsque Hors de porte s'affiche sur la radio, une tonalit rptitive retentit et le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Contactez votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme si la radio reoit encore des indications comme tant hors de porte tout en tant dans une zone bnficiant d'une bonne couverture RF. chec d'affiliation au groupe d'appels Une radio tente de s'affilier au groupe d'appels spcifi dans les canaux ou la position du bouton unifie (UKP) au cours de l'enregistrement. Une radio qui est dans un tat d'chec d'affiliation ne peut pas mettre ou recevoir des appels du groupe d'appels auquel la radio tente de s'affilier. Lorsqu'une radio est incapable de s'affilier un groupe d'appels, UKP alias (alias KP) s'affiche dans l'cran d'accueil avec un arrire-plan en surbrillance. Contactez votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme si la radio reoit des indications d'chec d'affiliation. Enregistrement refus Les indicateurs d'enregistrement refus sont reus lorsque l'enregistrement avec le systme n'est pas accept. La radio n'indique pas l'utilisateur radio la raison exacte du refus de l'enregistrement. Normalement, un enregistrement est refus lorsque l'oprateur du systme a dsactiv l'accs de la radio au systme. Lorsque l'enregistrement est refus la radio, Refus enregistrem. est affich sur la radio et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. Slection des zones et des canaux Ce chapitre dcrit la procdure pour slectionner une zone ou un canal sur votre radio. La radio peut tre programme avec un maximum de 250 zones Capacity Max avec un maximum de 160 canaux par zone. Chaque zone Capacity Max contient un maximum de 16 positions attribuables. Franais (Canada) Slection des zones Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone requise sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Slection de zone. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 ou jusqu' Zone. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. et la zone courante. jusqu' la zone voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. 65 Franais (Canada) Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone voulue l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou jusqu' Zone. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. et la zone actuelle. 3 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 4 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. 66 La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 5 pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. Slection dun type dappel Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un type d'appel. Il peut s'agir d'un appel de groupe, d'un appel de diffusion, d'un appel gnral ou d'un appel individuel, selon la programmation de votre radio. Si vous modifier la position du bouton de slection de canaux ( une position laquelle un type d'appel est affect), la radio s'enregistrera nouveau sur le systme Capacity Max. La radio s'enregistre en utilisant l'ID de groupe d'appels qui a t programm pour le nouveau type d'appel de la position du bouton de slection de canal. Franais (Canada) tant donn que votre radio ne peut pas fonctionner lorsqu'un canal non programm est slectionn, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal programm. L'cran de la radio affiche le message Recherche et poursuit la recherche dans la liste des sites. La radio reviendra au site prcdent si celui-ci est toujours disponible. Lorsque la zone requise est affiche (si vous avez plusieurs zones sur votre radio), tournez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner le type d'appel. Slectionner un site Un site fournit la couverture pour une zone particulire. Dans les rseaux multisites, la radio Capacity Max recherche automatiquement un nouveau site lorsque la puissance du signal du site courant chute sous un niveau inacceptable. Le systme Capacity Max peut prendre en charge jusqu'
250 sites. Demande ditinrance Une demande d'itinrance dit la radio de rechercher un autre site, mme si le signal du site courant est acceptable. Si aucun site n'est disponible :
AVIS:
Ceci est programm par votre dtaillant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Itinrance de site manuelle. Une tonalit retentit pour indiquer que la radio est passe un nouveau site. L'cran affiche ID du site <Numro du site>. Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :
Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. 67 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche Site verrouill. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :
Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. Restriction de site Pour les systmes Capacity Max, votre administrateur de systme radio est en mesure de dcider quels sites rseau sont autoriss ou non. Il n'est pas ncessaire de reprogrammer votre radio pour modifier la liste des sites autoriss et non autoriss. Si votre radio tente de s'inscrire sur un site non autoris, votre radio reoit l'indication que le site est refus. La radio recherche alors un autre site rseau. Lorsque vous rencontrez des restrictions de site, votre radio affiche Refus enregistrement et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. 68 ADF de site Un site doit tre en mesure de communiquer avec le contrleur de site ADF pour tre considr comme un systme ADF. Si le site ne parvient pas communiquer avec le tronon contrleur de site ADF, alors la radio entre en mode ADF de site. Lorsqu'en mode ADF de site, la radio envoie une indication audible et visuelle priodiquement pour informer l'utilisateur de sa fonctionnalit limite. Lorsqu'une radio est en ADF de site, la radio affiche Res. partag. Site et une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Les radios en mode ADF de site sont toujours en mesure de passer des appels vocaux, individuels ou de groupe ainsi que d'envoyer des messages texte d'autres radios du mme site. Les consoles vocales, les enregistreurs de journalisation, les passerelles de tlphone et les applications de donnes ne peuvent communiquer avec les radios sur le site. Une fois qu'elle est en mode ADF de site, une radio qui participe des appels sur des sites multiples ne sera en mesure de communiquer qu'avec d'autres radios au sein d'un mme site. La communication en provenance et en destination d'autres sites pourraient tre perdues. AVIS:
S'il y a plusieurs sites qui couvrent l'emplacement actuel de la radio et l'un des sites passe en mode ADF de site, les radios vont se connecter un autre site dans la couverture. Appels Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations pour recevoir et rpondre des appels, en faire et y mettre fin. Vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe une fois que vous avez slectionn un canal l'aide d'une de ces fonctions :
Recherche d'alias Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel individuel ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. Liste de contacts Cette mthode permet d'accder directement la liste des contacts. Numrotation manuelle ( partir de Contacts) Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel individuel ou un appel tlphonique partir du microphone clavier. Franais (Canada) Touches numriques programmes Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel individuel ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. AVIS:
Vous ne pouvez attribuer qu'un seul alias ou ID une touche numrique, mais vous pouvez attribuer plus d'une touche numrique un alias ou un ID. Toutes les touches numriques du microphone clavier peuvent tre attribues. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. Touche programme daccs direct Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire des appels de groupe, individuel et tlphonique. Vous pouvez attribuer uniquement un ID une touche d'accs direct programmable avec un appui prolong ou bref. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. Bouton programmable Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel tlphonique. 69 Franais (Canada) Bouton Volume/Canal Cette mthode slectionne manuellement un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. AVIS:
Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu durant la transmission dun appel crypt et met un clignotement double en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de confidentialit ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 487. Appels de groupe Votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie d'un groupe pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou de passer un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs. 70 Appels de groupe Pour tre en mesure de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels de groupe partir de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 66. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias s'affichent sur la premire ligne de l'cran. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. pour Franais (Canada) Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Le message Appel de groupe et l'icne Appel de groupe s'affichent sur la deuxime ligne. 71 Franais (Canada) 5 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 7 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. pour Appels de groupe faits laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 72 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. 4 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur pour mettre fin un appel de groupe. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. Franais (Canada) Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la recherche d'alias Vous pouvez galement utiliser un alias ou une recherche alphanumrique pour rcuprer l'alias d'un abonn. Cette fonction n'est accessible qu'au moyen de la liste des contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer n'importe quel type d'appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur d'abonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. 73 Franais (Canada) pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur l'entre slectionne est vide, une tonalit d'indication ngative se fait entendre et l'cran indique No. tl. invalide. ou pour un appel Appuyez sur tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection.. Si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code d'accs :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code d'accs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit pour DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de l'une des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche d'accs direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 8 pour mettre fin lappel. Si le Appuyez sur code de libration n'est pas prconfigur dans la 4 5 74 pour liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code de retrait d'accs, puis appuyez sur continuer. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et l'cran affiche Fin de lappel tl.. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, votre radio retourne l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque l'utilisateur a termin d'utiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Fin appel tl.. Si l'appel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par l'appel tlphonique, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. 9 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre Franais (Canada) et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit se fait entendre.Lcran affiche Appel termin. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. pour 75 Franais (Canada) ou pour quitter la AVIS:
Pendant l'accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche d'alias. Appuyez sur la touche recherche d'alias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/
retrait d'accs ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Rponse un appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel de groupe sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 76 L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Appel de diffusion Un appel de diffusion est un appel vocal de n'importe quel utilisateur un groupe d'appels en entier. La fonction Appel de diffusion permet uniquement au lanceur d'appel de transmettre au groupe d'appels, mais les destinataires de l'appel ne peuvent pas rpondre. L'initiateur de la diffusion peut galement mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou pour appeler ce dernier, votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie de ce groupe. Franais (Canada) Appels de diffusion Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels de diffusion partir de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 66. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.L'cran affiche l'icne et l'alias Appel groupe. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 77 Franais (Canada) L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. pour Appels de diffusion faits laide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de diffusion l'aide de la liste de contacts. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 78 L'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Le message Appel de groupe et l'icne Appel de groupe s'affichent sur la deuxime ligne. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. pour Appels de diffusion faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de diffusion l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. pour Franais (Canada) Rception d'appels de diffusion Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir des appels de diffusion sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un Appel de diffusion :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 79 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Les destinataires ne sont pas en mesure de rpondre lors d'un appel de diffusion. L'cran affiche Rponse interdite. La tonalit de rponse interdite retentit pendant un court instant si l'utilisateur appuie sur le bouton PTT pendant un appel de diffusion. Appel individuel Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il existe deux manires de configurer un appel individuel. Le premier type d'appel est appel appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission
(OACSU). Le mode OACSU dfinit l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio et met fin automatiquement l'appel. Le second type est appel tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU). Le mode FOACSU dfinit galement l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio. Cependant, un accus de rception de l'utilisateur est requis pour les appels FOACSU afin de terminer l'appel et permettre l'utilisateur d'accepter ou de refuser l'appel. 80 Le type d'appel est configur par l'administrateur systme. AVIS:
Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur le bouton
. Excution dun appel individuel Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel individuel. Si cette fonction n'est pas active, vous entendrez une tonalit dindication ngative lorsque vous lancez l'appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels privs partir de la radio.Si la radio cible n'est pas disponible, une courte tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Appel non disponible. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 66. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne dappel individuel, l'alias de l'abonn et l'tat de l'appel. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur le bouton
. Franais (Canada) Appels individuels faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv. dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. 81 Franais (Canada) 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias de destination. 4 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur
. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. Appels individuels faits l'aide de la recherche d'alias 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 82 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur d'abonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. Tl. Invalide. ou pour un appel Appuyez sur tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection.. Si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code d'accs :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur Franais (Canada) 8 pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Si le code de libration n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code pour continuer. de libration, puis appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, votre radio retourne l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message 83 Franais (Canada) Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 9 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur
. AVIS:
Pendant l'accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche d'alias. Appuyez sur la touche recherche d'alias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. pour quitter la ou 84 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche La fonction d'appel direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quun seul alias ou ID un bouton d'appel direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs boutons d'appel directs pour votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'appel direct programm pour passer un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'appel individuel. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur le bouton
. Appels individuels faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Modifier les ID d'abonn composs prcdemment et appuyez sur continuer. pour 6 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 85 Franais (Canada) 7 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 8 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. Rception d'un appel individuel Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (OACSU) :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 9 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur
. AVIS:
Selon la configuration de votre radio, soit en mode appel individuel OACSU, soit en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU), rpondre des appels individuels peut ncessiter ou non un accus de rception de l'utilisateur. Pour la configuration OACSU, la sourdine est dsactive et l'appel se connecte automatiquement. Accepter des appels individuels Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU) :
86 Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 1 Pour accepter un appel individuel configur comme FOACSU, effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes :
Appuyez sur appuyez sur individuel. ou Accepter, puis pour rpondre un appel Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur
. Refus des appels individuels Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU) :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Pour refuser un appel individuel configur comme FOACSU, effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes :
Appuyez sur appuyez sur individuel. Appuyez sur individuel. Rejeter, puis ou pour refuser un appel pour refuser un appel 87 Franais (Canada) Appels gnraux Un appel gnral est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle et destin toutes les radios prsentes sur le site ou toutes les radios sur un groupe de sites, selon la configuration du systme. Un appel gnral sert diffuser des annonces importantes qui sollicitent toute l'attention des utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs du systme ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel gnral. Le mode Capacity Max prend en charge l'appel gnral de site et appel gnral multisite. L'administrateur systme peut configurer une ou les deux actions dans votre radio. AVIS:
Les abonns peuvent prendre en charge tous les appels de l'ensemble du systme, mais l'infrastructure Motorola Solutions ne prend pas en charge tous les appels de l'ensemble du systme. Appel gnral Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels gnraux partir de la radio. 88 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe Appel gnral en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 66. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multi-sites selon le type de configuration. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin tous les appels. pour Franais (Canada) Appels gnraux faits laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels gnraux l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin tous les appels. pour Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. Appels gnraux faits laide de la recherche dalias 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.Lcran affiche Appel de groupe et Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite selon le type de configuration. 1 2 3 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. 89 Franais (Canada) ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur d'abonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. Tl. Invalide. jusqu' Appeler. Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code daccs :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne pour continuer. En cas de 3 4 5 90 dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 8 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Si le code de libration n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code de libration, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, votre radio retourne l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin tous les appels. pour Rception dun appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel gnral, voici ce qui arrive :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'ID de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. La deuxime ligne affiche Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite selon le type de configuration. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. la fin de l'appel, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la rception de l'appel gnral. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la 91 Franais (Canada) radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, ce qui indique que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral. sur le systme. Vrifiez auprs de votre administrateur systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. AVIS:
La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements tant que l'appel est en cours. Excution dun appel tlphonique Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels tlphoniques partir de la radio. Appels tlphoniques Un appel tlphonique est un appel entre une radio individuelle ou un groupe de radios et un tlphone. Selon la faon dont la radio est configure, les fonctions suivantes peuvent tre disponibles ou non :
Doubles tonalits multi-frquence (DTMF) Code de non-accs Affichage de lalias ou de lID de lappelant sur rception dun appel tlphonique Possibilit de refuser ou daccepter un appel tlphonique La capacit dappel tlphonique peut tre active par lattribution et la configuration des numros de tlphone 92 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs une touche pour lalias ou lID prdfini. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche le message Code daccs :. 2 Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. pour 3 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 5 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. 6 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 7 Faites un des suivants :
Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Si la touche Accs une touche Franais (Canada) nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez les deux dernires tapes qui prcdent ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. Acheminement dappels tlphoniques laide de la touche programmable Suivez la procdure pour passer un appel tlphonique laide de la touche programmable. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Tlphone pour accder au rpertoire tlphonique. 93 Franais (Canada) ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche le message Code daccs:. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. pour continuer. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias de labonn ou son ID et ltat de lappel. Si la configuration dappel russit :
La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias de labonn ou son ID, Appel tl et ltat de lappel. Si la configuration dappel choue :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel tl. chou. 2 94 Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 3 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 4 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. Lcran affiche Chiffres suppl.: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 5 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. pour continuer. Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche Code de libration:. Entrez le code de retrait daccs, puis appuyez sur La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite de la configuration de fin dappel, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. En cas dchec de la prparation de lappel, votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque lcran des contacts tlphoniques est affich, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel
(une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal et la transmission du code daccs/non-accs ou dchiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Volume/
Marche/Arrt Bouton de volume et Canal prcdent/suivantSlecteur de canal rpondent. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 95 Franais (Canada) Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques laide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que vous tes sur lcran Contacts tlphoniques :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Lcran affiche App. OK pour placer appel. Si lentre slectionne est vide :
1 2 3 96 4 5 Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Lcran affiche No dappel tlphonique non valide. ou jusqu Appeler. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Lcran affiche Code daccs : si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur. pour Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Lcran affiche Appels, lalias ou lID de labonn et licne Appel tl. Si lappel est russi :
La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de labonn, licne Appel tl et Appel tl. Si lappel nest pas russi :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche chec de lappel tlphonique, puis, Code daccs :. Si le code daccs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran prcdant la tentative dappel. 6 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Licne RSSI disparat. 7 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 8 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la Franais (Canada) radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. 9 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 10 Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 9 et tape 10 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone ait termin lappel. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque lcran des contacts tlphoniques est 97 Franais (Canada) affich, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 98 AVIS:
Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel (une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la recherche dalias Vous pouvez galement utiliser un alias ou une recherche alphanumrique pour rcuprer lalias dun abonn. Cette fonction nest accessible quau moyen de la liste des contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels laide de la recherche dalias partir de la radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur dabonn voulu. ou jusqu lalias ou lID pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. Tl. Invalide. jusqu Appeler. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste des contacts, lcran affiche Code daccs: et Franais (Canada) pour continuer. un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur En cas de russite :
La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de labonn, licne RSSI, Appel tl et licne Appel tl. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. 99 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. Lcran affiche Chiffres suppl.: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur DTMF se fait entendre pour continuer. La tonalit Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si lentre de la touche Accs une touche est vide, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. pour mettre fin lappel. Appuyez sur Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste des contacts, lcran affiche Code de libration: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code de retrait daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite :
pour 8 100 Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec :
Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. ou pour quitter la AVIS:
Pendant laccs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche dalias. Appuyez sur la touche recherche dalias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/retrait daccs ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques laide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. 1 2 3 4 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Numrotation pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur tlphone. Appuyez sur slection. Lcran affiche Numro : et un curseur clignotant. jusquau Numro de pour effectuer la 5 Saisissez le numro de tlphone, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Lcran affiche Code daccs : et un curseur clignotant si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur. 101 Franais (Canada) 6 Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias de labonn et ltat de lappel. Si lappel est russi :
La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche lalias de labonn et licne Appel tl. Si lappel nest pas russi :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche chec de lappel tlphonique, puis, Code daccs :. Si le code daccs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran prcdant la tentative dappel. 8 Faites un des suivants :
Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 7 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 7 102 AVIS:
Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque vous tes dans lcran de contacts, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appuyez sur OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel termin. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel
(une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Franais (Canada) Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Multifrquence deux tonalits La fonction Multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) permet d'utiliser un systme radio dot d'une interface de systme tlphonique. Vous pouvez dsactiver la tonalit DTMF en dsactivant toutes les tonalits et alertes de la radio. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio la page 215. Excution dun appel DTMF Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels DTMF partir de la radio. 103 Franais (Canada) 1 Maintenez le bouton de transmission PTT enfonc. 2 Faites un des suivants :
Entrez le numro voulu pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel gnral, la radio rceptrice ne peut pas parler ou rpondre. L'utilisateur destinataire n'est pas non plus autoris mettre fin l'appel gnral. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel gnral :
L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'cran affiche Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite selon le type de configuration et l'Appel tlphonique. 104 Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe :
Lcran affiche licne Appel tl et Appel tl. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 3 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Votre radio nest pas en mesure de mettre fin un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe. Lutilisateur du tlphone doit mettre fin lappel. Lutilisateur destinataire est uniquement autoris rpondre au cours de lappel. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl et Appel tl. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 3 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel individuel :
2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 3 pour mettre fin lappel. Appuyez sur AVIS:
Votre radio nest pas en mesure de mettre fin un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe. Lutilisateur du tlphone doit mettre fin lappel. Lutilisateur destinataire est uniquement autoris rpondre au cours de lappel. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. 105 Franais (Canada) Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 3 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. Priorit d'appel La Priorit d'appel permet une radio d'arrter toute transmission vocale en cours et de lancer une transmission prioritaire. Grce la fonction Priorit d'appel, le systme des interrompt et place en priorit des appels en cours dans les cas o les canaux de ressources partages sont indisponibles. Des appels de priorit plus leve, comme un appel d'urgence ou un appel gnral passent en priorit sur la radio l'origine de la transmission afin de rpondre l'appel de priorit suprieure. En l'absence d'autres canaux de radiofrquence (RF) disponibles, un appel d'urgence passe en priorit sur un appel gnral aussi. Interruption vocale L'interruption vocale permet l'utilisateur d'arrter une transmission vocale en cours. 106 Cette fonction utilise la composition de canal inverse pour arrter la transmission vocale en cours d'une radio, si la radio interrompue est configure pour l'interruption vocale et que la radio mettrice est configure pour pouvoir interrompre un appel vocal. La radio interrompue est alors autorise mettre une transmission vocale vers le participant dont l'appel est arrt. La fonction Interruption vocale amliore considrablement la probabilit de fournir une nouvelle transmission selon aux parties vises lorsqu'un appel est en cours. L'utilisateur accs l'interruption vocale uniquement si cette fonction a t configure. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Activation de l'interruption vocale Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction Interruption vocale sur votre radio. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 1 Pour interrompre la transmission pendant un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Sur la radio interrompue, l'cran affiche Appel termin. Une tonalit d'chec retentit tant que le bouton PTT n'est pas relch. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Franais (Canada) Fonctions avances Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. Cependant, votre dtaillant ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut avoir personnalis votre radio en fonction de vos besoins particuliers. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Files dattente dappels Lorsquil ny a pas de ressources disponibles pour traiter un appel, les files dattente dappels permettent de placer la demande dappel dans la file dattente du systme pour les prochaines ressources disponibles. Vous entendez une tonalit de file dattente dappels aprs avoir appuy sur le bouton PTT et lcran de la radio affiche Attente appel, ce qui indique que la radio est passe ltat de file dattente dappels. Le bouton PTT peut tre relch ds que la tonalit de File dattente dappels se fait entendre. Si la configuration de lappel est tablie, ce qui suit se produit :
107 Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Si cette option est active, la tonalit dautorisation se fait entendre. Lcran affiche licne du type dappel, lID ou lalias. Lutilisateur de la radio a jusqu 4 secondes pour appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour commencer transmission vocale. Si la configuration de lappel choue, ce qui suit se produit :
Si cette option est active, la tonalit de rejet se fait entendre. Lcran affiche lavis dchec pendant un court instant. Lappel est termin et la radio quitte la configuration des appels. Appel prioritaire La fonction dappel prioritaire permet au systme de traiter en priorit un des appels non prioritaires sortants et dinitier lappel priorit leve demand lorsque tous les canaux sont occups. Quand tous les canaux sont occups traiter des appels priorit leve, le systme ne traite aucun appel en priorit et place lappel priorit leve dorigine dans la file 108 dattente des appels. Si le systme ne russit pas placer lappel priorit leve dorigine dans la file dattente des appels, il gnre un avis dchec. Les paramtres par dfaut pour la fonction dappel prioritaire sont prconfigurs. Appuyez sur le bouton programmable pour basculer entre les niveaux de priorit normal et lev. Lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions suivantes, le niveau de priorit de lappel revient automatiquement au rglage prconfigur. Tous les appels vocaux Message texte DMR /Message texte Bon de travail coute distance AVIS:
Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les lments suivants sont les types dappel prioritaire :
Priorit leve La radio affiche Appel suivant : Priorit leve. Licne Priorit dappel leve saffiche dans le haut de lcran de votre radio. Lannonce vocale Appel suivant se fait entendre :
Priorit leve. Priorit normale La radio affiche Appel suivant : Prior. normale. Licne Priorit dappel leve disparat. Lannonce vocale Appel suivant se fait entendre :
Priorit normale. Balayage de groupe dappels Cette fonction permet votre radio d'couter et de joindre des appels pour des groupes dfinis dans une liste de groupe d'appels de rception. Lorsque la fonction de balayage est active, l'icne de balayage apparat dans la barre d'tat et le voyant DEL clignote en jaune. Votre radio dsactive tous les membres de sa liste de groupe de rception. Lorsque le balayage est dsactiv, votre radio ne reoit pas de transmission d'un membre de la liste de groupe de rception, sauf pour l'appel et le groupe slectionn. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Balayage de groupe peut tre configur par le CPS. Vrifiez auprs de votre administrateur systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe sur votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Balayer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. 109 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Eteindre. pour effectuer la slection. Si le balayage est activ :
L'cran affiche Balayage activ et l'icne Balayage. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si le balayage est dsactiv :
L'cran affiche Balayage dsactiv. L'icne de balayage disparat. Le voyant DEL s'teint. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Liste de groupe de rception La Liste de groupe de rception flexible vous permet de crer et d'affecter des membres la liste de groupe de rception. Cette liste est cre lors de la programmation de votre radio et dtermine les groupes qui peuvent tre balays. Votre radio peut prendre en charge un maximum de 16 membres dans la liste. 110 Si votre radio a t programme pour vous permettre de modifier la liste de balayage, vous pouvez :
Ajouter ou supprimer des groupes. Ajouter, supprimer ou modifier la priorit des groupes. Reportez-vous la section Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels la page 111. Ajouter, supprimer ou modifier l'affiliation des groupes. Reportez-vous Ajout d'affiliation de groupe la page 113 et Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe la page 114. Remplacer la liste de balayage avec une nouvelle liste de balayage. IMPORTANT:
Pour ajouter des membres dans la liste, le groupe doit d'abord tre configur dans la radio. AVIS:
Cette dernire est programme par l'administrateur systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) Surv. prioritaire La fonction Surveillance prioritaire permet la radio de recevoir automatiquement les transmissions de groupes avec une priorit suprieure, mme lorsqu'elle est sur appel de groupe. La radio quitte l'appel de groupe de priorit infrieure pour les appels de groupe de priorit plus leve. AVIS:
Cette fonction est accessible uniquement lorsque le balayage de groupe est activ. La fonction Surveillance prioritaire s'applique uniquement aux membres de la liste de groupe de rception. Il y a deux groupes de priorit : priorit 1 (P1) et priorit 2 (P2). P1 est une priorit suprieure P2. Dans le systme Capacity Max, la radio reoit une transmission en fonction de l'ordre de priorit ci-dessous :
1 Appel d'urgence pour le groupe P1 2 Appel d'urgence pour le groupe P2 3 Appel d'urgence pour les groupes de conversation non prioritaire dans la liste de groupe de rception 4 Tous les appels 5 Appel de groupe P1 6 Appel de groupe P2 7 Groupes non prioritaires dans la liste de groupe de rception Consultez la section Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels la page 111 pour en savoir plus sur la faon d'ajouter, de retirer ou de modifier la priorit pour les groupes dans la liste de balayage. AVIS:
Cette fonction est programme par l'administrateur de systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels Dans le menu Balayage de groupe, vous pouvez afficher ou modifier la priorit d'un groupe. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Balayer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 111 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur modifier la liste. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Voir ou pour jusqu'au groupe voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La priorit est indique par l'icne Priorit 1 ou Priorit 2 ct du groupe. ou Appuyez sur priorits. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Modifier les pour effectuer la ou jusqu'au niveau de Appuyez sur priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. Si un autre groupe a t attribu en priorit 1 ou priorit 2, vous pouvez choisir d'craser la priorit. Lorsque l'cran affiche Remplacer?, appuyez sur pour effectuer la ou sur pour les options suivantes :
112 Non pour retourner l'tape prcdente. Oui pour remplacer. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran prcdent. L'icne de priorit s'affiche ct du groupe d'appels. Affiliation de groupes multiples Dans un systme Capacity Max, votre radio peut tre configure pour un maximum de sept groupes un site. Des 16 groupes dans la liste de groupe de rception, jusqu' sept groupes peuvent tre attribus titre de l'affiliation de groupe. Le groupe slectionn et la priorit des groupes de conversation sont automatiquement affilis. AVIS:
Cette fonction est programme par l'administrateur de systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Ajout d'affiliation de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter une affiliation de groupe. 5 ou Appuyez sur affiliation. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Modif. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur modifier la liste. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Voir ou pour Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Activer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. Lorsque Activ est slectionn, de l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. apparat ct jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID de ou Appuyez sur groupe voulu. Appuyez sur slection. L'tat d'affiliation est affich dans Afficher/
modifier la liste. L'cran affiche l'alias ou de l'ID du groupe slectionn. pour effectuer la ct de Si l'affiliation est russie, l'cran affiche ou l'ID de groupe. Si l'affiliation n'est pas russie, ou l'ID de groupe. ct de l'alias demeure ct de l'alias 113 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
La radio affiche le message Liste pleine quand un maximum de sept groupes est slectionn pour l'affiliation dans la liste de balayage. Pour slectionner un nouveau groupe pour l'affiliation, supprimer un groupe associ pour faire place la nouvelle. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe la page 114. Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe Lorsque la liste d'affiliations est pleine et que vous souhaitez slectionner un nouveau groupe pour l'affiliation, supprimer un groupe dj associ pour faire place la nouvelle. Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer une affiliation de groupe. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 114 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur modifier la liste. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Voir ou pour jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID de ou Appuyez sur groupe voulu. Appuyez sur slection. L'tat d'affiliation est affich dans Afficher/
modifier la liste. L'cran affiche l'alias ou de l'ID du groupe slectionn. pour effectuer la ct de ou Appuyez sur affiliation. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Modif. pour effectuer la jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Lorsque Dsactiv est slectionn, ct de l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. apparat TalkBack (rponse) La fonction Talkback vous permet de rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage. Si votre radio balaye un appel partir de la liste de balayage de groupe slectionner, et si le bouton PTT est actionn au cours du balayage d'appel, le fonctionnement de la radio dpendra de l'activation ou de la dsactivation de l'option Talkback pendant la programmation de la radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. La fonction Talkback est dsactive La radio abandonne l'appel balay et tente de transmettre au contact pour la position de canal slectionne. Aprs expiration du temps de maintien d'appel sur le contact actuellement slectionn, la radio revient au canal d'accueil et dmarre la minuterie de mise en attente du balayage. La radio reprend le balayage de groupe aprs que le dlai d'attente du balayage soit coul. La fonction Talback est active Si le bouton PTT est actionn durant le temps de maintien de l'appel de groupe balay, la radio essaie de transmettre au groupe balay. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui n'est pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que l'appel se termine, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir rpondre ce groupe. Bluetooth Cette fonctionnalit vous permet d'utiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par l'intermdiaire d'une connexion Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts l'emploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. C'est--
dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Pour obtenir un haut degr de fiabilit, Motorola Solutions recommande de ne pas sparer la radio et l'accessoire. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et l'appareil Bluetooth ( moins 115 Franais (Canada) de 10 m l'un de l'autre) afin de rtablir la rception. La fonction Bluetooth de votre radio a une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m. Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu' trois connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Vous pouvez connecter, par exemple, un couteur, un scanneur et un appareil PTT. Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation de votre dispositif Bluetooth pour plus de dtails sur l'ensemble des possibilits de votre priphrique compatible Bluetooth. AVIS:
Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes d'appareil Bluetooth est efface. Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 116 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Mon tat. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Activ et Arrt. L'tat actuel est indiqu par l'icne
. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth disponibles. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Recherche pour trouver des appareils disponibles. Appuyez ou sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. pour effectuer la slection. 5 jusqu' Connecter. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. L'cran affiche le message Connexion
<appareil>. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. L'cran affiche En cas d'chec :
ct de l'appareil slectionn. 117 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. AVIS:
Si un code NIP est ncessaire, voir la section Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe la page 201. Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth en mode dtection. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Me chercher. pour effectuer la slection. Votre 1 2 3 118 radio peut maintenant tre dtecte par d'autres appareils Bluetooth pendant une dure programme. Il s'agit du Mode dtection. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. ct de l'appareil slectionn. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous dconnecter de dispositifs Bluetooth. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Dconnecter. ou Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche le message Dconnexion de
<appareil>. AVIS:
Il est possible que la dconnexion de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. Attendez la confirmation. Franais (Canada) Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <appareil> dconnect et l'icne Bluetooth connect disparat. Le disparat ct du de l'appareil connect. Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour faire basculer l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Rout. audio vers radio. Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Rout. audio vers Bluetooth. 119 Franais (Canada) Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les dtails de l'appareil sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou dtails. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Afficher les pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 5 120 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif Vous pouvez retirer un dispositif dconnect de la liste des dispositifs Bluetooth. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dispositif supprim. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Supprimer. Gain du micro Bluetooth Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur de contrler la valeur du gain du microphone de l'appareil Bluetooth connect. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Gain mic. BT. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu'au type de gain du Appuyez sur micro Bluetooth et aux valeurs courantes. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Vous pouvez modifier les valeurs ici. ou Appuyez sur diminuer les valeurs. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour augmenter ou pour Franais (Canada) Localisation interne AVIS:
La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Emplacement doit tre utilis pour assurer le suivi de l'emplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 121 Franais (Canada) b. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth pour slectionner. c. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. d. Appuyez sur pour activer le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. e. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 122 Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme. a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 2 3 4 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Localis. pour Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balises, puis pour slectionner. Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder l'information des balises d'emplacement intrieur. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Lcran affiche les informations sur les balises. Rglages multisite Ces fonctions s'appliquent lorsque le canal courant de la radio est configur pour un systme Capacity Max. Lancer une recherche de site manuelle Suivez la procdure pour dmarrer la recherche de site manuelle lorsque la puissance du signal de rception est de mauvaise qualit afin d'essayer de trouver un site avec meilleur signal. 123 Franais (Canada) Si la radio dtecte un nouveau site :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si la radio ne dtecte pas de nouveau site :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :
Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :
Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. 124 Accs la liste de sites voisins Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur de vrifier la liste des sites adjacents du site d'accueil actuel. Suivez la procdure pour accder la liste des sites voisins :
1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou voisins. Appuyez sur slection. pour voir les sites pour effectuer la Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active lorsque la radio n'est pas rgle sur le canal d'accueil pendant un certain laps de temps, voici ce qui se produit priodiquement :
La tonalit de Rappel de canal d'accueil et l'annonce sonore retentissent. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Non. La deuxime ligne affiche Canal d'accueil. Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil Lorsque survient le rappel du canal daccueil, vous pouvez le mettre en sourdine. Appuyez sur la touche programme Rappel du canal d'accueil en sourdine. La premire ligne de lcran affiche HCR et la deuxime en sourdine. Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil Lorsque le rappel du canal daccueil retentit, vous pouvez dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil. Franais (Canada) 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programmable Rinitialiser canal d'accueil pour rgler le canal courant comme nouveau canal d'accueil. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias du canal et la deuxime Nouv. canal acc. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur d'accueil. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Canal pour effectuer la 125 Franais (Canada) 5 jusqu' l'alias du ou Appuyez sur nouveau canal d'accueil. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche slectionn. ct de l'alias de canal d'accueil pour 2 coute distance Cette fonction est utilise pour activer le microphone d'une radio cible avec un alias ou un ID d'abonn. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio et la radio cible doivent tre programmes de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Si la fonction est amorce, le voyant DEL vert clignote une fois sur la radio cible. Cette fonction s'arrte automatiquement aprs une dure programme ou ds qu'une fonction de la radio cible est utilise. Lancer la fonction coute ambiance Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction de surveillance distance sur votre radio. 126 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la liste de contacts de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) jusqu' coute pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou distance Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 127 Franais (Canada) Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 6 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. 128 Modifiez les ID composs prcdemment et appuyez sur pour continuer. jusqu' coute pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur distance Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Rglages des contacts La fonction Contacts constitue le carnet d'adresses de votre radio. Chaque entre est associe un alias ou un ID que vous utilisez pour passer un appel. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. Chaque entre, selon le contexte, correspond diffrents types d'appels : Appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel de diffusion, appel gnral de site, appel gnral multisite, appel PC ou appel de rpartition. Les appels PC et les appels console rpartiteur sont des appels de donnes. Ils ne sont disponibles qu'avec les applications. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous la documentation sur les applications de donnes. De plus, le menu Contacts vous permet d'attribuer chaque entre une ou plusieurs touches numriques programmables sur un microphone clavier. Si une touche numrique est attribue une entre, votre radio peut excuter la composition rapide de l'entre. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Un crochet prcde chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si le crochet prcde le mot Vide, aucune touche numrique n'a t attribue l'entre. Chaque entre des contacts affiche les renseignements suivants :
Type d'appel Alias d'appel ID dappel AVIS:
Si la fonction Cryptage est active sur un canal, vous pouvez passer des appels de groupe, individuels, gnraux ou tlphoniques crypts sur ce canal. Seule une radio cible dote de la mme cl de cryptage OU des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Association dune entre une touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour associer des entres aux touches numriques programmables de votre radio. 129 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Contacts. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur programmable. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Touche pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Si la touche numrique voulue n'a t attribue jusqu' la une entre, appuyez sur touche numrique voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. ou Si la touche numrique voulue a t attribue une entre, l'cran affiche La cl est dj 130 affect et puis, la premire ligne de texte affiche Remplacer?. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio fait entendre une tonalit de russite et l'cran affiche Contact enregistr et un bref avis de russite. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur revenir l'cran prcdent. ou jusqu' Non pour prcde Diffrentes touches numriques peuvent tre attribues chaque entre. Le signe chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si le signe prcde Vide, la touche numrique n'est pas attribue. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Dissociation dune entre et de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure pour dissocier les entres des touches numriques programmables de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Passez tape 4. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 6 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur programmable. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Touche pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) ou jusqu' Vide. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur La premire ligne de texte affiche Supprimer de toutes les touches. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez AVIS:
Lorsqu'une entre est supprime, l'association entre l'entre et les touches numriques programmes est supprime. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Lcran affiche le message Contact enregistr. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Ajout d'un nouveau contact Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter de nouveaux contacts sur votre radio. 131 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 7 ou Appuyez sur Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou jusqu' la sonnerie Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre.L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou contact. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Nouveau pour effectuer la Rglages de l'indicateur d'appel Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de configurer un appel ou un message texte sonneries. 1 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur type de contact, soit Contact Radio, soit Contact pour effectuer la slection. tl. Appuyez sur pour slectionner le 5 Entrer le numro du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. 6 Entrer le nom du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. 132 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels privs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels privs de la radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 7 Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) jusqu' la sonnerie ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le s'affiche plus ct de Activ. pour effectuer la ne Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des messages textes Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries de messages texte sur votre radio. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appel indiv.. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 133 Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur texte. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. jusqu' Message pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. ct de la sonnerie Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels d'urgence sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 6 7 134 5 6 7 ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Aver. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. jusqu' la sonnerie pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels slectifs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs de la radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur slectif. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. jusqu' Appel pour effectuer la 135 Franais (Canada) 7 ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. jusqu' la sonnerie pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel d'tat de tlmtrie avec message texte sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 136 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Tlmtrie. Attribuer des styles de sonneries Vous pouvez programmer votre radio pour quelle mette une sonnerie particulire parmi les onze sonneries prdfinies lorsque vous recevez un appel priv, un avertissement dappel ou un message texte de la part dun contact particulier.La radio fait entendre chaque style de sonnerie lorsque vous parcourez la liste. Suivez la procdure pour attribuer des styles de sonnerie sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur Modifier. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Voir/
pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) jusqu ce que lcran affiche le indique la tonalit actuellement Appuyez sur menu Sonnerie Licne slectionne. 5 6 ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Licne jusqu la tonalit pour effectuer la saffiche ct de celui slectionn. Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Votre dtaillant peut programmer la radio pour vous alerter de faon continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 137 Franais (Canada) Fonctions du Journal des appels Votre radio fait le suivi des appels individuels que vous avez faits, que vous avez reus et que vous avez manqus rcemment. Utilisez le journal des appels pour afficher et grer les derniers appels. Les Alertes d'appels manqus peuvent tre incluses dans les journaux d'appels, selon la configuration du systme sur votre radio. Dans chacune des listes d'appels, vous pouvez excuter les tches suivantes :
Stocker l'alias ou l'ID dans les contacts Supprimer un appel Supprimer tous les appels Afficher les dtails Affichage des derniers appels Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les derniers appels sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 138 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Les listes offertes sont Manqus, Rpondus et Sortants. jusqu la liste voulue. ou Appuyez sur Lcran affiche lentre la plus rcente. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur Vous pouvez lancer un Appel individuel avec lalias ou lID affich lcran en appuyant sur la touche PTT. pour voir la liste. Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels Suivez la procdure suivante pour stocker les alias ou les ID de la liste d'appels sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. ou jusqu' Stocker. pour effectuer la slection. 6 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez galement enregistrer un ID sans un alias. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Suppression des appels de la liste dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des appels de la liste d'appel. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si la liste est vide :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. 139 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche Liste vide. 4 5 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur l'entre?. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Supprimer pour effectuer la 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui et supprimer l'entre. L'cran affiche Entre supprime. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Non. 140 Suppression d'un appel gnral de la liste d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les appels de la liste d'appel. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 5 ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui pour supprimer toutes les entres. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Non. Affichage des dtails de la liste dappels Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des dtails de la liste d'appels sur la radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou dtails. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche les dtails. jusqu' Afficher les pour effectuer la Fonction Avertissement dappel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous 141 Franais (Canada) souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle lorsqu'il lui sera possible de le faire. Cette fonction est offerte uniquement pour les alias ou les ID d'abonn et est accessible par le menu Contacts, la numrotation manuelle ou la touche d'accs direct programme. En mode Capacity Max, la fonction Avertissement d'appel permet un utilisateur radio ou un rpartiteur d'envoyer une alerte un autre utilisateur radio lui demandant de rappeler l'utilisateur radio qui a lanc l'alerte lorsqu'il est disponible. La communication vocale n'est pas concerne par cette fonction. La Fonction Avertissement d'appel peut tre configure par le fournisseur ou par l'administrateur systme de deux manires :
La radio est configure pour permettre l'utilisateur d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour rpondre directement au lanceur d'appel par la fonction Appel individuel. La radio est configure pour permettre l'utilisateur d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT et de poursuivre avec d'autres groupes de communication. Appuyer sur le bouton PTT lors de l'entre de l'avertissement d'appel ne permettra pas l'utilisateur de rpondre au lanceur d'appel. L'utilisateur doit naviguer sur l'option Journal 142 des appels manqus dans le menu Journal d'appels et rpondre l'avertissement d'appel partir de l. Un appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission (OACSU) permet l'utilisateur de rpondre immdiatement, tandis que l'utilisateur doit accuser rception d'un appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale
(FOACSU). Par consquent, il est recommand d'utiliser la fonction Avertissement d'appel pour les appels de type OACSU. Voir Appel individuel la page 80. Excution dune alerte dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour lancer des alertes d'appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. 4 Avis d'appels faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des avis d'appel l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) jusqu' Aver. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Rponse un avertissement d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un avertissement d'appel sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un avertissement d'appel :
Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. 143 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche la liste des notifications d'avertissement d'appel accompagne de l'alias ou de l'ID de la radio de l'appelant. Selon la configuration par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme, vous pouvez rpondre un avertissement d'appel en procdant de l'une des manires suivantes :
Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et rpondez par un appel individuel directement l'appelant. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour continuer la communication de groupe d'appels normale. L'avertissement d'appel est dplac vers l'option Appel manqu dans le menu du Journal d'appels. Vous pouvez rpondre l'appelant partir du journal Appel manqu. Pour plus d'informations ce sujet, reportez-vous Liste de notifications la page 204 et Fonctions du Journal des appels la page 138. Mode Muet Le mode muet propose une option l'utilisateur de couper tous les indicateurs audio de la radio. 144 Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs l'exception des fonctions de priorit leve, comme les oprations d'urgence. Lorsque l'on quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. AVIS:
Ceci est une fonction pouvant tre achete. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet activ. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'
ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. L'cran affiche le Mode muet sur l'cran d'accueil. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet La fonction Mode muet peut tre active pour une dure prdtermine en rglant la minuterie du mode muet. La dure de la minuterie est configure dans le menu de la radio et peut tre comprise entre 0,5 et 6 heures. Le mode muet est quitt lorsque la minuterie expire. Si la minuterie est laisse 0, la radio reste en mode muet pendant une priode indfinie jusqu' ce que lon appuie sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mode muet. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur pour modifier la valeur ou
. Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. 145 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet dsactiv. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. L'icne Mode muet disparat de l'cran d'accueil. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-
parleur est rtabli. Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est arrte. AVIS:
Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. Fonctionnement durgence Une alarme d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps mme si de l'activit se droule sur le canal en cours d'utilisation. 146 En mode Capacity Max, la radio rceptrice peut prendre uniquement en charge une seule alarme d'urgence la fois. Si amorce, une deuxime alarme d'urgence a priorit sur la premire alarme. Lorsqu'une alarme d'urgence est reue, le destinataire peut choisir de supprimer l'alarme et quitter la liste des alarmes, ou il peut rpondre une alarme d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton PTT et la transmission voix sans urgence. Votre dtaillant ou administrateur de site peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf l'appui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons :
Appui bref De 0,05 0,75 seconde. Appui long De 1,00 3,75 secondes. La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. AVIS:
Si l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Votre radio prend en charge trois alarmes d'urgence :
Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal De plus, chaque alarme comprend les types suivants :
Rgulier La radio transmet un signal d'alarme et active des indicateurs sonores ou visuels. Silencieux La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio reoit les appels sans qu'aucun son ne se fasse entendre sur le haut-parleur, jusqu' ce que la priode de transmission micro ouvert Franais (Canada) programme se termine ou que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT. Silencieux avec voix La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels, mais permet aux appels entrants de se faire entendre sur le haut-parleur. AVIS:
Une seule des alarmes d'urgence ci-dessus peut tre associe la touche durgence programme ou l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied. Envoi des alarmes durgence Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence (un signal sans voix) qui dclenche une indication d'alerte sur un groupe de radios. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des alertes d'urgence partir de votre radio. Votre radio n'affiche aucun indicateur sonore ou visuel durant le mode d'urgence lorsque celui-ci est rgl sur silencieux. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Vous voyez l'un des rsultats suivants :
147 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. AVIS:
Si programme, la tonalit de recherche durgence se fait entendre. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. La tonalit de recherche d'urgence peut tre programme par le dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche le message Alarme envoye 148 En cas d'chec aprs que toutes les tentatives ont t utilises :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche le message chec de l'alarme. La radio quitte le mode d'alarme d'urgence et revient l'cran d'accueil. AVIS:
Lorsque la radio est configure pour une alarme d'urgence seulement, le processus d'urgence consiste uniquement l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence. L'urgence se termine lorsqu'un accus de rception est reu du systme ou lorsque les tentatives d'accs au canal sont puises. Aucun appel vocal n'est associ l'envoi d'une alarme d'urgence lorsque la radio fonctionne en mode Alarme d'urgence seulement. Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence avec un appel un groupe de radios ou un rpartiteur. Lorsqu'une infrastructure du groupe accuse rception de l'alarme d'urgence, le groupe de radios peut communiquer sur un canal d'urgence programm. La radio doit tre configure avec pour l'alarme et l'appel d'urgence pour effectuer un appel d'urgence aprs le processus d'alarme. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. L'icne Urgence s'affiche.Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. AVIS:
Si programme, la tonalit de recherche durgence se fait entendre. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. Si un accus de rception de l'alarme d'urgence est reu :
La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche le message Alarme envoye Franais (Canada) Votre radio passe en mode d'appel d'urgence lorsque l'cran affiche le message Urgence et l'alias du groupe de destination. Si un accus de rception de l'alarme d'urgence n'est pas reu :
Toutes les tentatives sont puises. Une tonalit grave retentit. L'cran affiche le message chec de l'alarme. La radio quitte alors le mode d'alarme d'urgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour lancer une transmission vocale. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.Lcran affiche licne Appel de groupe. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 149 Franais (Canada) 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'cran affiche l'alias de l'appelant et l'alias de groupe. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 6 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode d'urgence. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. 150 AVIS:
Selon la configuration de votre radio, vous entendrez peut-tre une tonalit d'autorisation de parler. Votre dtaillant ou administrateur de site peut vous fournir plus d'information sur la faon dont votre radio a t programme pour les urgences. L'initiateur de l'appel d'urgence peut appuyer sur la touche programme pour mettre fin l'appel d'urgence en cours. La radio revient un tat d'attente d'appel, mais l'cran d'appel d'urgence reste ouvert. Envoi d'une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal un groupe de radios. Le microphone de votre radio est automatiquement activ, vous permettant de communiquer avec le groupe de radios sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . AVIS:
Votre radio ne peut pas dtecter un microphone non IMPRES qui est attach au connecteur d'accessoire arrire. Si aucun microphone n'est dtect sur le connecteur programm indiqu, votre radio vrifie l'autre connecteur. Ainsi votre radio donne la priorit au microphone dtect. Si le mode de cycle d'urgence de votre radio est activ, les rptitions de microphone branch et de priode de rception s'appliquent pendant la dure programme. Pendant le mode de cycle d'urgence, le son des appels reus est diffus sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de rception programme, une tonalit d'interdiction se fait entendre, indiquant que vous devez librer le bouton PTT. La radio ne tient pas compte du fait que le bouton PTT est enfonc et demeure en mode d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de microphone branch programme et si vous maintenez le bouton enfonc aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, la radio continue de transmettre jusqu' ce que vous relchiez le bouton PTT. Franais (Canada) Si la demande d'alarme d'urgence choue, la radio ne fait pas d'autre tentative et passe directement l'tat de microphone branch. AVIS:
Certains accessoires ne prennent pas en charge la fonction microphone branch. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. Vous voyez un des rsultats suivants :
L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. 151 Franais (Canada) 2 Lorsque lcran affiche le message Alarme envoye, parlez clairement dans le micro. La radio cesse automatiquement de transmettre dans les cas suivants :
Si le mode Cycle durgence est activ, la dure du cycle entre micro ouvert et rception dappels arrive son terme. Aprs l'expiration de la dure de micro ouvert, le mode cycle d'urgence est dsactiv. 3 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode d'urgence. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. Rception dune alarme durgence La radio rceptrice peut prendre uniquement en charge une seule alarme d'urgence la fois. Si amorce, une deuxime alarme d'urgence a priorit sur la premire alarme. Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir et voir des alertes d'urgence sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez une alarme d'urgence :
152 Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche la liste des alarmes d'urgence, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour afficher l'alarme. Appuyez sur pour afficher les options d'action et les dtails de l'entre dans la liste des alarmes. et slectionnez Oui pour quitter la Appuyez sur liste des alarmes. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil avec une icne d'urgence affiche dans le haut, indiquant une alarme d'urgence non rsolue. L' icne d'urgence disparat une fois que l'entre dans la liste des alarmes est supprime. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Slectionnez Liste des alarmes pour consulter de nouveau la liste des alarmes. 6 La tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL rouge clignote jusqu ce que vous quittiez le mode durgence. Cependant, la tonalit peut tre coupe. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour appeler le groupe de radios pour lequel une alarme durgence a t mise. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche programmable. Rponse une alarme durgence Lorsqu'une alarme d'urgence est reue, le destinataire peut choisir de supprimer l'alarme et quitter la liste des alarmes, ou il peut rpondre une alarme d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton PTT et la transmission voix sans urgence. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre une alarme d'urgence partir de votre radio. 1 Si l'indication d'alarme d'urgence est active, la liste des alarmes d'urgence s'affiche lorsque la radio Franais (Canada) reoit une alarme d'urgence. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. 2 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour transmettre un message vocal sans urgence au groupe cibl par l'alarme d'urgence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :
Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. 153 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche l'icne Appel d'urgence, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. La ligne de texte affiche l'ID ou l'alias du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. AVIS:
Si l'indication d'appel d'urgence n'est pas active, l'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. Rpondre des alarmes d'urgence par un appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un message d'urgence avec appel partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un appel d'urgence :
La tonalit d'appel d'urgence retentit si l'indication d'appel d'urgence et la tonalit de dchiffrement d'appel d'urgence sont actives. La tonalit d'appel d'urgence ne retentira pas si seulement que l'indication d'appel d'urgence est active. L'icne Appel d'urgence s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. 154 Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :
Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche l'icne Appel d'urgence, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. AVIS:
Si l'indication d'appel d'urgence n'est pas active, l'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. Envoi de messages d'tat Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour envoyer un message d'tat. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Message d'tat Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur d'envoyer des messages d'tat d'autres radios. La liste d'tats rapides est configure dans le CPS-RM et comprend un maximum de 99 tats. Un message texte peut comporter au maximum 16 caractres. AVIS:
Chaque tat a une valeur numrique correspondante allant de 0 99. Un alias peut tre spcifi pour chaque tat pour plus de commodit. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' tat rapide. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. 155 Franais (Canada) 5 ou Appuyez sur d'abonn ou de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. ct du message d'tat envoy. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la touche programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'tat l'aide de la touche programmable. 156 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Message d'tat. 2 3 ou Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La liste de contacts est affiche. jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur d'abonn ou de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. ct du message d'tat envoy. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. 5 Envoi d'un message d'tat en utilisant la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'tat l'aide de la liste de contacts. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur d'abonn ou de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Envoyer tat. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. ct du message d'tat envoy. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'tat l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 157 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Contacts. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn ou du groupe et appuyez sur pour continuer. 7 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. ct du message d'tat envoy. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Envoyer tat. ou pour effectuer la slection. Affichage des messages d'tat Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour voir des messages d'tat. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 158 2 3 4 Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur Le contenu du message d'tat est affich l'utilisateur radio. jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. Les messages d'tat reus peuvent galement tre consults en accdant la liste de notification. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Liste de notifications la page 204. Rponse des messages d'tat Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour rpondre aux messages d'tat. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. Le contenu de l'tat est affich. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rpondre. pour effectuer la slection. 159 Franais (Canada) 7 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran Bote de rception. ct du message d'tat envoy. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran Bote de rception. Suppression d'un message d'tat Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer un message d'tat de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 160 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat pour effectuer la slection. Le contenu de l'tat est affich. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 7 1 2 3 Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran Bote de rception. Suppression de tous les messages d'tat Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages d'tat de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez 4 5 L'cran affiche Liste vide. Messagerie texte Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance d'une autre radio ou d'une application de messagerie texte. Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale d'un message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne d'objet. Vous voyez la ligne d'objet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant d'une application courriel. 161 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
La longueur maximale de 280 caractres s'applique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale d'un message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Messages texte Les messages texte sont enregistrs de la bote de rception et classs du plus rcent au plus ancien. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. Affichage des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les messages texte sur la radio. 1 2 3 4 162 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Messages. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Bote de Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. Si la bote de rception est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une sonnerie se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pour effectuer la pav numrique est active. ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. pour effectuer la slection. Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie Suivez la procdure permettant d'afficher un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie partir de la bote de rception. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie. L'cran affiche Tlmtrie : <Status Text Message>. Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour effectuer la slection. 5 Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir Rponse des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un message texte :
L'cran affiche la liste de notification comprenant l'alias ou l'ID de l'expditeur. L'cran affiche l'icne Message. AVIS:
La radio quitte lcran dalerte de message texte et achemine un Appel individuel ou de groupe lexpditeur du message si le bouton PTT est enfonc. 1 Faites un des suivants :
163 Franais (Canada) jusqu' Lire. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche le message texte. La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Lire plus tard. Appuyez sur slection. La radio revient l'cran affich prcdant la rception du message texte. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur rception. pour revenir la bote de Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte par messages texte rapides partir de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez l'tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la Appuyez nouveau sur pour rpondre au message texte, le transfrer ou le supprimer. 164 4 5 6 7 8 ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rpondre. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou rapide. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Rponse pour effectuer la ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. Franais (Canada) 9 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Renvoi des messages texte Suivez la procdure pour renvoyer des messages texte partir de votre radio. Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :
pour renvoyer le mme message Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 165 Franais (Canada) En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Transfre des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour transfrer les messages texte partir de votre radio. Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :
Appuyez sur appuyez sur un autre abonn ou un alias de groupe ou un ID. ou pour envoyer le mme message jusqu' Transfrer et ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 1 2 166 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. AVIS:
Vous pouvez galement slectionner manuellement l'adresse de la radio cible
(consultez la section Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle la page 461). Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour transfrer les messages texte l'aide de la numrotation manuelle de votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Transfrer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. pour envoyer le mme message ou jusqu' Num. Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Numro de la radio :. pour effectuer la Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. pour 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Franais (Canada) En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Modification de messages texte Slectionnez Modifier pour modifier le message. AVIS:
Si le message comporte une ligne d'objet (s'il a t envoy partir d'une application de courriel), il est impossible de la modifier. 1 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. jusqu' Modifier. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 Utilisez les touches du clavier pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. 167 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le Appuyez sur pour choisir entre la suppression du message ou son enregistrement dans le dossier Brouillons. Rdaction de messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rdiger des messages texte sur la radio. 3 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur 1 Faites un des suivants :
. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'
Enregistrer, puis appuyez sur enregistrer le message dans le dossier Brouillons. pour Appuyez sur pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Un curseur clignotant apparat. ou jusqu' Composer. pour effectuer la slection. 168 4 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur d'une Appuyez sur d'une espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 5 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier, supprimer ou enregistrer le message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Envoi de messages texte Suivez la procdure pour envoyer des messages texte sur votre radio. Supposons que vous avez rcemment crit ou enregistr un message texte. Slectionnez le destinataire du message. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou Slectionnez le destinataire du message. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la manuelle. Appuyez sur slection.Entrez l'ID d'abonn. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Appuyez sur
. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 169 Franais (Canada) En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit faible retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Le message est dplac dans le dossier Messages envoys. Le message est marqu avec une icne chec d'envoi. AVIS:
Pour un nouveau message texte crit, la radio vous renvoie l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
170 2 3 4 Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. Si la bote de rception est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit se fait entendre. ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. pour effectuer la slection. 5 6 7 Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran revient la bote de rception. pour effectuer la slection. Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. Si la bote de rception est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit se fait entendre. ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez 171 Franais (Canada) Messages texte envoys Une fois qu'un message texte est envoy vers une autre radio, il est enregistr dans les messages envoys. Le dernier message texte envoy s'affiche toujours en haut de la liste des messages envoys. Vous pouvez renvoyer, transfrer, modifier ou supprimer un message texte envoy. Le dossier des messages envoys peut contenir au maximum les 30 derniers messages envoys. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message envoy remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Si vous quittez l'cran d'envoi de message pendant que l'envoi du message est en cours, la radio met jour l'tat du message dans le dossier des messages envoys sans fournir d'indication sonore ou visuelle. Si la radio change de mode ou est mise hors tension avant que l'tat du message ne soit mis jour dans le dossier des messages envoys, la radio ne peut terminer l'envoi du message en cours et marque automatiquement celui-ci d'une icne chec de l'envoi. La radio prend en charge un maximum de cinq envois de message en cours la fois. Pendant ce temps, la radio ne peut envoyer aucun autre message et marque 172 automatiquement les nouveaux messages de l'icne chec de l'envoi. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en appuyant longuement sur la touche
. AVIS:
Si le type de canal (p. ex. numrique conventionnel, Capacity Plus) ne correspond pas, vous pouvez uniquement modifier, transfrer ou supprimer un message envoy. Affichage des messages texte envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des messages texte envoys partir de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Messages. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 jusqu' Messages pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou envoys. Appuyez sur slection. Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit grave se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pav numrique est active. ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur L'icne qui s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran indique le statut du message. Voir Icnes des lments envoys. pour effectuer la slection. Envoi de messages texte envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message texte envoy sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :
1 Appuyez sur
. 2 Vous pouvez soit renvoyer ou transfrer le message texte envoy. Faites un des suivants :
pour Renvoyer. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour pour Transfrer. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 173 Franais (Canada) La radio passe l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 165. Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys. Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :
Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 174 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Messages pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou envoys. Appuyez sur slection. Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit se fait entendre. 4 ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio revient l'cran prcdent. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Non. Messages texte enregistrs Vous pouvez enregistrer un message texte afin de l'envoyer plus tard. Si l'cran de rdaction ou de modification de message se ferme pendant que vous rdigez ou modifiez un message texte, par exemple si vous avez appuy sur le bouton PTT ou chang de mode, votre message est automatiquement enregistr dans les brouillons. Franais (Canada) Le message texte le plus rcent figure toujours en haut de la liste des brouillons. Le dossier Brouillons permet de stocker au maximum les 10 derniers messages enregistrs. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message enregistr remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Affichage de messages texte enregistrs Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des messages texte enregistrs envoys partir de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. 175 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Brouillons. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour effectuer la slection. Modification de messages texte enregistrs Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier des messages texte enregistrs envoys partir de votre radio. 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez sur
. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Un curseur clignotant apparat. jusqu' Modifier. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. 176 Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur d'une Appuyez sur d'une espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 4 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer. pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir entre supprimer ou enregistrer le message. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des messages texte enregistrs dans les brouillons sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Brouillons. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur Slectionnez jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour supprimer le message texte. Message texte rapide Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 50 messages texte rapides selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. Les messages texte rapides sont prdfinis, mais vous pouvez modifier chaque message avant de l'envoyer. Envoi de messages texte rapides Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des messages texte rapides prdfinis sur votre radio un alias prdfini. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Passez tape 6. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 177 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Messages. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Texte rapide. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au texte rapide pour effectuer la slection. 5 Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le destinataire et envoyer le message. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 178 En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio passe l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 165. Configuration de saisie de texte Votre radio vous permet de configurer diffrents textes. Vous pouvez configurer les paramtres suivants pour la saisie de texte dans votre radio :
Prdiction de texte Mot correct Majuscule en dbut de phrase Mes mots Votre radio prend en charge les mthodes de saisie de texte suivantes :
Chiffres Symboles Frappe prdictive ou multiple Langue (si programme) AVIS:
Appuyez sur l'cran prcdent ou maintenez enfonce la touche pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a en tout temps pour revenir aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct Cette option fournit d'autres choix de mots quand le mot entr dans l'diteur de texte n'est pas reconnu par le dictionnaire intgr. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour dsactiver pour 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour dsactiver pour Appuyez sur pour activer la correction orthographique. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 179 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la correction orthographique. Si cette option est dsactive, le ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte Prdiction de texte : Votre radio peut apprendre des squences de mots courantes que vous entrez souvent. Elle peut alors prdire le prochain mot que vous dsirez utiliser aprs la saisie du premier mot d'une squence de mots courante dans l'diteur de texte. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 1 2 3 180 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur texte. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Prdict. pour effectuer la slection. 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour activer la prdiction de texte. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le contrle dynamique de la distorsion du microphone. Si cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus Majuscule en dbut de phrase Cette fonction met automatiquement la premire lettre du premier mot en majuscule pour chaque nouvelle phrase. 1 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. pour dsactiver Maj. phrase. Si ne s'affiche plus Afficher des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter vos propres mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. Votre radio contient une liste de ces mots. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou Phrase. Appuyez sur slection. pour dsactiver Maj. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur fonction est active, pour activer Maj. phrase. Si la apparat ct d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 181 Franais (Canada) 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur mots. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la slection. Modifier des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez modifier les mots personnaliss enregistrs dans votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 182 3 4 5 6 7 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur mots. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au mot voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. 8 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier. pour effectuer la slection. 9 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 10 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'enregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Franais (Canada) Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Ajouter des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter des mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 183 Franais (Canada) 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. jusqu' Ajouter mot. 7 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les 184 Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 8 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'enregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Supprimer un mot personnalis Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les mots personnaliss enregistrs sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la 8 Slectionnez un des lments suivants :
Au message Supprimer l'entre?, appuyez pour slectionner Oui. L'cran affiche sur Entre supprime. ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur prcdent. ou jusqu' Non. pour revenir l'cran Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mes mots. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au mot voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les mots personnaliss du dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 5 6 7 185 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 7 Faites un des suivants :
Au message Supprimer l'entre?, appuyez pour slectionner Oui. L'cran affiche sur Ttes entres supprimes. 186 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Tickets de tche Cette fonction permet votre radio de recevoir des messages du rpartiteur dressant la liste des tches effectuer. AVIS:
Cette fonction peut tre personnalise grce au CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Il y a deux dossiers qui contiennent diffrents tickets de tche :
Le dossier Mes tches Les tickets de tche personnaliss attribus votre signature dans l'ID utilisateur. Le dossier Tches partages Les tickets de tche partags attribus un groupe de personnes. Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez rpondre aux tickets de tche afin de les classer dans les dossiers de tickets de tche. Par dfaut, les dossiers sont Tous, Nouveaux, Commencs et Termins. Pour obtenir dix autres dossiers, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:
Les tickets de tche sont conservs mme lorsque la radio est mise hors tension, puis remise sous tension. Tous les tickets de tche sont situs dans le dossier Tous. Selon la faon dont votre radio est programme, les tickets de tche sont tris par leur niveau de priorit suivi par lheure de rception. Les nouveaux tickets de tche, ceux avec les plus rcents changements l'tat et ceux avec la plus haute priorit sont affichs en premier. Lorsque le nombre maximum de tickets de tche est atteint, le prochain ticket de tche remplace automatiquement le dernier ticket de tche sur la radio. Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 100 ou 500 tickets de tche, selon le modle de radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio dtectera et annulera automatiquement les tickets de tche dupliqus qui possdent le mme ID de ticket de tche. Selon l'importance du ticket de tche, le rpartiteur ajoute un niveau de priorit pour eux. Il existe trois niveaux de priorit : Priorit 1, Priorit 2 et Priorit 3. La Priorit 1 est la plus haute priorit et la Priorit 3 est la priorit la plus basse. Il existe galement des tickets de tche sans aucune priorit. Votre radio est mise jour conformment lorsque le rpartiteur effectue les changements suivants :
Modifier le contenu de tickets de tche. Ajouter ou modifier le niveau de priorit de tickets de tche. Dplacer les tickets de tche dun dossier un autre dossier. Annuler des tickets de tche. Accs au dossier Tickets de tche Suivez la procdure d'accs au dossier Tickets de tche. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. 187 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur de tche. Appuyez sur slection. pour voir les Tickets pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche pour effectuer la slection. Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant Cette fonction permet de se connecter et de se dconnecter du serveur distant en utilisant votre ID utilisateur. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 188 jusqu' Connexion. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si vous tes dj connect, l'option Dconnexion s'affiche dans le menu. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Cration de tickets de tche Votre radio peut crer des tickets de tche, bass sur un modle de ticket de tche, et envoyer la liste des tches accomplir. Un logiciel de programmation CPS est ncessaire pour configurer le modle de ticket de tche. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou ticket. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Crer un pour effectuer la Rpondre des tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des tickets de tche sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche pour effectuer la slection. pour accder au Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur la touche numrique correspondante (de 1 9) jusqu'
Rponse rapide. ou jusqu'au ticket de tche Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. voulu. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 189 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer le ticket de tche. 1 Utilisez le clavier numrique pour saisir le numro de salle requis. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 Appuyez sur salle. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat de pour effectuer la slection. 190 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' loption voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Envoyer. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec plus d'un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer les tickets de tche. 1 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' loption voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Envoyer. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Suppression de tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des tickets de tche de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier Tous. ou pour effectuer la slection. 191 Franais (Canada) 5 6 7 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche pour effectuer la slection. Supprimer tous les tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les tickets de tche de votre radio. Appuyez de nouveau sur de travail est affich. pendant que le bon 1 Faites un des suivants :
jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 192 Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier Tous. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Non. Cryptage Cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. Sur votre radio, la fonction de cryptage doit tre active sur le canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; l'activation Franais (Canada) de la fonction n'est cependant pas ncessaire la rception d'une telle transmission. Pendant qu'un canal crypt est slectionn, la radio continue d'tre en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Votre radio prend uniquement en charge le cryptage amlior. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre programme de faon utiliser les mmes valeurs et ID de cl (pour le cryptage amlior) que la radio mettrice. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant des valeurs et ID de cl diffrentes, vous n'entendrez rien du tout (pour le cryptage amlior). Sur un canal crypt, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des appels dbrouills, selon la faon dont votre radio est programme. En outre, votre radio peut jouer un avertissement ou non, selon la faon dont elle est programme. AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et met un clignotement rapide lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. 193 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage, ou peuvent avoir une configuration diffrente. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 3 4 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction confidentialit de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Confidentialit. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 194 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Confidentialit. Appuyez sur la slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Interrompre/Raviver Cette fonction vous permet d'activer ou dsactiver n'importe quelle radio du rseau. Par exemple, le dtaillant ou l'administrateur du systme pourrait vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de s'en servir, puis la ractiver une fois qu'elle est de nouveau en votre possession. Une radio peut tre dsactive (interrompue) ou active
(raviv) soit par la console, soit par une commande initie par une autre radio. Une fois la radio dsactive, la radio met une tonalit d'chec et l'cran d'accueil affiche Canal refus. Lorsqu'une radio est dsactive temporairement, elle ne peut plus demander ni recevoir de services initis par l'utilisateur sur le systme qui a effectu la procdure d'interruption. Cependant, la radio peut basculer vers un autre systme. La radio continue d'envoyer des rapports de position GNSS et peut tre surveille distance lorsqu'elle a t interrompue. AVIS:
Le dtaillant ou l'administrateur de systme peut dsactiver en permanence une radio. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Dsactivation permanente de la radio la page 200. Franais (Canada) Interrompre une radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Dsac radio. 2 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 195 Franais (Canada) Interruption d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Dsactiver une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. ou Appuyez sur jusqu' Dsactiver la pour effectuer la slection. radio. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 196 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :
jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Relance d'une radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio. Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Activer la radio. ou jusqu' Dsactiver la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 2 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche Activer la radio ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 197 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4 ou pour activer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche Activer la radio ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. pour effectuer la slection. Relance d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 198 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Activer la radio russie. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche chec de l'activation de la radio. Rallumer une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Contacts. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la jusqu' Appel indiv.. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :
Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Franais (Canada) ou pour activer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche Activer la radio ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. pour effectuer la slection. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Activer la radio russie. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche chec de l'activation de la radio. 199 Franais (Canada) Dsactivation permanente de la radio Cette fonction est une mesure de scurit amliore qui restreint l'accs non autoris une radio. La dsactivation permanente de la radio rend la radio inutilisable. Par exemple, le dtaillant ou l'administrateur de systme peut vouloir dsactiver une radio perdue ou vole pour en empcher toute utilisation non autorise. Lors de la mise sous tension, une radio dsactive de manire permanente affiche des services Radio arrte sur l'cran pendant un moment pour indiquer l'tat de dsactivation. AVIS:
La radio dsactive peut uniquement tre ractive dans un centre de rparation de Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Travailleur solitaire Cette fonction dclenche le mode d'urgence s'il n'y a aucun signe d'activit par l'utilisateur, tel qu'appuyer sur une 200 quelconque touche de la radio ou activer le slecteur de canal, pendant une dure prdfinie. Si aucune activit n'est dtecte pendant la dure prdfinie, la radio avertit l'utilisateur de l'expiration du dlai d'inactivit au moyen d'un signal sonore. Si l'utilisateur ne donne aucune rponse l'avertissement avant l'expiration du dlai prdfini subsquent, la radio active une situation d'urgence selon la programmation du dtaillant ou de l'administrateur de site. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Fonctionnement durgence la page 146. AVIS:
Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Fonctions de verrouillage par mot de passe Cette fonction vous permet de restreindre l'accs la radio en demandant un mot de passe lorsqu'elle est allume. Vous pouvez utiliser un microphone clavier ou les touches de dfilement vers le haut/bas pour entrer le mot de passe. Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder votre radio en utilisant un mot de passe. 1 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. AVIS:
L'utilisation de l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied permet d'accder la radio sans devoir entrer un mot de passe. Utilisez le microphone clavier. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier la valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur chiffre suivant. pour valider et passer au 2 pour saisir le mot de passe. Appuyez sur En cas de russite, la radio est mise sous tension. En cas d'chec :
Franais (Canada) Aprs la premire et seconde tentative, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron. Rptez l'tape tape 1. Aprs une troisime tentative incorrecte, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron puis, Verrouillage radio. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. La radio se verrouille pendant 15 minutes. AVIS:
En tat de verrouillage, la radio ragit uniquement aux commandes du bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume et de la touche programme Rtroclairage. Dverrouillage de la radio Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour dverrouiller une radio verrouille. Faites un des suivants :
201 Franais (Canada) Si la radio est allume, patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe la page 201 pour accder la radio. Si la radio est teinte, allumez-la. La radio redmarre la minuterie de verrouillage de 15 minutes. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche Radio verrouille. Patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe la page 201 pour accder la radio. Activation/dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le verrouillage par mot de passe de votre radio. 3 4 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur verr.. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. Utilisez le microphone clavier. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier la valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur chiffre suivant. Vous entendrez une tonalit de russite chaque fois que vous appuyez sur un chiffre. pour valider et passer au Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 6 pour saisir le mot de passe. Appuyez sur Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 1 2 202 7 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct de Allumer. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Eteindre. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Eteindre. Changement de mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mot de passe sur votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur verr.. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe actuel quatre chiffres, puis pour continuer. appuyez sur Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 6 Appuyez sur MdP. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Changer le pour effectuer la slection. 7 Entrez un nouveau mot de passe quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. 203 Franais (Canada) 8 Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe quatre chiffres, pour continuer. puis appuyez sur En cas de russite, l'cran affiche Mot de passe chang. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche Mots de passe incorrects. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Liste de notifications Votre radio offre une liste de notification qui rassemble tous les vnements non lus sur le canal, par exemple les messages texte, les messages de tlmtrie, les appels manqus et les avertissements d'appel. L'cran affiche l'icne Notification lorsque la liste de notification comprend au moins un vnement. La liste prend en charge au maximum quarante (40) vnements non lus. Une fois la liste pleine, le prochain vnement remplace automatiquement l'vnement le plus ancien. Une fois les vnements lus, ils sont retirs de la liste de notifications. 204 Dans le cas de messages texte, d'appels manqus ou dvnements davertissement d'appel, le nombre maximum est de 30 messages texte et 10 appels manqus ou avertissements d'appel. Ce nombre maximum est fonction des capacits de liste de chaque fonction (tickets de tche, message texte ou appels manqus et avertissements d'appel). Accs liste de notification Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder la liste de notification sur votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Notifications. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'vnement pour effectuer la slection. Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir Programmation par onde radio Votre dtaillant peut mettre jour distance votre radio partir de la programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) sans connexion physique. De plus, certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs partir de la programmation par radiocommunication. Lorsque votre radio est programme par OTAP, le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lorsque votre radio reoit des donnes volume lev :
L'cran affiche l'icne Donnes volume lev. Le canal devient occup. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Lorsque l'OTAP est termine, selon la configuration :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Actualisation Redmarrage. La radio redmarre en se mettant hors tension puis nouveau sous tension. Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez slectionner Redmarrer maintenant ou Reporter. Lorsque vous slectionnez Reporter, votre radio revient l'cran prcdent. L'cran affiche l'icne Retardateur OTAP jusqu' ce que le dmarrage automatique se produise. Lorsque votre radio se met sous tension aprs un redmarrage automatique :
En cas de russite, l'cran affiche MJ logiciel russie. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec de la MJ logiciel. Reportez-vous Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel la page 237 pour connatre la version logicielle mise jour. Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner l'un des modes de connexion de priphriques tiers :
Motorola Solutions PC et audio Accs aux donnes 205 Franais (Canada) Tlmtrie Gnrique 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Type cble. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 206 ou jusqu'au mode de Appuyez sur connexion voulu. Appuyez sur slection. Cet cran montre le mode de connexion slectionn. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. pour effectuer la Indicateur dintensit du signal reu Cette fonction vous permet de prendre connaissance des valeurs de l'indicateur d'intensit du signal reu (RSSI). L'cran affiche l'icne RSSI dans le coin suprieur droit. Consultez la section Icnes d'affichage pour des dtails sur l'icne RSSI. Affichage des valeurs RSSI (indicateur dintensit de rception du signal) Suivez la procdure suivant pour afficher les valeurs RSSI sur votre radio. Lorsque vous tes lcran daccueil :
1 2 Appuyez trois fois sur la touche immdiatement trois fois sur la touche en 5 secondes. Lcran affiche les valeurs RSSI courantes. et appuyez
, le tout Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir Configuration du panneau avant Il est possible de personnaliser certains paramtres des fonctions de Configuration du panneau avant (FPC) afin d'amliorer l'utilisation de votre radio. Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Programmer la pour effectuer la slection. Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC Utilisez les touches suivantes au besoin pendant la navigation dans les paramtres. Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant Suivez la procdure suivante pour entrer en mode programmation partir du panneau avant de votre radio.
, Pour parcourir les options, augmenter ou rduire les valeurs ou naviguer verticalement. Pour slectionnez l'option ou entrer dans un sous-menu. 207 Franais (Canada) Appuyez brivement pour revenir au menu prcdent ou quitter l'cran de slection. Maintenez cette touche enfonce pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous connecter ce rseau. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:
Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. 208 Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. AVIS:
Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi en effectuant lune des actions suivantes. Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou Fi, puis sur appuyez sur c. Appuyez sur ou On, puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-
pour slectionner. pour choisir le Wi-Fi pour slectionner. Appuyez sur affiche pour activer le Wi-Fi. Lcran ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Licne Activ. pour dsactiver le Wi-Fi. ne saffiche plus ct du message Franais (Canada) Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. AVIS:
Vous pouvez galement vous connecter un point daccs rseau partir du menu. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. 209 Franais (Canada) 4 5 ou pour un point daccs Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. AVIS:
Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, si un point daccs rseau nest pas prconfigur, loption Connecter nest pas disponible. pour Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour se Connecter, pour slectionner. 6 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel, entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur
. 7 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, le mot de passe est configur partir de RM. Si le mot de passe prconfigur est correct, votre radio se connecte automatiquement au point daccs rseau slectionn. 210 Si le mot de passe prconfigur nest pas valide, lcran affiche Authentificat. - chec et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Lorsque la connexion est russie, la radio affiche un avis et le point daccs rseau est enregistr dans la liste des profils. Si la connexion choue, la radio affiche lcran davis dchec pendant un moment et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi pour connatre l'tat de la connexion avec l'annonce vocale. L'annonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, Le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il n'y a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, connect lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, dconnecte lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais que la radio n'est pas connecte un rseau. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:
La touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi est affecte par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Actualisation de la liste de rseaux Suivez la procdure pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour actualiser la liste de rseaux partir du menu. Franais (Canada) a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-
pour slectionner c. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Quand vous entrez dans le menu Rseaux, la radio actualise automatiquement la liste des rseaux. Si vous tes dj dans le menu Rseaux, effectuez l'action suivante pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. ou pour Actualiser, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur La radio s'actualise et affiche la dernire liste de rseaux. pour slectionner. 211 Franais (Canada) Ajout dun rseau AVIS:
Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. Si un rseau prfr nest pas dans la liste de rseaux disponibles, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour ajouter un rseau. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Ajouter un pour 1 2 3 4 212 5 Entrez lidentifiant SSID (Service Set Identifier), puis appuyez sur
. 6 7 Appuyez sur appuyez sur pour lOuvrir, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le rseau est correctement enregistr. Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau Vous pouvez afficher les dtails des points daccs rseau. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. 3 4 5 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour un point daccs pour ou pour afficher les Appuyez sur dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. AVIS:
Lcran affiche des dtails diffrents pour les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel et Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. pour Wi-Fi WPA personnel Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche lidentifiant Service Set Identifier (SSID), le mode de scurit, ladresse Media Access Control (MAC) et ladresse Internet Protocol (IP). Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID et le mode de scurit. Franais (Canada) Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP), lauthentification de phase 2, le nom du certificat, ladresse MAC, ladresse IP, la passerelle, le DNS1 et le DNS2. Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode EAP, lauthentification de phase 2 et le nom du certificat. Retrait de points daccs rseau AVIS:
Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour supprimer des points daccs rseau dans la liste de profils. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 213 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. pour slectionner un Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour le Supprimer, puis pour slectionner. ou pour choisir Oui, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le point daccs rseau slectionn est supprim avec succs. pour slectionner. Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. Niveaux de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci Haut ou Bas pour chaque canal. Haute Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios considrablement loignes. Faible Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios situes proximit. AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Configuration de la puissance Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la puissance de votre radio. 2 3 4 5 6 214 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Puissance. ou pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Haut. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche ct de Haut. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Basse. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Basse. 6 Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et alertes, si ncessaire, l'exception de la tonalit dalerte entrante . Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries et les alertes sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur le bouton programm Sonneries/
Alertes. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 215 Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Tnlts. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Toutes pour effectuer la Appuyez sur les tonalits et tous les avertissements. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
pour activer ou dsactiver toutes Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier sur votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 2 3 4 5 6 216 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur clavier numrique. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Tonalits du pour Franais (Canada) Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes Cette fonction permet de configurer le niveau sonore des sonneries et des alertes de manire ce qu'il soit plus ou moins haut que celui de la voix. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes de votre radio. pour activer ou dsactiver les Appuyez sur tonalits du clavier. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 217 Franais (Canada) 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou alertes. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonneries et pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' cart Vol. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur compensation voulu. Une tonalit se fait entendre correspondant chaque niveau de compensation de volume. jusqu'au niveau de 7 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le niveau d'cart de volume est enregistr. Appuyez sur sont supprims. pour quitter. Les changements 218 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la 5 6 ou Appuyez sur de parler. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Autorisation pour effectuer la pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur tonalit d'autorisation de parler. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit de mise sous tension de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Sous tension. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur tonalit de mise sous tension. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 219 Franais (Canada) Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche 4 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte Vous pouvez personnaliser la tonalit d'alerte de message texte sur Temporaire ou Rptitive pour chaque entre dans la liste de contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les sonneries d'avis de messages de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Contacts. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 220 Appuyez sur ou message. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Avis de pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Temporaire. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Temporaire. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Rptitive. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Rptitive. Changement des modes daffichage Vous pouvez changer le mode d'affichage de la radio entre le mode Jour ou mode Nuit au besoin. Ce rglage modifie la palette de couleurs de l'cran. Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mode d'affichage de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode d'affichage. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage Suivez la procdure de rgler la luminosit de l'affichage sur votre radio. La luminosit de lcran ne peut tre ajuste lorsque la fonction Luminosit auto est active. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Luminosit. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Mode Jour et Mode Nuit. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du profil slectionn. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 2 3 4 5 221 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche une barre de progression. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Luminosit. Appuyez sur pour augmenter ou rduire la luminosit de l'affichage. Appuyez sur ou pour effectuer la slection. La valeur du paramtre varie de 1 8. Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Cette fonction passe par le connecteur d'accessoire l'arrire de votre radio et doit tre installe par votre dtaillant. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. 222 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./
phares. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou phares. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Avert./
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur l'avertisseur ou les phares. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
pour activer ou dsactiver Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche 4 5 Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les voyants DEL sur votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur DEL. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Indicateur pour effectuer la slection. pour activer ou dsactiver le Appuyez sur voyant DEL. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique interne (PA) de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. 223 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur publique. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Diffusion pour effectuer la pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur diffusion publique. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche 2 3 4 5 224 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique externe (PA) de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique ext. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur publique externe. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Diffusion pour 5 Appuyez sur diffusion publique externe. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. pour activer ou dsactiver la apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction selon la procdure suivante. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Afficheur. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' cran intro. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer ou dsactiver l'cran Appuyez sur d'introduction. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche 225 Franais (Canada) Slection de la langue Suivez la procdure suivante pour choisir la langue de votre radio. 5 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Langues. pour effectuer la slection. 226 ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche jusqu' la langue pour effectuer la ct de la langue slectionne. Dterminer le type de cble Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le type de cble utilis par votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Type cble. ou pour effectuer la slection. 5 Le type de cble actuel est indiqu par l'icne
. Activation ou dsactivation de l'assistance parle Cette fonction permet la radio de confirmer vocalement le code ou le nom de la zone ou du canal que l'utilisateur vient d'entrer ou la touche programmable sur laquelle il vient d'appuyer. Cette option est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. L'assistance parle peut tre personnalise en fonction des exigences du client. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'assistance parle de votre radio. Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation de la carte d'option Les capacits de carte d'option de chaque canal peuvent tre attribues aux touches programmables. Un canal peut prendre en charge jusqu' six fonctions de carte d'option. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la carte d'option sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Carte d'option. Synthse texte-parole La fonction de synthse vocale peut tre active uniquement par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, l'Annonce vocale est automatiquement dsactive. Si cette option est active, la fonction de synthse texte-parole est automatiquement dsactive. Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre les fonctionnalits suivantes :
Canal actuel Zone actuelle 227 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de bouton programm Contenu des messages texte reus Contenu des fiches de travail reues L'indicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Cette fonction est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. 4 5 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole Suivez la procdure pour dfinir la fonction de synthse vocale. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 1 2 3 228 Appuyez sur ou parle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Assistance pour effectuer la pour n'importe laquelle pour ou Appuyez sur des fonctions suivantes. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. Voici les options disponibles :
Tout Messages Tickets de tche Canal Zone Touche de programmation L'icne s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. Rglage du dlai menu Vous pouvez rgler la dure pendant laquelle la radio affiche le menu avant de revenir automatiquement l'cran d'accueil. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le dlai menu. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Afficheur. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Dlai Menu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique Le contrle de gain automatique du microphone numrique
(CGA) permet de rguler automatiquement le gain du microphone de la radio durant la transmission sur un systme numrique. Cette fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le CGA du microphone de votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 229 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mic.CGA-N. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer la fonction CGA Mic. Appuyez sur numrique. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'audio intelligent sur votre radio. AVIS:
Cette fonction ne s'applique pas la technologie Bluetooth. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent Votre radio rgle automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans lenvironnement, y 230 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 4 ou Appuyez sur intelligent. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Audio pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Activer. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Franais (Canada) Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la raction acoustique reue lors de la rception d'appels. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. ou jusqu Rducteur de Appuyez sur bruit, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Vous pouvez galement utiliser les touches ou pour changer l'option slectionne. 5 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. 231 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour activer la suppression de la raction acoustique. L'cran affiche du message Activ. ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique. L'icne plus ct du message Activ. ne s'affiche Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration Vous pouvez activer cette fonction lorsque vous parlez une langue qui contient beaucoup de consonnes vibrantes alvolaires ( R rouls). Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Amlioration de la vibration. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 232 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la vibration. Appuyez sur la slection. jusqu' Amlioration pour effectuer 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Ambiance audio Vous pouvez personnaliser l'ambiance audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Par dfaut Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Fort Cette configuration active la suppression du bruit et augmente le volume du haut-parleur pour une utilisation dans un environnement bruyant. Groupe de travail Cette configuration permet d'activer la rduction du bruit et de dsactiver l'AGC pour utilisation lorsqu'un groupe de radios sont proximit les unes des autres. Configuration de lambiance audio Suivez la procdure pour dfinir l'ambiance audio sur votre radio en fonction de votre environnement. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur audio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Ambiance pour effectuer la slection. jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Les paramtres sont les suivants. Choisissez Par dfaut pour activer les paramtres d'origine par dfaut. Choisissez Fort pour augmenter le volume lorsque vous utilisez la radio dans un environnement bruyant. Choisissez Groupe travail afin de rduire la rtroaction acoustique lors de l'utilisation de la 233 1 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) radio en combinaison avec un groupe de radios qui sont proximit de l'autre. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Profils audio Vous pouvez personnaliser les profils audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Par dfaut Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Niveau 1, niveau 2 et niveau 3 Ces paramtres sont des profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive cause par le bruit qui est typique chez les adultes dans la quarantaine, la cinquantaine, la soixantaine ou plus. Amplification des frquences aigus, moyennes et basses Ces paramtres sont prvus pour des sons plus tnus, ou nasillards, ou graves. Configuration des profils audio Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les profils audio par dfaut de votre radio. 234 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur audio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Profils pour effectuer la slection. jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Les paramtres sont les suivants. Choisissez Par dfaut pour dsactiver le profil audio slectionn prcdemment et revenir aux paramtres par dfaut. Choisissez Niveau 1, Niveau 2 ou Niveau 3 pour les profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive due au bruit qui est habituelle pour les adultes de plus de 40 ans. Choisissez Ampli. aigus, Ampli. mdiums, ou Ampli. basses pour les profils audio qui s'alignent avec votre prfrence pour des sons plus mtalliques, plus nasillards ou plus profonds. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 Effectuez une des tapes suivantes pour activer ou dsactiver le mode GNSS sur votre radio. Appuyez sur le bouton programm GNSS. Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de positionnement global (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme de satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). Le 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Passez l'tape suivante. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 235 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' GNSS. Appuyez pour activer ou dsactiver le Appuyez sur GNSS. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. apparat ct ne s'affiche plus Renseignements gnraux sur la radio Votre radio contient des renseignements sur diffrents paramtres. Les informations gnrales de votre radio sont les suivantes :
Alias et ID de la radio. Versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de codes. Mise jour du logiciel. 236 Informations du systme GNSS. Information sur le site. AVIS:
Appuyez sur Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. pour revenir l'cran prcdent. pour revenir Vrification de l'alias et l'ID de la radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier l'alias et l'ID de la radio sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Mon ID. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'alias de la radio s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'ID de la radio s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Version. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche la version actuelle du micrologiciel et celle de la fiche de code. Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier les versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de code sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel Affiche la date et l'heure de la dernire mise jour logicielle effectue par lintermdiaire de la Programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) ou Wi-Fi. Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier les informations de mise jour du logiciel de votre radio. 237 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' M. j. Appuyez sur logicielle. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche la date et l'heure de la dernire mise jour logicielle. pour effectuer la Le menu de mise jour logicielle est uniquement disponible aprs au moins une session OTAP ou Wi-Fi russie. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Programmation par onde radio la page 506. 238 Consulter les informations du GNSS Affiche les informations GNSS sur votre radio, par exemple, les valeurs suivantes :
Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Vlocit Affaiblissement de la prcision horizontale (Horizontal Dilution of Precision, ou HDOP) Satellites Version 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Info GNSS. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Info site. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les informations GNSS demandes. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' llment voulu. Affichage de linformation sur le site Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher le nom du site sur lequel se trouve actuellement votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le nom du site actuel. Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise Vous pouvez afficher les dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise slectionn. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la 239 Franais (Canada) 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Certificat. Appuyez sur slection. pour Menu pour effectuer la saffiche vis--vis des certificats prts. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusquau certificat voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio affiche les dtails complets du certificat. AVIS:
Pour les certificats non prts, lcran affiche uniquement ltat. 240 Fonctionnement Connect Plus Le mode Connect Plus est une solution ADF base sur la technologie DMR. Le mode Connect Plus utilise un canal de contrle rserv pour les requtes de canal et les attributions. Les fonctions qui sont disponibles pour les utilisateurs radio en vertu de ce systme sont disponibles dans le prsent chapitre. Autres commandes de la radio en mode Connect Plus Ce chapitre dcrit les commandes radio supplmentaires disponibles pour l'utilisateur de la radio laide de moyens prprogramms tels que les touches programmables et les fonctions attribuables de la radio. Bouton d'mission (PTT) Le bouton PTT situ sur le ct de la radio a deux fonctions principales :
Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Franais (Canada) Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel (voir Faire un appel radio la page 258). Si la tonalit d'autorisation est active, attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. Touches programmables Votre dtaillant peut programmer les touches pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur ces boutons :
Appui bref Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appui long Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. 241 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
La dure programme pour la pression d'un bouton peut s'appliquer tous les rglages et toutes les fonctions attribuables de la radio. Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 296 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. Fonctions attribuables de la radio Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. 242 Annulation de file d'attente occupe La radio quitte le mode Occup quand un appel non urgent de la file d'attente Occup est effectu. Les appels d'urgence, une fois qu'ils sont accepts dans la file d'attente Occup, ne peuvent pas tre annuls. Journal des appels Permet d'ouvrir le journal des appels. Annonce du canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Contacts Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts. Urgence active/dsactive Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Avertisseur/phares Active ou dsactive la fonction d'avertisseurs et de phares. Localisation interne Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de localisation interne. Audio intelligent Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Num. manuelle Selon la programmation choisie, permet d'effectuer un appel individuel ou un appel tlphonique en entrant un ID d'abonn ou un numro de tlphone. Accs direct Permet de lancer un appel de groupe ou individuel prdfini et d'envoyer un avis d'appel, un message texte rapide automatiquement ou de revenir au mode Accueil. Cryptage Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Vrification de la radio Dtermine si une radio est active dans un systme. Activer la radio Permet d'activer une radio cible distance. Dsactiver la radio Permet de dsactiver une radio cible distance. coute distance Active le microphone d'une radio cible sans indication. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Type de sonnerie d'avertissement Fournit un accs direct au rglage du type de sonnerie d'avertissement. Franais (Canada) Demande d'itinrance Demande de recherche d'un autre site. Balayage Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de balayage. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsqu'elle est dsactive, la radio recherche d'autres sites en plus du site courant. Message texte Slectionne le menu de la messagerie texte. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Zone Permet de slectionner une zone dans une liste. 243 Franais (Canada) Rglages ou fonctions attribuables FRduction bruit Active ou dsactive la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Toutes les tonalits/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Luminosit du rtroclairage Rgle le niveau de luminosit. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Mode d'affichage Permet d'alterner entre l'activation et la dsactivation des modes d'affichage Jour et Nuit. Systme satellite de navigation mondial (GNSS) Permet d'activer ou dsactiver le systme de navigation par satellite. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. Non attribu Indique que la fonction du bouton n'a pas encore t attribue. 244 Description des indicateurs d'tat en mode Connect Plus Icnes daffichage Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes s'affichant l'cran de la radio. Indicateur de puissance de signal reu
(RSSI) Le nombre de barres reprsente lintensit du signal radio. Laffichage de quatre barres indique une intensit de signal maximale. Cette icne ne saffiche quen mode de rception. Bluetooth non connect La fonction Bluetooth est active, mais aucun appareil Bluetooth distance nest connect. Bluetooth connect La fonction Bluetooth est active. Licne demeure allume tant quun dispositif Bluetooth distant est connect. Donnes volume lev La radio reoit des donnes volume lev et le canal est occup. Localisation intrieure disponible3 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ et disponible. Localisation intrieure non disponible3 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ, mais non disponible parce que la fonction Bluetooth est dsactive ou parce que la dtection des balises a t suspendue par Bluetooth. Mode Muet Le mode Muet est activ et le haut-parleur est coup. Franais (Canada) ou Notification La liste de notifications contient des lments passer en revue. Niveau de puissance La radio est rgle Faible tension ou Haute puissance. Dsactivation des tonalits Les tonalits sont dsactives. Carte doption La fonction Carte doption est active. Absence de fonction de la carte doption La fonction Carte doption est dsactive. Fonction GNSS disponible La fonction GPS/GNSS est active. Licne demeure allume tant que la rception dune position est disponible. 3 Applicable uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel 245 Franais (Canada) Fonction GNSS non disponible/hors de porte La fonction GPS/GNSS est active, mais ne reoit aucune donne du satellite. Balayage La fonction de balayage est active. Urgence La radio est en mode durgence. Scurise La fonction Cryptage est active. Non scurise La fonction Cryptage est dsactive. Itinrance de site La fonction ditinrance de site est active. Contact Le contact radio est disponible. Journal des appels Journal des appels radio. 246 Message Arrive d'un message entrant. Sonnerie seulement Le mode sonnerie est activ. Sonnerie silencieuse Le mode de sonnerie silencieuse est activ. Vibration Le mode vibration est activ. Vibration et sonnerie Le mode vibration et sonnerie est activ. Wi-Fi excellent4 Le signal Wi-Fi est excellent. Wi-Fi bon4 Le signal Wi-Fi est bon. Wi-Fi moyen4 Le signal Wi-Fi est moyen. Wi-Fi faible4 Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. Wi-Fi non disponible4 Le signal Wi-Fi nest pas disponible. Icnes d'appels Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes s'affichant l'cran de la radio pendant un appel. Ces icnes apparaissent galement dans la liste de contacts pour indiquer le type d'ID. Appel individuel Cette icne s'affiche lorsqu'un appel individuel est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) de l'abonn. Appel de groupe/Appel gnral de site 4 Ne sapplique quaux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e Franais (Canada) Cette icne s'affiche lorsqu'un appel de groupe ou un appel gnral de site est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) du groupe. Appel tlphonique comme tant un appel individuel Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un Appel individuel en cours. Appel PC par Bluetooth Indique qu'un appel PC par Bluetooth est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) de l'appel PC par Bluetooth. Appel de rpartition Le type de contact d'appel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais d'un serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. 247 Franais (Canada) Icnes de menu avanc Les icnes suivantes saffichent prs des lments de menu qui offrent un choix entre deux options ou qui prsentent un sous-menu offrant aussi deux options. Case cocher (vide) Indique que l'option n'est pas slectionne. Case cocher (coche) Indique que l'option est slectionne. Case noire Indique que l'option slectionne dans le menu comporte un sous-
menu. Icnes de messages envoys Les icnes ci-dessous apparaissent dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran dans le dossier Msges envoys. 248 Russite de lenvoi Le message texte a t envoy. En cours Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID de groupe est en attente de transmission. Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID dabonn est en attente de transmission et sera ensuite en attente de confirmation. Message personnel ou de groupe lu Le message texte a t lu. Message personnel ou de groupe non lu Le message texte na pas t lu. OU OU OU OU chec de lenvoi Le message texte n'a pas t envoy. OU Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth Les icnes suivantes accompagnent les lments de la liste de dispositifs Bluetooth afin de vous informer sur le type du dispositif. Dispositif de donnes Bluetooth Dispositif de transfert de donnes Bluetooth, par exemple, un lecteur de codes barres. Dispositif audio Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif audio compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un casque dcoute. Dispositif PTT Bluetooth Franais (Canada) Il sagit dun dispositif PTT (messagerie vocale instantane) compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un dispositif fonction PTT uniquement
(POD). Voyant lumineux Le voyant DEL indique l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. Rouge clignotant Rouge clignotemen t rapide La radio met alors que le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, reoit une transmission d'urgence ou n'a pas russi l'auto-vrification la mise sous tension, ou a quitt la zone de couverture si la radio est configure avec le systme ARTS (Auto-Range Transponder System). Mode Muet est activ. La radio reoit un transfert de fichier par radiocommunication (fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option, fichier de frquence rseau ou fichier de codeplug de carte d'option) ou la radio 249 Franais (Canada) met niveau un nouveau fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option. La radio reoit une alerte d'appel, a reu un message texte ou le balayage est activ et elle reoit de l'activit. La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio reoit une alerte d'appel ou le balayage est activ alors qu'elle est inactive (ne dsactive pas la sourdine pour toute activit). La radio est s'allume ou transmet. La radio est en train de s'allumer, de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. La radio reoit un appel crypt. Tonalits d'avertissement Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-
parleur de la radio. Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec Tonalits dalerte La fonction Tonalits d'alerte vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Clignoteme nt vert et jaune Jaune continu Clignoteme nt jaune double Jaune clignotant Vert continu Clignoteme nt vert Clignoteme nt vert rapide 250 Tonalit priodique Tonalit rptitive Tonalit temporaire Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Le signal sonore retentit une fois pendant une courte priode, selon les rglages de la radio. Slection des modes Connect Plus et non Connect Plus Pour passer un mode non Connect Plus, vous devez changer de zone, si la programmation par le dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme le prvoit. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir si votre radio a t programme avec des zones non Connect Plus, et quelles fonctions sont disponibles lors de lutilisation dans des zones non Connect Plus. Franais (Canada) Recevoir et faire des appels en mode Connect Plus Cette section explique le fonctionnement gnral de la radio et les fonctions d'appel qui sont disponibles sur votre radio. Slectionner un site Un site fournit la couverture pour une zone particulire. Un site Connect Plus est dot d'un contrleur de site et d'un maximum de 15 rpteurs. Dans les rseaux multisites, la radio Connect Plus recherche automatiquement un nouveau site lorsque la puissance du signal du site courant chute sous un niveau inacceptable. Demande ditinrance Une demande d'itinrance dit la radio de rechercher un autre site, mme si le signal du site courant est acceptable. Si aucun site n'est disponible :
La radio affiche la recherche et l'alias du canal slectionn et poursuit la recherche dans la liste des sites. 251 Franais (Canada) La radio reviendra au site prcdent si celui-ci est toujours disponible. AVIS:
Ceci est programm par votre dtaillant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Demande d'itinrance. Une tonalit retentit pour indiquer que la radio est passe un nouveau site. L'cran affiche ID du site <Numro du site>. Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :
Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :
252 Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. Restriction de site Votre administrateur de systme radio Connect Plus est en mesure de dcider quels sites du rseau sont autoriss ou non. Il n'est pas ncessaire de reprogrammer votre radio pour modifier la liste des sites autoriss et non autoriss. Si votre radio tente de s'inscrire sur un site non autoris, un bref message s'affiche pour indiquer : Site <numro donn> non autoris. La radio recherche alors un autre site rseau. Slection d'une zone La radio peut tre programme pour un maximum de 16 zones Connect Plus, et chaque zone contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables sur le bouton de slection de canaux. Chaque position assignable du bouton peut tre utilise pour dmarrer l'un des types d'appels vocaux suivants :
Appel de groupe Appel multigroupe Appel gnral de site Appel individuel 1 Accdez la fonction Zone en effectuant les commandes suivantes :
Commandes de la radio Touche programme Slection de zone Menu de la radio tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Slection de zone. a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio tapes suivre puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La zone slectionne est affiche et indique par l'icne
. 2 Slectionnez la zone requise. Commande radio tapes suivre ou Appuyez sur ou
, puis faites dfiler jusqu' la zone requise. b Appuyez sur ou 3 jusqu Rpondre, pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. 253 Franais (Canada) Utilisation de rseaux multiples Si votre radio a t programme pour utiliser plusieurs rseaux Connect Plus, vous pouvez slectionner un autre rseau en passant la zone Connect Plus attribue au rseau dsir. Ces attributions rseau--zone sont configures par votre dtaillant par le biais de la programmation de la radio. Slection dun type dappel Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un type d'appel. Il peut s'agir d'un appel de groupe, d'un appel multigroupe, d'un appel gnral ou d'un appel individuel, selon la programmation de votre radio. Si vous changez la position du bouton de slection de canaux (pour une position laquelle un type d'appel est affect), la radio s'enregistrera nouveau sur le site Connect Plus. La radio s'enregistre en utilisant l'ID de groupe d'enregistrement qui a t programm pour la nouvelle position du bouton de slection de canal le nouveau type d'appel. Si vous slectionnez une position laquelle aucun type d'appel n'est attribu, votre radio met une tonalit continue et lcran affiche Non programm. tant donn que votre radio ne peut pas fonctionner lorsqu'un canal non 254 programm est slectionn, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal programm. Lorsque la zone requise est affiche (si vous avez plusieurs zones sur votre radio), tournez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner le type d'appel. Rception et rponse un appel Une fois le canal, l'ID d'abonn ou le type d'appel affich, vous pouvez recevoir des appels et y rpondre. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. AVIS:
Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et met un clignotement double en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt . Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de cryptage OU des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 317. Recevoir un appel de groupe et y rpondre Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Si vous recevez un appel de groupe ( partir de l'cran d'accueil), le voyant DEL clignote en vert.L'icne d'appel de groupe apparat dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Franais (Canada) Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. AVIS:
Pour en savoir davantage sur la fonction d'appel de groupe, consultez la section Pour passer un appel de groupe la page 259. Recevoir un appel individuel et y rpondre Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Lorsque vous recevez un Appel individuel, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. Le message Appel indiv. et l'icne d'appel individuel s'affichent sur la deuxime ligne. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur de la radio. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 255 Franais (Canada) 2 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Pour en savoir davantage sur la fonction d'appel individuel, consultez la section Passer un appel individuel la page 260. Rception d'un appel gnral Un appel gnral est un appel provenant d'une radio individuelle et transmis toutes les radios du site. On l'utilise surtout pour faire une annonce importante exigeant toute l'attention de l'utilisateur. Lors de la rception d'un appel gnral de site, une tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL clignote en vert. L'icne d'appel de groupe apparat dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Appel gnral de site s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Une fois que l'appel gnral est termin, la radio revient lcran o elle tait avant de recevoir lappel. Les appels gnraux n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral de site. AVIS:
Voir Faire un appel gnral de site la page 261 pour savoir comment faire un appel gnral de site. La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les fonctions des touches programmes tant que l'appel est en cours. Rception d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel individuel entrant, l'icne d'appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche 256 dans le coin suprieur droit. La premire ligne de texte affiche Appel tl. l'cran. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Appel tl. Franais (Canada) 1 Pour rpondre et parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur l'appel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. L'cran d'appel tlphonique s'affiche. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 1 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer les chiffres et appuyez sur le bouton
. dans les
, suivi de Appuyez sur 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace
* et # sur l'afficheur. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de lcran affiche les chiffres saisis. Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de 2 pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. L'cran d'appel tlphonique s'affiche. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 257 Franais (Canada) Composition surnumraire en direct lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Appel tl. Rception d'un appel de Talkgroup entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel de Talkgroup, l'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel1 1 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et utilisez le clavier pour saisir les chiffres. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche les chiffres de composition en direct. 2 pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. L'cran d'appel tlphonique s'affiche. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Appel tlphonique multigroupe entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel multigroupe, l'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit. La premire ligne affiche Appel multigroupe. La radio dsactive la sourdine et la tonalit d'appel multigroupe entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Faire un appel radio Aprs avoir slectionn un canal, vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn ou de groupe l'aide des lments suivants :
Le bouton de slection de canaux. 258 Une touche programme daccs direct La fonction daccs direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel vers un ID prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quun seul ID une touche daccs direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. La liste de contacts (voir Rglages des contacts la page 284). AVIS:
La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active pour que ce canal soit en mesure d'envoyer des transmissions cryptes. Seule une radio cible dote des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 317. Faire un appel l'aide du bouton slecteur de canal Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de passer diffrents types d'appels : Appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel gnral de site, appel multigroupe. Franais (Canada) Pour passer un appel de groupe Pour tre en mesure de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 254. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le tmoin DEL sallume en vert continu. L'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. L'alias d'appel de groupe s'affiche sur la premire ligne de texte. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 259 Franais (Canada) Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert, la radio dsactive la sourdine et la rponse se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. L'icne d'appel de groupe, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio l'origine de la transmission s'affichent l'cran. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. La radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. Passer un appel individuel Bien que vous puissiez recevoir un appel individuel effectu par une radio individuelle autorise et y rpondre, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de passer un appel individuel. Si cette fonction n'a pas t active, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre lorsque vous tentez de faire un appel individuel en passant par la touche d'accs direct, ou le bouton de slection de canaux,. 1 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 254. 260 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'icne d'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran.. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert, . S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Votre radio peut tre programme de manire faire une vrification de prsence radio avant dtablir lappel individuel. Si la radio cible nest pas disponible, une courte tonalit se fait entendre et un bref avis dchec saffiche lcran. Faire un appel gnral de site Cette fonction vous permet de transmettre un appel tous les utilisateurs du site qui ne sont pas actuellement en communication pour un autre appel. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Les utilisateurs du canal ou du site ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral de site. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias de groupe Appel gnral de site en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 254. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. Franais (Canada) 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel gnral de site. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Appel multigroupe Cette fonction vous permet de transmettre tous les utilisateurs de groupes multiples. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. AVIS:
Les utilisateurs des groupes ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel multigroupe. 1 Tournez le bouton de slection de canaux pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID multigroupe. 261 Franais (Canada) 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID multigroupe. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche AVIS:
Les boutons programmables doivent tre enfoncs partir de l'cran d'accueil. La fonction d'appel direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. 262 Vous ne pouvez attribuer quUN SEUL alias ou ID un bouton d'appel direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs boutons d'appel directs pour votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'appel direct programm pour passer un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'appel individuel. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. Passer un appel au moyen de la touche programmable de composition manuelle Cette fonction permet lutilisateur radio de faire des appels privs l'aide de la touche programmable de composition manuelle. Passer un appel individuel 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Num. manuelle pour afficher l'cran de composition manuelle. L'cran affiche Numro :. 2 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un ID priv ou un alias dabonn. 3 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. Franais (Canada) 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'icne d'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant l'aide du bouton 263 Franais (Canada) programmable de numrotation manuelle 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Num. manuelle pour afficher l'cran de composition manuelle. L'cran affiche Numro :. 3 2 Utilisez le clavier pour saisir un numro de tlphone et appuyez sur numro. pour passer l'appel vers ce Si vous appuyez sur et qu'aucun numro de tlphone n'a t saisi, la radio fait entendre une tonalit dindication positive suivie d'une tonalit ngative. L'afficheur ne change pas. pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin.
, suivi de pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez sur inutiles. Appuyez sur dans les 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace
* et # sur l'afficheur. En cas de russite, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Si un numro de tlphone incorrect est slectionn, l'cran affiche un mini-avis ngatif, Appel tl. chou, Ressource indisponible, ou Autorisations invalides. Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant au moyen du menu du tlphone 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tlphone, puis pour slectionner. 264 3 pour slectionner Numrotation Appuyez sur manuelle. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le Numro et la deuxime ligne affiche un curseur clignotant. 5 4 Utilisez le clavier pour saisir un numro de tlphone et appuyez sur numro. pour passer l'appel vers ce Franais (Canada) tonalit dindication positive suivie d'une tonalit ngative. L'afficheur ne change pas. pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin.
, suivi de pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez sur inutiles. Appuyez sur dans les 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace
* et # sur l'afficheur. En cas de russite, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Si un numro de tlphone incorrect est slectionn, l'cran affiche un mini-avis ngatif, Appel tl. chou, Ressource indisponible, ou Autorisations invalides. Si vous appuyez sur et qu'aucun numro de tlphone n'a t saisi, la radio fait entendre une Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant partir des Contacts AVIS:
Si la numrotation manuelle du tlphone est dsactive dans MOTOTRBRO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, le No. tlphone ne s'affichera pas dans le menu. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 265 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Contacts, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Numrotation pour ou jusqu' Numro de Appuyez sur tlphone, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le Numro et la deuxime ligne affiche un curseur clignotant. pour 5 Utilisez le clavier pour saisir un numro de tlphone pour passer l'appel vers ce et appuyez sur numro. Si le bouton PTT est enfonc, l'cran affiche un mini-
avis ngatif Appuyez sur OK pour envoyer et revient l'cran prcdent. 266
, suivi de pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez sur inutiles. Appuyez sur dans les 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace
* et # sur l'afficheur. En cas de russite, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Si vous appuyez sur et qu'aucun numro de tlphone n'a t saisi, la radio fait entendre une tonalit dindication positive suivie d'une tonalit ngative. L'afficheur ne change pas. 6 pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Attente d'autorisation de canal lors d'un appel individuel sortant Lorsque vous passez un appel individuel, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Une fois l'appel connect, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche un mini-avis ngatif, Appel tl. chou, Ressource indisponible, ou Invalid Permissions (Autorisations invalides). Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. pour mettre fin Franais (Canada) Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte sur l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone. 1 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer les chiffres.
, suivi de pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez sur dans les inutiles. Appuyez sur 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace
* et # sur l'afficheur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le texte Chiffres suppl. et la deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche les chiffres supplmentaires. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton
. 267 Franais (Canada) Si le bouton PTT est enfonc, l'cran affiche un mini-
avis ngatif Appuyez sur OK pour envoyer et revient l'cran prcdent. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone avec les chiffres supplmentaires (composition surnumraire). 3 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Appuyez sur tlphonique. pour revenir l'cran d'appel Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin Composition surnumraire en direct en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de 268 l'cran. La premire ligne de texte sur l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et utilisez le clavier pour saisir les chiffres. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone avec les chiffres supplmentaires (composition surnumraire). 2 pour mettre fin Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Fonctions avances en mode Connect Plus Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active par le CPS, la tonalit de rappel du canal daccueil et lavertissement sonore retentissent. De plus, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Non et la deuxime Canal daccueil de manire rpte lorsque la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :
Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. Plan de secours automatique Le plan de secours automatique est une fonction du systme qui permet de continuer effectuer et recevoir des appels non urgents dans le groupe de contacts Franais (Canada) slectionn s'il se produit certains types de dfaillance du systme Connect Plus. Si une telle dfaillance se produit, votre radio tente de d'accder un autre site Connect Plus. Ce processus de recherche peut amener votre radio trouver un site Connect Plus fonctionnel ou un canal de secours (si le plan de secours automatique est activ sur votre radio). Un canal de secours est un rpteur qui fait habituellement partie d'un site Connect Plus fonctionnel, mais qui n'est pas en mesure de communiquer pour l'instant ni avec son contrleur de site ni avec le rseau Connect Plus. En mode de reprise d'appel automatique, le rpteur fonctionne en tant que rpteur numrique autonome . Le mode de secours automatique ne prend en charge que les appels de groupe non urgents. Aucun autre type d'appel n'est pris en charge en mode de secours. Indications de mode de reprise d'appel automatique Lorsque votre radio utilise un canal de reprise d'appel, vous pouvez entendre une tonalit de reprise intermittente peu prs toutes les quinze secondes (sauf durant la transmission). L'cran affiche brivement le message Canal de reprise d'appel de manire priodique. Votre radio ne permet d'utiliser le PTT qu'avec le groupe de 269 Franais (Canada) contacts slectionn (appel de groupe, appel multigroupe ou appel gnral de site). Elle ne vous permet pas de passer d'autres types d'appels. 270 Recevoir et passer des appels en mode de reprise AVIS:
Les appels ne sont entendus que par les radios qui coutent le mme canal de reprise et qui ont slectionn le mme groupe. Les appels ne sont pas mis en rseau avec d'autres sites ou d'autres relais. Ni les appels vocaux d'urgence ni les alertes d'urgence ne sont disponibles en mode de reprise. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton d'urgence en mode de reprise, la radio met une tonalit de touche non valide. Les radios dotes d'un cran affichent aussi le message Fonction non disponible . Les appels privs (de radio radio) et les appels tlphoniques ne sont pas disponibles en mode reprise. Si vous tentez d'appeler un contact individuel, vous recevrez une tonalit de refus. ce moment, vous devez slectionner un contact du groupe dsir. Voici d'autres types d'appels non pris en charge : coute ambiance, avertissement d'appel, vrification de la radio, activation de la radio, dsactivation de la radio, messagerie texte, actualisation demplacement et appels de donnes en paquets. L'accs amlior au canal de trafic (ETCA) n'est pas pris en charge en mode de reprise automatique. Si deux utilisateurs de radio ou plus appuient sur le bouton PTT en mme temps (ou presque en mme temps), il est possible que les deux radios mettent jusqu' ce que le bouton PTT soit relch. Dans ce cas, il est possible qu'aucune transmission ne soit comprise par les radios rceptrices. Pour passer des appels en mode de reprise, procdez comme pour le fonctionnement normal. Slectionnez simplement le contact de groupe que vous dsirez utiliser
(en utilisant la mthode de slection habituelle de canal de la radio), puis appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour faire votre appel. Il est possible que le canal soit dj utilis par un autre groupe. Si le canal est dj utilis, une tonalit occup retentit et l'cran affiche Canal occup . Vous pouvez slectionner des contacts de groupe, multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site en utilisant la mthode de slection habituelle de canal de la radio. Lorsque la radio est utilise sur le canal de reprise, les groupes multiples fonctionnent comme les autres groupes. Elle ne peut tre entendue que par les radios qui ont slectionn le mme multigroupe. Franais (Canada) Retour au fonctionnement normal Si le site revient au fonctionnement ADF normal pendant que vous vous trouvez porte du rpteur de secours, votre radio quitte automatiquement le mode de secours automatique. Un bip retentit lorsque votre radio est enregistre. Si vous tes porte d'un site fonctionnel (qui n'est pas en mode de secours), vous pouvez appuyer sur le bouton de demande d'itinrance (si cette fonction est programme dans votre radio) pour forcer votre radio rechercher un site disponible et s'y enregistrer. Si aucun autre site n'est disponible, votre radio retourne au mode de secours automatique une fois la recherche termine. Si vous sortez de la zone de couverture de votre rpteur de secours, votre radio se met en mode de recherche (lcran affiche Recherche). Vrification de la radio Lorsqu'active, la fonction Vrif. radio vous permet de dterminer si une autre radio est en fonction au sein d'un systme, sans importuner l'utilisateur de cette radio. Aucune notification sonore ou visuelle ne se manifeste sur la radio cible. Cette fonction n'est offerte que pour les alias ou ID d'abonn. 271 Franais (Canada) Envoyer une vrification radio 1 Accdez la fonction Vrification de la radio. Commande radio Touche programme Vrif. radio tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme Vrif. radio. Commande radio tapes suivre c Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Menu a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour d Appuyez sur ou Vrification radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'alias cible indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio cible est active dans le systme, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche brivement le message Radio cible disponible. 272 Franais (Canada) Si la radio cible n'est pas active dans le systme, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche brivement le message Radio cible Non disponible. La radio revient l'cran d'alias ou d'ID d'abonn lorsque la commande est active partir du menu. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil si la commande est active partir du bouton programmable. Lancer la fonction coute ambiance AVIS:
Le moniteur distance s'arrte automatiquement aprs une dure programme ou lors d'une tentative de transmission, de changement de canal ou de mise hors tension de la radio. 1 Accdez la fonction coute ambiance. coute distance Utilisez la fonction coute ambiance pour activer le microphone d'une radio cible (alias ou ID d'abonn seulement). Le voyant DEL clignotera une fois en vert sur l'abonn vis. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Commande radio Touche programme coute ambiance. tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Menu a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour 273 Franais (Canada) Commande radio tapes suivre Commande radio tapes suivre b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour c Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour d Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour e Appuyez sur ou jusqu' coute amb., puis 274 sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour La premire ligne de l'cran affiche coute. distance. La deuxime ligne affiche l'alias cible, indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL passe au vert clignotant. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message coute amb. coute russie. Votre radio fait entendre l'audio provenant de la radio coute pendant une dure programme, et l'cran affiche coute Moniteur, suivi par l'alias cible. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, la radio fait entendre une tonalit davertissement et le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec, une tonalit d'indication ngative se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message coute amb. chec dcoute. Balayage Cette fonction permet votre radio d'couter et de joindre des appels pour des groupes/canaux dfinis dans une liste de balayage prprogramme. Lorsque la fonction de balayage est active, l'icne de balayage apparat dans la barre d'tat. Le voyant DEL clignote en jaune si le balayage devient inactif. Dmarrer et arrter le balayage 1 2 3 AVIS:
Cette procdure active ou dsactive le balayage pour toutes zones Connect Plus avec la mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. Il est important de noter que mme lorsque la fonction de balayage est active au moyen de cette procdure, le balayage peut encore tre dsactiv pour certains groupes (ou tous) de votre liste de balayage. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Modifier la liste de balayage la page 278. Vous pouvez lancer et arrter un balayage en appuyant sur la touche programme Balayage OU en suivant la procdure ci-dessous. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Balayage, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' l'option pour ou jusqu' Allumer ou Appuyez sur teindre, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. L'cran affiche Scan Activ lorsque le balayage pour est activ. Le menu Balayage affiche le message teindre si le balayage est activ. L'cran affiche Scan dsactiv lorsque le balayage est dsactiv. Le menu Balayage affiche le message Allumer si le balayage est dsactiv. 275 Franais (Canada) Rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage Lorsqu'elle excute un balayage, votre radio s'arrte sur un groupe si elle y dtecte de l'activit. La radio balaie en continu pour dtecter des membres de la liste de balayage lorsqu'elle se trouve sur le canal de contrle. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode d'attente. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si vous ne rpondez pas avant que la priode d'attente soit coule, la radio reprend le balayage des autres groupes. 276 Balayage configurable par l'utilisateur Si le menu Modifier liste est activ, l'utilisateur peut ajouter ou supprimer des membres de la liste de balayage partir du menu Ajouter membre. Un membre de la liste de balayage doit tre un contact de groupe rgulier (p. ex. non pas un contact multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site/de rseau) qui est actuellement affect une position du slecteur de canal dans une zone Connect Plus avec le mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. De plus, l'alias du groupe ne doit concorder avec aucun groupe dj inclus dans la liste de balayage de la zone courante. Le balayage peut tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen du menu ou en appuyant sur un balayage activ/dsactiv programm. Cette fonction n'est accessible que si la radio n'a pas d'appel en cours. Si vous avez un appel en cours, votre radio ne peut pas effectuer de balayage pour rechercher d'autres appels de groupe et n'en peroit donc pas. Une fois l'appel termin, votre radio retourne au crneau temporel du canal de contrle et est en mesure de balayer pour reprer les groupes de la liste de balayage. 2 3 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage AVIS:
Cette procdure active ou dsactive le balayage pour toutes les zones avec la mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. Il est important de noter que mme lorsque la fonction de balayage est active au moyen de cette procdure, le balayage peut encore tre dsactiv pour certains groupes (ou tous) de votre liste de balayage. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements, consultez la section suivante. Lorsque le balayage est activ, l'icne de balayage s'affiche l'cran. Lorsque le balayage est activ et que vous n'avez pas d'appel en cours, le voyant DEL clignote en vert et jaune. La procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage dpend de la faon dont votre radio est programme. Si elle a t programme avec un bouton de balayage activ/
dsactiv, utilisez-le pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Si votre radio a t programme pour que le balayage puisse tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen du menu, procdez comme suit. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur Balayage, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' l'option pour ou jusqu' Allumer ou Appuyez sur teindre, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. L'cran affiche Balayage activ pendant un pour moment lorsque le balayage est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Balayage dsactiv pendant un moment lorsque le balayage est activ. 277 Franais (Canada) Modifier la liste de balayage AVIS:
Si l'entre de la liste de balayage se trouve tre dans le groupe actuellement slectionn, la radio vrifie s'il y a de l'activit dans ce groupe, qu'il y ait ou non un crochet devant l'entre de la liste. Quand une radio n'a pas d'appel en cours, la radio vrifie s'il y a de l'activit dans le groupe slectionn, le multigroupe, l'appel gnral de site et son groupe d'annulation d'urgence par dfaut (s'il y en a un de configur). Cette opration ne peut pas tre dsactive. Si le balayage est activ, la radio vrifie galement s'il y a de l'activit auprs des membres activs de la liste de balayage de zone. Votre liste de balayage dtermine les groupes qui peuvent tre balays. La liste est cre lors de la programmation de votre radio. Si votre radio a t programme pour vous permettre de modifier la liste de balayage, vous pouvez :
Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupes individuels dans la liste. Ajouter ou supprimer des membres de la liste de balayage partir du menu Ajouter membre. Reportez-
vous la section Ajouter ou supprimer un groupe partir du menu Ajouter membre la page 279. 278 1 2 3 AVIS:
Un membre de la liste de balayage doit tre un contact de groupe rgulier (et non pas un contact multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site/de rseau) qui est actuellement affect une position du slecteur de canal dans une zone Connect Plus avec le mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. De plus, l'alias du groupe ne doit concorder avec aucun groupe dj inclus dans la liste de balayage de la zone courante. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur liste, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir/Modif pour slectionner. ou jusqu'au nom de groupe Appuyez sur voulu. S'il y a un crochet devant le nom du groupe, le balayage est actuellement activ pour ce groupe. S'il n'y a pas de crochet devant le nom du groupe, le balayage est actuellement dsactiv pour ce groupe. 4 pour slectionner le groupe voulu. L'cran affiche Activer si le balayage est dsactiv pour le groupe. L'cran affiche Dsactiver si le balayage est activ pour le groupe. 5 Slectionnez l'option affiche (Activer ou pour Dsactiver), puis appuyez sur slectionner. Selon l'option qui a t slectionne, la radio affiche brivement Balayage activ ou Balayage dsactiv en guise de confirmation. La radio affiche de nouveau la liste de balayage de la zone. Si le balayage est activ pour le groupe, le crochet est affich devant le nom du groupe. Si le balayage est dsactiv pour le groupe, le crochet est supprim devant le nom du groupe. Franais (Canada) Ajouter ou supprimer un groupe partir du menu Ajouter membre La radio Connect Plus n'autorise pas les numros ou les alias de groupe en double tre insrs dans une liste de balayage de zone (ou tre affichs en tant que candidats pour le balayage ). Ainsi, la liste des candidats pour le balayage dcrite aux tapes tape 6 et tape 7 change parfois aprs l'ajout ou la suppression d'un groupe dans la liste de balayage de zone. Si votre radio a t programme pour vous permettre de modifier la liste de balayage, vous pouvez utiliser le menu Ajouter membre pour ajouter un groupe la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne ou pour supprimer un groupe de la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Balayage, puis appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'option pour slectionner. 279 Franais (Canada) 3 ou pour <Ajouter Appuyez sur membre>, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche le message Ajouter membre de la zone n (o n = le numro de zone Connect Plus de la premire zone Connect Plus de votre radio possdant le mme ID rseau que votre zone actuellement slectionne). 4 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Si le groupe que vous souhaitez ajouter la liste de balayage est affect une position du slecteur de canaux dans cette zone, passez tape 6. Si le groupe que vous souhaitez ajouter la liste de balayage est affect une position du slecteur de canaux dans une autre zone Connect Plus, passez tape 5. Appuyez sur liste de zones Connect Plus possdant le mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. pour faire dfiler une ou 5 280 6 Aprs avoir localis la zone Connect Plus dans pour laquelle le groupe dsir est affect une position du slecteur de canal, appuyez sur slectionner. Votre radio affiche la premire entre d'une liste de groupes affects une position du slecteur de canal dans cette zone. Les groupes de la liste sont appels candidats pour le balayage parce qu'ils peuvent tre ajouts la liste de balayage de votre zone actuellement slectionne (ou qu'ils se trouvent dj dans la liste de balayage de la zone). Si la zone ne comprend aucun groupe pouvant tre ajout la liste de balayage, la radio affiche le message Aucun candidat. 7 pour faire dfiler la liste Appuyez sur ou des groupes candidats. Si un signe plus (+) est affich immdiatement avant l'alias d'un groupe, cela indique que le groupe figure actuellement dans la liste de balayage de la zone slectionne. Si le signe plus (+) n'est pas affich immdiatement avant l'alias d'un groupe, cela signifie que le groupe Franais (Canada) ne figure actuellement pas dans la liste de balayage, mais qu'il peut tre ajout. supprimer un groupe de la liste de balayage avant d'en ajouter un nouveau. 8 9 lorsque l'alias de groupe dsir Appuyez sur s'affiche. Si ce groupe ne figure pas actuellement dans la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne, le message Ajouter (alias du groupe) s'affiche. Si ce groupe figure dj dans la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne, le message Supprimer (alias du groupe) s'affiche. pour accepter le message affich Appuyez sur
(Ajouter ou Supprimer). Si vous supprimez un groupe de la liste, vous saurez que l'opration a russi lorsque le signe plus (+) n'apparatra plus immdiatement devant l'alias. Si vous ajoutez un groupe de la liste, vous saurez que l'opration a russi lorsque le signe plus (+) apparatra immdiatement devant l'alias. Si vous tentez d'ajouter un groupe et que la liste est dj pleine, la radio affiche le message Liste pleine. Dans une telle ventualit, vous devrez 10 Lorsque vous avez termin, appuyez sur autant de fois que ncessaire pour revenir au menu dsir. Comprendre la fonction de balayage AVIS:
Si la radio se joint un appel pass un membre de zone de liste de balayage partir d'une zone diffrente et que le minuteur de mise en attente d'appel expire avant que vous puissiez rpondre, vous devez alors atteindre la zone et le canal du membre de la liste de balayage et passer un nouvel appel. Il y a des circonstances dans lesquelles vous pouvez manquer des appels de groupe qui se trouvent dans votre liste de balayage. Si vous manquez un appel pour l'une des raisons suivantes, cela n'indique pas que votre radio prsente un problme. Il s'agit du fonctionnement normal du balayage en mode Connect Plus. La fonction de balayage n'est pas active (recherchez l'icne de balayage l'cran). 281 Franais (Canada) Un canal membre de la liste de balayage a t dsactiv par le biais du menu (consultez la section Modifier la liste de balayage la page 278). Vous avez dj un appel en cours. Aucun membre du groupe balay n'est enregistr auprs de votre site (systmes multisite seulement). Rponse de balayage Si votre radio balaye un appel partir de la liste de balayage de groupe slectionner, et si le bouton PTT est actionn au cours du balayage d'appel, le fonctionnement de la radio dpendra de l'activation ou de la dsactivation de l'option de rponse de balayage pendant la programmation de la radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Rponse de balayage dsactive La radio abandonne l'appel balay et tente de transmettre au contact pour la position de canal slectionne. Aprs expiration du temps de maintien d'appel sur le contact actuellement slectionn, la radio revient au canal d'accueil et dmarre la minuterie de mise en attente du balayage. La radio reprend le balayage de groupe aprs que le dlai d'attente du balayage soit coul. Rponse de balayage active Si le bouton PTT est actionn durant le temps de maintien de l'appel de groupe balay, la radio essaie de transmettre au groupe balay. AVIS:
Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui n'est pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que vous manquez le temps de maintien d'appel, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir rpondre ce groupe. Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels La fonction Surveillance prioritaire permet la radio d'automatiquement recevoir les transmissions du groupe d'appels avec une priorit suprieure lorsqu'elle est sur un autre appel. Une tonalit se fait entendre lorsque la radio passe l'appel la priorit plus leve. Il existe deux niveaux de priorit pour les groupes d'appels : P1 et P2. P1 est une priorit suprieure P2. 282 AVIS:
Si l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence par dfaut est configur dans le CPS de la carte d'option MOTOTRBO Connect Plus, il existe trois niveaux de priorit pour des groupes d'appels : P0, P1 et P2. P0 est l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence permanente et la priorit la plus leve. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Balayage, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' l'option pour Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur priorit, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Modif. pour ou jusqu'au niveau de pour Appuyez sur priorit requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran prcdent. L'icne de priorit s'affiche la gauche du groupe d'appels. Appuyez sur liste, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir/Modif pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur jusqu'au groupe voulu, pour slectionner. 283 1 2 3 4 Franais (Canada) Rglages des contacts AVIS:
Vous pouvez ajouter ou modifier des ID d'abonn pour les contacts Connect Plus. La suppression des ID dabonn ne peut tre effectue que par votre dtaillant. La fonction de cryptage est active sur un canal;
vous pouvez passer un appel vocal crypt sur ce canal. Seule une radio cible dote de la mme cl de cryptage ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Laccs des listes de contacts dpend de la configuration de zone :
Si seulement un fuseau horaire est configur dans la radio, la liste de contacts affiche directement la liste partir de la zone slectionne. Si plusieurs zones sont configurs dans la radio, le dossier de contacts de la zone affiche toutes les zones avec les mmes ID rseau que la zone slectionne. L'utilisateur peut accder aux contacts dans ces zones. La fonction Contacts correspond au carnet dadresses de votre radio. Chaque entre est associe un alias ou un ID que vous utilisez pour passer un appel. 284 Chaque zone permet d'avoir une liste pouvant contenir jusqu' 100 contacts. Les types de contacts suivants sont disponibles :
Appel individuel Appel de groupe Appel multigroupe Appel gnral de site vocal Appel gnral de site texte Appel de rpartition Le type de contact dappel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais dun serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. Passer un appel individuel partir des contacts 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Contacts, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. 3 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert et l'cran affiche l'ID de l'utilisateur qui effectue la transmission. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Franais (Canada) Faire un appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias Vous pouvez galement utiliser un alias ou une recherche alphanumrique pour rcuprer lalias dun abonn. Cette fonction nest accessible quau moyen de la liste des contacts. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. ou pour slectionner. Contacts, puis sur 3 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias requis, puis appuyez sur la touche l'alias requis. ou pour localiser 4 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 285 Franais (Canada) 5 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 6 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 7 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Ajout d'un nouveau contact Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 286 2 3 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Contacts, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur contact, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Nouveau pour 4 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer le numro du contact et appuyez sur pour confirmer. 5 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer le nom du contact et appuyez sur pour confirmer. 6 jusqu'au type de sonnerie voulu, puis sur Si vous ajoutez un contact radio, appuyez sur ou appuyez sur La radio fait entendre une tonalit de russite et l'cran affiche le message Contact enregistr. pour slectionner. 5 6 7 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de configurer un appel ou un message texte sonneries. Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des avertissements d'appel Vous pouvez slectionner, activer ou dsactiver les sonneries des avertissements d'appel que vous recevez. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou Tnlts/Avert., puis pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur dappels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Sonn. pour ou jusqu' Avert. Appuyez sur d'appel, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne pour
. ou Appuyez sur voulue, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' la tonalit pour L'icne s'affiche ct de la tonalit slectionne. 287 Franais (Canada) Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels individuels Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver les sonneries des appels individuels que vous recevez. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Tonalits/alertes, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur dappels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Sonn. pour 1 2 3 4 5 288 6 7 ou Appuyer sur individuel, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Appel pour pour activer ou dsactiver les Appuyez sur sonneries d'appel individuel. Si les sonneries d'appel individuel sont actives, l'cran affiche Le symbole d'appel individuel sont dsactives. ct du message Activ. n'est pas affich lorsque les tonalits Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des messages texte Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des messages texte que vous recevez. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. 7 ou Appuyez sur voulue, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' la tonalit pour Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Tonalits/alertes, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur dappels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Sonn. pour ou Appuyez sur texte, puis sur appuyez sur La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne jusqu' Message pour slectionner. L'icne s'affiche ct de la tonalit slectionne. Slection dun type de sonnerie davertissement AVIS:
La touche programme Type de sonnerie davertissement est attribue par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Vous pouvez programmer une alerte par vibration unique prdtermine pour les appels radio. Si l'tat Toutes Tonalits est dsactiv, la radio affiche l'icne Toutes Tonalits dsactives. Si l'tat Toutes les tonalits est activ, le type de sonnerie d'alerte est affich. La radio vibre une fois s'il s'agit d'un style de sonnerie momentan. La radio vibre de faon rptitive s'il s'agit 289 Franais (Canada) d'un style de sonnerie rptitif. Lorsque l'option Sonnerie et vibration est slectionne, la radio met une sonnerie particulire lors d'une communication radio entrante (p. ex. alerte d'appel ou message). Elle ressemble une tonalit dindication positive ou un appel manqu. Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Vous pouvez programmer la radio pour qu'elle mette une alarme continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. Journal des appels Votre radio fait le suivi des appels individuels que vous avez faits, que vous avez reus et que vous avez manqus rcemment. Utilisez le journal des appels pour afficher et grer les derniers appels. Dans chacune des listes d'appels, vous pouvez excuter les tches suivantes :
Suppression 290 Afficher les dtails Magasin Affichage des derniers appels Les listes offertes sont : Manqus, Rpondus et Sortants. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur d'appels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Journal pour Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche l'entre la plus rcente au sommet de la liste. jusqu la liste voulue, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour passer un appel individuel l'alias ou l'ID slectionn. pour voir la liste. Supprimer un appel d'une liste d'appels Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer, puis pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Faites un des suivants :
ou Appuyez sur d'appels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Journal pour jusqu' la liste voulue, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Lorsque vous slectionnez une liste et qu'elle ne contient aucune entre, l'cran affiche Liste vide, , et une tonalit grave se fait entendre si les tonalits du clavier sont actives. Appuyez sur requis, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour slectionner. Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui et supprimer l'entre. L'cran affiche Entre supprime. Appuyez sur ou appuyez sur appuyez sur la touche retourner la fentre prcdente. jusqu' Non, puis pour Afficher les dtails d'une liste d'appels 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur d'appels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Journal pour 291 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' la liste voulue, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur requis, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour slectionner. pour afficher les ou Appuyez sur dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. L'cran affiche les dtails de la liste d'appel. pour Fonction Avertissement dappel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle lorsqu'il lui sera possible de le faire. Cette fonction est accessible partir du menu en allant sur Contacts, numrotation manuelle ou ou par la touche programme d'accs direct. 292 Rponse un avertissement d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un avertissement d'appel sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un avertissement d'appel :
Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. L'cran affiche la liste des notifications d'avertissement d'appel accompagne de l'alias ou de l'ID de la radio de l'appelant. Selon la configuration par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme, vous pouvez rpondre un avertissement d'appel en procdant de l'une des manires suivantes :
Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et rpondez par un appel individuel directement l'appelant. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour continuer la communication de groupe d'appels normale. L'avertissement d'appel est dplac vers l'option Appel manqu dans le menu du Journal d'appels. Vous pouvez rpondre l'appelant partir du journal Appel manqu. Pour plus d'informations ce sujet, reportez-vous Liste de notifications la page 204 et Fonctions du Journal des appels la page 138. Envoyer un avertissement d'appel partir de la liste des contacts 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 4 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Contacts, puis sur ou pour slectionner. 3 Suivez une des tapes ci-dessous pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn voulu :
slectionner l'alias d'abonn directement Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. utiliser le menu Num. manuelle Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu'
Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran de saisie de texte de numrotation manuelle doit tre affich. Entrez l'ID d'abonn, puis appuyez sur
. ou pour jusqu' Avert. Appuyez sur d'appel, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel : <alias ou ID d'abonn>Avert. d'appel et l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn, indiquant que l'avertissement d'appel a t envoy. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant l'envoi de l'avertissement d'appel. Si la radio reoit l'accus de rception de lavertissement dappel, lcran affiche Avert. appel russi. Sinon, lcran affiche Avert. appel chou. 293 Franais (Canada) Envoyer un avertissement d'appel au moyen de la touche d'accs direct Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs direct pour envoyer un avertissement d'appel l'ID prdfini. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn pour vous aviser que l'avertissement a t envoy. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant l'envoi de l'avertissement d'appel. Si la confirmation d'avertissement d'appel est reue, l'cran indique Avert. dappel russi. Si la confirmation de l'avis d'appel n'est pas reue, l'cran indique Avert. dappel chou. Mode Muet Le mode muet propose une option l'utilisateur de couper tous les indicateurs audio de la radio. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs l'exception des fonctions de priorit leve, comme les oprations d'urgence. 294 Lorsque l'on quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. AVIS:
Ceci est une fonction pouvant tre achete. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet activ. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'
ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. L'cran affiche le Mode muet sur l'cran d'accueil. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet La fonction Mode muet peut tre active pour une dure prdtermine en rglant la minuterie du mode muet. La dure de la minuterie est configure dans le menu de la radio et peut tre comprise entre 0,5 et 6 heures. Le mode muet est quitt lorsque la minuterie expire. Si la minuterie est laisse 0, la radio reste en mode muet pendant une priode indfinie jusqu' ce que lon appuie sur la touche programme Mode muet. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mode muet. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur pour modifier la valeur ou 4 5
. Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet dsactiv. 295 Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. L'icne Mode muet disparat de l'cran d'accueil. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-
parleur est rtabli. Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est arrte. AVIS:
Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. 296 Fonctionnement durgence AVIS:
Si votre radio est programme pour l'activation du mode durgence Silencieux ou Silencieux avec voix , elle quitte automatiquement le mode silencieux dans la plupart des cas aprs la fin de l'appel d'urgence ou de l'alerte d'urgence. L'exception cette rgle est le cas o Alerte d'urgence est le mode d'urgence configur et Silencieux est le type d'urgence configur. Si votre radio est programme de cette manire, le mode silencieux est maintenu jusqu' ce que vous l'annuliez en appuyant sur le bouton PTT ou sur le bouton configur pour Urgence dsactive . Ni les appels vocaux d'urgence ni les alertes d'urgence ne sont pris en charge en mode de secours automatique Connect Plus. Pour de plus amples renseignements, voir Plan de secours automatique la page 269. Une alerte d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps, partir de nimporte quel cran, mme si de lactivit se droule sur le canal actuel. Le mode d'urgence programm se dclenche lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton Urgence. Le mode d'urgence programm peut aussi tre dclench en activant la fonction de situation de dtresse en option. La fonction d'urgence peut tre dsactive sur votre radio. Votre dtaillant peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf la dure dappui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons. Appui bref De 0,05 0,75 seconde. Appui long De 1,00 3,75 secondes. La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. Si l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Lorsqu'une zone Connect Plus est slectionne, votre radio prend en charge trois modes durgence :
Franais (Canada) Appel d'urgence Vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour parler dans le crneau temporel d'urgence attribu. Appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal Lors de la premire transmission dans le crneau temporel d'urgence attribu, la sourdine du microphone est dsactive et vous pouvez parler sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. De cette faon, le microphone est branch pendant la dure programme dans la radio. Pour les transmissions subsquentes du mme appel d'urgence, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Alerte d'urgence Une alerte d'urgence n'est pas un appel vocal. Il s'agit d'une notification d'urgence qui est envoye aux radios configures pour recevoir de type d'alerte. La radio envoie une alerte d'urgence par le canal de contrle du site actuellement enregistr. L'alerte d'urgence est reue par les radios du rseau Connect Plus qui sont programmes pour les recevoir (quel que soit le site rseau auprs duquel elles sont enregistres). Seul un des modes d'urgence peut tre affect au bouton Urgence pour chaque zone. De plus, chaque mode durgence comprend les types suivants :
297 Franais (Canada) Rgulier La radio met une alarme et active des indicateurs sonores et/ou visuels. Silencieux La radio lance une urgence sans indication sonore ou visuelle. La radio coupe toutes les indications sonores ou visuelles relatives l'urgence jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Silencieux avec voix Identique au mode Silencieux, sauf que la sourdine de la radio se dsactive galement pour certaines transmissions vocales. Recevoir un appel d'urgence entrant Votre radio peut tre programme pour mettre une tonalit dalerte et afficher de l'information au sujet de l'avis d'urgence entrant. Si la radio est programme de cette faon, la rception de l'avertissement d'urgence entrant, l'cran affiche les dtails de l'urgence avec l'icne d'urgence, lalias ou de lID de la radio qui a fait la demande durgence, le contact du groupe utilis pour l'urgence et une ligne additionnelle d'information. L'information supplmentaire est le nom de la zone qui contient le contact de groupe. 298 Pour le moment, la radio n'affiche que la plus rcente urgence avoir t dcode. Si une nouvelle urgence est reue avant que l'urgence prcdente soit efface, les dtails de la nouvelle urgence remplacent ceux de l'urgence prcdente. Selon la faon dont votre radio a t programme, l'cran des dtails de l'urgence (ou de la liste des alarmes) reste affich mme aprs la fin de l'urgence. Vous pouvez enregistrer les dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes ou les supprimer de la faon dcrite dans les sections suivantes :
Enregistrement des dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes L'enregistrement des dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes permet dafficher les dtails plus tard en slectionnant la liste des alarmes dans le menu principal. 1 Pendant que l'cran des dtails de l'urgence (ou la liste des alarmes) est affich, appuyez sur L'cran Quitter la liste des alarmes s'affiche. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions suivantes :
Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur pour enregistrer les dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes et pour quitter l'cran des dtails de l'urgence (ou la liste des alarmes). Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur pour revenir lcran des dtails de l'urgence (ou la liste des alarmes). Supprimer les dtails de l'urgence 1 Pendant que l'cran des dtails de l'urgence est affich, appuyez sur L'cran Supprimer s'affiche. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions suivantes :
Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur supprimer les dtails de l'urgence. pour Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur revenir lcran des dtails de l'urgence. pour Franais (Canada) Rponse un appel d'urgence AVIS:
Si vous ne rpondez pas l'appel d'urgence dans le dlai de rponse prvu, l'appel d'urgence prend fin. Si vous dsirez parler au groupe aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence, vous devez d'abord slectionner la position du canal attribue au groupe
(si elle n'est pas dj slectionne). Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton PTT pour effectuer un appel non urgent au groupe. 1 Lors de la rception d'un appel d'urgence, appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche pour interrompre toutes les indications de rception d'appel d'urgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour diffuser une transmission vocale dans le groupe d'urgence. Toutes les radios qui coutent ce groupe entendront votre transmission. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Le voyant DEL s'allume en vert. 299 Ignorer Appel d'annulation d'urgence Cette amlioration de fonctionnalit sert fournir une option pour la radio d'ignorer un appel d'annulation d'urgence. Pour activer la fonction Ignorer Appel d'annulation d'urgence, la radio doit tre configure avec le CPCPS. Lorsque la fonction est active, la radio n'affiche pas les indications d'appel d'urgence et elle ne reoit pas le signal audio de l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence par dfaut. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio mettrice de lappel durgence rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. L'icne d'appel de groupe, l'ID du groupe ainsi que l'ID de la radio mettrice s'affichent l'cran. Rpondre une alerte d'urgence AVIS:
Le contact du groupe utilis pour l'alerte d'urgence ne doit pas tre utilis pour les communications vocales. Cela aurait pour effet d'empcher d'autres radios d'envoyer et de recevoir des alertes d'urgence dans ce groupe. Une alerte d'urgence provenant d'une radio indique que l'utilisateur se trouve dans une situation d'urgence. Vous pouvez ragir l'alerte en faisant un Appel individuel la radio qui a dclar l'urgence, en faisant un appel de groupe au groupe dappel dsign, en envoyant une alerte d'appel la radio, en amorant la surveillance distance de radio, etc. La rponse approprie est dtermine par votre organisation et par la situation particulire. 300 Initiation d'un appel d'urgence AVIS:
Si votre radio est rgle Silencieux, elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle durant l'urgence jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Si votre radio est rgle Silencieux avec voix, elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle de mode durgence. Cependant, votre radio dbloque le son pour les transmissions des radios qui rpondent votre urgence. Les indicateurs d'urgence ne se manifestent que lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Tant en mode Silencieux que Silencieux avec voix , la radio quitte automatiquement le mode silencieux aprs la fin de l'appel d'urgence. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour diffuser une transmission vocale dans le groupe d'urgence. Lorsque vous relchez le bouton PTT, l'appel d'urgence se poursuit pendant la priode alloue comme dlai d'appel d'urgence. Franais (Canada) Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant ce temps, l'appel d'urgence se poursuit. Lancement d'un appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal Votre radio doit tre programme pour ce mode. Dans ce mode, lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton programm Urgence et que votre radio reoit un crneau temporel, le microphone est automatiquement activ sans que vous ayez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . Le microphone branch s'applique la premire transmission vocale de votre radio durant l'appel d'urgence. Pour les transmissions subsquentes du mme appel d'urgence, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence. 2 Le microphone reste actif pendant la dure de microphone branch prcise dans la programmation de la codeplug radio. Pendant ce temps, le voyant DEL s'allume en vert. 301 Franais (Canada) 3 Maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc pour parler plus longtemps que la dure programme. le contact du groupe utilis pour l'alerte d'urgence l'alarme TX. Lancement d'une alerte d'urgence AVIS:
Si votre radio est programme pour Silencieux ou Silencieux avec voix , elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle qu'elle est en train d'envoyer une alerte d'urgence. Si elle est programme pour Silencieux , le mode silencieux est maintenu indfiniment jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT ou sur le bouton configur pour Urg. Ds. Si elle est programme pour Silencieux avec voix , la radio annule automatiquement le mode silencieux lorsque le contrleur de site diffuse l'alerte d'urgence. Appuyez sur le bouton Urgence orange. Une fois l'alerte d'urgence transmise au contrleur de site, l'cran de la radio affiche l'icne d'urgence, Une fois que l'alerte d'urgence est envoye avec succs et qu'elle est diffuse l'intention des autres radios, une tonalit de russite retentit et l'cran de la radio affiche Alerte envoye. Si l'alerte d'urgence est sans succs, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre et la radio affiche chec alerte. Quitter le mode durgence AVIS:
Si l'appel d'urgence prend fin en raison de l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence alors que la situation d'urgence existe toujours, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton Urgence pour redmarrer le processus. Si vous lancez une alerte d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton programm Urgence, la radio quitte automatiquement le mode durgence aprs avoir reu une rponse du systme Connect Plus. Si vous lancez un appel d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton programm Urgence, votre radio est automatiquement associe un canal ds qu'il y en a un 302 de disponible. Une fois que votre radio a transmis un message pour signaler une urgence, vous ne pouvez pas annuler votre appel d'urgence. Cependant, si vous avez appuy par accident sur le bouton ou si l'urgence n'existe plus, vous pourriez vouloir le dire sur le canal associ. Lorsque vous relchez le bouton PTT, l'appel d'urgence est coup aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence. Si votre radio est configure pour la fonction Urgence suivi d'un appel vocal, utilisez la priode de micro ouvert pour expliquer votre erreur, puis appuyez brivement sur le bouton PTT pour mettre fin la transmission. L'appel d'urgence est coup aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence. Messagerie texte Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance d'une autre radio ou d'une application de messagerie texte. Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale d'un message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne d'objet. Vous voyez la ligne d'objet lorsque Franais (Canada) vous recevez un message provenant d'une application courriel. AVIS:
La longueur maximale de 280 caractres s'applique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale d'un message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Envoyer un message texte rapide Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 10 messages texte rapides, selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. Les messages texte rapides sont prdfinis, mais vous pouvez modifier chaque message avant de l'envoyer. Si vous envoyez le message, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour slectionner un destinataire :
303 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la Alias voulu, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'
Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn, puis appuyez sur
. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. En cas dchec de lenvoi du message texte, lcran doption Renvoyer saffiche (consultez la section 304 Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte la page 308). Envoyer un message texte rapide au moyen de la touche daccs direct Vous pouvez envoyer des messages texte rapides en utilisant le bouton programmable programm par votre dtaillant. Appuyez sur la touche programme d'accs direct pour envoyer un message texte rapide prdfini un ID prdfini. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. En cas dchec de lenvoi du message texte, lcran doption Renvoyer saffiche (consultez la section Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte la page 308). Accs au dossier Brouillons Le dossier Brouillons permet de stocker au maximum les dix (10) derniers messages enregistrs. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message enregistr remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. AVIS:
Vous pouvez modifier un message texte enregistr avant de l'envoyer. Cette fonction ne peut tre utilise qu'avec un microphone clavier (consultez la section Modifier et envoyer un message texte enregistr la page 306). Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. Afficher un message texte enregistr 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. 2 3 Commandes de la radio Touche programme Message texte Menu Franais (Canada) tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu'aux Brouillons, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voulu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour slectionner. 305 Franais (Canada) Modifier et envoyer un message texte enregistr 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez sur
. 2 ou Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur Un curseur clignotant apparat. pour slectionner. jusqu' Modifier, puis 3 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace ou sur la pour dplacer le curseur d'une Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur touche vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche supprimer les caractres inutiles. Appuyez longuement sur saisie de texte. pour modifier le mode de pour 306 4 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. 5 Slectionnez le destinataire du message en faisant ce qui suit :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la Alias voulu, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'
Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn, puis appuyez sur
. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. Si le message texte ne peut pas tre envoy, il est dplac dans le dossier des lments envoys et marqu d'une icne d'chec d'envoi. Supprimer un message texte enregistr dans les brouillons 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio Touche programme Message texte Menu tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour 2 3 4 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio tapes suivre b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur jusqu'aux Brouillons, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voulu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour slectionner. Appuyer sur appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer, puis ou pour supprimer le message texte. 307 Franais (Canada) Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte Vous pouvez slectionner l'une des options suivantes dans l'cran Renvoyer :
Renvoyer Suivante Modifier Renvoyer un message texte pour renvoyer le mme message Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. Si le message a bien t envoy, une tonalit Se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Si le message ne peut pas tre envoy, l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Transfrer un message texte Slectionnez Transfrer pour envoyer le message un autre alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. 1 ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Transfrer, pour slectionner. 2 Pour slectionner le destinataire du message, appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. 308 Gestion de messages texte envoys Une fois qu'un message texte est envoy vers une autre radio, il est enregistr dans les messages envoys. Le dernier message texte envoy s'affiche toujours en haut de la liste des messages envoys. Le dossier des messages envoys peut contenir au maximum les 30 derniers messages envoys. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message envoy remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. AVIS:
Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. Affichage d'un message texte envoy 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Comman des de la radio Touche program tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. 2 3 Comman des de la radio me Message texte Menu Franais (Canada) tapes suivre a Appuyez sur au menu. pour accder b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur envoys, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' lments pour Appuyez sur requis, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour slectionner. 309 Franais (Canada) L'icne affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran indique l'tat du message (consultez la section Icnes de messages envoys la page 248). Envoi d'un message texte envoy Vous pouvez slectionner l'une des options suivantes lorsque vous consultez un message texte envoy :
Renvoyer Suivante Modifier Suppression 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez sur
. ou jusqu' l'une des options suivantes et appuyez sur pour slectionner. 2 310 Option Suivant e Suppres sion Renvoye r tapes suivre Slectionnez Transfrer pour envoyer le message texte slectionn un autre alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe (voir Transfrer un message texte la page 308). Slectionnez Supprimer pour supprimer le message texte. Slectionnez Renvoyer pour envoyer nouveau le message texte slectionn au mme alias ou ID d'abonn/de groupe. L'cran affiche Envoi de Message, indiquant que le mme message est envoy la mme radio cible. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. Option tapes suivre Lorsque l'envoi d'un message texte choue, l'cran d'option Renvoyer s'affiche de nouveau. Appuyez sur pour renvoyer le message au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. Si vous quittez l'cran d'envoi de message pendant que l'envoi du message est en cours, la radio met jour l'tat du message dans le dossier des messages envoys sans fournir d'indication sonore ou visuelle. Si la radio change de mode ou est mise hors tension avant que l'tat du message ne soit mis jour dans le dossier des messages envoys, la radio ne peut terminer l'envoi du message en cours et marque automatiquement celui-ci d'une icne chec de l'envoi. La radio prend en charge un maximum de cinq envois de message en cours la fois. Pendant ce temps, la radio ne peut envoyer aucun autre message et marque automatiquement les nouveaux messages de l'icne chec de l'envoi. Franais (Canada) Supprimer tous les messages envoys du dossier des messages envoys 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio Touche programme Message texte Menu tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 311 Franais (Canada) ou jusqu' lments Appuyez sur envoys, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. Lorsque vous slectionnez le dossier lments envoys et qu'il ne contient aucun message texte, l'cran affiche Liste vide et une tonalit grave se fait entendre si les tonalits du clavier sont actives. pour 2 3 Recevoir un message texte Lorsque votre radio reoit un message, l'cran affiche la liste de notifications comprenant l'alias ou l'ID de l'expditeur et l'icne de message. Vous pouvez slectionner l'une des options suivantes lorsque vous recevez un message texte :
Lecture Lire plus tard Suppression Appuyez sur tout, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer pour slectionner. Lire un message texte 4 Slectionnez un des lments suivants :
1 Appuyez sur appuyez sur affiche un bref avis de russite. ou jusqu' Oui, puis pour slectionner. L'cran Appuyez sur appuyez sur prcdent. jusqu' Non et ou pour revenir l'cran 312 jusqu Lire?, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Le message slectionn dans la bote de rception s'ouvre. 2 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur rception. pour revenir la bote de Appuyez nouveau sur pour rpondre au message texte, le transfrer ou le supprimer. Grer les messages texte reus Utilisez la bote de rception pour grer vos messages texte. La bote de rception peut contenir au maximum 30 messages. Les messages texte de la bote de rception sont classs du plus rcent au plus ancien. Votre radio prend en charge les options de messagerie texte suivantes :
Rpondre (par texte rapide) Suivante Suppression Supprimer tout AVIS:
Si le type de canal ne correspond pas, vous pouvez uniquement transfrer un message, supprimer un message ou supprimer tous les messages reus. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. Franais (Canada) Afficher un message texte partir de la bote de rception 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Messages, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour aller Bote de pour Appuyez sur messages. ou pour afficher les 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour slectionner le message pour actuel, puis appuyez de nouveau sur rpondre au message, envoyer une , transfrer le message ou le supprimer. 313 Franais (Canada) Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir tapes suivre Comman des de la radio Rpondre un message texte partir de la bote de rception 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Comman des de la radio Touche program me Message texte Menu tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur au menu. pour accder 2 3 4 b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour aller Bote de pour Appuyez sur voulu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour slectionner. Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. pour accder au 5 Utilisez le clavier pour composer ou modifier votre message. 314 6 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche Echec de l'envoi du message. En cas dchec de lenvoi du message, lcran doption Renvoyer saffiche (voir Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte la page 308). Supprimer un message texte de la bote de rception 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. 2 3 Commandes de la radio Touche programme Message texte Menu Franais (Canada) tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour ou Appuyez sur rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour aller Bote de pour Appuyez sur voulu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour slectionner. 315 Franais (Canada) 4 5 6 Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. pour accder au Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer, puis pour slectionner. Commandes de la radio Touche programme Message texte Menu jusqu' Oui, puis ou pour Slectionnez. Appuyez sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Message supprim, puis revient la bote de rception. tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception 2 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. 316 ou pour aller Bote de Appuyez sur rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. Lorsque vous slectionnez la Bote rcept. ne contenant aucun message texte, l'cran indique Liste vide et une tonalit grave se fait entendre si les tonalits du clavier sont actives (consultez la pour 3 4 section Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier la page 216). Appuyez sur tout, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Bote rcept. Vide. ou pour slectionnez. jusqu' Oui, puis Cryptage Si elle est active, cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active la position courante du slecteur de canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; lactivation de la fonction nest cependant pas ncessaire la rception dune telle transmission. Lorsqu'elle est une position de slecteur de Franais (Canada) canal crypt, la radio reste en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Votre radio prend en charge le cryptage amlior. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre programme de faon utiliser les mmes valeurs et ID de cl (pour le cryptage amlior) que la radio mettrice. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant des valeurs et ID de cl diffrentes, vous n'entendrez rien du tout (cryptage amlior). Si un type de cryptage a t attribu la radio, l'icne de transmission scurise ou non s'affiche l'cran d'accueil, sauf lorsque la radio envoie ou reoit un appel ou une alarme d'urgence. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et clignote rapidement en vert lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. Vous pouvez accder cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Cryptage pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Utilisez le menu de la radio en suivant les tapes suivantes. 317 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou ou appuyez sur Appuyez sur amlior. ou jusqu' Param. radio jusqu' Connect Plus, puis sur pour slectionner. ou pour le cryptage pour Si l'cran affiche Allumer, appuyez sur activer le cryptage. La radio affiche un message de confirmation de votre slection. 318 Si l'cran affiche teindre, appuyez sur pour dsactiver le cryptage. La radio affiche un message de confirmation de votre slection. Si un type de cryptage a t attribu la radio, l'icne de transmission scurise ou non s'affiche dans la barre d'tat, sauf lorsque la radio envoie ou reoit une alarme d'urgence. Faire un appel crypt Le cryptage peut tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen de la touche programme Cryptage ou du menu. La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active pour que la position du canal actuellement slectionn envoie des transmissions cryptes. Lorsque le cryptage est activ pour la position du canal actuellement slectionn, toutes les transmissions vocales effectues par votre radio sont brouilles. Cela inclut les types dappels suivants : appel de groupe, appel multigroupe, rplique en cours dappel balay, appel gnral de site, appel d'urgence et appel individuel. Seule une radio cible dote des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Scurit Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver n'importe quelle radio du systme. Par exemple, vous pourriez vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de s'en servir, puis la ractiver une fois qu'elle est de nouveau en votre possession. AVIS:
L'excution des fonctions Dsactiver radio et Activer radio est limite aux radios sur lesquelles ces fonctions sont actives. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Dsactiver la radio 1 Accdez cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :
Franais (Canada) Comman des de la radio Touche Dsac radio tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme Dsac radio. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Menu de la radio a Appuyez sur au menu. pour accder b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. c Suivez une des tapes ci-
dessous pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn voulu :
319 Franais (Canada) tapes suivre Comman des de la radio Slectionnez l'alias ou l'ID directement. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Utilisez le menu Numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur jusqu'
ou Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 320 tapes suivre Comman des de la radio Appuyez sur ou Numro de radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer l'ID ou l'alias dabonn, puis appuyez sur
. d Appuyez sur ou Dsactiver la radio, puis sur tapes suivre Comman des de la radio appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Dsactiver la radio : <Alias ou ID cible > et le voyant DEL clignote en vert. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Dsact. radio russi. En cas d'chec, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Dsact. radio chou. Activer la radio 1 Accdez cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :
Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio Touche Activer radio tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme Activer la radio. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Menu de la radio a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. c Suivez une des tapes ci-
dessous pour slectionner 321 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Commandes de la radio tapes suivre l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn voulu Slectionnez l'alias ou l'ID directement. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Utilisez le menu Numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur jusqu'
ou Numrotation manuelle, puis sur 322 appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Numro de radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer l'ID ou l'alias dabonn, puis appuyez sur
. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre d Appuyez sur ou Activer la radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Activer radio : <<Alias ou l'ID d'abonn > et le voyant DEL passent au vert continu. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite, une tonalit dindication positive retentit et lcran affiche le message Dsact. radio russi. En cas d'chec, une tonalit dindication ngative retentit et l'cran affiche le message Dsact. radio chou. Franais (Canada) Bluetooth AVIS:
Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes d'appareil Bluetooth est efface. Cette fonctionnalit vous permet d'utiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par l'intermdiaire d'une connexion sans fil Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts l'emploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 mtres (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. C'est--dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Il n'est pas recommand de laisser votre radio l'cart et vous ne devez pas vous attendre ce que l'appareil Bluetooth offre une fiabilit leve lorsque les deux appareils sont spars. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et l'appareil Bluetooth moins de 323 Franais (Canada) 10 mtres (32 pieds) l'un de l'autre afin de rtablir la rception. La fonctionnalit Bluetooth de votre radio offre une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi). Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu' quatre connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Vous pouvez par exemple connecter un casque et un dispositif PTT. Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalits compltes de votre appareil compatible Bluetooth, reportez-vous son guide d'utilisation. Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. 1 2 324 3 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Activ et Arrt. L'tat actuel est indiqu par l'icne pour afficher Mon tat, pour slectionner. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Activ, puis l'icne gauche de l'tat slectionn. jusqu Activer, pour slectionner. apparat Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dsactiv, puis l'icne apparat gauche de l'tat slectionn. jusqu Dsactiver, pour slectionner. Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion Il ne faut pas mettre le dispositif Bluetooth hors tension ni appuyer sur pendant le processus de dtection et de connexion, car cela annulerait l'opration. 1 Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. 2 3 4 Sur la radio, appuyez sur menu. pour accder au 6 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Appareils, puis pour slectionner. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou ou jusqu'
Recherche dappareils pour trouver des appareils disponibles. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. pour se Connecter, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche le message Connexion <nom dispositif>. Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. Si l'appariement russit, la radio affiche le message <nom dispositif> connect. Une se fait entendre et 325 Franais (Canada) s'affiche ct du dispositif connect. L'icne Bluetooth activ s'affiche dans la barre d'tat. En cas d'chec, la radio affiche Connexion choue. 4 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion (Mode dtection) vitez de mettre le dispositif Bluetooth ou votre radio hors tension pendant le processus de dtection et de connexion, car cela annulerait l'opration. 1 Activez Bluetooth. Voir Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth la page 324. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. 2 3 326 jusqu' Me chercher, Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Votre radio peut maintenant tre dtecte par d'autres dispositifs Bluetooth pendant une dure programme. Il s'agit du Mode dtection. 5 Mettez sous tension votre dispositif Bluetooth et appariez-le votre radio. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. Se dconnecter d'un dispositif Bluetooth 1 2 Sur la radio, appuyez sur menu. pour accder au Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. 3 4 5 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils, puis pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil requis, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur jusqu Dconnecter, ou puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche le message <Dconnexion de lappareil>. Il est possible que la dconnexion de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. La radio affiche le message <Dispositif> dconnect. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et l'icne cesse de s'afficher ct du dispositif connect. L'icne Bluetooth activ ne s'affiche plus dans la barre d'tat. Franais (Canada) Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Vous pouvez faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. Une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Rout. audio vers radio. Une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Rout. audio vers Bluetooth. Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 327 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Appareils, puis pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil requis, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour afficher les pour 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Appareils, puis pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil requis, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur pour slectionner. sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dispositif supprim. jusqu' Supprimer, puis Supprimer le nom dun dispositif Vous pouvez retirer un dispositif dconnect de la liste des dispositifs Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 328 Gain du micro Bluetooth Permet de contrler la valeur de gain du microphone d'un dispositif Bluetooth connect. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Gain mic. BT, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur micro Bluetooth et aux valeurs courantes. ou jusqu'au type de gain du Pour modifier les valeurs, appuyez sur slectionner. pour ou Appuyez sur diminuer les valeurs, puis appuyez sur slectionner. pour augmenter ou pour Franais (Canada) Localisation interne AVIS:
La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Emplacement doit tre utilis pour assurer le suivi de l'emplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 329 Franais (Canada) b. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth pour slectionner. c. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. d. Appuyez sur pour activer le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. e. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 330 Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme. a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 2 3 4 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Localis. pour Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balises, puis pour slectionner. Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder l'information des balises d'emplacement intrieur. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Lcran affiche les informations sur les balises. Liste de notifications Votre radio comprend une liste de notifications qui rassemble tous les vnements non lus sur le canal, par exemple les messages texte non lus, les appels manqus et les avertissements dappel. L'icne de notification s'affiche dans la barre d'tat lorsque la liste de notifications prsente au moins un vnement. La liste prend en charge au maximum quarante (40) vnements non lus. Une fois la liste pleine, le prochain 331 Franais (Canada) vnement remplace automatiquement l'vnement le plus ancien. AVIS:
Une fois les vnements lus, ils sont retirs de la liste de notifications. Accder la liste de notifications Suivez la procdure pour actualiser la liste de notification. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Notification, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voulu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' lvnement pour slectionner. pour revenir Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. 1 2 3 332 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous connecter ce rseau. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:
Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. AVIS:
Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi en effectuant lune des actions suivantes. Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. Franais (Canada) a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou Fi, puis sur appuyez sur c. Appuyez sur ou On, puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-
pour slectionner. pour choisir le Wi-Fi pour slectionner. Appuyez sur affiche pour activer le Wi-Fi. Lcran ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Licne Activ. pour dsactiver le Wi-Fi. ne saffiche plus ct du message Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. 333 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Vous pouvez galement vous connecter un point daccs rseau partir du menu. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. AVIS:
Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, si un point daccs rseau nest pas prconfigur, loption Connecter nest pas disponible. 5 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour se Connecter, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel, entrez le mot ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour un point daccs pour de passe et appuyez sur
. 7 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, le mot de passe est configur partir de RM. Si le mot de passe prconfigur est correct, votre radio se connecte automatiquement au point daccs rseau slectionn. Si le mot de passe prconfigur nest pas valide, lcran affiche Authentificat. - chec et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Lorsque la connexion est russie, la radio affiche un avis et le point daccs rseau est enregistr dans la liste des profils. 1 2 3 4 334 Si la connexion choue, la radio affiche lcran davis dchec pendant un moment et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi pour connatre l'tat de la connexion avec l'annonce vocale. L'annonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, Le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il n'y a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, connect lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, dconnecte lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais que la radio n'est pas connecte un rseau. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises Franais (Canada) par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:
La touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi est affecte par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Actualisation de la liste de rseaux Suivez la procdure pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour actualiser la liste de rseaux partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-
pour slectionner 335 Franais (Canada) c. Appuyez sur pour les Rseaux, ou puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Quand vous entrez dans le menu Rseaux, la radio actualise automatiquement la liste des rseaux. Si vous tes dj dans le menu Rseaux, effectuez l'action suivante pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. ou pour Actualiser, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur La radio s'actualise et affiche la dernire liste de rseaux. pour slectionner. Ajout dun rseau AVIS:
Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. 336 Si un rseau prfr nest pas dans la liste de rseaux disponibles, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour ajouter un rseau. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Ajouter un pour 5 Entrez lidentifiant SSID (Service Set Identifier), puis appuyez sur
. 6 7 Appuyez sur appuyez sur pour lOuvrir, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le rseau est correctement enregistr. 4 5 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau Vous pouvez afficher les dtails des points daccs rseau. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour un point daccs pour ou pour afficher les Appuyez sur dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. AVIS:
Lcran affiche des dtails diffrents pour les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel et Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. pour Wi-Fi WPA personnel Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche lidentifiant Service Set Identifier (SSID), le mode de scurit, ladresse Media Access Control (MAC) et ladresse Internet Protocol (IP). Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID et le mode de scurit. Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP), 337 Franais (Canada) lauthentification de phase 2, le nom du certificat, ladresse MAC, ladresse IP, la passerelle, le DNS1 et le DNS2. Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode EAP, lauthentification de phase 2 et le nom du certificat. Retrait de points daccs rseau AVIS:
Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour supprimer des points daccs rseau dans la liste de profils. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. 1 2 338 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. pour slectionner un Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour le Supprimer, puis pour slectionner. ou pour choisir Oui, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le point daccs rseau slectionn est supprim avec succs. pour slectionner. Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits et les avertissements de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et tous les avertissements de la radio (sauf la tonalit davertissement durgence entrant), au besoin. Appuyez sur la touche programme Toutes Tnlts/Avert. pour activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits ou suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour accder cette fonction depuis le menu de la radio. 5 6 Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur tonalits, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Toutes les pour pour activer ou dsactiver toutes Appuyez sur les tonalits et alertes. L'cran affiche L'icne Activ. ct du message Activ. ne s'affiche plus ct du message 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Rgler l'cart de volume des tonalits d'avertissement Vous pouvez rgler l'cart de volume des tonalits d'avertissement au besoin. Cette fonction permet de rgler le niveau sonore des tonalits et des avertissements de manire ce qu'il soit plus lev ou moins lev que celui de la voix. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Tonalits/alertes, pour slectionner. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 339 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Tonalits/alertes, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' cart Vol., pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur volume requis. La radio met une tonalit correspondant chaque rglage de volume. jusqu'au rglage de 7 Faites un des suivants :
340 Appuyez sur volume affich. pour conserver le rglage de Appuyez sur pour quitter sans modifier les rglages actuels de l'cart de volume. Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler, au besoin. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Tonalits/alertes, pour slectionner. Appuyer sur d'autorisation de parler, puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Tonalit ou pour slectionner. pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur tonalit d'autorisation de parler. Lcran affiche Licne Activ. ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension au besoin. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Tonalits/alertes, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur pour activer, puis sur ou pour slectionner. pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension. Lcran affiche Licne Activ. ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message 341 Franais (Canada) Rgler le niveau de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci lev ou bas pour chaque zone Connect Plus. Haute permet des communications, en mode Connect Plus, avec des sites de tour situs une distance considrable. Basse permet des communications, en mode Connect Plus, avec des sites de tour situs proximit. Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance pour alterner entre un niveau de puissance lev ou bas. Pour accder cette fonction partir de l'cran de la radio, suivez la procdure suivante. 4 5 Appuyez sur pour l'alimentation, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner ou pour afficher pour Appuyez sur requis, puis sur appuyez sur ou pour choisir , le rglage pour slectionner. s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. Appuyez tout moment pour retourner longuement sur l'cran d'accueil. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Changer le mode d'affichage Vous pouvez changer le mode d'affichage de la radio pour le faire passer du mode Jour au mode Nuit et inversement, au besoin. Ce rglage modifie la palette de couleurs de l'cran. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 3 342 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Mode Jour et Mode Nuit. jusqu Affichage, puis ou Appuyez sur puis appuyez sur L'icne s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. pour activer la slection. jusqu'au rglage dsir, Rgler la luminosit de l'cran Vous pouvez ajuster la luminosit de l'affichage de la radio selon vos besoins. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
La luminosit de lcran ne peut tre ajuste lorsque la fonction Luminosit auto est active. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche une barre de progression. jusqu Luminosit, pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 5 343 Franais (Canada) 6 Rduisez la luminosit de l'cran en appuyant sur ou augmentez-la en appuyant sur
. Slectionnez un rglage de 1 8. Appuyez sur pour confirmer le rglage. Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction, au besoin. 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. 1 2 3 344 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' cran intro., pour slectionner. Appuyez sur d'introduction. L'cran affiche L'icne Activ. pour activer ou dsactiver l'cran ct du message Activ. ne s'affiche plus ct du message Language Vous pouvez configurer la langue d'affichage de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusquaux Langues, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur voulue, puis sur L'icne s'affiche ct de la langue slectionne. pour activer la slection. jusqu' la langue 2 3 4 5 Activer ou dsactiver le voyant DEL Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le voyant DEL, au besoin. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur DEL, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu lindicateur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voyant DEL. Lcran affiche Licne Activ. pour activer ou dsactiver le ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message 345 Franais (Canada) Dterminer le type de cble Vous pouvez slectionner le type de cble utilis par votre radio. l'appui sur une touche programmable. L'indicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Cette option est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Type cble, pour slectionner. 5 Le type de cble actuel est indiqu par l'icne
. Annonce vocale Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre la zone ou le canal que l'utilisateur vient d'attribuer, ou de signaler 346 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Annonce Appuyer sur vocale, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. Vous pouvez galement utiliser ou pour changer l'option slectionne. pour 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour activer la fonction d'annonce vocale. L'cran affiche message Activ. ct du Appuyez sur d'annonce vocale. L'icne ct du message Activ. pour dsactiver la fonction ne s'affiche plus Dlai de menu Rglez la dure pendant laquelle la radio affiche le menu avant de revenir automatiquement l'cran d'accueil. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis pour slectionner. Appuyez sur menu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dlai de pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voulu, puis sur appuyez sur ou jusqu'au paramtre pour slectionner. 4 5 6 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Cette fonction doit tre installe par le connecteur d'accessoire larrire de votre radio par votre dtaillant. Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. 1 Faites un des suivants :
347 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./
phares pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Avert./phares. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur phares, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Avert./
pour pour activer ou dsactiver Appuyez sur l'avertisseur ou les phares. Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. Licne Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double Votre radio est dote d'un slecteur double Volume/Canal. Si vous dsactivez l'option de slecteur double, le slecteur permet uniquement de rgler le volume. 1 2 3 4 pour accder au menu. ou jusqu Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Config. radio, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Double slect., puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. 2 3 4 5 348 5 L'cran affiche Volume uniq. et Volume & Canal. jusqu'au rglage voulu, puis appuyez ou sur pour slectionner. s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. Contrle de gain automatique de microphone numrique (Mic. CGA-D) Cette fonction gre automatiquement le gain du microphone de votre radio pendant la transmission sur un systme numrique. La fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Mic. CGA-D, pour slectionner. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour activer Mic.CGA-D. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver Mic.CGA-D. Le ne s'affiche plus ct d'Activ . Audio intelligent Votre radio peut rgler automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans l'environnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et 349 Franais (Canada) immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Commande radio tapes suivre 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Commande radio Menu tapes suivre a Appuyez sur accder au menu. pour b Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour c Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 350 d ou Appuyez sur jusqu' Audio intelligent, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. AVIS:
Vous pouvez galement utiliser ou pour changer l'option slectionne. e Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour activer la fonction Audio intelligent. Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. Commande radio tapes suivre Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la fonction Audio intelligent. Licne ne saffiche plus ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur intelligent, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Audio pour 2 3 4 5 Faites un des suivants :
Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur intelligent. Lcran affiche Activ. pour activer la fonction Audio ct du message Appuyez sur Audio intelligent. Licne ct du message Activ. pour dsactiver la fonction ne saffiche plus Consultez la section Liste des accessoires approuvs pour connatre les accessoires audio Bluetooth recommands avec rglage de volume automatique intgr permettant d'obtenir un rendement similaire. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la raction acoustique reue lors de la rception d'appels. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. 351 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur Paramtres radio, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur bruit, puis sur appuyez sur Vous pouvez galement utiliser ou pour changer l'option slectionne. jusqu Rducteur de pour slectionner. comprend le systme de navigation mondial (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). AVIS:
Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 5 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour activer la suppression de la raction acoustique. Lcran affiche du message Activ. ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique. Licne plus ct du message Activ. ne saffiche Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS 352 Appuyez sur la touche programmeGNSS pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu'
GNSS. Appuyez pour activer ou dsactiver le Appuyez sur GNSS. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. apparat ct ne s'affiche plus Reportez-vous la section Consulter les informations du systme GNSS la page 365 sur l'accs aux informations du GNSS. Franais (Canada) Accs aux renseignements gnraux sur la radio Votre radio contient des renseignements sur les lments suivants :
Batterie Degr d'inclinaison (acclromtre) Codeplug de carte d'option par radiocommunication Index de numro de modle de la radio
(OTA) CRC Info site Numro du site Alias et ID de la radio Versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de codes Informations du systme GNSS en tout temps pour revenir l'cran Appuyez sur prcdent ou maintenez enfonce la touche pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. 353 Franais (Canada) Vrifier l'index de numro de modle de la radio Ce numro d'index identifie le matriel propre au modle de votre radio. Votre administrateur de systme radio pourrait vous demander ce numro lors de la prparation d'une nouvelle codeplug de carte d'option pour votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. jusqu' Index modle, ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'index de numro de modle. 1 2 3 4 354 Vrification fichier de codeplug de carte d'option OTA CRC Si votre administrateur de systme radio vous demande d'afficher la vrification CRC de fichier de codeplug de carte d'option OTA (par radiocommunication) CRC, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Cette option de menu n'apparat que si la carte doption a reu sa dernire mise jour de codeplug par radiocommunication. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche des chiffres et des lettres. Transmettez cette information votre administrateur jusqu' crcCP OTA OB, pour slectionner. de systme radio exactement telle qu'elle est affiche. 4 Affichage de l'ID du site (numro du site) AVIS:
Si vous n'tes pas enregistr auprs d'un site, l'cran affiche Non enregistr. La radio affiche brivement l'ID du site au moment de son enregistrement comme site Connect Plus. Aprs l'enregistrement, la radio n'indique habituellement pas le numro du site. Pour afficher le numro de site enregistr, procdez comme suit :
1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur site, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'ID du rseau et le numro du site. jusqu' Numro du Vrification de l'info du site AVIS:
Si vous n'tes pas enregistr auprs d'un site, l'cran affiche Non enregistr. La fonction Info site fournit des renseignements qui peuvent tre utiles un technicien de service. Il s'agit des renseignements suivants :
Le numro du relais de canal de contrle courant. RSSI : Dernire valeur de puissance du signal mesure partir du relais de canal de contrle. Liste de voisins envoye par le relais de canal de contrle (cinq chiffres spars par des virgules). 355 Franais (Canada) Si la radio vous demande d'utiliser cette fonction, veuillez rapporter l'information affiche exactement telle qu'elle apparat l'cran. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche l'info du site. jusqu' Infos site, pour slectionner. Vrifier l'ID de la radio Cette fonction permet d'afficher l'ID de votre radio. 356 Pour accder cette fonction partir de l'cran de la radio, suivez la procdure ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche l'ID de la radio. ou pour slectionner. jusqu Mon ID, puis sur Franais (Canada) Vrifier les versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de code Affiche la version du micrologiciel de la radio. Version de frquence de la carte d'option Version de matriel de la carte d'option Version de codeplug de la carte d'option 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. jusquaux Versions, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche une liste avec les renseignements suivants :
Version du micrologiciel (radio) Version de codeplug (radio) Version du micrologiciel de la carte d'option Recherche des mises jour Connect Plus offre la possibilit de mettre jour certains fichiers (codeplug de carte d'option, fichier de frquence rseau et fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option) par radiocommunication. AVIS:
Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir si cette fonction a t active pour votre radio. L'cran de la radio Connect Plus a la possibilit d'afficher sa codeplug de carte d'option OTA CRC courante, la version du fichier de frquence ou du micrologiciel de carte d'option laide dune option de menu. De plus, les radios afficheur sur lesquelles le transfert de fichier par radiocommunication a t activ peuvent afficher la version des fichiers en attente. Un fichier en attente est un fichier de frquence ou de micrologiciel de carte d'option dont la radio Connect Plus est informe par la messagerie du systme, mais dont elle n'a pas encore recueilli tous les 357 Franais (Canada) paquets. Si une radio afficheur Connect Plus a un fichier en attente, le menu offre les options suivantes :
Afficher le numro de version du fichier en attente. Afficher le pourcentage de paquets de fichiers recueillis jusque-l. Demander que la radio Connect Plus reprenne la cueillette des paquets de fichiers. Si le transfert de fichier par radiocommunication Connect Plus est activ sur la radio, la radio peut parfois amorcer un transfert de fichier sans en aviser au pralable l'utilisateur de la radio. Lorsque la radio recueille des paquets de fichiers, le voyant DEL clignote rapidement en rouge et la radio affiche l'icne Donnes volume lev sur la barre d'tat de l'cran d'accueil. AVIS:
La radio Connect Plus ne peut pas recueillir des paquets de fichiers et recevoir des appels simultanment. Pour annuler le transfert du fichier, appuyez brivement sur le bouton PTT. La radio fait alors une demande d'appel pour le nom du contact slectionn et annule le transfert de fichier pour cette radio jusqu' ce que le processus reprenne plus tard. 358 Plusieurs choses peuvent dclencher la reprise du transfert de fichier. Le premier exemple s'applique tous les types de fichiers par radiocommunication. Les autres exemples ne s'appliquent qu'au fichier de frquence rseau et au fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option :
L'administrateur de systme radio redmarre le transfert du fichier par radiocommunication. Le dlai de la minuterie prdfinie de la carte doption expire, ce qui dclenche la reprise automatique du processus de cueillette des paquets par la carte doption. Le dlai de la minuterie n'est pas expir, mais l'utilisateur de la radio demande la reprise du transfert du fichier l'aide de l'option du menu. Une fois que la radio Connect Plus a fini de tlcharger tous les paquets de fichiers, elle doit procder la mise niveau vers le fichier nouvellement acquis. Pour le fichier de frquence rseau, il s'agit d'un processus automatique qui n'exige pas de rinitialisation de la radio. Pour le fichier de codeplug de carte d'option, il s'agit d'un processus automatique qui interrompt temporairement le service pendant que la carte doption charge l'information de la nouvelle codeplug et acquiert de nouveau un site rseau. La vitesse laquelle la radio procde la mise niveau vers le fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option dpend de la faon dont la radio a t configure par le dtaillant ou l'administrateur systme. Soit que la radio procdera la mise niveau immdiatement aprs avoir recueilli tous les paquets de fichiers ou qu'elle attendra jusqu' la mise sous tension de la radio par l'utilisateur. AVIS:
Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Le processus de mise niveau vers un nouveau fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option prend quelques secondes et requiert que la carte doption Connect Plus rinitialise la radio. Une fois la mise niveau commence, la radio ne peut ni faire ni recevoir dappel tant que le processus n'est pas termin. Durant ce processus, l'cran de la radio informe les utilisateurs qu'ils ne doivent pas teindre la radio. Fichier de micrologiciel La section suivante fournit des informations sur le micrologiciel de la radio. Franais (Canada) Micrologiciel jour AVIS:
Si le fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option n'est pas jour (et si la radio a rcemment recueilli en partie une version plus rcente du fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option version), la radio affiche une liste d'options additionnelles : Version,
%reu et Tlcharger. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Utilitaires, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. 359 Franais (Canada) 5 ou jusqu Appuyez sur Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. L'cran affiche Firmware jour. pour 5 6 Firmware en attente Version Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 360 ou Appuyez sur Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu pour ou pour slectionner. jusqu Version, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur S'il y a un fichier de firmware de carte d'option en attente, l'cran affiche le numro de version du firmware en attente. S'il y a un fichier de micrologicielde carte d'option en attente, l'cran affiche Firmware jour. Firmware en attente % reu 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Utilitaires, pour slectionner. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu pour jusqu %reu, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche le pourcentage de paquets de fichiers de firmware recueillis jusque-l. AVIS:
Lorsque le pourcentage est de 100 %, la radio doit tre teinte puis rallume pour amorcer la mise niveau du firmware. Franais (Canada) Firmware en attente Tlchargement Si la radio Connect Plus a pralablement laiss un transfert de fichier de firmware de carte d'option OTA avec un fichier partiel, l'appareil retourne automatiquement au transfert du fichier (s'il est encore en cours) l'expiration du dlai de la minuterie interne. Si vous voulez que l'appareil retourne au transfert d'un fichier de firmware de carte d'option en cours avant l'expiration du dlai de cette minuterie interne, utilisez l'option de tlchargement de la faon dcrite ci-
dessous. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Utilitaires, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. 361 Franais (Canada) 5 6 ou Appuyez sur Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche les lments suivants. jusqu Tlcharger, pour slectionner. Tlchargement disponible Aucun tlchargement disponible Lancer le tlchargement Tlchargement non disponible 7 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur la touche pour commencer le tlchargement. 362 Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur la touche pour revenir au menu prcdent. pour Fichier de frquence La section suivante fournit des informations sur le fichier de frquence de la radio. Fichier de frquence jour AVIS:
Si le fichier de frquence n'est pas jour (et si la radio rcemment recueillie en partie une version plus rcente du fichier de frquence) la radio affiche une liste d'options additionnelles : Version, %reu et Tlcharger. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. 3 4 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Fichier de frq. jour. pour slectionner. jusqu Frquence, puis Fichier de frquence en attente Version 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu Frquence, puis pour slectionner. ou jusqu Version, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur S'il y a un fichier de frquence en attente, l'cran affiche le numro de version du fichier de frquence en attente. pour slectionner. Fichier de frquence en attente % reu 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. 363 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. jusqu %reu, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche le pourcentage de paquets de fichiers de frquence recueillis jusque-l. Fichier de frquence en attente Tlchargement Si la radio Connect Plus a pralablement laiss un transfert de fichier de frquence rseau OTA avec un fichier partiel, l'appareil retourne automatiquement au transfert du fichier
(s'il est encore en cours) l'expiration du dlai de la minuterie interne. Si vous voulez que l'appareil retourne au transfert d'un fichier de frquence rseau avant l'expiration 364 du dlai de cette minuterie interne, utilisez l'option de tlchargement de la faon dcrite ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Mises jour, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu Frquence, puis pour slectionner. 6 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu Tlcharger, pour slectionner. Tlchargement actuellement non disponible Tlchargement actuellement disponible Tlchargement non disponible Lancer le tlchargement Satellites Version Franais (Canada) Longitude Altitude Direction Vlocit Affaiblissement de la prcision horizontale (Horizontal Dilution of Precision, ou HDOP) 7 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur la touche pour commencer le tlchargement. Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur la touche pour revenir au menu prcdent. Consulter les informations du systme GNSS Affiche les informations GNSS sur votre radio, par exemple, les valeurs suivantes :
Latitude 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Utilitaires, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur appuyez sur Info radio, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Infos GNSS, pour slectionner. 365 Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche les informations GNSS demandes. jusqu' llment voulu, pour slectionner. Voir Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS la page 352 pour en savoir plus au sujet du systme GNSS. Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise Vous pouvez afficher les dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise slectionn. 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Certificat. Appuyez sur slection. pour Menu pour effectuer la saffiche vis--vis des certificats prts. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusquau certificat voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio affiche les dtails complets du certificat. AVIS:
Pour les certificats non prts, lcran affiche uniquement ltat. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la 1 2 366 Autres systmes Les fonctions qui sont disponibles pour les utilisateurs radio en vertu de ce systme sont disponibles dans le prsent chapitre. Bouton PTT Le bouton PTT a deux fonctions principales :
Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel. Appuyez longuement sur la touche PTT pour parler. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si la tonalit dautorisation ou leffet local PTT attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. est activ, Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ (programm par le dtaillant), une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible (la radio qui reoit la Franais (Canada) transmission) relche le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous entendez une tonalit d'interdiction de parler en continu si votre appel est interrompu. Vous devez relcher le bouton PTT si vous entendez la tonalit d'interdiction de parler continue. Touches programmables Selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur une touche, votre revendeur peut programmer les touches programmables pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appui bref Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appui long Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:
Voir Fonctionnement d'urgence la page 447 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 367 Franais (Canada) Fonctions attribuables de la radio Les fonctions suivantes de la radio peuvent tre attribues aux boutons programmables. Ambiance audio Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner un environnement dans lequel la radio fonctionne. Profils audio Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner le profil audio prfr. Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. 368 Avertissement d'appel Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts de la radio afin de slectionner le destinataire d'un avertissement d'appel. Renvoi d'appel Active ou dsactive le renvoi d'appel. Journal des appels Permet d'ouvrir le journal des appels. Annonce du canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Contacts Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts. Urgence Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Quitter la diffusion publique (PA) Faire basculer le routage de l'audio entre l'amplificateur/
haut-parleur PA connect et le systme de sonorisation interne de la radio. Localisation interne Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de localisation interne. Franais (Canada) Audio intelligent Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Num. manuelle Permet d'effectuer un appel individuel en entrant un ID d'abonn. Itinrance de site manuelle 5 Lance une recherche de site manuelle. CGA Mic. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. Moniteur Surveille l'activit du canal slectionn. Notifications Permet l'accs direct la liste des notifications. Suppression des nuisances sur le canal5 Permet de retirer temporairement un canal nuisible de la liste de balayage, sauf le canal slectionn. Le canal slectionn rfre la zone ou la combinaison de canaux slectionne de l'utilisateur partir duquel le balayage est effectu. Accs direct Permet de lancer un appel tlphonique, de groupe ou individuel prdfini et d'envoyer un avis d'appel, un message texte rapide automatiquement ou de revenir au mode Accueil. Fonction de carte d'option Active ou dsactive les fonctions de la carte d'option sur les canaux qui les utilisent. coute permanente5 Surveille le trafic radio d'un canal slectionn jusqu' ce que la fonction soit dsactive. Tlphone Permet laccs direct la liste des contacts du tlphone. Cryptage Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Diffusion publique (PA) Active/dsactive le systme PA interne de la radio. Alias et ID de la radio Indique l'alias et l'ID de la radio. 5 Ne sapplique pas Capacity Plus. 369 Franais (Canada) Vrification de la radio Dtermine si une radio est active dans un systme. Transmet les messages vocaux pour le site actuel pour le site actuel lorsque l'Annonce vocale est active. Dsactiver la radio Permet de dsactiver une radio cible distance. Activer la radio Permet d'activer une radio cible distance. coute distance Active le microphone d'une radio cible sans indication. Relais/Direct5 Permet d'alterner entre l'utilisation d'un rpteur et les communications directes avec une autre radio. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Balayage 6 Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de balayage. Info site Affiche le nom et l'ID du site actuel Capacity Plus -
multisite. 6 Ne s'applique pas Capacity Plus-Site unique. 370 Verrouillage de site5 Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsqu'elle est dsactive, la radio recherche d'autres sites en plus du site courant. Contrle de la tlmtrie Permet de contrler la broche de sortie sur une radio locale ou distante. Message texte Slectionne le menu de la messagerie texte. Interruption de transmission Met fin un appel interruptible afin de librer le canal. Amlioration de la vibration Permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Transmission vocale (VOX) Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la transmission vocale. Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Slection de zone Permet de slectionner une zone dans une liste. Accs aux fonctions programmes Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder aux fonctions programmes de votre radio. Franais (Canada) Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Les fonctions ou paramtres radio suivants peuvent tre attribus aux touches programmables. Sonneries/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Rtroclairage Active ou dsactive le rtroclairage de l'cran. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Mode d'affichage Permet d'alterner entre l'activation et la dsactivation des modes d'affichage Jour et Nuit. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou menu et appuyez sur fonction ou entrer dans un sous-menu. jusqu' la fonction du pour slectionner une 3 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir l'cran Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir La radio quitte automatiquement le menu et revient l'cran d'accueil aprs une priode d'inactivit. 371 Franais (Canada) Des touches de navigation se trouvent galement sur le microphone clavier. Voir Touches du microphone clavier la page 43. Indicateurs d'tat Ce chapitre explique les indicateurs d'tat et les tonalits audio utiliss par la radio. Icnes L'affichage cristaux liquides (ACL) prsente l'tat de la radio, les entres de texte et des menus. Tableau 9: Icnes d'affichage Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant dans la barre dtat qui apparat au haut de lcran. Les icnes sont classes par ordre d'utilisation ou d'apparition partir de la gauche et sont spcifiques au canal. Bluetooth connect La fonction Bluetooth est active. L'icne demeure allume tant qu'un dispositif Bluetooth distant est connect. 372 Bluetooth non connect La fonction Bluetooth est active, mais aucun appareil Bluetooth distance n'est connect. Journal des appels Journal des appels radio. Contact Le contact radio est disponible. Urgence La radio est en mode d'urgence. Liste de rception flexible La liste de rception flexible est active. Fonction GNSS disponible La fonction GNSS est active. L'icne demeure allume tant que la rception d'une position est disponible. Fonction GNSS non disponible La fonction GNSS est active, mais ne reoit aucune donne du satellite. Donnes volume lev La radio reoit des donnes volume lev et le canal est occup. Localisation interne disponible 7 L'tat de la localisation intrieure est activ et disponible. Positionnement l'intrieur non disponible7 L'tat de la localisation intrieure est activ, mais non disponible parce que la fonction Bluetooth est dsactive ou parce que la dtection des balises a t suspendue par Bluetooth. Message Arrive d'un message entrant. Moniteur Le canal slectionn est surveill. Mode Muet Le mode Muet est activ et le haut-
parleur est coup. 7 Ne s'applique qu'aux logiciels et au matriel les plus rcents. Franais (Canada) Notification La liste de notifications comprend au moins un vnement manqu. Carte d'option La fonction Carte d'option est active.
(Modles dots de la fonction Carte d'option uniquement.) Absence de fonction de la carte d'option La fonction Carte d'option est dsactive. Retardateur de programmation par radiocommunication Indique le temps restant avant le redmarrage automatique de la radio. Indicateur de puissance de signal reu (RSSI) Le nombre de barres reprsente l'intensit du signal radio. L'affichage de quatre barres indique une intensit 373 Franais (Canada) de signal maximale. Cette icne ne s'affiche qu'en mode de rception. Sonnerie seulement Le mode sonnerie est activ. Balayage 8 La fonction de balayage est active. Balayage Priorit 18 La radio dtecte de l'activit sur le canal ou le groupe de canaux Priorit 1. Balayage Priorit 28 La radio dtecte de l'activit sur le canal ou le groupe de canaux Priorit 2. Scurise La fonction Cryptage est active. 8 Ne s'applique pas Capacity Plus. 9 Ne s'applique pas Capacity PlusSsite unique. 374 Connexion La radio s'est connecte au serveur distant. Dconnexion La radio s'est dconnecte du serveur distant. Sonnerie silencieuse Le mode de sonnerie silencieuse est activ. Itinrance de site 9 La fonction d'itinrance de site est active. 8Mode direct En l'absence d'un rpteur, la radio est configure pour la communication directe radio radio. Dsactivation des tonalits Les tonalits sont dsactives. Franais (Canada) Tableau 10: Icnes de menu avanc Les icnes suivantes s'affichent prs des lments de menu qui offrent un choix entre deux options ou qui prsentent un sous-menu offrant aussi deux options. Case cocher (coche) Indique que l'option est slectionne. Case cocher (vide) Indique que l'option n'est pas slectionne. Case noire Indique que l'option slectionne dans le menu comporte un sous-
menu. Non scurise La fonction Cryptage est dsactive. Balayage par vote :
La fonction de balayage par vote est active. Wi-Fi Excellent10 Le signal Wi-Fi est excellent. Wi-Fi bon10 Le signal Wi-Fi est bon. Wi-Fi moyen10 Le signal Wi-Fi est moyen. Wi-Fi faible10 Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. Wi-Fi non disponible10 Le signal Wi-Fi n'est pas disponible. 10 Applicable uniquement pour les modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e. 375 Franais (Canada) Tableau 11: Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth Les icnes suivantes accompagnent les lments de la liste de dispositifs Bluetooth afin de vous informer sur le type du dispositif. Dispositif audio Bluetooth Il s'agit d'un dispositif audio compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un casque d'coute. Dispositif de donnes Bluetooth Dispositif de transfert de donnes Bluetooth, par exemple, un lecteur de codes barres. Dispositif PTT Bluetooth Il s'agit d'un dispositif PTT
(messagerie vocale instantane) compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un dispositif fonction PTT uniquement (POD). Tableau 12: Icnes d'appels Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes s'affichant l'cran de la radio pendant un appel. Ces icnes apparaissent 376 galement dans la liste de contacts pour indiquer le type d'alias ou d'ID. Appel PC par Bluetooth Indique qu'un appel PC par Bluetooth est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) de l'appel PC par Bluetooth. Appel de rpartition Le type de contact d'appel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais d'un serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. Appel de groupe/appel gnral Cette icne s'affiche lorsqu'un appel de groupe ou un appel gnral est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) du groupe. Appel individuel Cette icne s'affiche lorsqu'un appel individuel est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) de l'abonn. Appel de groupe comme tant un appel de groupe/gnral Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un appel de groupe/
gnral en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) du groupe. Appel tlphonique comme tant un appel individuel Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un Appel individuel en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) du tlphone. Franais (Canada) Tableau 13: Icnes de tickets de tche Les icnes suivantes apparaissent momentanment sur l'cran dans le dossier Tickets de tche. Toutes les tches Indique toutes les tches de la liste. Nouvelles tches Indique les nouvelles tches. En cours Les travaux sont en cours de transmission. Ceci s'affiche avant l'indication dchec ou de russite denvoi de tickets tche. chec de l'envoi Les travaux ne peuvent tre envoys. Russite de l'envoi Les travaux ont t envoys avec succs. Priorit 1 Indique le niveau de priorit 1 pour les travaux. 377 Franais (Canada) Priorit 2 Indique le niveau de priorit 2 pour les travaux. Priorit 3 Indique le niveau de priorit 3 pour les travaux. Tableau 14: Icnes d'avertissement Les icnes dcrites ci-dessous s'affichent momentanment l'cran de la radio lors de l'excution d'une tche. chec de transmission (ngatif) L'action excute n'a pas russi. Transmission russie (positif) L'action excute a russi. Transmission en cours (transitoire) Transmission en cours. Cette icne s'affiche avant l'indication de russite ou d'chec de la transmission. Tableau 15: Icnes des lments envoys Les icnes ci-dessous apparaissent dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran dans le dossier Messages envoys. ou ou ou En cours Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID d'abonn est en attente de transmission et sera ensuite en attente de confirmation. Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID de groupe est en attente de transmission. Message personnel ou de groupe lu Le message texte a t lu. Message personnel ou de groupe non lu Le message texte n'a pas t lu. 378 chec de l'envoi Le message texte ne peut tre envoy. Russite de l'envoi Le message texte a t envoy. ou ou Voyants DEL Les voyants DEL indiquent l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. Rouge clignotant La radio na pas russi lautovrification la mise sous tension. La radio reoit une transmission d'urgence. La radio effectue une transmission avec un niveau de batterie faible. La radio est maintenant hors de la zone de couverture si la fonction ARTS est configure. Franais (Canada) Mode Muet est activ. Vert continu La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio effectue une transmission. La radio envoie un avertissement d'appel ou une transmission d'urgence. Vert clignotant La radio est en train de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. La radio rcupre des transmissions de programmation. La radio dtecte de l'activit de radiocommunication. AVIS:
Cette activit peut influer ou non le canal programm de la radio en raison de la nature du protocole relatif aux donnes numriques. Le voyant DEL ne s'allume pas si la radio dtecte de l'activit de liaison radio Capacity Plus. Vert clignotement double La radio reoit un appel ou des donnes cryptes. Jaune continu La radio surveille un canal classique. 379 Franais (Canada) La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Jaune clignotant La radio effectue un balayage pour dtecter de l'activit. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel. La Liste de rception flexible de la radio est active. Tous les canaux Capacity Plus multi-site sont occups. Jaune clignotement double La fonction Itinrance automatique est active. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel de groupe. La radio est verrouille. La radio n'est pas connecte au rpteur en mode Capacity Plus. Tous les canaux Capacity Plus sont occups. Tonalits Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-
parleur de la radio. 380 Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Tonalits d'avertissement Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec Tonalits audio La fonction Tonalits audio vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Tonalit priodique Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Tonalit rptitive Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Son entendu une fois pendant une courte priode dfinie par la radio. Mode analogique ou numrique classique Vous pouvez configurer chaque canal de la radio de manire analogique classique ou numrique classique. Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour alterner entre les canaux analogiques et numriques. Certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous basculez du mode numrique au mode analogique. Les icnes des fonctions numriques non disponibles sont Franais (Canada) estompes. Les fonctions dsactives sont masques dans le menu. Certaines fonctions de la radio sont accessibles en mode analogique et numrique. Toutefois, les diffrences mineures de fonctionnement ne nuisent pas au rendement de la radio. AVIS:
La radio peut aussi alterner entre les modes analogique et numrique pendant le balayage bimode. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Balayage la page 425. Information relative aux icnes Dans le prsent document, les icnes dcrites sont utilises pour signaler les fonctions prises en charge en mode analogique classique ou en mode numrique classique ou si elles sont disponibles au moyen dun microphone clavier. Indique une fonction propre au mode analogique classique seulement. 381 Franais (Canada) Indique une fonction propre au mode numrique classique seulement. Les fonctions offertes en mode conventionnel analogique et en mode numrique ne sont accompagnes d'aucune icne. Sites IP interconnects Cette fonction permet votre appareil radio de fonctionner au-del de la zone de couverture d'un site unique en se connectant diffrents sites accessibles par l'intermdiaire d'un rseau IP (Internet Protocol). Il s'agit d'un mode multisite classique. Lorsque la radio quitte la zone de couverture d'un site et entre dans celle d'un autre site, elle se connecte au rpteur du nouveau site pour envoyer et recevoir les appels ou les transmissions de donnes. Cette opration s'effectue automatiquement ou manuellement en fonction de vos paramtres. Si la radio est configure en mode automatique, elle dtecte tous les sites accessibles lorsque le signal du site actuel est faible ou lorsqu'elle ne reoit aucun signal de ce site. Elle se verrouille alors sur le rpteur du site dont la 382 valeur RSSI (indicateur d'intensit de rception du signal) est la plus leve. Lors d'une recherche manuelle, la radio recherche le premier site actuellement dans la zone de couverture dans la liste des sites disponibles en itinrance, mais qui ne prsente pas ncessairement le signal le plus puissant et s'y connecte. AVIS:
Pour chaque canal, seule l'option Balayage ou Itinrance peut tre active, mais non les deux en mme temps. Les canaux pour lesquels cette fonctionnalit est active peuvent tre ajouts une liste d'itinrance particulire. En mode de recherche automatique en itinrance, la radio recherche le ou les canaux dans la liste d'itinrance afin de dterminer le meilleur site. Une liste d'itinrance peut contenir un maximum de 16 canaux, y compris le canal slectionn. AVIS:
Il est impossible d'ajouter ou de supprimer manuellement une entre dans la liste d'itinrance. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Capacity Plus site unique Capacity Plus site unique est une configuration de partage de canaux site unique du systme radio MOTOTRBO qui prend en charge des centaines d'utilisateurs et un maximum de 254 groupes l'aide d'un bassin de canaux. Ainsi, votre radio peut utiliser efficacement tous les canaux programms disponibles en mode Rpteur. Une tonalit d'chec retentit lorsque vous tentez d'accder une fonction qui n'est pas accessible en mode Capacity Plus Site unique l'aide d'une touche programmable. Certaines fonctions de la radio sont accessibles en mode numrique conventionnel, Sites IP interconnects et Capacity Plus. Toutefois, les diffrences mineures de fonctionnement ne nuisent PAS la performance de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements au sujet de cette configuration, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Capacity Plus multisite Capacity Plus multisite est une configuration de partage de canaux multisite du systme radio MOTOTRBO alliant Franais (Canada) les principaux avantages des configurations Capacity Plus et Sites IP interconnects. Capacity Plus Multisite permet votre appareil radio de fonctionner au-del de la zone de couverture d'un site unique en se connectant diffrents sites accessibles par l'intermdiaire d'un rseau IP. Cette fonction permet galement d'accrotre la capacit en utilisant efficacement le nombre disponible combin de canaux programms pris en charge par chacun des sites disponibles. Lorsque la radio quitte la zone de couverture d'un site et entre dans celle d'un autre site, elle se connecte au rpteur du nouveau site pour envoyer et recevoir les appels ou les transmissions de donnes. Selon la configuration choisie, cette opration se fait de faon automatique ou manuelle. Si la radio est configure en mode automatique, elle dtecte tous les sites accessibles lorsque le signal du site actuel est faible ou lorsqu'elle ne reoit aucun signal de ce site. Elle se verrouille alors sur le relais du site dont la valeur RSSI. Lors d'une recherche manuelle, la radio recherche le premier site actuellement porte dans la liste des sites disponibles en itinrance (qui ne prsente pas ncessairement le signal le plus puissant) et s'y connecte. 383 Franais (Canada) Les canaux pour lesquels la configuration Capacity Plus multisite est active peuvent tre ajouts une liste d'itinrance particulire. En mode de recherche automatique en itinrance, la radio recherche ces canaux afin d'identifier le meilleur site. Votre radio prend en charge jusqu 99 canaux et 2 zones, avec un maximum de 99 canaux par zone. Chaque canal peut tre programm avec diffrentes fonctions ou divers groupes d'utilisateurs. AVIS:
Il est impossible d'ajouter ou de supprimer manuellement une entre dans la liste d'itinrance. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Tout comme pour Capacity Plus site unique, les icnes des fonctions qui ne sont pas offertes en mode Capacity Plus multisite ne sont pas disponibles dans le menu. Une tonalit d'chec retentit lorsque vous tentez d'accder une fonction qui n'est pas accessible en mode Capacity Plus multisite l'aide d'une touche programmable. Slection des zones et des canaux Ce chapitre dcrit la procdure pour slectionner une zone ou un canal sur votre radio. Une zone est un groupe de canaux. 384 Slection des zones Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone requise sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Slection de zone. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 ou jusqu' Zone. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. et la zone courante. 3 jusqu' la zone voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone voulue l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou jusqu' Zone. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. et la zone actuelle. 3 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Franais (Canada) 4 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 5 pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. Slection des canaux Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner le canal voulu aprs avoir slectionn la zone. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche de dfilement vers le haut/bas. Utilisez le bouton Volume/Canal. 385 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur les touches programmes Canal prcdent/suivant. Appels Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations pour recevoir et rpondre des appels, en faire et y mettre fin. Vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe une fois que vous avez slectionn un canal l'aide d'une de ces fonctions :
Recherche d'alias Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel individuel ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. Liste de contacts Cette mthode permet d'accder directement la liste des contacts. Numrotation manuelle ( partir de Contacts) Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel individuel ou un appel tlphonique partir du microphone clavier. Touches numriques programmes Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel individuel ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. 386 AVIS:
Vous ne pouvez attribuer qu'un seul alias ou ID une touche numrique, mais vous pouvez attribuer plus d'une touche numrique un alias ou un ID. Toutes les touches numriques du microphone clavier peuvent tre attribues. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. Touche programme daccs direct Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire des appels de groupe, individuel et tlphonique. Vous pouvez attribuer uniquement un ID une touche d'accs direct programmable avec un appui prolong ou bref. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. Bouton programmable Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel tlphonique. Bouton Volume/Canal Cette mthode slectionne manuellement un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. AVIS:
Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu durant la transmission dun appel crypt et met un clignotement double en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de confidentialit ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 487. Appels de groupe Votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie d'un groupe pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou de passer un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs. Franais (Canada) Appels de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels de groupe partir de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias du groupe. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque 387 Franais (Canada) l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 388 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 6 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Franais (Canada) Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. Rponse un appel de groupe Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel de groupe sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 389 Franais (Canada) L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 390 2 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Si la radio affiche un cran autre que l'cran d'accueil et reoit un appel de groupe, elle continue d'afficher l'cran slectionn. Appuyez longuement sur d'accueil et afficher l'alias de l'appelant avant de rpondre. pour retourner l'cran Appels privs Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il existe deux manires de configurer un appel individuel. Le premier type transmet l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio, tandis que le deuxime type transmet l'appel immdiatement. Un seul de ces types d'appels peut tre programm dans votre radio par votre dtaillant. Excution d'un appel individuel Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel individuel. Si cette fonction n'est pas active, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre lorsque vous lancez l'appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels privs partir de la radio. Servez-vous des fonctions de messagerie texte ou d'avertissement d'appel pour communiquer avec une radio individuelle. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous la section Messagerie texte la page 161 ou Fonction Avertissement d'appel la page 443. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Franais (Canada) 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv., l'alias de l'abonn et l'tat de l'appel. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit se fait entendre.Lcran affiche Appel termin. 391 Franais (Canada) Appels privs faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'alias de destination. 392 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 7 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit se fait entendre.Lcran affiche Appel termin. Appels individuels faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Franais (Canada) Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Modifier les ID d'abonn composs prcdemment et appuyez sur continuer. pour 6 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 7 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 8 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 9 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur 393 Franais (Canada) le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Appels individuels faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 394 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv. dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias de destination. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit se fait entendre. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. appel interruptible afin de librer le canal pour vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Franais (Canada) Rponse des appels individuels Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un Appel individuel :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si l'interruption de transmission est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre fin un 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Appels gnraux Un appel gnral est un appel effectu partir d'une radio priv et destin toutes les radios prsentes sur le canal. Un appel gnral sert diffuser des annonces importantes qui sollicitent toute l'attention des utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel gnral. Rception d'un appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel gnral :
395 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'ID de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Appel gnral s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. la fin de l'appel, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la rception de l'appel gnral. Les appels gnraux n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, ce qui indique que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral. 396 AVIS:
La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements tant que l'appel est en cours. Appel gnral Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels gnraux partir de la radio. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe Appel gnral en surbrillance. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne d'appel de groupe et Appel gnral. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral. Appels gnraux faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels gnraux l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. Franais (Canada) 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral en ce moment. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Lorsque l'appel individuel se termine, une courte tonalit retentit. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable la page 431. 397 Franais (Canada) Appels slectifs Un appel slectif est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il s'agit d'un appel priv effectu en mode analogique. Excution d'un appel slectif Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel slectif. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels slectifs partir de la radio. 1 Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv., l'alias de l'abonn et l'tat de l'appel. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 398 Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6 Lcran affiche Appel termin. Rponse un appel slectif Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel slectif sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel slectif :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Franais (Canada) La premire ligne de texte affiche l'icne Appel indiv. et l'alias de l'appelant ou Appel slectif ou Avert. avec appel. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit se fait entendre.Lcran affiche Appel termin. Appels tlphoniques Un appel tlphonique est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers un tlphone. Si la fonction Appel tlphonique n'est pas active sur votre radio :
L'cran affiche Non disponible. Votre radio dsactive le son de l'appel. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. Lors de votre appel tlphonique, votre radio tente de mettre fin l'appel lorsque :
Vous appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct si le code de non-accs est prconfigur. Vous entrez le code de non-accs comme entre pour les autres chiffres. Durant laccs aux canaux, la transmission du code d'accs ou de retrait d'accs ou de chiffres supplmentaires, votre radio rpond la touche Activ/
dsactiv, du Rglage du volumeet du slecteur de canal seulement. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur mettre fin la tentative dappel. Une tonalit se fait entendre. pour 399 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Excution d'un appel tlphonique Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels tlphoniques partir de la radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme d'accs direct l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si la touche d'accs direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, l'cran affiche le message Code d'accs :. 3 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT.Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 4 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires l'aide du clavier si l'appel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si l'appel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par l'appel, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. La multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) se fait entendre. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. 5 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 6 Faites un des suivants :
Si le code de non-accs n'est pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque l'cran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur Entrez le code d'accs, puis appuyez sur continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. pour pour continuer. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 400 Si la touche d'accs direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si l'appel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si l'appel choue, la radio revient l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Rptez les deux dernires tapes qui prcdent ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. 2 3 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques laide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que vous tes sur lcran Contacts tlphoniques :
La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message pour effectuer la slection. Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Si lentre slectionne est vide :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Lcran affiche No dappel tlphonique non valide. 401 Franais (Canada) 4 5 ou jusqu' Appeler. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Lcran affiche Code daccs : si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur. pour Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche En appel La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne Appel tlphonique. Si lappel est russi :
La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne affiche Appel tlphonique et l'icne Appel tlphonique. Si lappel nest pas russi :
402 Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche chec de lappel tlphonique, puis, Code daccs :. Si le code daccs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran prcdant la tentative dappel. 6 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Licne RSSI disparat. 7 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 8 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. 9 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 10 Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 9 et tape 10 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone ait termin lappel. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Franais (Canada) Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. AVIS:
Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel (une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 403 Franais (Canada) Appels tlphoniques faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur tlphone. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Numro : et un curseur clignotant. jusqu'au Numro de pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 404 5 Saisissez le numro de tlphone, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. L'cran affiche Code d'accs : et un curseur clignotant si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur. 6 Entrez le code d'accs, puis appuyez sur continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. pour 7 Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Si l'appel est russi :
La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'cran continue d'afficher l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. Si l'appel n'est pas russi :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche chec de l'appel tlphonique, puis, Code d'accs :. Si le code d'accs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient l'cran prcdant la tentative d'appel. 8 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 9 Faites un des suivants :
Si le code de non-accs n'est pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque l'cran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Franais (Canada) Si la touche d'accs direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si l'appel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si l'appel choue, la radio revient l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Rptez tape 8 ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. 405 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque vous tes dans lcran de contacts, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appuyez sur OK pour placer appel. Lorsque l'utilisateur a termin d'utiliser le tlphone, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel termin. Si l'appel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par l'appel tlphonique, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel
(une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, si le code de non-
accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. 406 Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Pour passer des appela de groupe, individuels, tlphoniques ou gnraux l'aide de la recherche d'alias Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer n'importe quel type d'appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur d'abonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur l'entre slectionne est vide, une tonalit d'indication ngative se fait entendre et l'cran indique No. Tl. Invalide. ou pour un appel Appuyez sur tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection.. Si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code d'accs :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code d'accs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit pour DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de Franais (Canada) lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de l'une des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche d'accs 407 Franais (Canada) 8 direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Si le code de libration n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code pour continuer. de libration, puis appuyez sur La radio revient l'cran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et l'cran affiche Fin de lappel tl.. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, votre radio retourne l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque l'utilisateur a termin d'utiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Fin appel tl.. Si l'appel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par l'appel tlphonique, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. 408 ou pour quitter la AVIS:
Pendant l'accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche d'alias. Appuyez sur recherche d'alias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Multifrquence deux tonalits La fonction Multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) permet d'utiliser un systme radio dot d'une interface de systme tlphonique. Vous pouvez dsactiver la tonalit DTMF en dsactivant toutes les tonalits et alertes de la radio. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio la page 215. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. Excution dun appel DTMF Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels DTMF partir de la radio. 1 Maintenez le bouton de transmission PTT enfonc. L'cran affiche l'alias du groupe et Appel tl. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Indisponible, et votre radio met les appels en sourdine. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. 2 Faites un des suivants :
Entrez le numro voulu pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe :
1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT.Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 pour mettre fin lappel. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Fin de lappel tl.. Si l'appel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si l'appel choue, la radio revient l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Rptez l'tape ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. 409 Franais (Canada) Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral, vous ne pouvez y rpondre ou y mettre fin que si le canal est du type appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel gnral :
L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'cran affiche Appel gnral et Appel tl. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Indisponible, et votre radio met les appels en sourdine. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 410 3 pour mettre fin lappel. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Fin de lappel tl.. Si l'appel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Appel gnral et Appel termin. Si l'appel choue, la radio revient l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Rptez tape 3 ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel individuel :
L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'cran affiche l'alias de l'appelant ou Appel tl. Franais (Canada) Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Indisponible, et votre radio met les appels en sourdine. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. radio est bloqu, parce que le bouton PTT a t enfonc par inadvertance. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Suivez la procdure suivante pour mettre fin un appel sur votre radio. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT.Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 pour mettre fin lappel. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Fin de lappel tl.. Si l'appel se termine avec succs :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Si l'appel choue, la radio revient l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Rptez l'tape ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Interruption de transmission. L'cran affiche Interruption. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Interruption russie. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche chec de l'interruption. Interruption dun appel radio La fonction vous permet de mettre fin un appel de groupe ou un appel individuel afin de librer le canal pour une transmission. Par exemple, lorsque le microphone de la AVIS:
Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 411 Franais (Canada) Mode Direct Cette fonction vous permet de continuer de communiquer lorsque votre rpteur ne fonctionne pas ou lorsque la radio est hors de la porte du rpteur, mais demeure la porte des autres radios. Ce rglage demeure activ mme aprs la mise hors tension. AVIS:
Cette fonction ne s'applique pas aux canaux Capacity Plus site unique, Capacity Plus multi-
site et Bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Basculement entre les modes Rpteur et Direct Suivez la procdure pour alterner entre les modes Rpteur et Direct sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur le bouton programm Repeater/
Talkaround. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. 2 3 4 412 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou jusqu' Direct. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. apparat ct ne s'affiche plus Franais (Canada) Fonctions avances Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. Cependant, votre dtaillant ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut avoir personnalis votre radio en fonction de vos besoins particuliers. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active via le CPS lorsque la radio n'est pas rgle sur le canal d'accueil pendant un certain temps, voici ce qui se produit priodiquement :
La tonalit de Rappel de canal d'accueil et l'annonce sonore retentissent. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Non. La deuxime ligne affiche Canal d'accueil. Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :
Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil Lorsque survient le rappel du canal daccueil, vous pouvez le mettre en sourdine. Appuyez sur la touche programme Rappel du canal d'accueil en sourdine. La premire ligne de lcran affiche HCR et la deuxime en sourdine. Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil Lorsque le rappel du canal daccueil retentit, vous pouvez dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil. 1 Faites un des suivants :
413 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur la touche programmable Rinitialiser canal d'accueil pour rgler le canal courant comme nouveau canal d'accueil. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias du canal et la deuxime Nouv. canal acc. 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. jusqu' l'alias du ou Appuyez sur nouveau canal d'accueil. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche slectionn. ct de l'alias de canal d'accueil pour ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur d'accueil. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Canal pour effectuer la Vrification de la radio La fonction Vrification de la radio vous permet de dterminer si une autre radio est en fonction au sein d'un systme, sans importuner l'utilisateur de cette radio. Aucune notification sonore ou visuelle ne se manifeste sur la radio cible. Cette fonction n'est offerte que pour les alias ou ID d'abonn. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Envoi des vrifications radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des vrifications radio partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Vrif. radio. 2 3 4 414 2 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours.Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. pendant l'attente de Attendez la confirmation. Si vous appuyez sur confirmation, une tonalit se fait entendre, la radio met fin toutes les tentatives et quitte le mode de vrification de radio. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'alias ou d'ID d'abonn. Franais (Canada) Envoi des vrifications radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer les vrifications de radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. 415 Franais (Canada) Modifiez les ID composs prcdemment et appuyez sur pour continuer. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'alias ou d'ID d'abonn. 6 ou jusqu' Vrifications Appuyez sur de radio. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. pour effectuer la 7 Attendez la confirmation. pendant l'attente de Si vous appuyez sur confirmation, une tonalit se fait entendre, puis la radio met fin aux tentatives et quitte le mode de vrification de radio. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 416 coute distance Cette fonction est utilise pour activer le microphone d'une radio cible avec un alias ou un ID d'abonn. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio et la radio cible doivent tre programmes de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Cette fonction s'arrte aprs une dure programme ou ds qu'une fonction de la radio cible est utilise. Lancer la fonction coute ambiance Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction de surveillance distance sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. 2 3 Appuyez sur voulu. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 4 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la liste de contacts de la radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur distance ou jusqu' coute 417 Franais (Canada) 5 pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. 418 Franais (Canada) Modifiez les ID composs prcdemment et appuyez sur pour continuer. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6 7 Appuyez sur distance ou jusqu' coute pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :
Listes de balayage Les listes de balayage sont cres et attribues des canaux ou des groupes. Votre radio recherche l'activit vocale en passant par le cycle complet de la squence de canaux et de groupes dfinie dans la liste de balayage du canal ou du groupe actuel. Votre radio prend en charge jusqu' 250 listes de balayage, chacune pouvant comprendre jusqu' 16 membres. Chaque liste de balayage peut comprendre des entres analogiques et des entres numriques. Lorsque vous modifiez une liste de balayage, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des canaux ou en tablir l'ordre de priorit. Il vous est galement possible de joindre une nouvelle liste de balayage l'aide de la fonction de programmation du clavier. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Configuration du panneau avant la page 207. 419 Franais (Canada) L'icne Priorit s'affiche gauche de l'alias du membre, s'il est dfini, pour indiquer si le membre fait partie d'une liste de canaux de Priorit 1 ou de Priorit 2. Vous ne pouvez pas avoir plusieurs canaux de Priorit 1 ou de Priorit 2 dans une liste de balayage. Aucune icne Priorit ne s'affiche si le rglage de la priorit est Aucun. AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. 3 4 ou Appuyez sur balayage. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la Appuyez sur des membres de la liste. ou pour afficher chacun Affichage d'une entre de la liste de balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des entres de la liste de balayage sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 420 Affichage des entres de la liste de balayage laide de la recherche dalias Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des entres de la liste de balayage de la radio l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 ou Appuyez sur balayage. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la 4 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 5 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur balayage. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou membre. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Ajouter un pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Ajout dentres la liste de balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter des entres la liste de balayage de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 421 Franais (Canada) 6 ou jusqu'au niveau de Appuyez sur priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite, immdiatement suivi du message En ajouter un autre?. pour effectuer la 7 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui pour ajouter une entre. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. Rptez tape 5 et tape 6. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour enregistrer la liste actuelle. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 422 Ajout d'entres la liste de balayage l'aide de la recherche d'alias Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter des entres la liste de balayage de la radio l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur balayage. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou membre. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Ajouter un pour effectuer la 5 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 6 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 7 8 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu'au niveau de Appuyez sur priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite, immdiatement suivi du message En ajouter un autre?. pour effectuer la 9 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui pour ajouter une entre. Appuyez sur pour Franais (Canada) effectuer la slection. Rptez l'tape tape 8 jusqu l'tape tape 5 . Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour enregistrer la liste actuelle. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Suppression d'une entre de la liste de balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les entres de la liste de balayage. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur balayage. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la 423 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 8 Appuyez longuement sur d'accueil aprs avoir supprim les alias et les ID voulus. pour revenir l'cran Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Supprimer l'entre?. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Supprimer. 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui pour supprimer l'entre. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 7 Rptez tape 4 jusqu' tape 6 pour supprimer d'autres entres. 424 Configuration de lordre de priorit des entres de la liste de balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer l'ordre de priorit des entres de la liste de balayage de votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Balayer. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur balayage. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la 4 5 6 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur priorits. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Modifier les pour effectuer la ou jusqu'au niveau de Appuyez sur priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran prcdent. L'icne Priorit s'affiche la gauche de l'alias du membre. pour effectuer la Balayage Lorsque vous dmarrez un balayage, votre radio recherche l'activit vocale en passant par le cycle complet de la liste de balayage du canal actuel. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. Pendant un balayage bimode, si vous employez un canal numrique et si votre radio capte un canal analogique, votre radio passe automatiquement du mode numrique au mode analogique pendant la dure de la communication. L'inverse est galement vrai. Il y a deux faons de dmarrer un balayage :
Balayage du canal principal (manuel) Votre radio effectue le balayage de tous les canaux et de tous les groupes de votre liste de balayage. Au dmarrage du balayage, votre radio peut, selon les rglages dfinis, commencer automatiquement par le dernier canal ou groupe actif lors du dernier balayage ou par le canal partir duquel le balayage a t lanc. Balayage auto (automatique) Votre radio dmarre automatiquement le balayage lorsque vous slectionnez un canal ou un groupe pour lequel la fonction balayage auto est active. 425 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Lorsque vous configurez la Rception de messages de groupe dans la liste de balayage, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des messages de groupe partir de canaux autres que de l'accueil. Votre radio est en mesure de rpondre au groupe des messages sur votre canal d'accueil, mais n'est pas en mesure de rpondre des canaux autres que ceux de l'accueil. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-
vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Activer ou dsactiver le balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 426 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' tat scan. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur balayage requis, puis appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' l'tat de pour le Si le balayage est activ :
L'cran affiche Balayage activ et l'icne Balayage. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Si le balayage est dsactiv :
L'cran affiche Balayage dsactiv. L'icne de balayage disparat. Le voyant DEL s'teint. Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage Lorsqu'elle excute un balayage, votre radio s'arrte sur un canal ou un groupe si elle y dtecte de l'activit. La radio demeure sur ce canal pendant une dure programme appele priode d'attente . Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des transmissions pendant le balayage. 1 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode d'attente. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. La radio reprend le balayage des autres canaux ou des groupes si vous ne rpondez pas dans le dlai de mise en attente. Suppression des canaux nuisibles Si un canal met continuellement des appels indsirables ou du bruit (canal nuisible ), vous pouvez liminer temporairement ce canal indsirable de la liste de balayage. Cette possibilit n'existe pas pour le canal employ comme canal slectionn. Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les canaux nuisibles de votre radio. Franais (Canada) 1 Lorsque votre radio capte un canal indsirable ou nuisible, appuyez sur la touche programme Suppr. canal nuisible et maintenez-la jusqu' ce qu'une tonalit retentisse. 2 Relchez la touche programme Suppr canal nuisible. Le canal nuisible est supprim. Restauration des canaux nuisibles Suivez la procdure suivante pour restaurer les canaux nuisibles de votre radio. Faites un des suivants :
teignez la radio, puis rallumez-la. Arrtez et redmarrez un balayage avec la touche prprogramme Balayage ou du menu. Changez de canal l'aide de la touche Canal prcdent/suivant. 427 Franais (Canada) Balayage par vote :
Le balayage par vote vous permet d'obtenir une zone de couverture tendue l o plusieurs stations de base transmettent des donnes identiques sur diffrents canaux analogiques. Votre radio effectue le balayage des canaux analogiques de plusieurs stations de base et slectionne le signal reu le plus fort. Une fois la slection dtermine, la radio reoit les transmissions de cette station de base. Pendant un balayage par vote, le voyant DEL jaune clignote et l'cran affiche l'icne Balayage par vote. Suivez les tapes dcrites dans la section Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage la page 426 pour rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage par vote. Rglages des contacts La fonction Contacts constitue le carnet d'adresses de votre radio. Chaque entre est associe un alias ou un ID que vous utilisez pour passer un appel. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. 428 Chaque entre, selon le contexte, correspond diffrents types d'appels : appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel gnral, appel PC ou appel de rpartition. Les appels PC et les appels console rpartiteur sont des appels de donnes. Ils ne sont disponibles qu'avec les applications. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous la documentation sur les applications de donnes. De plus, le menu Contacts vous permet d'attribuer chaque entre une ou plusieurs touches numriques programmables sur un microphone clavier. Si une touche numrique est attribue une entre, votre radio peut excuter la composition rapide de l'entre. AVIS:
Un crochet prcde chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si le crochet prcde le mot Vide, aucune touche numrique n'a t attribue l'entre. Chaque entre des contacts affiche les renseignements suivants :
Type d'appel Alias d'appel ID dappel AVIS:
Si la fonction Cryptage est active sur un canal, vous pouvez passer des appels crypts de type groupe, individuel ou gnral sur ce canal. Seule une radio cible dote de la mme cl de cryptage OU des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 6 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 429 Franais (Canada) Appels privs faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'alias de destination. 430 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler
(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 7 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit se fait entendre.Lcran affiche Appel termin. Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour associer des entres aux touches numriques programmables de votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur programmable. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Touche pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Si la touche numrique voulue n'a t attribue jusqu' la une entre, appuyez sur ou Franais (Canada) touche numrique voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si la touche numrique voulue a t attribue une entre, l'cran affiche La cl est dj affect et puis, la premire ligne de texte affiche Remplacer?. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio fait entendre une tonalit de russite et l'cran affiche Contact enregistr et un bref avis de russite. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur revenir l'cran prcdent. ou jusqu' Non pour Diffrentes touches numriques peuvent tre attribues chaque entre. Le signe chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si prcde Vide, la touche numrique n'est le signe pas attribue. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prcde 431 Franais (Canada) prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Dissociation dune entre et de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure pour dissocier les entres des touches numriques programmables de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Passez tape 4. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. 2 432 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur programmable. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Touche pour effectuer la ou jusqu' Vide. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur La premire ligne de texte affiche Supprimer de toutes les touches. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez AVIS:
Lorsqu'une entre est supprime, l'association entre l'entre et les touches numriques programmes est supprime. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Lcran affiche le message Contact enregistr. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Ajout d'un nouveau contact Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter de nouveaux contacts sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou contact. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Nouveau pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur type de contact, soit Contact Radio, soit Contact pour effectuer la slection. tl. Appuyez sur pour slectionner le Franais (Canada) 5 Entrer le numro du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. 6 Entrer le nom du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. 7 ou jusqu' la sonnerie Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre.L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la Configuration du contact par dfaut Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le contact par dfaut de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 433 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Configurer pour effectuer la Appuyez sur par dfaut. Appuyez sur slection. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre.L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran affiche ct de l'alias ou de l'ID slectionn par dfaut. Rglages de l'indicateur d'appel Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de configurer un appel ou un message texte sonneries. Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels d'urgence sur votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 2 3 4 434 4 5 6 7 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Aver. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. jusqu' la sonnerie pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels privs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels privs de la radio. Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la 435 Franais (Canada) 6 7 jusqu' Appel indiv.. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si les sonneries d'appel individuel sont actives, l'cran affiche Si les sonneries d'appel individuel sont actives, l'cran affiche ct du message Allum. ct du message teint. jusqu' la sonnerie ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ.Si cette option est dsactive, le s'affiche plus ct de Activ. pour effectuer la ne Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs de la radio. 436 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la 6 7 ou Appuyez sur slectif. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. jusqu' Appel pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. jusqu' la sonnerie pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des messages textes Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries de messages texte sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur texte. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. jusqu' Message pour effectuer la slection. 437 Franais (Canada) 7 ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. jusqu' la sonnerie pour effectuer la ct de la nouvelle sonnerie Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel d'tat de tlmtrie avec message texte sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 438 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur dappels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonn. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Tlmtrie. Attribuer des styles de sonneries Vous pouvez programmer votre radio pour quelle mette une sonnerie particulire parmi les onze sonneries prdfinies lorsque vous recevez un appel priv, un avertissement dappel ou un message texte de la part dun contact particulier.La radio fait entendre chaque style de sonnerie lorsque vous parcourez la liste. Suivez la procdure pour attribuer des styles de sonnerie sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur Modifier. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Voir/
pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) jusqu ce que lcran affiche le indique la tonalit actuellement Appuyez sur menu Sonnerie Licne slectionne. 5 6 ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Licne jusqu la tonalit pour effectuer la saffiche ct de celui slectionn. Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Votre dtaillant peut programmer la radio pour vous alerter de faon continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 439 Franais (Canada) Fonctions du Journal des appels Votre radio fait le suivi des appels individuels que vous avez faits, que vous avez reus et que vous avez manqus rcemment. Utilisez le journal des appels pour afficher et grer les derniers appels. Les Alertes d'appels manqus peuvent tre incluses dans les journaux d'appels, selon la configuration du systme sur votre radio. Dans chacune des listes d'appels, vous pouvez excuter les tches suivantes :
Stocker l'alias ou l'ID dans les contacts Supprimer un appel Supprimer tous les appels Afficher les dtails Affichage des derniers appels Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les derniers appels sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 440 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Les listes offertes sont Manqus, Rpondus et Sortants. jusqu la liste voulue. ou Appuyez sur Lcran affiche lentre la plus rcente. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur Vous pouvez lancer un Appel individuel avec lalias ou lID affich lcran en appuyant sur la touche PTT. pour voir la liste. Suppression des appels de la liste d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des appels de la liste d'appel. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Faites un des suivants :
Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Journal des pour effectuer la jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si la liste est vide :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Liste vide. Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui et supprimer l'entre. L'cran affiche Entre supprime. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Non. ou pour effectuer la slection. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. Afficher les dtails de la liste d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les dtails de l'appel sur votre radio. Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 ou Appuyez sur l'entre?. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Supprimer pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Journal des pour effectuer la 441 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou dtails. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche les dtails dappel. jusqu' Afficher les pour effectuer la Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels Suivez la procdure suivante pour stocker les alias ou les ID de la liste d'appels sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 442 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou appels. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu Journal des pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' la liste voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. ou jusqu' Stocker. pour effectuer la slection. 6 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Vous pouvez galement enregistrer un ID sans un alias. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Fonction Avertissement d'appel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle. Cette fonction est offerte uniquement pour les alias ou les ID d'abonn et est accessible par le menu Contacts, la numrotation manuelle ou la touche d'accs direct programme. Excution dune alerte dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour lancer des alertes d'appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Avis d'appels faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des avis d'appel l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. 443 Franais (Canada) 4 jusqu' Aver. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Avis d'appel fait l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des avis d'appel l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de votre radio. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Num. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. pour effectuer la Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour jusqu' Aver. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. 1 444 Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Rponse un avertissement d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un avertissement d'appel sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un avertissement d'appel :
Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. L'cran affiche la liste des notifications d'avertissement d'appel accompagne de l'alias ou de l'ID de la radio de l'appelant. Selon la configuration par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme, vous pouvez rpondre un avertissement d'appel en procdant de l'une des manires suivantes :
Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et rpondez par un appel individuel directement l'appelant. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour continuer la communication de groupe d'appels normale. Franais (Canada) L'avertissement d'appel est dplac vers l'option Appel manqu dans le menu du Journal d'appels. Vous pouvez rpondre l'appelant partir du journal Appel manqu. Pour plus d'informations ce sujet, reportez-vous Liste de notifications la page 204 et Fonctions du Journal des appels la page 138. Mode Muet Le mode muet propose une option l'utilisateur de couper tous les indicateurs audio de la radio. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs l'exception des fonctions de priorit leve, comme les oprations d'urgence. Lorsque l'on quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. AVIS:
Ceci est une fonction pouvant tre achete. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 445 Franais (Canada) Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet activ. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'
ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. L'cran affiche le Mode muet sur l'cran d'accueil. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet La fonction Mode muet peut tre active pour une dure prdtermine en rglant la minuterie du mode muet. La dure de la minuterie est configure dans le menu de la 446 radio et peut tre comprise entre 0,5 et 6 heures. Le mode muet est quitt lorsque la minuterie expire. Si la minuterie est laisse 0, la radio reste en mode muet pendant une priode indfinie jusqu' ce que lon appuie sur la touche programme Mode muet. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mode muet. ou pour effectuer la slection. 5 Appuyez sur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur pour modifier la valeur ou
. Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet dsactiv. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. L'icne Mode muet disparat de l'cran d'accueil. Franais (Canada) Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-
parleur est rtabli. Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est arrte. AVIS:
Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. Fonctionnement d'urgence Une alarme d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps mme si de l'activit se droule sur le canal en cours d'utilisation. Votre dtaillant peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf la dure dappui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons. Appui bref De 0,05 0,75 seconde. Appui long De 1,00 3,75 secondes. 447 Franais (Canada) La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. Rgulier La radio transmet un signal d'alarme et active des indicateurs sonores ou visuels. AVIS:
Si un appui bref sur la touche Urgence lance le mode d'urgence, alors une longue pression sur la mme touche permet la radio de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si un appui long sur la touche Urgence lance le mode d'urgence, alors une courte pression sur la mme touche permet la radio de quitter le mode d'urgence. Votre radio prend en charge trois alarmes d'urgence :
Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal AVIS:
Une seule des alarmes d'urgence ci-dessus peut tre associe la touche durgence programme ou l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied. De plus, chaque alarme comprend les types suivants :
448 Silencieux La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio reoit les appels sans qu'aucun son ne se fasse entendre sur le haut-parleur, jusqu' ce que la priode de transmission micro ouvert programme se termine ou que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT. Silencieux avec voix La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels, mais permet aux appels entrants de se faire entendre sur le haut-parleur. Rception dune alarme durgence Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir des alertes d'urgence sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez une alarme d'urgence :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche l'icne Urgence et l'alias de l'metteur de l'appel d'urgence ou s'il n'y a plus d'une alarme d'urgence, tous les alias de l'metteur de l'appel d'urgence sont affichs dans liste des alarmes. 1 Faites un des suivants :
S'il y a une seul l'alarme, appuyez sur afficher plus de dtails. pour S'il y a plus d'une alarme, appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias requis, puis appuyez sur pour plus de dtails. Appuyez sur s'offrent vous. Appuyez sur liste des alarmes. pour afficher les options qui et slectionnez Oui pour quitter la Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Slectionnez Liste des alarmes pour consulter de nouveau la liste des alarmes. Franais (Canada) 6 La tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL clignote en rouge jusqu ce que vous quittiez le mode durgence. Cependant, la tonalit peut tre coupe. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour appeler le groupe de radios pour lequel une alarme durgence a t mise. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche programmable. Quittez le mode durgence. Voir Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence la page 450. Rponse une alarme durgence Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre une alarme d'urgence partir de votre radio. 1 Assurez-vous que l'cran affiche la liste des alarmes. Appuyez sur ou l'ID voulu. ou jusqu' l'alias 2 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque 449 Franais (Canada) l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour transmettre un message vocal sans urgence au groupe cibl par l'alarme d'urgence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Votre radio demeure en mode d'urgence. 3 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :
Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et l'ID, l'ID de la radio mettrice et la liste des alarmes. La voix d'urgence ne peut tre transmise que par la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence. Toutes les autres radios (y compris la radio rceptrice de la transmission d'urgence) transmettent la voix sans urgence. Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence Suivez la procdure suivante pour quitter le mode d'urgence aprs avoir reu une alarme d'urgence :
Supprimez les alarmes. teignez la radio. Envoi des alarmes d'urgence Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence (un signal sans voix) qui dclenche une indication d'alerte sur un groupe de radios. Votre radio n'affiche aucun indicateur sonore ou visuel durant le mode d'urgence lorsque celui-ci est rgl sur silencieux. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des alertes d'urgence partir de votre radio. 450 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Vous voyez un des rsultats suivants :
L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. AVIS:
Si programme, la tonalit de recherche durgence se fait entendre. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. La tonalit Recherche d'urgence peut tre programme partir du CPS. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche le message Alarme envoye En cas d'chec aprs que toutes les tentatives ont t utilises :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche le message chec de l'alarme. La radio quitte le mode d'alarme d'urgence et revient l'cran d'accueil. Envoi d'une alarme d'urgence avec un appel Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence avec un appel un groupe de radios. Lorsqu'une radio du groupe accuse rception de l'alarme d'urgence, le groupe de radios peut communiquer sur un canal d'urgence programm. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence avec appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. L'cran affiche Envoi d'alarme en alternance avec l'ID de votre radio. Vous voyez ce qui suit :
451 Franais (Canada) Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. AVIS:
Si programme, la tonalit de recherche durgence se fait entendre. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence.La tonalit de la recherche d'urgence peut tre programme par votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur systme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche le message Alarme envoye Votre radio passe en mode d'appel d'urgence lorsque l'cran affiche le message Urgence et l'alias du groupe de destination. 452 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel de groupe. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'cran affiche l'alias de l'appelant et l'alias de groupe. 6 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 7 Pour quitter le mode d'urgence une fois l'appel termin, appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsactive. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. Alarmes d'urgence suivies d'un appel vocal Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal un groupe de radios. Le microphone de votre radio est automatiquement activ, vous permettant de communiquer avec le groupe de radios sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . AVIS:
Votre radio ne peut pas dtecter un microphone non IMPRES qui est attach au connecteur d'accessoire arrire. Si aucun microphone n'est dtect sur le connecteur programm indiqu, votre radio vrifie l'autre connecteur. Ainsi votre radio donne la priorit au microphone dtect. Franais (Canada) Si le mode de cycle d'urgence de votre radio est activ, les rptitions de microphone branch et de priode de rception s'appliquent pendant la dure programme. Pendant le mode de cycle d'urgence, le son des appels reus est diffus sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de rception programme, une tonalit d'interdiction se fait entendre, indiquant que vous devez librer le bouton PTT. La radio ne tient pas compte du fait que le bouton PTT est enfonc et demeure en mode d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de microphone branch programme et si vous maintenez le bouton enfonc aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, la radio continue de transmettre jusqu' ce que vous relchiez le bouton PTT. Si la demande d'alarme d'urgence choue, la radio ne fait pas d'autre tentative et passe directement l'tat de microphone branch. AVIS:
Certains accessoires ne prennent pas en charge la fonction microphone branch. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 453 Franais (Canada) Envoi d'une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. Vous voyez un des rsultats suivants :
L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. 2 Lorsque lcran affiche le message Alarme envoye, parlez clairement dans le micro. La radio cesse automatiquement de transmettre dans les cas suivants :
Si le mode Cycle durgence est activ, la dure du cycle entre micro ouvert et rception dappels arrive son terme. 454 Aprs l'expiration de la dure de micro ouvert, le mode cycle d'urgence est dsactiv. 3 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode d'urgence. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. Ractivation du mode durgence Cette fonction n'est offerte que sur la radio qui envoie l'alarme d'urgence. Suivez la procdure suivante pour ractiver une alarme d'urgence sur votre radio. Faites un des suivants :
Changez le canal pendant que la radio est en mode d'urgence. La radio quitte le mode d'urgence et ractive le mode d'urgence, si l'alarme d'urgence est active sur le nouveau canal. Appuyez sur la touche programme Urg. activ pendant que la radio est dans un tat d'activation du mode d'urgence ou de transmission d'urgence. La radio quitte alors cet tat et ractive le mode d'urgence. Quitter le mode d'urgence aprs l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence Cette fonction n'est offerte que sur la radio qui envoie l'alarme d'urgence. Votre radio quitte le mode d'urgence lorsque :
Un accus de rception est reu (dans le cas de l'alarme d'urgence seulement). Toutes les tentatives d'envoi de l'alarme ont t effectues. AVIS:
Si la radio est mise hors tension, elle quitte le mode d'urgence. La radio ne ractive pas automatiquement le mode durgence lorsquelle est remise sous tension. Suivez la procdure suivante pour quitter le mode d'urgence sur votre radio. Faites un des suivants :
Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur la touche programme Urg. dsactiv. Changez de canal pour un nouveau canal qui n'a pas t configur avec le mode d'urgence. L'cran affiche Pas d'urgence. Supprimez lalarme de la liste dalarmes Suivez la procdure pour supprimer les lments d'alarme de la liste des alarmes, pour quitter le mode d'urgence. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Alarmes. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'alarme voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. 455 Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Messagerie texte Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance d'une autre radio ou d'une application de messagerie texte. Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale d'un message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne d'objet. Vous voyez la ligne d'objet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant d'une application courriel. 456 AVIS:
La longueur maximale de 280 caractres s'applique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale d'un message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Messages texte Les messages texte sont enregistrs de la bote de rception et classs du plus rcent au plus ancien. Affichage des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les messages texte sur la radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Messages. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 ou jusqu' Bote de Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. Si la bote de rception est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une sonnerie se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pour effectuer la pav numrique est active. ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. pour effectuer la slection. Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie Suivez la procdure permettant d'afficher un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie partir de la bote de rception. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie. L'cran affiche Tlmtrie : <Status Text Message>. Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir 457 Franais (Canada) Rponse des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un message texte :
L'cran affiche la liste de notification comprenant l'alias ou l'ID de l'expditeur. L'cran affiche l'icne Message. AVIS:
La radio quitte lcran dalerte de message texte et achemine un Appel individuel ou de groupe lexpditeur du message si le bouton PTT est enfonc. 1 Faites un des suivants :
jusqu' Lire. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche le message texte. La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. 458 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Lire plus tard. Appuyez sur slection. La radio revient l'cran affich prcdant la rception du message texte. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur rception. pour revenir la bote de Appuyez nouveau sur pour rpondre au message texte, le transfrer ou le supprimer. Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte par des messages texte rapides sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez l'tape tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la 6 7 8 ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rpondre. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou rapide. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Rponse pour effectuer la ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 9 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 459 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Renvoi des messages texte Suivez la procdure pour renvoyer des messages texte partir de votre radio. Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :
pour renvoyer le mme message Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. 460 Transfre des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour transfrer les messages texte partir de votre radio. Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :
1 2 Appuyez sur appuyez sur un autre abonn ou un alias de groupe ou un ID. ou pour envoyer le mme message jusqu' Transfrer et ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. AVIS:
Vous pouvez galement slectionner manuellement l'adresse de la radio cible
(consultez la section Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle la page 461). 3 4 Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour transfrer les messages texte l'aide de la numrotation manuelle de votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Transfrer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. pour envoyer le mme message Franais (Canada) ou jusqu' Num. Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche Numro de la radio :. pour effectuer la Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. pour 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 461 Franais (Canada) Modification de messages texte Slectionnez Modifier pour modifier le message. AVIS:
Si le message comporte une ligne d'objet (s'il a t envoy partir d'une application de courriel), il est impossible de la modifier. 1 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. ou jusqu' Modifier. pour effectuer la slection. 2 Utilisez les touches du clavier pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 3 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'
Enregistrer, puis appuyez sur enregistrer le message dans le dossier Brouillons. pour Appuyez sur pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur ou pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres 462 Appuyez sur pour choisir entre la suppression du message ou son enregistrement dans le dossier Brouillons. Rdaction de messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rdiger des messages texte sur la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Un curseur clignotant apparat. ou jusqu' Composer. pour effectuer la slection. 4 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur d'une Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur d'une espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 5 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier, supprimer ou enregistrer le message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Envoi de messages texte Suivez la procdure pour envoyer des messages texte sur votre radio. 463 Franais (Canada) Supposons que vous avez rcemment crit ou enregistr un message texte. Slectionnez le destinataire du message. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou Slectionnez le destinataire du message. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la manuelle. Appuyez sur slection.Entrez l'ID d'abonn. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Appuyez sur
. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 464 En cas dchec :
Une tonalit faible retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Le message est dplac dans le dossier Messages envoys. Le message est marqu avec une icne chec d'envoi. AVIS:
Pour un nouveau message texte crit, la radio vous renvoie l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Messages. ou pour effectuer la slection. 6 7 jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. Si la bote de rception est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit se fait entendre. ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran revient la bote de rception. pour effectuer la slection. Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 465 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Bote de pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur rception. Appuyez sur slection. Si la bote de rception est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit se fait entendre. ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez 2 3 4 5 466 Messages texte envoys Une fois qu'un message texte est envoy vers une autre radio, il est enregistr dans les messages envoys. Le dernier message texte envoy s'affiche toujours en haut de la liste des messages envoys. Vous pouvez renvoyer, transfrer, modifier ou supprimer un message texte envoy. Le dossier des messages envoys peut contenir au maximum les 30 derniers messages envoys. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message envoy remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Si vous quittez l'cran d'envoi de message pendant que l'envoi du message est en cours, la radio met jour l'tat du message dans le dossier des messages envoys sans fournir d'indication sonore ou visuelle. Si la radio change de mode ou est mise hors tension avant que l'tat du message ne soit mis jour dans le dossier des messages envoys, la radio ne peut terminer l'envoi du message en cours et marque automatiquement celui-ci d'une icne chec de l'envoi. La radio prend en charge un maximum de cinq envois de message en cours la fois. Pendant ce temps, la radio ne peut envoyer aucun autre message et marque automatiquement les nouveaux messages de l'icne chec de l'envoi. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en appuyant longuement sur la touche
. AVIS:
Si le type de canal (p. ex. numrique conventionnel, Capacity Plus) ne correspond pas, vous pouvez uniquement modifier, transfrer ou supprimer un message envoy. Affichage des messages texte envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des messages texte envoys partir de votre radio. 3 4 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Messages. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) jusqu' Messages pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou envoys. Appuyez sur slection. Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit grave se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pav numrique est active. ou jusqu'au message Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur L'icne affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran indique l'tat du message. Voir Icnes des lments envoys. pour effectuer la slection. Envoi de messages texte envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message texte envoy sur votre radio. 467 Franais (Canada) Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :
1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez sur
. 2 Vous pouvez soit renvoyer ou transfrer le message texte envoy. Faites un des suivants :
pour Renvoyer. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour pour Transfrer. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 468 L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio passe l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 165. Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :
1 2 Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Messages pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou envoys. Appuyez sur slection. Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :
L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Franais (Canada) 4 ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio revient l'cran prcdent. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Non. Messages texte enregistrs Vous pouvez enregistrer un message texte afin de l'envoyer plus tard. Si l'cran de rdaction ou de modification de message se ferme pendant que vous rdigez ou modifiez un message texte, par exemple si vous avez appuy sur le bouton PTT ou chang de mode, votre message est automatiquement enregistr dans les brouillons. 469 Franais (Canada) Le message texte le plus rcent figure toujours en haut de la liste des brouillons. Le dossier Brouillons permet de stocker au maximum les 10 derniers messages enregistrs. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message enregistr remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Brouillons. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour effectuer la slection. Affichage de messages texte enregistrs Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des messages texte enregistrs envoys partir de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. 2 470 Modification de messages texte enregistrs Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier des messages texte enregistrs envoys partir de votre radio. 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez sur
. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Un curseur clignotant apparat. jusqu' Modifier. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur d'une Appuyez sur d'une espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Franais (Canada) Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des messages texte enregistrs dans les brouillons sur votre radio. Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 4 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur
. Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer. pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur
. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir entre supprimer ou enregistrer le message. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Brouillons. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 471 Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur Slectionnez jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour supprimer le message texte. Passez tape 6. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Message texte rapide Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 50 messages texte rapides, selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. Les messages texte rapides sont prdfinis, mais vous pouvez modifier chaque message avant de l'envoyer. Envoi de messages texte rapides Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des messages texte rapides prdfinis sur votre radio un alias prdfini. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 6. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 472 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Texte rapide. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au texte rapide pour effectuer la slection. 5 Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le destinataire et envoyer le message. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio passe l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 165. Franais (Canada) Symboles Frappe prdictive ou multiple Langue (si programme) AVIS:
Appuyez sur l'cran prcdent ou maintenez enfonce la touche pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a en tout temps pour revenir aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. Configuration de saisie de texte Votre radio vous permet de configurer diffrents textes. Vous pouvez configurer les paramtres suivants pour la saisie de texte dans votre radio :
Prdiction de texte Mot correct Majuscule en dbut de phrase Mes mots Votre radio prend en charge les mthodes de saisie de texte suivantes :
Chiffres Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct Cette option fournit d'autres choix de mots quand le mot entr dans l'diteur de texte n'est pas reconnu par le dictionnaire intgr. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 473 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour dsactiver pour 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour dsactiver pour Appuyez sur pour activer la correction orthographique. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 474 Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la correction orthographique. Si cette option est dsactive, le ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte Prdiction de texte : Votre radio peut apprendre des squences de mots courantes que vous entrez souvent. Elle peut alors prdire le prochain mot que vous dsirez utiliser aprs la saisie du premier mot d'une squence de mots courante dans l'diteur de texte. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur texte. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Prdict. pour effectuer la slection. 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour activer la prdiction de texte. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le contrle dynamique de la distorsion du microphone. Si cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus Majuscule en dbut de phrase Cette fonction met automatiquement la premire lettre du premier mot en majuscule pour chaque nouvelle phrase. 1 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou Phrase. Appuyez sur slection. pour dsactiver Maj. pour effectuer la 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur fonction est active, pour activer Maj. phrase. Si la apparat ct d'Activ. 475 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. pour dsactiver Maj. phrase. Si ne s'affiche plus Afficher des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter vos propres mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. Votre radio contient une liste de ces mots. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 1 2 3 476 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur mots. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la slection. Modifier des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez modifier les mots personnaliss enregistrs dans votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 6 7 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur mots. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. jusqu' Liste de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au mot voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 8 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier. pour effectuer la slection. 9 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 10 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'enregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. 477 Franais (Canada) Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Ajouter des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter des mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de la radio. 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. jusqu' Ajouter mot. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 7 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les 1 2 3 478 Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 8 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'enregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Supprimer un mot personnalis Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les mots personnaliss enregistrs sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 7 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mes mots. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au mot voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. 479 Franais (Canada) 8 Slectionnez un des lments suivants :
Au message Supprimer l'entre?, appuyez pour slectionner Oui. L'cran affiche sur Entre supprime. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur prcdent. ou jusqu' Non. pour revenir l'cran Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les mots personnaliss du dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 480 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Saisie texte. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 7 Faites un des suivants :
Au message Supprimer l'entre?, appuyez pour slectionner Oui. L'cran affiche sur Ttes entres supprimes. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Tickets de tche Cette fonction permet votre radio de recevoir des messages du rpartiteur dressant la liste des tches effectuer. AVIS:
Cette fonction peut tre personnalise grce au CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Il y a deux dossiers qui contiennent diffrents tickets de tche :
Le dossier Mes tches Les tickets de tche personnaliss attribus votre signature dans l'ID utilisateur. Le dossier Tches partages Les tickets de tche partags attribus un groupe de personnes. Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez rpondre aux tickets de tche afin de les classer dans les dossiers de tickets de tche. Par dfaut, les dossiers sont Tous, Nouveaux, Commencs et Termins. Pour obtenir dix autres dossiers, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:
Les tickets de tche sont conservs mme lorsque la radio est mise hors tension, puis remise sous tension. Tous les tickets de tche sont situs dans le dossier Tous. Selon la faon dont votre radio est programme, les tickets de tche sont tris par leur niveau de priorit suivi par lheure de rception. Les nouveaux tickets de tche, ceux avec les plus rcents changements l'tat et ceux avec la plus haute priorit sont affichs en premier. Lorsque le nombre maximum de tickets de tche est atteint, le prochain ticket de tche remplace automatiquement le dernier ticket de tche sur la radio. Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 100 ou 500 tickets de tche, selon le modle de radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio dtectera et annulera automatiquement les tickets de tche dupliqus qui possdent le mme ID de ticket de tche. 481 Franais (Canada) Selon l'importance du ticket de tche, le rpartiteur ajoute un niveau de priorit pour eux. Il existe trois niveaux de priorit : Priorit 1, Priorit 2 et Priorit 3. La Priorit 1 est la plus haute priorit et la Priorit 3 est la priorit la plus basse. Il existe galement des tickets de tche sans aucune priorit. Votre radio est mise jour conformment lorsque le rpartiteur effectue les changements suivants :
Modifier le contenu de tickets de tche. Ajouter ou modifier le niveau de priorit de tickets de tche. Dplacer les tickets de tche dun dossier un autre dossier. Annuler des tickets de tche. Accs au dossier Tickets de tche Suivez la procdure d'accs au dossier Tickets de tche. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. 482 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur de tche. Appuyez sur slection. pour voir les Tickets pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche pour effectuer la slection. Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant Cette fonction permet de se connecter et de se dconnecter du serveur distant en utilisant votre ID utilisateur. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 jusqu' Connexion. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Si vous tes dj connect, l'option Dconnexion s'affiche dans le menu. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Cration de tickets de tche Votre radio peut crer des tickets de tche, bass sur un modle de ticket de tche, et envoyer la liste des tches accomplir. Franais (Canada) Un logiciel de programmation CPS est ncessaire pour configurer le modle de ticket de tche. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou ticket. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Crer un pour effectuer la Rpondre des tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des tickets de tche sur votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. 483 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche pour effectuer la slection. pour accder au Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur la touche numrique correspondante (de 1 9) jusqu'
Rponse rapide. ou jusqu'au ticket de tche Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. voulu. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 484 L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer le ticket de tche. 1 Utilisez le clavier numrique pour saisir le numro de salle requis. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 Appuyez sur salle. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat de pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' loption voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Envoyer. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec plus d'un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer les tickets de tche. 1 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' loption voulue. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Envoyer. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 485 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Suppression de tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des tickets de tche de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier Tous. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 486 5 6 7 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez de nouveau sur de travail est affich. pendant que le bon jusqu' Supprimer. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Supprimer tous les tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les tickets de tche de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur tche. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au dossier Tous. ou pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 5 ou Appuyez sur supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tout pour effectuer la 6 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Non. Cryptage Cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. Sur votre radio, la fonction de cryptage doit tre active sur le canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; l'activation 487 Franais (Canada) de la fonction n'est cependant pas ncessaire la rception d'une telle transmission. Pendant qu'un canal crypt est slectionn, la radio continue d'tre en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage, ou peuvent avoir une configuration diffrente. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio prend en charge deux types de cryptage, mais un seul peut tre attribu votre radio. Ce sont les suivants :
Cryptage de base Cryptage amlior Pour dcoder un appel ou une transmission de donnes crypt, votre radio doit tre programme de manire avoir la mme cl de cryptage (cryptage de base) ou la mme valeur et le mme ID de cl (cryptage amlior) que la radio l'origine de la transmission. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant une cl de cryptage diffrente ou une valeur et un ID de cl diffrents, vous entendrez une transmission brouille
(cryptage de base) ou vous n'entendrez rien du tout
(cryptage amlior). 488 Sur un canal crypt, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des appels dbrouills, selon la faon dont votre radio est programme. En outre, votre radio peut jouer un avertissement ou non, selon la faon dont elle est programme. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et met un clignotement rapide lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction confidentialit de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Confidentialit. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Confidentialit. Appuyez sur la slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Franais (Canada) Rglages multisite Ces fonctions peuvent tre utilises lorsque votre canal de radio actuel fait partie d'une configuration Sites IP interconnects ou Capacity PlusMultisite. Lancer une recherche de site manuelle Suivez la procdure pour dmarrer la recherche de site manuelle lorsque la puissance du signal de rception est de mauvaise qualit afin d'essayer de trouver un site avec meilleur signal. Si la radio dtecte un nouveau site :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si la radio ne dtecte pas de nouveau site :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 489 Franais (Canada) Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :
Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :
Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. Accs la liste de sites voisins Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur de vrifier la liste des sites adjacents du site d'accueil actuel. Suivez la procdure pour accder la liste des sites voisins :
490 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou voisins. Appuyez sur slection. pour voir les sites pour effectuer la Scurit Cette fonction vous permet d'activer ou dsactiver n'importe quelle radio du rseau. Par exemple, vous pourriez vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de s'en servir, puis la ractiver une fois qu'elle est de nouveau en votre possession. Vous ne recevrez aucune confirmation si vous appuyez sur 4 Attendez la confirmation. Franais (Canada) pendant que le processus d'activation ou de dsactivation de la radio est en cours. AVIS:
Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Dsactivation des radios Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Dsac radio. 2 3 Appuyez sur voulu. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la 491 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur voulu.Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. ou jusqu' Dsactiver la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 492 Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :
jusqu'au Numro de la pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 5 6 7 Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Appuyez sur radio. ou jusqu' Dsactiver la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Activation des radios Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Activer la radio. 2 3 Appuyez sur voulu. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche le message Radio active ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 4 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 493 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 5 Activation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. ou pour activer la 1 2 3 4 494 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert clignote.L'cran affiche le message Radio active ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Activation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Num. jusqu' Appel indiv.. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :
Franais (Canada) 7 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert clignote.L'cran affiche le message Radio active ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. pour effectuer la 8 Attendez la confirmation. Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Appuyez sur radio. ou pour activer la Travailleur solitaire Cette fonction dclenche le mode d'urgence s'il n'y a aucun signe d'activit par l'utilisateur, tel qu'appuyer sur une quelconque touche de la radio ou activer le slecteur de canal, pendant une dure prdfinie. 495 Franais (Canada) Si aucune activit n'est dtecte pendant la dure prdfinie, la radio avertit l'utilisateur de l'expiration du dlai d'inactivit au moyen d'un signal sonore. Si l'utilisateur ne donne aucune rponse l'avertissement avant l'expiration du dlai prdfini subsquent, la radio active une alarme d'urgence. Seulement une des alarmes d'urgence suivantes est associe cette fonction :
Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal La radio demeure dans l'tat d'urgence, ce qui permet la transmission des messages vocaux, jusqu' ce qu'une action soit excute. Reportez-vous Fonctionnement d'urgence la page 447 pour en savoir plus sur les faons de quitter le mode Urgence. AVIS:
L'excution de cette fonction est limite aux radios sur lesquelles la fonction est active.Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-
vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 496 Bluetooth Cette fonctionnalit vous permet d'utiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par l'intermdiaire d'une connexion Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts l'emploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. C'est--
dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Pour obtenir un haut degr de fiabilit, Motorola Solutions recommande de ne pas sparer la radio et l'accessoire. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et l'appareil Bluetooth ( moins de 10 m l'un de l'autre) afin de rtablir la rception. La fonction Bluetooth de votre radio a une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m. Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu' trois connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Vous pouvez connecter, par exemple, un couteur, un scanneur et un Franais (Canada) appareil PTT. Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation de votre dispositif Bluetooth pour plus de dtails sur l'ensemble des possibilits de votre priphrique compatible Bluetooth. 3 ou jusqu' Mon tat. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Activ et Arrt. L'tat actuel est indiqu par l'icne
. AVIS:
Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes d'appareil Bluetooth est efface. Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth disponibles. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. 497 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Connecter. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. L'cran affiche le message Connexion
<appareil>. 4 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Recherche pour trouver des appareils disponibles. Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. pour effectuer la slection. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. ct de l'appareil slectionn. L'cran affiche En cas d'chec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. 498 AVIS:
Si un code NIP est ncessaire, voir la section Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe la page 201. Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth en mode dtection. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur radio peut maintenant tre dtecte par d'autres ou jusqu' Me chercher. pour effectuer la slection. Votre Franais (Canada) appareils Bluetooth pendant une dure programme. Il s'agit du Mode dtection. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :
Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. ct de l'appareil slectionn. L'cran affiche En cas dchec :
Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous dconnecter de dispositifs Bluetooth. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. 499 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Dconnecter. Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le message Dconnexion de
<appareil>. AVIS:
Il est possible que la dconnexion de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. Attendez la confirmation. Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <appareil> dconnect et l'icne Bluetooth connect disparat. 500 Le disparat ct du de l'appareil connect. Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour faire basculer l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Rout. audio vers radio. Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Rout. audio vers Bluetooth. Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les dtails de l'appareil sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou dtails. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Afficher les pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Appareils. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' l'appareil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dispositif supprim. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Supprimer. Supprimer le nom dun dispositif Vous pouvez retirer un dispositif dconnect de la liste des dispositifs Bluetooth. Gain du micro Bluetooth Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur de contrler la valeur du gain du microphone de l'appareil Bluetooth connect. 501 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Gain mic. BT. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu'au type de gain du Appuyez sur micro Bluetooth et aux valeurs courantes. Appuyez pour effectuer la slection. Vous pouvez sur modifier les valeurs ici. ou Appuyez sur diminuer les valeurs. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour augmenter ou pour Localisation interne AVIS:
La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Emplacement doit tre utilis pour assurer le suivi de l'emplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 3 4 5 502 b. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Bluetooth pour slectionner. c. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. d. Appuyez sur pour activer le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. e. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme. a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 503 Franais (Canada) b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :
En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. jusqu' Localis. pour Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balises, puis pour slectionner. Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder l'information des balises d'emplacement intrieur. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 504 Lcran affiche les informations sur les balises. Liste de notifications Votre radio offre une liste de notification qui rassemble tous les vnements non lus sur le canal, par exemple les messages texte, les messages de tlmtrie, les appels manqus et les avertissements d'appel. L'cran affiche l'icne Notification lorsque la liste de notification comprend au moins un vnement. La liste prend en charge au maximum quarante (40) vnements non lus. Une fois la liste pleine, le prochain vnement remplace automatiquement l'vnement le plus ancien. Une fois les vnements lus, ils sont retirs de la liste de notifications. Dans le cas de messages texte, d'appels manqus ou dvnements davertissement d'appel, le nombre maximum est de 30 messages texte et 10 appels manqus ou avertissements d'appel. Ce nombre maximum est fonction des capacits de liste de chaque fonction (tickets de tche, message texte ou appels manqus et avertissements d'appel). Accs liste de notification Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder la liste de notification sur votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Notifications. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'vnement pour effectuer la slection. Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir Systme ARTS Le systme ARTS est une fonctionnalit analogique seulement conue pour vous informer quand votre radio est en dehors de la zone de couverture des autres radios dotes du systme ARTS. Les radios dotes du systme ARTS transmettent ou reoivent priodiquement des signaux pour confirmer qu'elles se trouvent dans la zone de couverture l'une de l'autre. Votre radio fournit des indications d'tat comme suit :
Alerte initiale Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche A porte aprs l'alias du canal. Alerte ARTS dans la zone de couverture Une tonalit se fait entendre, si programme. 505 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche A porte aprs l'alias du canal. Alerte ARTS hors de la zone de couverture Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote rapidement. L'cran affiche Hors de la zone de couverture en alternance avec l'cran d'accueil. AVIS:
Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Programmation par onde radio Votre dtaillant peut mettre jour distance votre radio partir de la programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) sans connexion physique. De plus, certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs partir de la programmation par radiocommunication. Lorsque votre radio est programme par OTAP, le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lorsque votre radio reoit des donnes volume lev :
L'cran affiche l'icne Donnes volume lev. Le canal devient occup. 506 Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Lorsque l'OTAP est termine, selon la configuration :
Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Actualisation Redmarrage. La radio redmarre en se mettant hors tension puis nouveau sous tension. Vous pouvez slectionner Redmarrer maintenant ou Reporter. Lorsque vous slectionnez Reporter, votre radio revient l'cran prcdent. L'cran affiche l'icne Retardateur OTAP jusqu' ce que le dmarrage automatique se produise. Lorsque votre radio se met sous tension aprs un redmarrage automatique :
En cas de russite, l'cran affiche MJ logiciel russie. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec de la MJ logiciel. Reportez-vous Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel la page 237 pour connatre la version logicielle mise jour. Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner l'un des modes de connexion de priphriques tiers :
Motorola Solutions PC et audio Accs aux donnes Tlmtrie Gnrique 4 5 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Type cble. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu'au mode de Appuyez sur connexion voulu. Appuyez sur slection. Cet cran montre le mode de connexion slectionn. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Indicateur dintensit du signal reu Cette fonction vous permet de prendre connaissance des valeurs de l'indicateur d'intensit du signal reu (RSSI). L'cran affiche l'icne RSSI dans le coin suprieur droit. Consultez la section Icnes d'affichage pour des dtails sur l'icne RSSI. Affichage des valeurs RSSI (indicateur dintensit de rception du signal) Suivez la procdure suivant pour afficher les valeurs RSSI sur votre radio. 507 Franais (Canada) Lorsque vous tes lcran daccueil :
1 2 Appuyez trois fois sur la touche immdiatement trois fois sur la touche en 5 secondes. Lcran affiche les valeurs RSSI courantes. et appuyez
, le tout Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir Fonctions de verrouillage par mot de passe Cette fonction vous permet de restreindre l'accs la radio en demandant un mot de passe lorsqu'elle est allume. Vous pouvez utiliser un microphone clavier ou les touches de dfilement vers le haut/bas pour entrer le mot de passe. 508 Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder votre radio en utilisant un mot de passe. 1 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. AVIS:
L'utilisation de l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied permet d'accder la radio sans devoir entrer un mot de passe. Utilisez le microphone clavier. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier la valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur chiffre suivant. pour valider et passer au 2 pour saisir le mot de passe. Appuyez sur En cas de russite, la radio est mise sous tension. En cas d'chec :
Aprs la premire et seconde tentative, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron. Rptez l'tape tape 1. Si la radio est allume, patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe la page 201 pour accder la radio. Franais (Canada) Aprs une troisime tentative incorrecte, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron puis, Verrouillage radio. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. La radio se verrouille pendant 15 minutes. AVIS:
En tat de verrouillage, la radio ragit uniquement aux commandes du bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume et de la touche programme Rtroclairage. Dverrouillage de la radio Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour dverrouiller une radio verrouille. Faites un des suivants :
Si la radio est teinte, allumez-la. La radio redmarre la minuterie de verrouillage de 15 minutes. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche Radio verrouille. Patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs aux radios l'aide des mots de passe la page 201 pour accder la radio. Activation/dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le verrouillage par mot de passe de votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 509 Franais (Canada) 3 4 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur verr.. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. Utilisez le microphone clavier. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier la valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur chiffre suivant. Vous entendrez une tonalit de russite chaque fois que vous appuyez sur un chiffre. pour valider et passer au pour saisir le mot de passe. Appuyez sur Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 6 510 7 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. ct de Allumer. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Eteindre. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Eteindre. Changement de mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mot de passe sur votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur verr.. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe actuel quatre chiffres, puis pour continuer. appuyez sur Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 6 Appuyez sur MdP. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Changer le pour effectuer la slection. 7 Entrez un nouveau mot de passe quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Franais (Canada) 8 Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe quatre chiffres, pour continuer. puis appuyez sur En cas de russite, l'cran affiche Mot de passe chang. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche Mots de passe incorrects. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Configuration du panneau avant Il est possible de personnaliser certains paramtres des fonctions de Configuration du panneau avant (FPC) afin d'amliorer l'utilisation de votre radio. Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant Suivez la procdure suivante pour entrer en mode programmation partir du panneau avant de votre radio. 511 Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Programmer la pour effectuer la slection. Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC Utilisez les touches suivantes au besoin pendant la navigation dans les paramtres.
, Pour parcourir les options, augmenter ou rduire les valeurs ou naviguer verticalement. Pour slectionnez l'option ou entrer dans un sous-menu. 512 Appuyez brivement pour revenir au menu prcdent ou quitter l'cran de slection. Maintenez cette touche enfonce pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous connecter ce rseau. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:
Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. AVIS:
Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi en effectuant lune des actions suivantes. Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou Fi, puis sur appuyez sur c. Appuyez sur ou On, puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-
pour slectionner. pour choisir le Wi-Fi pour slectionner. Appuyez sur affiche pour activer le Wi-Fi. Lcran ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Licne Activ. pour dsactiver le Wi-Fi. ne saffiche plus ct du message 513 Franais (Canada) Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. AVIS:
Vous pouvez galement vous connecter un point daccs rseau partir du menu. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4 5 ou pour un point daccs Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. AVIS:
Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, si un point daccs rseau nest pas prconfigur, loption Connecter nest pas disponible. pour Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour se Connecter, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. 6 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel, entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur
. 7 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, le mot de passe est configur partir de RM. Si le mot de passe prconfigur est correct, votre radio se connecte automatiquement au point daccs rseau slectionn. 1 2 3 514 Si le mot de passe prconfigur nest pas valide, lcran affiche Authentificat. - chec et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Lorsque la connexion est russie, la radio affiche un avis et le point daccs rseau est enregistr dans la liste des profils. Si la connexion choue, la radio affiche lcran davis dchec pendant un moment et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi pour connatre l'tat de la connexion avec l'annonce vocale. L'annonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, Le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il n'y a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est dsactiv. Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, connect lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, dconnecte lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais que la radio n'est pas connecte un rseau. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:
La touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi est affecte par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Actualisation de la liste de rseaux Suivez la procdure pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour actualiser la liste de rseaux partir du menu. 515 Franais (Canada) a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-
pour slectionner c. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Quand vous entrez dans le menu Rseaux, la radio actualise automatiquement la liste des rseaux. Si vous tes dj dans le menu Rseaux, effectuez l'action suivante pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. ou pour Actualiser, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur La radio s'actualise et affiche la dernire liste de rseaux. pour slectionner. 516 Ajout dun rseau AVIS:
Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. Si un rseau prfr nest pas dans la liste de rseaux disponibles, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour ajouter un rseau. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Ajouter un pour 5 Entrez lidentifiant SSID (Service Set Identifier), puis appuyez sur
. 6 7 Appuyez sur appuyez sur pour lOuvrir, puis sur ou pour slectionner. Entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le rseau est correctement enregistr. 3 4 5 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau Vous pouvez afficher les dtails des points daccs rseau. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour un point daccs pour ou pour afficher les Appuyez sur dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. AVIS:
Lcran affiche des dtails diffrents pour les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel et Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. pour Wi-Fi WPA personnel Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche lidentifiant Service Set Identifier (SSID), le mode de scurit, ladresse Media Access Control (MAC) et ladresse Internet Protocol (IP). Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID et le mode de scurit. 517 Franais (Canada) Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP), lauthentification de phase 2, le nom du certificat, ladresse MAC, ladresse IP, la passerelle, le DNS1 et le DNS2. Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode EAP, lauthentification de phase 2 et le nom du certificat. Retrait de points daccs rseau AVIS:
Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour supprimer des points daccs rseau dans la liste de profils. 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 518 Appuyez sur ou puis sur appuyez sur pour choisir le Wi-Fi, pour slectionner. Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. pour slectionner un Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur ou pour le Supprimer, puis pour slectionner. ou pour choisir Oui, puis Appuyez sur sur appuyez sur La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le point daccs rseau slectionn est supprim avec succs. pour slectionner. Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. Niveau de silencieux Vous pouvez rgler le niveau du silencieux de la radio de manire filtrer les appels indsirables faible intensit de signal ou les canaux caractriss par un bruit de fond anormalement lev. Normal Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Serr Ce filtre limine les appels indsirables ou le bruit de fond. Cependant, les appels provenant d'emplacements distants risquent alors d'tre galement limins. AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Franais (Canada) Configuration du niveau du silencieux Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le niveau du silencieux de recherche de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Silencieux. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Silencieux. ou pour effectuer la slection. 519 Franais (Canada) 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche ou jusqu' Normal. pour effectuer la slection. ct de Normal. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Serr. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Serr. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Niveaux de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci Haut ou Bas pour chaque canal. Haute Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios considrablement loignes. Faible Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios situes proximit. 520 AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Configuration de la puissance Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la puissance de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Puissance. ou pour effectuer la slection. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Haut. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Haut. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Basse. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Basse. 6 Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et alertes, si ncessaire, l'exception de la tonalit dalerte Franais (Canada) entrante . Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries et les alertes sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur le bouton programm Sonneries/
Alertes. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la 521 Franais (Canada) 5 6 Appuyez sur ou Tnlts. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Toutes pour effectuer la pour activer ou dsactiver toutes Appuyez sur les tonalits et tous les avertissements. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 522 2 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur clavier numrique. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Tonalits du pour Appuyez sur tonalits du clavier. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
pour activer ou dsactiver les Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes Cette fonction permet de configurer le niveau sonore des sonneries et des alertes de manire ce qu'il soit plus ou moins haut que celui de la voix. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes de votre radio. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 Franais (Canada) ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou alertes. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Sonneries et pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' cart Vol. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur compensation voulu. Une tonalit se fait entendre correspondant chaque niveau de compensation de volume. jusqu'au niveau de Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 7 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le niveau d'cart de volume est enregistr. 523 4 5 6 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur sont supprims. pour quitter. Les changements Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 1 2 3 524 Appuyez sur ou Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de parler. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Autorisation pour effectuer la pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur tonalit d'autorisation de parler. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit de mise sous tension de votre radio. 5 6 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Tnlts/
pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Sous tension. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur tonalit de mise sous tension. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte Vous pouvez personnaliser la tonalit d'alerte de message texte sur Temporaire ou Rptitive pour chaque entre dans la liste de contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les sonneries d'avis de messages de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 525 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou message. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Avis de pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Temporaire. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Temporaire. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Rptitive. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct de Rptitive. 526 Changement des modes daffichage Vous pouvez changer le mode d'affichage de la radio entre le mode Jour ou mode Nuit au besoin. Ce rglage modifie la palette de couleurs de l'cran. Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mode d'affichage de la radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode d'affichage. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 2 3 4 5 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Mode Jour et Mode Nuit. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du profil slectionn. Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage Suivez la procdure de rgler la luminosit de l'affichage sur votre radio. La luminosit de lcran ne peut tre ajuste lorsque la fonction Luminosit auto est active. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Luminosit. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche une barre de progression. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' Luminosit. Appuyez sur pour augmenter ou rduire la luminosit de l'affichage. Appuyez sur ou pour effectuer la slection. La valeur du paramtre varie de 1 8. 527 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Cette fonction passe par le connecteur d'accessoire l'arrire de votre radio et doit tre installe par votre dtaillant. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. 3 4 5 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./
phares. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la 528 ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou phares. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Avert./
pour effectuer la pour activer ou dsactiver Appuyez sur l'avertisseur ou les phares. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les voyants DEL sur votre radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur DEL. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Indicateur pour effectuer la slection. pour activer ou dsactiver le Appuyez sur voyant DEL. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Franais (Canada) Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique interne (PA) de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur publique. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Diffusion pour effectuer la 529 Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur diffusion publique. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. pour activer ou dsactiver la apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique externe (PA) de votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique ext. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 2 530 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur publique externe. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. jusqu' Diffusion pour pour activer ou dsactiver la Appuyez sur diffusion publique externe. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction selon la procdure suivante. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Afficheur. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' cran intro. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer ou dsactiver l'cran Appuyez sur d'introduction. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Franais (Canada) Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Slection de la langue Suivez la procdure suivante pour choisir la langue de votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 531 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Langues. pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche jusqu' la langue pour effectuer la ct de la langue slectionne. Dterminer le type de cble Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le type de cble utilis par votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 532 3 4 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Type cble. ou pour effectuer la slection. 5 Le type de cble actuel est indiqu par l'icne
. Transmission vocale La transmission vocale (VOX) vous permet d'tablir une communication vocale en mode mains libres sur un canal programm. La radio transmet automatiquement, pendant une priode programme, ds que le microphone de l'accessoire VOX dtecte une voix. AVIS:
Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction VOX en procdant de l'une ou l'autre des manires suivantes :
teignez la radio, puis rallumez-la pour activer la fonction VOX. Changez de canal l'aide de la touche Canal prcdent/suivant pour activer la fonction VOX. Changez de canal l'aide du bouton Volume/Canal pour activer la fonction VOX. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction VOX l'aide de la touche programme VOX ou du menu. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que la radio fonctionne pour dsactiver la fonction VOX. AVIS:
L'activation ou la dsactivation de cette fonction est limite aux radios sur lesquelles la fonction associe est active. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Activation ou dsactivation de l'mission commande par la voix
(VOX) Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le VOX sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur le bouton programm VOX. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu'
VOX. Appuyez Appuyez sur fonction VOX. pour activer ou dsactiver la 533 Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Si la fonction de tonalit d'autorisation est active, utilisez un mot dclencheur pour faire l'appel. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler, puis parlez clairement dans le microphone. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler la page 218. Activation ou dsactivation de la carte d'option Les capacits de carte d'option de chaque canal peuvent tre attribues aux touches programmables. Un canal peut prendre en charge jusqu' six fonctions de carte d'option. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la carte d'option sur votre radio. Activation ou dsactivation de l'assistance parle Cette fonction permet la radio de confirmer vocalement le code ou le nom de la zone ou du canal que l'utilisateur vient d'entrer ou la touche programmable sur laquelle il vient d'appuyer. Cette option est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. L'assistance parle peut tre personnalise en fonction des exigences du client. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'assistance parle de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Carte d'option. Synthse texte-parole La fonction de synthse vocale peut tre active uniquement par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, l'Annonce vocale est automatiquement dsactive. Si cette option est active, la fonction de synthse texte-parole est automatiquement dsactive. Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre les fonctionnalits suivantes :
Canal actuel Zone actuelle 534 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de bouton programm Contenu des messages texte reus Contenu des fiches de travail reues L'indicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Cette fonction est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. 4 5 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole Suivez la procdure pour dfinir la fonction de synthse vocale. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou parle. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Assistance pour effectuer la pour n'importe laquelle pour ou Appuyez sur des fonctions suivantes. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. Voici les options disponibles :
Tout Messages Tickets de tche Canal Zone Touche de programmation L'icne s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. 535 Franais (Canada) Activer ou dsactiver le renvoi dappel automatique Vous pouvez configurer votre radio de manire ce qu'elle transfre automatiquement les appels vocaux une autre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Renvoi pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
536 Appuyez sur ou pour activer le renvoi d'appel. Si la fonction est active, ct d'Activ. apparat Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le renvoi d'appel. Si cette option est dsactive, le ou ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Rglage du dlai menu Vous pouvez rgler la dure pendant laquelle la radio affiche le menu avant de revenir automatiquement l'cran d'accueil. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le dlai menu. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Afficheur. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Dlai Menu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Activation ou dsactivation du microphone analogique Le contrle de gain automatique du microphone analogique
(CGA) permet de rguler automatiquement le gain du microphone de la radio durant la transmission sur un systme analogique. Franais (Canada) Cette fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le CGA du microphone de votre radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mic. CGA-A. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer la fonction CGA Mic. Appuyez sur analogique. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
537 Franais (Canada) Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique Le contrle de gain automatique du microphone numrique
(CGA) permet de rguler automatiquement le gain du microphone de la radio durant la transmission sur un systme numrique. Cette fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le CGA du microphone de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 538 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Mic.CGA-N. ou pour effectuer la slection. pour activer la fonction CGA Mic. Appuyez sur numrique. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :
Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le plus ct de Activ. ne s'affiche Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent Votre radio rgle automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans lenvironnement, y Franais (Canada) compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'audio intelligent sur votre radio. 4 ou Appuyez sur intelligent. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Audio pour effectuer la AVIS:
Cette fonction ne s'applique pas la technologie Bluetooth. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Activer. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la suppression de la raction acoustique lors de la rception d'appels. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique sur votre radio. 539 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection.. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur bruit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rduction pour effectuer la slection. Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration Vous pouvez activer cette fonction lorsque vous parlez une langue qui contient beaucoup de consonnes vibrantes alvolaires ( R rouls). Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Amlioration de la vibration. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur pour activer la suppression de la raction acoustique. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 2 3 Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique. Si cette option est dsactive, le Activ. ne s'affiche plus ct de 540 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 4 ou Appuyez sur de la vibration. Appuyez sur la slection. jusqu' Amlioration pour effectuer 5 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Activer. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche jusqu' Dsactiver. ou pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Ambiance audio Vous pouvez personnaliser l'ambiance audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Par dfaut Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Franais (Canada) Fort Cette configuration active la suppression du bruit et augmente le volume du haut-parleur pour une utilisation dans un environnement bruyant. Groupe de travail Cette configuration permet d'activer la rduction du bruit et de dsactiver l'AGC pour utilisation lorsqu'un groupe de radios sont proximit les unes des autres. Configuration de lambiance audio Suivez la procdure pour dfinir l'ambiance audio sur votre radio en fonction de votre environnement. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la 541 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur audio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Ambiance pour effectuer la slection. jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Les paramtres sont les suivants. Choisissez Par dfaut pour activer les paramtres d'origine par dfaut. Choisissez Fort pour augmenter le volume lorsque vous utilisez la radio dans un environnement bruyant. Choisissez Groupe travail afin de rduire la rtroaction acoustique lors de l'utilisation de la radio en combinaison avec un groupe de radios qui sont proximit de l'autre. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Profils audio Vous pouvez personnaliser les profils audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. 542 Par dfaut Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Niveau 1, niveau 2 et niveau 3 Ces paramtres sont des profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive cause par le bruit qui est typique chez les adultes dans la quarantaine, la cinquantaine, la soixantaine ou plus. Amplification des frquences aigus, moyennes et basses Ces paramtres sont prvus pour des sons plus tnus, ou nasillards, ou graves. Configuration des profils audio Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les profils audio par dfaut de votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur audio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Profils pour effectuer la slection. jusqu'au profil voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Les paramtres sont les suivants. Choisissez Par dfaut pour dsactiver le profil audio slectionn prcdemment et revenir aux paramtres par dfaut. Choisissez Niveau 1, Niveau 2 ou Niveau 3 pour les profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive due au bruit qui est habituelle pour les adultes de plus de 40 ans. Choisissez Ampli. aigus, Ampli. mdiums, ou Ampli. basses pour les profils audio qui Franais (Canada) s'alignent avec votre prfrence pour des sons plus mtalliques, plus nasillards ou plus profonds. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de positionnement global (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme de satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). Le AVIS:
Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 Effectuez une des tapes suivantes pour activer ou dsactiver le mode GNSS sur votre radio. 543 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur le bouton programm GNSS. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Passez l'tape suivante. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. ou Appuyez sur de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'au Paramtres pour effectuer la Appuyez sur sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' GNSS. Appuyez pour activer ou dsactiver le Appuyez sur GNSS. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, le ct de Activ. apparat ct ne s'affiche plus 2 3 4 5 544 Liste de rception flexible La Liste de rception flexible vous permet de crer et d'affecter des membres la liste de groupe d'appels de rception. Votre radio peut prendre en charge un maximum de 16 membres dans la liste. Cette fonction est prise en charge en mode Capacity Plus. Activer ou dsactiver la liste de rception flexible Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la liste de rception flexible. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Liste de rception flexible. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 ou Appuyez sur flexible. Appuyez sur slection. jusqu' Liste Rx pour effectuer la 3 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. ou jusqu' Activer. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. ou jusqu' Eteindre. pour effectuer la slection. Renseignements gnraux sur la radio Votre radio contient des renseignements sur diffrents paramtres. Les informations gnrales de votre radio sont les suivantes :
Alias et ID de la radio. Versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de codes. Franais (Canada) Mise jour du logiciel. Informations du systme GNSS. Information sur le site. AVIS:
Appuyez sur Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. pour revenir l'cran prcdent. pour revenir Vrification de l'alias et l'ID de la radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier l'alias et l'ID de la radio sur votre radio. 1 Faites un des suivants :
Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 545 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Mon ID. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'alias de la radio s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'ID de la radio s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' Version. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche la version actuelle du micrologiciel et celle de la fiche de code. Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier les versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de code sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 546 Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel Affiche la date et l'heure de la dernire mise jour logicielle effectue par lintermdiaire de la Programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) ou Wi-Fi. Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier les informations de mise jour du logiciel de votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' M. j. Appuyez sur logicielle. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche la date et l'heure de la dernire mise jour logicielle. pour effectuer la Le menu de mise jour logicielle est uniquement disponible aprs au moins une session OTAP ou Wi-Fi russie. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Programmation par onde radio la page 506. Franais (Canada) Consulter les informations du GNSS Affiche les informations GNSS sur votre radio, par exemple, les valeurs suivantes :
Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Vlocit Affaiblissement de la prcision horizontale (Horizontal Dilution of Precision, ou HDOP) Satellites Version 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 547 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Info GNSS. ou pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 Appuyez sur radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Info site. ou pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les informations GNSS demandes. ou pour effectuer la slection. jusqu' llment voulu. Affichage de linformation sur le site Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher le nom du site sur lequel se trouve actuellement votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusqu' Utilitaires. ou pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 548 L'cran affiche le nom du site actuel. Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise Vous pouvez afficher les dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise slectionn. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ou Appuyez sur Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. jusqu'
pour effectuer la 3 4 ou Appuyez sur Certificat. Appuyez sur slection. pour Menu pour effectuer la saffiche vis--vis des certificats prts. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur jusquau certificat voulu. ou pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio affiche les dtails complets du certificat. AVIS:
Pour les certificats non prts, lcran affiche uniquement ltat. Franais (Canada) 549 Franais (Canada) Liste des accessoires approuvs Motorola Solutions fournit une liste daccessoires pour amliorer la productivit de votre radio. Antenne VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAD4006_) VHF, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAD4007_) VHF, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAD4008_) VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAD4009_) UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4002_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4003_) UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4004_) 550 UHF, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4010_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4011_) UHF, 470 494 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4012_) UHF, 494 512 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE4013_) GPS/UHF combins, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE6019_) GPS/UHF combins, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE6020_) UHF, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE6022_) GPS/UHF combins, 470 494 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE6024_) GPS/UHF combins, 494 512 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAE6026_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAF4027_) GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAF4029_) Franais (Canada) GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAF4030_) combins GPS/VHF combins, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (RAD4214_) GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAF4032_) combins GPS/VHF combins, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (RAD4215_) GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (HAF4033_) combins GPS/VHF combins, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (RAD4216_) GPS/UHF combins, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (PMAE4030_) GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 d'onde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (PMAE4031_) GPS/VHF combins, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U (RAD4217_) GPS/VHF combins, 146 172 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (RAD4218_) GPS/UHF combins, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (PMAE4032_) UHF, 445 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (avec base) (RAE4004_RB) GPS/UHF combins, 450 -470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (PMAE4033_) GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, gain 5,0 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (PMAE4033_) Antenne GPS active fixe (PMAN4000_) Antenne GPS active monte sur fentre (PMAN4001_) Antenne GPS active fixation magntique
(PMAN4002_) GPS+RF combins, base uniquement, montage par insertion, Mini-U (PMAN4004_) UHF, 445 470 MHz, gain 5,0 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (sans base) (RAE4004_) Pour une utilisation avec base PMAN4004_ uniquement :
UHF, 494 512 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion
(HAE6027_) UHF, 470 494 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion (HAE6028_) UHF, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion (HAE6029_) 551 Franais (Canada) UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion
(HAE6030_) UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde (PMAE4039_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde (PMAE4041_) UHF, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB (PMAE4040_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB (PMAE4042_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 5,0 dB (PMAE4043_) UHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 d'onde (RAD4223_) VHF, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 d'onde (RAD4224_) VHF, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 d'onde (RAD4225_) VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 d'onde (RAD4226_) VHF, 146 172 MHz, gain 3 dB (RAD4227_) Accessoires audio Casque Bluetooth HK200 (89409N) Combin de style tlphone (HMN4098_) Oreillette de lappareil sans fil indispensable, cble de 30,5 cm (12 po) (NNTN8125_) Oreillette de lappareil sans fil indispensable, cble de 24 cm (9,5 po) (NNTN8126_) Dispositif PTT de messagerie vocale instantane sans fil indispensable (NNTN8127_) Casque sans fil non intrinsque et dispositif PTT avec audio PTT, cble de 30,5 cm (12 pouces) (NNTN8189_) Ensemble daccessoires Bluetooth, SP, cble de 24 cm
(9,5 po) (NNTN8190_) Ensemble discret sans fil, comprend deux ensembles dcouteurs 2 fils (1 noir et 1 blanc), oreillette 1 fil
(noir), et un adaptateur de 3,5 mm pour brancher nimporte quels couteurs disponibles dans le commerce (NNTN8296_) 11 Adaptateur sans fil en Y et crochet de rtention pour couteurs entirement dissimuls (NNTN8385_) 13 Oreillette pivotante ajustement flexible avec microphone sur tige (PMLN7181_) 13 Oreillette pivotante ajustement flexible avec microphone sur tige, emballage multiple
(PMLN7203_) 13 11 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires indiqus ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 552 couteurs entirement dissimuls (RLN4922_) 13 Casque robuste sans fil non scuris XBT contour doreille (RLN6490_) Casque robuste sans fil non scuris XBT (RLN6491_) Kit daccessoires Bluetooth MOTOTRBO avec bloc dalimentation AN (RLN6500_) Oreillette pivotante avec microphone en ligne pour accessoire de bouton Bluetooth, paquet de 3
(RLN6550_) 13 Microphone de bureau (RMN5050_) Microphone compact (RMN5052_) Microphone clavier IMPRES pour navigation quatre directions (RMN5127_) Microphone robuste avec audio avanc (RMN5053_) Microphone pour pare-soleil fonction audio amliore
(RMN5054_) Cbles Cble de rechange pour microphone compact
(3075336B07) Cble de rechange pour microphone clavier ou microphone robuste (3075336B10) Franais (Canada) Cble d'alimentation vers la batterie, 3 m (10 pi), 15 ampres (1 -25 watts) (HKN4137_) Cble d'alimentation vers la batterie, 3 m (10 pi), 20 ampres (1 -45 watts) (HKN4191_) Cble d'alimentation vers la batterie, 6 m (20 pi), 20 ampres (1 -45 watts) (HKN4192_) Avant mobile (MMP), cble de programmation
(HKN6184_) Cble de programmation MAP (PMKN4010_) Cble de programmation et de test MAP (PMKN4016_) Cble universel de connecteur d'accessoire arrire pour dispositif sans fil et rpteur (PMKN4018_) Cble de rallonge pour microphone sans fil, 3 m (10 pi)
(PMKN4033_) Cble de rallonge pour microphone sans fil, 6 m (20 pi)
(PMKN4034_) Cble pour support distant, 3 m (PMKN4143_) Cble pour support distant, 5 m (PMKN4144_) Cble de dtection d'allumage (RKN4136_) 553 Franais (Canada) Accessoires de bureau Cordon d'alimentation .-U. (3060665A04) Cble d'alimentation radio pour GPN6145 (GKN6266_) Plateau de bureau sans haut-parleur (GLN7318_) Bloc d'alimentation dcoupage (modles 1 25 watts)
(marqus CE) (GPN6145_) Bloc dalimentation et cble (HPN4007_) Trousse pour connecteur d'accessoire arrire
(PMLN5072_) Plateau de bureau avec haut-parleur (RSN4005_) Trousses de fixation Protecteur d'cran, clair (une unit par emballage)
(AY000269A01_) 12 Matriel de fixation pour tableau de bord (DIN)
(RLN6465_) Matriel de fixation par tourillons profil bas
(RLN6466_) Matriel de fixation par tourillons profil haut
(RLN6467_) Matriel de fixation par tourillons verrouillage
(RLN6468_) Sac tourillon bas profil (RLN6469_) Interface d'metteur-rcepteur montage distance
(PMLN6402_) Interface de tte de commande de montage distance
(PMLN6403_) Accessoires divers Protection contre les surtensions, trousse de montage sur tour (DQT1) Protection contre les surtensions, cloison de protecteur coaxial (DSISB50LNC2MA) Adaptateur d'antenne PL259/Mini-U, cble de 2,4 m
(8 pi) (HKN9557_) Pince de suspension pour microphone (tous les microphones) (HLN9073_) 12 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires indiqus ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 554 Franais (Canada) Pince de suspension universelle pour microphone (tous les microphones) (HLN9414_) Adaptateur mobile MMP IMPRES, sans PC
(PMKN4072_) Adaptateur mobile MAP IMPRES, sans PC
(PMKN4070_) Carte d'option gnrique (PMLN5718_S) Ensemble de surveillance sans fil un fil pour oprations critiques avec tube translucide
(PMLN7052_) 13 Bouton PTT (RLN5926_) Interrupteur durgence au pied (RLN5929_) Haut-parleurs Haut-parleur externe de 13 W (RSN4002_) Haut-parleur externe 7,5 W (RSN4003_) Haut-parleur externe de 5 W (RSN4004_) 13 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires indiqus ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 555 Franais (Canada) Utilisation de la radio maritime dans la gamme de frquence VHF Assignations des canaux spciaux Canal d'urgence Si vous tes expos un danger grave et imminent en mer et avez besoin d'une aide d'urgence, utilisez le canal VHF 16 pour lancer un appel de dtresse aux navires qui se trouvent proximit et la Garde ctire. Transmettez les renseignements suivants dans cet ordre :
1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 ICI _____________________, INDICATIF D'APPEL __________. Dites le nom du navire en dtresse trois fois, suivi de l'indicatif d'appel ou d'une autre identification du navire, en l'nonant trois fois. 3 Rptez MAYDAY et le nom du navire. 4 NOTRE POSITION EST _______________________. Indiquez la position du 556 navire en dtresse l'aide de renseignements qui pourraient aider les rpondants vous localiser, p. ex :
la latitude et la longitude;
le relvement (dites si vous utilisez le nord gographique ou magntique);
votre distance d'un point de repre connu;
la route, la vitesse ou la destination du navire. 5 noncez la nature de la situation de dtresse. 6 Prcisez l'aide dont vous avez besoin. 7 Indiquez le nombre de personnes bord du navire et ncessitant une assistance mdicale, le cas chant. 8 Mentionnez toute autre information pouvant tre utile aux rpondants, comme le type de navire, sa longueur ou son tonnage, la couleur de la coque, etc. 9 Termin. 10 Attendez une rponse. 11 Si vous ne recevez pas de rponse immdiate, restez prs de la radio et rptez votre transmission intervalles jusqu' ce que l'on vous rponde. Soyez prt suivre les instructions qui vous seront donnes. Canal d'appel non commercial Pour transmettre des messages non commerciaux, comme des rapports de pche, des arrangements de rendez-vous, des planifications de rparation ou des informations d'accostage, utilisez le canal VHF 9. Exigences relatives la frquence de fonctionnement Toute radio conue pour la navigation doit tre conforme la section 80 des rglements de la Commission fdrale des communications (FCC), comme suit :
sur les navires soumis la section II du titre III de la Loi sur les communications (Communications Act) des tats-Unis, la radio doit pouvoir fonctionner sur la frquence 156,800 MHz;
sur les navires soumis la Convention de scurit, la radio doit pouvoir fonctionner
- en mode simplex sur le poste du navire qui transmet les frquences prcises sur la bande de frquences 156,025 -157,425 MHz, et
- en mode semi-duplex sur les deux canaux de frquence prciss dans le tableau ci-dessous. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Les canaux simplex 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82 et 83 ne peuvent tre utiliss lgalement par le grand public dans les eaux amricaines. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements sur les exigences de fonctionnement des Services maritimes, consultez la version intgrale de la section 80 des rglements de la FCC ou communiquez avec la Garde ctire amricaine. Tableau 16: Liste des canaux de la bande maritime VHF Numro de canal 1 2
*
4 5 6 7 8 Frquence (MHz) Transmission 156,050 156,100 156,150 156,200 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 Rception 160,650 160,700 160,750 160,800 160,850 160,950 557 Franais (Canada) 9 10 11 12 13**
14 15**
16 17**
18 19 20
*
22
*
24 25 26 558 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 161,500 161,550 161,600 161,650 161,700 161,750 161,800 161,850 161,900 27 28 60
*
62 63
*
65 66 67**
68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 157,350 157,400 156,025 156,075 156,125 156,175 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725
***
***
161,950 162,000 160,625 160,675 160,725 160,775 160,825 160,875 160,925 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,575 156,675 156,725
***
***
77**
78 79 80
*
*
*
84 85 86 87 88 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425 161,525 161,575 161,625 161,675 161,725 161,775 161,825 161,875 161,925 161,975 162,025 AVIS:
*Les canaux simplex 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, et 83 ne peuvent tre utiliss lgalement par le grand public dans les eaux amricaines.
**Faible puissance (1 W) seulement.
***Bande de garde. Franais (Canada) AVIS:
Un dans la colonne Rception indique qu'il s'agit d'un canal de transmission seulement. Dclaration de conformit pour utilisation des frquences de dtresse et de scurit L'quipement radio n'utilise pas de modulation autre que la modulation adopte l'chelle internationale pour l'usage en mer sur les frquences de dtresse et de scurit spcifies dans le CNR-182 section 7.3. Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes RS232 18V USB 3,6V SB9600 5V Tension d'entre
(tension 559 Franais (Canada) crte crte) Dbit binaire maximum Impdanc e 28 kbit/s 12 Mbit/s 9,6 kbit/s 5000 ohms 90 ohms 120 ohms 560 Franais (Canada) Garantie limite PRODUITS DE COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS I. PROTECTION ASSURE PAR LA PRSENTE GARANTIE ET DURE DE CELLE-CI :
Motorola Solutions Inc. ( Motorola Solutions ) garantit les produits de tlcommunications identifis ci-dessous (le Produit ) fabriqus par Motorola Solutions contre tout dfaut de matriel ou de fabrication dans des conditions normales d'utilisation et d'entretien, pour une priode suivant la date d'achat, tel qu'il est stipul ci-dessous :
Radios numriques mobiles Accessoires des produits 24 mois 12 mois sa discrtion, Motorola Solutions rparera sans frais le produit (avec des pices neuves ou remises neuf), le remplacera (par un produit neuf ou remis neuf) ou remboursera le prix d'achat du produit durant la priode de garantie, condition que le produit soit retourn au lieu d'achat conformment aux modalits de la prsente garantie. Les pices et les cartes remplaces sont garanties pour le reste de la priode de garantie d'origine. Toute pice remplace du produit devient la proprit de Motorola Solutions. Cette garantie limite expresse est accorde par Motorola Solutions l'acheteur ou l'utilisateur final d'origine seulement, et ne peut tre ni transfre ni cde un tiers. La prsente garantie constitue la garantie complte du produit fabriqu par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions n'assume aucune obligation ni responsabilit pour quelconques ajout ou modification apports la prsente garantie, moins d'tre en prsence d'un document crit sign par un cadre suprieur de Motorola Solutions. Sauf dans le cadre d'une entente distincte conclue entre Motorola Solutions et l'acheteur ou l'utilisateur final d'origine, Motorola Solutions ne garantit pas l'installation, l'entretien, ni la rparation du produit. Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit l'gard de tout quipement ou accessoire qui n'est pas fourni par Motorola Solutions et qui est branch sur le produit ou utilis conjointement avec celui-ci, ainsi qu'
561 Franais (Canada) l'gard du fonctionnement du produit utilis conjointement avec tout quipement ou accessoire, et tous les quipements de cette nature sont expressment exclus de la prsente garantie. Compte tenu du caractre unique de chaque systme pouvant utiliser le produit, Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit l'gard de la porte, de la diffusion et du fonctionnement du systme. II. CONDITIONS GNRALES La prsente garantie prcise l'entire responsabilit de Motorola Solutions l'gard du produit. la discrtion de Motorola Solutions, la rparation du produit, son remplacement ou le remboursement de son prix d'achat constituent le seul recours. CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE EXPRESSE. TOUTES LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES, COMPRENANT, SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALIT MARCHANDE ET D'ADAPTATION UN USAGE PARTICULIER, SONT LIMITES LA PRIODE DFINIE PAR CETTE GARANTIE LIMITE. DANS LA MESURE AUTORISE PAR LA LOI, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS NE POURRA EN AUCUN CAS TRE TENUE RESPONSABLE DE DOMMAGES DONT LA VALEUR DPASSE LE PRIX D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT, NI L'GARD DES PERTES DE JOUISSANCE, DES 562 PERTES DE TEMPS, DES DRANGEMENTS, DES PERTES COMMERCIALES, DES PERTES DE PROFIT OU D'CONOMIES, NI RELATIVEMENT TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE ACCESSOIRE, SPCIAL OU INDIRECT RSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'INCAPACIT D'UTILISER CE PRODUIT. III. DROITS PRVUS PAR LES LOIS PROVINCIALES :
CERTAINES PROVINCES NE PERMETTENT AUCUNE EXCLUSION NI LIMITATION QUANT AUX DOMMAGES CONSCUTIFS OU INDIRECTS, NI AUCUNE LIMITE SUR LA DURE D'UNE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, DE SORTE QUE LES LIMITES OU EXCLUSIONS MENTIONNES PLUS HAUT PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER DANS VOTRE CAS. La prsente garantie confre des droits juridiques prcis et il est possible que vous jouissiez d'autres droits, selon votre province de rsidence. Franais (Canada) IV. ENTRETIEN COUVERT PAR LA GARANTIE Pour que la rparation soit couverte par la garantie, vous devez fournir une preuve d'achat (portant la date d'achat et le numro de srie du Produit). De plus, vous devez livrer ou expdier le Produit, en payant d'avance les frais de transport et d'assurance, un centre de service homologu. Les rparations sous garantie seront effectues par Motorola Solutions l'un de ses centres de service autoriss. Dans certains cas, il est plus facile d'obtenir les rparations couvertes par la garantie en s'adressant d'abord l'entreprise qui vous a vendu le produit (p. ex. le dtaillant ou votre fournisseur de services de tlcommunication). Vous pouvez galement appeler Motorola Solutions au numro 1 800 927-2744. V. CE QUI N'EST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE 1 Utilisation du produit autrement que dans des conditions normales et habituelles. 2 Mauvaise utilisation, accident, ngligence ou exposition des liquides. 3 Pannes ou dommages rsultants de tests, modes opratoires, maintenance, installation, modifications ou rglages inadapts. 4 Dommage ou bris des antennes, sauf si caus directement par un dfaut de fabrication ou de main-
d'uvre. 5 Un Produit soumis des modifications, des rparations ou un dmontage non autoriss (y compris, sans s'y limiter, l'ajout au Produit d'un quipement quelconque non fourni par Motorola Solutions) et qui ont un effet ngatif sur le rendement du Produit ou qui nuisent l'inspection ou l'essai normal sous garantie du Produit par Motorola Solutions en cas de rclamation. 6 Tout produit dont le numro de srie a t retir ou rendu illisible. 7 Batteries rechargeables si :
les protections tanches du botier sont brises ou prsentent des signes d'altration;
le dommage ou dfaut a t provoqu par le chargement ou l'utilisation de la batterie dans des conditions ou avec des quipements autres que celles/ceux destin (e) s au produit. 8 Cots du fret l'atelier de rparation. 563 Franais (Canada) 9 Tout produit qui, cause de modifications illgales ou interdites apportes au logiciel ou au micrologiciel du Produit, ne fonctionne pas conformment aux spcifications nonces par Motorola Solutions ou sur l'tiquette de conformit de la FCC en vigueur pour ce Produit lorsque le Produit a t initialement distribu par Motorola Solutions. 10 Les gratignures et les autres dommages superficiels qui ne nuisent pas au fonctionnement du produit. 11 L'usure et le vieillissement normaux et habituels. VI. DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX BREVETS ET AUX LOGICIELS Motorola Solutions dfendra ses frais toute poursuite mene en justice contre l'acheteur dans la mesure o la poursuite revendique que le produit ou certaines de ses pices enfreignent un brevet des tats-Unis et Motorola Solutions paiera les frais et dommages finalement accords au dtriment de l'acheteur dans toute poursuite judiciaire attribuable une quelconque revendication de cette nature, une telle dfense et un tel paiement tant soumis aux conditions suivantes :
1 Motorola Solutions doit tre rapidement notifie, par crit, d'une telle rclamation par l'acheteur;
564 2 Motorola Solutions matrisera entirement la dfense de l'action juridique et toutes les ngociations d'accord ou de compromis;
3 Si le produit ou les pices doivent ou, de l'avis de Motorola Solutions, pourraient faire l'objet d'une poursuite pour contrefaon d'un brevet amricain ou canadien, l'acheteur accordera le droit Motorola Solutions, la discrtion et aux frais de cette dernire, soit de procurer l'acheteur le droit de continuer d'utiliser le produit ou les pices, soit de remplacer ou de modifier ces derniers de manire ce qu'ils n'enfreignent plus le brevet, soit d'accorder l'acheteur un crdit quivalent la valeur dprcie du produit ou des pices et d'accepter de reprendre ceux-ci. La dprciation reprsentera un montant gal pour chaque anne de dure de vie utile du produit ou des pices, tel que dtermin par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit l'gard de toute poursuite pour contrefaon de brevet fonde sur une adaptation du produit ou des pices mentionnes dans la prsente un logiciel, un appareil ou un quipement non fourni par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions se dgage galement de toute responsabilit l'gard de tout quipement ou logiciel qui n'est pas fourni par Motorola Solutions et qui est rattach au produit ou utilis conjointement avec ce dernier. Ce qui prcde nonce l'entire responsabilit de Motorola Solutions pour la contrefaon de brevets relative au produit ou toute pice de ce dernier. Les lois au Canada, aux tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays protgent au nom de Motorola Solutions certains droits exclusifs visant les logiciels, comme ceux de reproduire des copies et de distribuer des copies desdits logiciels Motorola Solutions. Les logiciels Motorola Solutions ne peuvent tre utiliss qu'avec les produits l'intrieur desquels ils taient installs l'origine. Il est interdit de remplacer, de copier, de distribuer, de modifier d'aucune faon et d'utiliser le logiciel l'intrieur du produit en vue de fabriquer un quelconque produit driv. Aucune autre utilisation, y compris, sans s'y limiter, l'altration, la modification, la reproduction, la distribution ou l'ingnierie rebours, d'un quelconque logiciel Motorola Solutions n'est permise. Aucune licence n'est accorde pour infrence, estoppel ou autre en vertu des droits de brevets ou des droits d'auteur de Motorola Solutions ou de tiers. VII. LOI APPLICABLE Cette garantie est rgie par les lois de l'tat de l'Illinois, .-
U. Franais (Canada) 565 www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo Motorola Solutions, Inc. 500 W Monroe Street Chicago, IL 60661 U.S.A. Printed in U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
1 2 3 4 | User Manual II | Users Manual | 276.70 KiB | January 30 2019 |
en-US fr-CA es-LA pt-BR RF Energy ExposureTraining and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations Formation sur lexposition aux RF et information sur la scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes dans des vhicules ou comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Capacitacin sobre la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia e informacin de proteccin del producto para radios de dos vas mviles instalados en vehculos o como estaciones de control fijas Treinamento sobre a Exposio Energia de RF e Informaes de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis Bidirecionais Instalados em Veculos ou como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo English Caution Before using this radio, read this booklet which contains important operating instructions. For information on product details, brochures, user manuals and approved accessories. Please refer to www.motorolasolutions.com. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards National and international regulations require manufacturers to comply with the RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed. Your Motorola Solutions two-way radio is designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with all applicable national and international regulations for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, applicable regulations may require users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use Notice: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users are aware of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the requirements in national and international regulations. This radio device is not authorized for general population, consumer use. For more information on what RF energy exposure is, and how to control your exposure to ensure compliance with established RF exposure limits, consult the following websites:
https://www.fcc.gov/
https://www.osha.gov/
https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/
For additional user training information on exposure requirements, consult the following websites:
https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-
responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-
faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/
RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines To control exposure to yourself and others, and to ensure compliance with the relevant RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following guidelines:
1 English Do not remove any of the RF Exposure Labels if present from this device or its related accessories. Attach these instructions to the device when you transfer it to other users. Do not use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. Operating Instructions Transmit no more than 50% of the time. To transmit (talk), press the Push-To-
Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. Transmitting more than 50% of the time may cause RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. Transmit only when people (bystanders) outside the vehicle are at least at the recommended minimum lateral distance (as shown in Tables 1 and 2) away from the vehicle body. This separation will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed (according to the installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the relevant RF exposure limits. To ensure continued compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and accessories. For a list of Motorola Solutions approved accessories please refer to your user manual or visit www.motorolasolutions.com Table 1 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed single-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for single-band radios, depend on the radio rated power. Table 1: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Single-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Single-Band Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Notice) Minimum Lateral Distance of By-
standers from Vehicle Body Less than 7 W 7 to 14 W 15 to 39 W 40 to 110 W 8 in. (20 cm) 1 ft (30 cm) 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Notice: If you are not sure of the rated power of your single-band radio, contact your Motorola Solutions representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you cannot 2 English determine the rated power, then assure 3 ft (90 cm) separation for bystanders from the body of the vehicle. Table 2 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed multi-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for multi-band radios, depend on whether the radio is installed on a motorcycle, or on other kinds of vehicles. Table 2: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Multi-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Type of Vehicle Motorcycle Other vehicles Minimum Lateral Distance of By-
standers from Vehicle Body 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines Make sure to follow the antenna installation guidelines that are provided in this mobile radio installation manual. Use only Motorola Solutions approved supplied antenna, or a Motorola Solutions approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed and operated at a fixed location, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with applicable RF exposure limits. The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure compliance with RF exposure limits. 3 English Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility Notice: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed sites equipped with mobile radio equipment is susceptible to the RF energy emitted by the mobile radio antenna, and if any measures need to be implemented to eliminate or mitigate the potential for EMI between the radio transmitter and the electronic equipment. Vehicles To avoid possible interference between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission control modules, your mobile radio should be installed only by an experienced installer, using the following precautions when installing the radio:
1 Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2 Before installing the radio, determine the location of the vehicle electronic control modules and their harnesses within the vehicle. 3 Route all radio wiring, including the antenna cable, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated harnesses. Operational Warnings The following explains the operational warnings:
For Vehicle With Air Bags Warning:
Refer to vehicle manufacturers manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Warning:
Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a potentially explosive atmosphere could result in a serious injury or death. You should only 4 English use a certified Intrinsically Safe radio in potentially explosive atmospheres. Explosive atmospheres refer to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, dusts, such as fueling areas below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transferor storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a radio type specifically certified for use in hazardous location areas. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas, or remove or install antennas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas Warning: To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Batteries If your mobile radio is equipped with a primary or backup battery, you must follow these instructions:
Charge your battery using the approved Motorola Solutions charger. Use the battery in accordance with its water and/or dust Ingress Protection (IP) rating. Do not discard your battery into a fire. Do not replace the battery in any area labeled "Hazardous Atmosphere". Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source, such as a hair dryer or microwave oven. Do not allow conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains to touch exposed battery terminals. European Union(EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package 5 English in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 6 Portugus (Brasil) Ateno Antes de usar o rdio, leia este folheto, que contm importantes instrues de operao. Para obter informaes sobre detalhes do produto, folhetos, manuais do usurio e acessrios aprovados. Consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF Os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais exigem que os fabricantes estejam em conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF para rdios mveis bidirecionais antes de serem comercializados. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola Solutions foi projetado, fabricado e testado para estar em conformidade com todos os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, os regulamentos aplicveis podem exigir que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio Energia de RF e Instrues Operacionais para o Uso Ocupacional Comunicado: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/
controladas, em que os usurios estejam cientes de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre ela, para atender aos requisitos nos regulamentos nacionais e internacionais. O uso do dispositivo de rdio pela populao em geral no autorizado. Para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos, acesse os seguintes sites:
https://www.fcc.gov/
https://www.osha.gov/
https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/
Para informaes adicionais de treinamento sobre os requisitos de exposio, acesse os seguintes sites:
https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-
responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-
faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/
1 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF Para controlar a exposio para si e demais pessoas, e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF em questo, sempre siga estas diretrizes:
No remova as Etiquetas de Exposio RF, se houverem, do dispositivo ou acessrios relacionados. Anexe essas instrues ao dispositivo quando o transferir a outros usurios. No use este dispositivo se os requisitos operacionais descritos aqui no forem atendidos. Instrues Operacionais Transmita, no mximo, 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Transmitir mais de 50% do tempo pode fazer que os requisitos de conformidade de exposio RF sejam excedidos. Transmita somente quando as pessoas (observadores) fora do veculo estiverem, pelo menos, distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme exibido na Tabela 1 e 2) da carroceria de um veculo. Essa separao garantir que haja distncia suficiente de uma antena externa adequadamente instalada
(de acordo com as instrues de instalao) para atender aos limites de exposio RF em questo. Para garantir constantemente a conformidade com os limites aplicveis de exposio RF, use apenas antenas, baterias e acessrios de reposio aprovados ou fornecidos pela Motorola Solutions. Para obter uma lista dos acessrios aprovados pela Motorola Solutions, consulte o manual do usurio ou acesse www.motorolasolutions.com A Tabela 1 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de banda nica aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncia laterais, para rdios de banda nica, dependem da potncia nominal do rdio. Tabela 1: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Banda nica Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada da Carroceria do Veculo Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo Inferior a 7 W 20 cm (8 polegadas) 2 Portugus (Brasil) Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 7 a 14 W 15 a 39 W 40 a 110 W 30 cm (1 p) 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Comunicado: Se voc no tiver certeza da potncia nominal do seu rdio de banda nica, entre em contato com o representante ou o fornecedor da Motorola Solutions e fornea o nmero do modelo encontrado na etiqueta de modelo do rdio. Se voc no conseguir determinar a potncia nominal, garanta uma separao de 90 cm (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. A Tabela 2 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de vrias bandas aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncias laterais, para rdios de vrias bandas, dependem se o rdio est instalado em uma motocicleta ou em outros tipos de veculos. Tabela 2: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Vrias Bandas Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada do da Carroceria do Veculo Tipo de Veculo Motocicleta Outros veculos Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Diretrizes de Instalao da Antena Mvel No deixe de seguir as diretrizes de instalao da antena fornecidas neste manual de instalao do rdio mvel. Use somente antenas aprovadas, fornecidas ou de reposio aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no autorizados podem danificar o rdio e resultar em no conformidade com os Padres de Segurana de RF. 3 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes e Instrues de Operao para Rdios Mveis Bidirecionais Instalados como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo Se o equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado e operado em um local fixo, a instalao da antena dever seguir estes requisitos para garantir o desempenho ideal e o cumprimento dos limites de exposio energia de RF. A antena deve ser instalada fora do prdio, no teto ou em uma torre, se possvel. Assim como ocorre com todas as instalaes de antena em site fixo, de responsabilidade do licenciado gerenciar o site de acordo com os requisitos regulamentares. Aes adicionais, como medidas de inspeo do site, sinalizao, e restrio de acesso ao site podem ser necessrias a fim de garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF. Interferncia/Compatibilidade Eletromagntica Comunicado: Quase todo dispositivo eletrnico suscetvel interferncia eletromagntica (EMI) quando blindado, projetado ou de alguma forma configurado inadequadamente para compatibilidade eletromagntica. Pode ser necessrio realizar testes de compatibilidade para determinar se qualquer equipamento eletrnico usado em veculos, ao seu redor, ou prximo a sites fixos suscetvel energia de RF emitida pela antena do rdio mvel e se necessrio que medidas sejam implementadas para eliminar ou diminuir o potencial de EMI (Interferncia Eletromagntica) entre o transmissor de rdio e o equipamento eletrnico. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interferncia entre o transmissor de rdio e quaisquer mdulos de controle eletrnico de veculos, como ABS, motor ou de controle da transmisso, o rdio mvel dever ser instalado apenas por um profissional experiente, observando-se as precaues a seguir durante a instalao do rdio:
1 Consulte as instrues do fabricante ou outros boletins tcnicos para obter recomendaes sobre a instalao do rdio. 2 Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e sua fiao eltrica no veculo. 3 Direcione a fiao do rdio, incluindo o cabo da antena, o mais distante possvel de unidades de controle eletrnico e dos chicotes associados. Avisos Operacionais A seguir so explicados os avisos operacionais:
4 Portugus (Brasil) Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bags Aviso:
Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag ou sobre a rea de expanso dos air bags. Os air bags inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio estiver colocado na rea de abertura do air bag e ele inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar graves ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos Aviso:
O uso de um rdio que no intrinsecamente seguro em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo poder resultar em danos graves e at em morte. Voc deve usar apenas rdios Intrinsecamente Seguros certificados em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos, como reas de abastecimento embaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustvel e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em qualquer rea com ambientes potencialmente explosivos, a menos que o tipo de rdio seja especificamente certificado para utilizao em reas de risco. NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas, nem remova ou instale antenas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e, at mesmo, morte. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Aviso: Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: Desligue rdios bidirecionais. Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 5 Portugus (Brasil) Baterias Se o seu rdio mvel estiver equipado com uma bateria principal ou de reserva, voc deve seguir estas instrues:
Sempre carregue a bateria usando o carregador aprovado pela Motorola Solutions. Use a bateria de acordo com sua classificao de Proteo contra entrada (IP) de p e gua. No descarte a bateria no fogo. No troque a bateria em lugares identificados como "Atmosferas Potencialmente Perigosas". No desmonte, comprima, perfure, fragmente nem tente alterar de outra maneira a forma da bateria. No seque baterias molhadas nem midas usando aparelhos ou fontes de calor, como secadores de cabelo ou fornos de micro-ondas. No permita que materiais condutores como joias, chaves ou correntes toquem os terminais expostos da bateria. Diretiva de Resduos de Equipamentos Eltricos e Eletrnicos
(WEEE) para a Unio Europeia (UE) A Diretiva de WEEE da Unio Europeia exige que os produtos vendidos nos pases da UE tenham a etiqueta de lixeira riscada no produto (ou no pacote, em alguns casos). Conforme definido pela diretiva WEEE, essa etiqueta de lixeira cruzada indica que os clientes e os usurios nos pases da UE no devem descartar equipamentos ou acessrios eltricos ou eletrnicos em lixo domstico. Os clientes ou os usurios nos pases da UE devem entrar em contato com o representante local do fornecedor do equipamento ou com a central de servios para obter informaes sobre o sistema de coleta de lixo em seu pas. 6 Franais (Canada) Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez cette brochure qui contient d'importantes consignes d'utilisation. Pour obtenir plus dinformation sur les dtails du produit, les brochures, les manuels et les accessoires approuvs : Veuillez vous reporter www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Les rglementations nationales et internationales noncent que les fabricants de radios bidirectionnelles mobiles doivent sassurer que celles-ci sont conformes aux limites dexposition l'nergie RF avant de les commercialiser. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola Solutions a t conue, fabrique et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes nationales et internationales lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la rglementation en vigueur exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Information de sensibilisation et de gestion de l'exposition l'nergie RF, et consignes pour l'usage professionnel Avis: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par les rglements nationaux et internationaux. Ce dispositif radio n'est pas autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences. https://www.fcc.gov/
https://www.osha.gov/
https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/
Pour plus de renseignements sur la formation des utilisateurs relativement aux limites d'exposition, consultez les sites suivants :
https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-
responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-
faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/
1 Franais (Canada) Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF Pour contrler votre exposition ainsi que celle des autres personnes et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, observez toujours les consignes suivantes :
Ne pas retirer les tiquettes relatives l'exposition aux RF qui sont apposes sur cet appareil ou sur ses accessoires. Joignez ces directives l'appareil lorsque vous le transfrez d'autres utilisateurs. N'utilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites aux prsentes ne sont pas runies. Consignes dutilisation Ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton Push-to-talk (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton PTT. Le fait de transmettre plus de 50 % du temps peut entraner le dpassement de la limite dexposition normalise au rayonnement RF. Transmettez seulement lorsque les personnes (les passants) lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (comme illustr dans les tableaux 1 et 2) de la carrosserie du vhicule. Cet cart constitue une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences applicables en matire dexposition lnergie RF. Pour assurer la conformit continue avec les limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, utilisez uniquement les antennes, les batteries et les accessoires de remplacement ou fournis et approuvs par Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions, veuillez consulter votre manuel ou visitez le site www.motorolasolutions.com Le Tableau 1 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio monobande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio monobande, dpendent de la puissance nominale de la radio. 2 Franais (Canada) Tableau 1: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande (voir avis) Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Moins de 7 W 7 - 14 W 15 - 39 W 40 - 110 W 20 cm (8 po) 30 cm (1 pi) 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Avis: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio monobande, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola Solutions et indiquez-lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de la radio. Si vous ne pouvez pas dterminer la puissance nominale, conservez une distance de sparation de 90 cm (3 pi) entre les passants et la carrosserie du vhicule. Le Tableau 2 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio multibande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio multibande, varient selon que la radio est installe sur une moto ou sur dautres types de vhicules. Tableau 2: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile multibande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Type de vhicule Motocyclette Autres vhicules. Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Consignes d'installation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Veillez suivre les directives d'installation de l'antenne qui sont fournies dans le manuel d'installation de cette radio mobile. 3 Franais (Canada) Utilisez uniquement l'antenne agre fournie par Motorola Solutions ou une antenne de rechange agre par Motorola Solutions. L'utilisation d'antennes ou d'accessoires non agrs, ainsi que les modifications non agres peuvent endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire d'nergie de RF. Directives et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Si de l'quipement de radio mobile est install et utilis dans un emplacement fixe, l'installation de l'antenne doit satisfaire aux exigences suivantes afin d'assurer un rendement optimal et la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. L'antenne devrait tre monte l'extrieur de l'difice sur le toit ou sur une tour, si possible. Comme pour toutes les installations d'antennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir l'emplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Les actions telles que les mesures de propagation, la signalisation et les restrictions d'accs l'emplacement peuvent tre ncessaires afin de garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux radiofrquences. Interfrence/compatibilit lectromagntique Avis: La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles l'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) s'ils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou s'ils ne sont pas conus ou configurs afin d'tre compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Il se peut que des tests de compatibilit soient ncessaires afin de dterminer si l'un des appareils lectroniques utiliss l'intrieur ou proximit des vhicules ou prs demplacements fixes quips l'quipement radio mobile est sensible l'nergie de RF mise lantenne de radio mobile, et s'il faut prendre des mesures quelconques pour liminer ou attnuer le risque d'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) entre la radio mettrice et l'appareil lectronique. Vhicules Afin d'viter une ventuelle interfrence entre la radio mettrice et l'un des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule, comme le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou les modules de contrle de la transmission, il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser l'installation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :
1 Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour l'installation de la radio. 4 Franais (Canada) 2 Avant d'installer la radio, dterminez l'emplacement des modules de commande lectronique du vhicule et leurs points d'ancrage lintrieur de celui-ci. 3 Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris le cble de l'antenne, le plus loin possible des units de commande lectronique et de leurs points dancrage. Avertissements de fonctionnement Le tableau suivant explique les avertissements de fonctionnement :
Pour vhicules quips de coussins gonflables Avertissement:
Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE MONTEZ PAS ET NE PLACEZ PAS de radio mobile dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac, lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives Avertissement:
L'utilisation d'une radio autre qu'une radio scurit intrinsque dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive est susceptible d'entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Vous ne devez pas utiliser de radio de scurit intrinsque agre dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives. On retrouve des atmosphres explosives dans les lieux classs comme tant dangereux en raison de la prsence de gaz, de vapeurs et de poussires reprsentant un danger, par exemple, les zones d'avitaillement en carburant dans des cales de bateau, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques, et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. teignez la radio avant d'accder un lieu prsentant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, moins qu'il s'agisse d'un type de radio certifi spcifiquement pour une utilisation dans des zones dangereuses. 5 Franais (Canada) VITEZ d'enlever, d'installer ou de charger les batteries, ou d'enlever ou d'installer des antennes dans de tels lieux. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Zone de dynamitage et dtonateurs Avertissement: teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin dviter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. Batteries Si votre radio mobile est dote dune batterie principale ou de secours, vous devez suivre ces instructions :
Chargez votre batterie l'aide du chargeur approuv par Motorola Solutions. Utilisez la batterie conformment son indice de protection (IP) contre l'eau et la poussire. Ne jetez pas votre batterie au feu. Ne remplacez pas la batterie dans un endroit qui porte la mention atmosphre dangereuse . Veillez ne pas dmonter, craser, percer, dcouper ou autrement modifier la forme de votre batterie. Ne faites pas scher une batterie mouille ou humide avec un appareil lectrique ou une source de chaleur, comme un schoir cheveux ou un four micro-
ondes. Ne permettez pas des matriaux conducteurs, comme des bijoux, des cls ou des mailles de chane dentrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de l'Union europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de l'Union europenne exige que les produits vendus dans les pays de l'UE portent l'tiquette de la poubelle barre (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas). Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de l'UE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de l'UE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur 6 fournisseur d'quipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. Franais (Canada) 7 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Precaucin Antes de usar este radio, lea el folleto que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes. Para obtener informacin sobre los detalles del producto, folletos, manuales de usuario y accesorios aprobados, consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidad con las normas sobre exposicin a la radiofrecuencia Las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales obligan a que los fabricantes cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia para radios porttiles de dos vas antes de que se puedan comercializar. El radio de dos vas Motorola Solutions est diseado, fabricado y probado para cumplir con todas las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales correspondientes en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, las regulaciones correspondientes podran exigir que los usuarios conozcan y controlen su nivel de exposicin para cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. Conocimiento de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia, informacin de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso ocupacional Nota: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlarla con el fin de cumplir con los requisitos de las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio no est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el significado de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia y cmo controlar la exposicin con el fin de asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias establecidos, consulte los siguientes sitios web:
https://www.fcc.gov/
https://www.osha.gov/
https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/
Para obtener informacin adicional de la capacitacin de los usuarios sobre los requisitos de exposicin, consulte los siguientes sitios web:
https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-
responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-
faqs.html 1 Espaol (Latinoamrica) http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/
Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia y pautas de control Para controlar el nivel de exposicin a la que usted y otros estn expuestos y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias correspondientes, respete siempre las siguientes pautas:
No retire ninguna de las etiquetas de exposicin a radiofrecuencias, si las hubiere, de este dispositivo o sus accesorios respectivos. Adjunte estas instrucciones al dispositivo cuando se lo transfiera a otros usuarios. No utilice este dispositivo si no se cumple con los requisitos de funcionamiento descritos en este documento. Instrucciones de funcionamiento No transmita ms de un 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push to Talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Una transmisin superior al 50 % del tiempo de uso podra provocar que se superen los requisitos de cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Realice transmisiones solo cuando las personas (transentes) que estn fuera del vehculo se encuentren, por lo menos, a la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (segn se indica en las Tablas 1 y 2) del vehculo. Con esta separacin se garantiza que haya una distancia suficiente entre una antena instalada correctamente en el exterior (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes. Para garantizar el cumplimiento continuo de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes, utilice solamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de repuesto suministrados o aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola Solutions, consulte el manual del usuario o visite www.motorolasolutions.com. En la Tabla 1 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil de banda nica y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios de banda nica, dependen de la potencia nominal del radio. 2 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Tabla 1: Potencia nominal del radio mvil de banda nica instalada en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Potencia nominal de radio mvil de banda nica (consulte Aviso) Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo Menor que 7 W De 7 a 14 W De 15 a 39 W De 40 a 110 W 8 pulg. (20 cm) 1 pie (30 cm) 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Nota: Si no est seguro de la potencia nominal del radio de banda nica, contctese con un representante, distribuidor o proveedor de Motorola Solutions e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que figura en la etiqueta. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal, asegrese de establecer una separacin de 3 pies (90 cm) entre los transentes y el vehculo. En la Tabla 2 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil multibanda y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios multibanda, dependen de si el radio est instalado en una motocicleta o en otro tipo de vehculos. Tabla 2: Potencia nominal del radio mvil multibanda instalado en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Tipo de vehculo Motocicleta Otros vehculos Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Pautas de instalacin de la antena mvil Asegrese de seguir las pautas de instalacin de la antena incluidas en el manual de instalacin de este radio mvil. Use nicamente antenas suministradas y aprobadas por Motorola Solutions o una antena de repuesto aprobada por Motorola Solutions. Las antenas, las modificaciones o los agregados no autorizados podran daar el radio y causar el incumplimiento con los estndares de seguridad de RF. 3 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Pautas de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios mviles de dos vas instalados en estaciones de control fijas Si el equipo de radio mvil se instala y utiliza en una ubicacin fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos para garantizar el rendimiento ptimo y el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia correspondientes. La antena debe instalarse en el exterior de los edificios, en el techo o en una torre de ser posible. Al igual que en todas las instalaciones de antena en sitios fijos, la administracin del sitio, conforme a los requisitos normativos correspondientes, es responsabilidad del titular de la licencia. Es posible que sea necesario realizar acciones como inspeccionar el sitio, instalar sistemas de sealizacin y restricciones de acceso al sitio para garantizar el cumplimiento con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Interferencia y compatibilidad electromagntica Nota: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a las interferencias electromagnticas (EMI) si no cuentan con la debida proteccin o si no estn diseados o configurados para ser compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Es posible que sea necesario realizar pruebas de compatibilidad para determinar si algn equipo electrnico utilizado en vehculos, cerca de estos o de sitios fijos que cuenten con equipo de radio mvil es sensible a la energa de radiofrecuencia que emite la antena del radio mvil, y si es necesario implementar cualquiera de las medidas para eliminar o mitigar el potencial de EMI entre el transmisor del radio y el equipo electrnico. Vehculos Para evitar posibles interferencias entre el transmisor del radio y cualquier mdulo de control electrnico de un vehculo, como sistemas de frenado antibloqueo, motor o mdulos de control de transmisin, la instalacin del radio mvil debe ser responsabilidad de una sola persona con experiencia y que tome las siguientes precauciones durante la instalacin:
1 Consulte las pautas del fabricante u otros boletines tcnicos para ver las recomendaciones a la hora de instalar el radio. 2 Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y el cableado dentro del vehculo. 3 Enrute todo el cableado del radio, incluido el cable de la antena, lo ms alejado posible de las unidades de control electrnicas y el cableado asociado. 4 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Advertencias de funcionamiento A continuacin, se explican las advertencias de funcionamiento:
Para vehculos con airbags Advertencia:
Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos para evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO instale ni ubique el radio mvil en el rea que se encuentra encima de la bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas Advertencia:
El uso de un radio que no sea intrnsecamente seguro en una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. En atmsferas potencialmente explosivas, debe utilizar solamente un radio intrnsecamente seguro certificado. El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos en los que podra haber gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos, como reas con combustibles bajo las cubiertas de los botes o instalaciones de almacenamiento o transferencia de qumicos, y reas en que el aire contenga productos qumicos o partculas, como material granulado, polvo o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Apague el radio antes de ingresar a cualquier rea que posea una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que se trate de un tipo de radio certificado especficamente para ser usado en zonas de ubicaciones peligrosas. NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras, ni tampoco retire o instale antenas en dichas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. 5 Espaol (Latinoamrica) reas de voladuras y explosivos Advertencia: Para evitar posibles interferencias con operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de zonas de voladuras elctricas, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Bateras Si el radio mvil cuenta con una batera principal o de reserva, deber seguir estas instrucciones:
Cargue la batera con cargadores aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Utilice la batera de acuerdo con su clasificacin de proteccin de ingreso (IP) contra polvo y agua. No arroje la batera al fuego. No cambie la batera en un rea designada como Atmsfera peligrosa. No desarme, rompa, perfore, triture ni intente cambiar de ningn otro modo la forma de la batera. No intente secar una batera mojada o hmeda con un electrodomstico o una fuente de calor externa, como un secador de pelo o un horno microondas. No permita que materiales conductores como joyas, llaves o cadenas hagan contacto con los terminales expuestos de la batera. Directiva de Residuos de Aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos
(RAEE) de la Unin Europea (UE) La Directiva RAEE de la Unin Europea requiere que los productos que se venden en los pases de la UE tengan la etiqueta de un bote de residuos tachado sobre el producto (o en el paquete, en algunos casos). Como define la directiva RAEE, esta etiqueta con un bote de basura tachado indica que los clientes y los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE no deben deshacerse de los equipos o accesorios elctricos y electrnicos con la basura domstica. Los clientes o los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE deben ponerse en contacto con su representante distribuidor de equipos o el centro de servicio locales para obtener informacin sobre el sistema de recoleccin de residuos de su pas. 6 MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 and 2017 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in
*NNTN7851E*
NNTN7851E
*6881095C99*
6881095C99-KA
1 2 3 4 | User Manual III | Users Manual | 2.93 MiB | January 30 2019 |
PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO SYSTEM MOTOTRBO MOBILE XPR 4000/5000/5000e SERIES INSTALLATION GUIDE 0 Foreword This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment. Specifically, it contains installation information required for the XPR Series Mobile Radios. For information related to the service of the XPR Series Mobile Radios, refer to Related Publications on page v for the list of applicable manuals available separately. Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance See Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards on page ii. Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in PMRs (Publication Manual Revisions). These PMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added, changed, and deleted items. To obtain PMRs, go to:
https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com Parts Ordering See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering for information on how to obtain replacement parts. For part numbers, refer to the service manuals listed in Related Publications on page v. Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2006 2015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!
This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Safety Standards:
Install only Motorola approved antennas and accessories. Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation on page 2-12 of this manual. Be sure that Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio. Before using this product, the operator must be familiar with the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with each radio (Motorola publication part number 6881095C99_) to ensure compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) energy exposure limits.
!
!
W A R N I N G For radios installed in vehicles fuelled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. This radio has a transmitter Time-out Timer that disables the transmitter during a transmission after a pre-
defined time period, which by default is set to 60 seconds. It is recommended NOT to change the default 60 seconds time period for the Time-out Timer as the radio is intended for intermittent duty cycle operation. C a u t i o n For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following web site, which lists approved accessories for your radio model:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com ii Table of Contents Table of Contents iii Foreword ..........................................................................................................i Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance .............................................................................................i Manual Revisions .........................................................................................................................................i Parts Ordering ..............................................................................................................................................i Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i Document Copyrights ...................................................................................................................................i Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards .......................ii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme....................................................vi Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................vii Limited Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... vii MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS ............................................................................... vii I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long..................................................................... vii II. General Provisions ................................................................................................................ vii III. State Law Rights ................................................................................................................. viii IV. How to Get Warranty Service ............................................................................................. viii V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover................................................................................... viii VI. Patent and Software Provisions............................................................................................ix VII. Governing Law.....................................................................................................................ix Chapter 1 Introduction ......................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Mobile Radio Description............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Connections on the Back of the Radio ............................................................................. 1-4 1.2 Standard Configurations ................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration ........................................................................................... 1-5 1.3 Base/Control Stations .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Chapter 2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations ............. 2-1 2.2.2 2.1 Planning the Installation................................................................................................................. 2-1 Tools Required for Installation .......................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 2.1.2 Installation Example.......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2 Radio Mounting ............................................................................................................................ 2-4 Locking Kit (Optional) ....................................................................................................... 2-7 2.2.2.1 All Radios................................................................................................................. 2-7 2.2.3 DIN Mount......................................................................................................................... 2-7 To install the frame into the dashboard ................................................................... 2-7 To Mount the radio in the frame............................................................................... 2-8 To Remove the radio from the frame....................................................................... 2-9 2.2.4 Remote Mount with Trunnion............................................................................................ 2-9 2.3 Power Cable .................................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 iv 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.4 Ignition Sense Cable.................................................................................................................... 2-12 2.5 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-12 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle ........................................ 2-12 Antenna Installation Procedure....................................................................................... 2-13 Antenna Connection ....................................................................................................... 2-14 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip ........................................................................................................... 2-15 Standard Hang-Up Clip................................................................................................... 2-15 2.7 Completing the Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-15 2.6.1 Chapter 3 Options and Accessories Installation ............................... 3-1 3.1 Accessory Installation .................................................................................................................... 3-1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation ............................................................ 3-3 3.1.1 3.1.2 Horn and Lights (External Alarm) Relay ........................................................................... 3-4 3.1.3 External Speaker ............................................................................................................. 3-5 Chapter 4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting................ 4-1 4.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing ..................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring................................... 4-2 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines...................................................... 4-2 4.3 4.4 Jump-Start the Vehicle .................................................................................................................. 4-3 4.5 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker.................................................................................... 4-3 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering ............................................. A-1 A.1 Basic Ordering Information ............................................................................................................A-1 A.2 Motorola Online .............................................................................................................................A-1 Appendix B Motorola Service Centers .................................................. B-1 B.1 Servicing Information .....................................................................................................................B-1 B.2 Motorola Solutions de Mxico, S.A. ..............................................................................................B-1 B.3 Motorola Solutions de Colombia, Ltd. ...........................................................................................B-1 B.4 Motorola Solutions Brazil, Ltd. ......................................................................................................B-1 Index .....................................................................................................Index-1 List of Figures List of Figures v Figure 1-1 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBO DGM 4100/6100 Series .................... 1-2 Figure 1-2 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBODGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series 1-2 Figure 1-3 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO DGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series............................................................. 1-3 Figure 1-4 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO DGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series............................................................. 1-3 Figure 1-5 Back View of the Mobile Radio ............................................................................................. 1-4 Figure 1-6 Dash Mount Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-7 Example of a Base/Control Station Configuration ................................................................. 1-6 Figure 2-1 Typical Dash Mount Configuration ........................................................................................ 2-1 Figure 2-2 Typical Remote Mount Configurations .................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3 Radio Installation (Dash Mount)............................................................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-4 Radio Installation (Remote Mount) ....................................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5 Trunnion Orientation for Above or Below Mobile .................................................................. 2-5 Figure 2-6 Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-7 Below Dash Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................................ 2-6 Figure 2-8 Locking Kit (Optional)............................................................................................................ 2-7 Figure 2-9 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO DGM 4100/6100 Series ........................................... 2-8 Figure 2-10 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO DGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series ..................... 2-8 Figure 2-11 Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount................................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-12 Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount............................................................... 2-11 Figure 2-13 Antenna connections on the back of the radio.................................................................... 2-13 Figure 2-14 Mini-UHF Connection ......................................................................................................... 2-14 Figure 3-1 Location of the Rear Accessory Connector .......................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-2 Pin Configuration of Rear Accessory Connector (as viewed from the rear of the radio) ...... 3-2 Figure 3-3 Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 3-3 Figure 3-4 Horn and Lights Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-5 External Speaker Mounting................................................................................................... 3-5 Related Publications MOTOTRBO XPR 4350/4550 Mobile Basic Service Manual .....................................................6880309T21_ MOTOTRBO XPR 4380/4580 Mobile Basic Service Manual ..................................................68009272001_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5350/5550 Mobile Basic Service Manual .................................................. 68009515001_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5580/5380 ............................................................................................. MN000305A01_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5000e Series Mobile Service Manual.......................................................MN002201A01_ vi Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Below is the model numbering scheme for XPR 5000e:
Model No.Example :
AA M Position
:
1 2 2 8 3 J 4 Q 5 C 6 9 7 R 8 A 9 1 A N 10 11 12 AZ: Asia LA: Latin America AA: North America MD: Europe Mobile MOTOTRBO Mobile XPR 5000e Series : 28 Band J
: 136174 MHz M
: 217222 MHz K : 300360 MHz P
: 350400 MHz Q
: 403470 MHz T
: 450527 MHz X
: 450520 MHz U
: 806941 MHz V
: 806870 MHz Power Level N: 125 W P: 2540 W Q: 2545 W R: 140 W M: 1035 W Physical Packages C: Numeric Display H: Monochrome Display N: Color Display X: No Control Head Unique Variations N: Standard Package Version Letter Feature Level 1: Mini-U (Mobile) 2: BNC (Mobile) Primary System Type A: Conventional B: Trunking C: Analog Only D: Limited System E: Modified Conventional Primary Operation J: Basic (No GNSS, no Bluetooth) K: GNSS (GPS or GLONASS) and Bluetooth L: GPS only M: Bluetooth only R: GNSS, WiFi and Bluetooth S: WiFi and Bluetooth only V: Basic (No WiFi, No GNSS, No Bluetooth, No embedded GOB) W: GNSS only Channel Information 9: Variable/Programmable Channel Spacing Below is the numbering scheme of XPR 4000 and 5000 series. Model No.Example :
AA M Position
:
1 2 2 7 3 Q 4 P 5 H 6 9 7 L 8 A 9 1 A N 10 11 12 AZ: Asia LA: Latin America AA: North America (except Mexico) MD: Europe/Middle East/
Africa/Australasia Mobile Mobile Model Series MOTOTRBO XPR 4000 Series: 27 MOTOTRBO XPR 5000 Series: 28 Band J : 136174 MHz Q: 403470 MHz T : 450527 MHz X : 450520 MHz U : 806941 MHz Power Level N: 125W R: 140W M: 1035W P: 2540W Q: 2545W Physical Packages C: Numeric Display Model H: Monochrome Display Model
(XPR 4000 Series) N: Color Display Model
(XPR 5000 Series) Unique Model Variations N: Standard Package Version Letter Feature Level 1: Mini-U 2: BNC Primary System Type A: Conventional B: Trunking C: Analog Only Primary Operation J: Basic (w/o Bluetooth or GPS) K: w/ Bluetooth and GPS L: w/ GPS Only M: w/ Bluetooth Only Channel Spacing 9: Variable/Programmable Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme vii
. vii Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
XPR Series Mobile Radios Product Accessories Two (2) Years One (1) Year The mobiles additionally ship with a standard 1-year Repair Service Advantage (RSA) (for U.S. customers) or 1-year Extended Warranty (for Canada customers). However, at the time of order, you may choose to omit these warranties. For more RSA or Extended Warranty information, please refer to the price pages or Motorola Online (https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com) > Resource Center > Services > Service Product Offerings > Repair Service Advantage or Extended Warranty. Motorola, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. Commercial Warranty II. General Provisions viii This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA's option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. State Law Rights SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How to Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola at 1-888-567-7347 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. C. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs
(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G. Rechargeable batteries if:
- any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.
- the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H. Freight costs to the repair depot. ix Commercial Warranty I. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K. Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. Patent and Software Provisions MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
A. B. that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;
that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C. should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for XPR Series Mobile Radios and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description 1.1.1 Overview Model XPR 4300 Description Numeric Display model with 2 programmable buttons and a 2-character 7-segment display. XPR 4350/
XPR 4380 Numeric Display model with 2 programmable buttons, a 2-character 7-segment display, and GPS. XPR 4500 Display model with 4 programmable buttons and a dot-matrix LCD. XPR 4550/
XPR 4580 Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a dot-matrix LCD, and GPS. XPR 5350 XPR 5550 XPR 5580 XPR 5380 Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-
character 7-segment display, Bluetooth, and GPS. Colour Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a colour LCD, Bluetooth, and GPS. Colour Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a colour LCD, Bluetooth, and GPS. Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-
character 7-segment display, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5350e Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-
character 7-segment display, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5550e Color Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a color LCD, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5580e Color Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a color LCD, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5380e Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-
character 7-segment display, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. 1-2 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1.1.2 Dimensions Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4 show the basic dimensions of the dash mount trunnion of the mobile radio. When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections; in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling; and to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion wing screws. 8.2 6.8 Figure 1-1 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/
XPR 4000e Series 8.2 6.9 Figure 1-2 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBOXPR 5000/
XPR 5000e Series Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-3 8.3 7.9 2 2.4 Figure 1-3 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series NOTE: The MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile models use wing screws with thread length of 14.9 mm while the XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries models require wing screws with thread length of 9.9 mm to secure the radio to the mounting trunnion. 8.1 7.4 2.1 2.5 Figure 1-4 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series NOTE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in (19.1 mm) to the overall length. 1-4 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1.1.3 Connections on the Back of the Radio Figure 1-5 shows the connections that are found on the back of the radio. For complete pin configuration of the rear accessory connector, see Figure 3-2 on page 3-2. Rear Accessory Connector Antenna Connector Battery+ Battery-
GPS-Antenna Connector Figure 1-5 Back View of the Mobile Radio Introduction Standard Configurations 1-5 1.2 Standard Configurations The XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile can be either dash mounted or remote mounted. The XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series mobile can only be dash mounted at this time. 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration In the dash mount configuration of the mobile radio, the control head is mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio via a flexible cable between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head. For details on this configuration, see Section 2.2.1 on page 2-6. Figure 1-6 Dash Mount Configuration 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration (XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobiles Only) In the remote control version, the control head and the transceiver are mounted separately in the vehicle. The control head is mounted in a remote trunnion (PMLN4912_) near the operator using an extension cable. The transceiver is mounted using one of the trunnion mounting options shown in Table 2-1 on page 2-4. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, be sure that secure mounting and sufficient cooling are provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, etc. See publication 6878397A01 for the MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobile Radio remote mount control head installation instructions. 1-6 Introduction Base/Control Stations 1.3 Base/Control Stations If the mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the radio and antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the Safety Booklet (Motorola publication part number 68P81095C99_) provided with the radio:
For outdoor antenna installations, proper site grounding and lightning protection are vitally important. Failure to provide proper lightning protection may result in permanent damage to the radio equipment. Refer to Motorola Quality Standards Fixed Network Equipment Installation Manual R56 (which can be obtained by ordering CDROM 9880384V83) for complete information regarding lightning protection. C a u t i o n The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible and the antenna cable should be earth grounded. The radio chassis must be earth grounded and a lightning surge protector should be used in line with the radio connector and the outdoor antenna. The lightning surge protector should be earth grounded and located at the point where the antenna cable enters the building. The line voltage power supply must have a proper ground connection. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Also, additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. Figure 1-7 shows a typical setup of a Base/Control Station configuration. Line Cord with Ground Wall-
outlet Power Supply Lightning Protector With Quarter Wave Shorting Stub Outdoor Antenna Desktop Power Cable Speaker C C C CC C Antenna Cable Antenna Connector Radio in Desktop Tray Desk Microphone C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CCCC C C Figure 1-7 Example of a Base/Control Station Configuration Chapter 2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations 2.1 Planning the Installation The mobile radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems. Before starting the radio installation, make sure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity will not damage the radio, but will cause the cable fuses to blow. Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable runs to provide maximum protection from pinching, crushing, and overheating. Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual. The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. C a u t i o n 2.1.1 Tools Required for Installation Tool Motorola Part Number 11/32 hex driver Rubber-coated pliers Regular slot screwdriver or Phillips #2 Pin removal tool 1/4 hex driver 6680163F01 2.1.2 Installation Example The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be a dash or remote mount (XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series models can only be dash mounted). (See Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2). Speaker Antenna 1/4-Wavelength Radio Battery Figure 2-1 Typical Dash Mount Configuration 2-2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Speaker Control Head Antenna - Wavelength Radio Battery Control Head Figure 2-2 Typical Remote Mount Configurations 2.1.3 Wiring Diagrams Figure 2-3 shows the wiring diagrams for some of the possible configurations. Identify the configuration that you are installing, and use the diagram when planning the installation. GPS ANTENNA RED LEAD FIREWALL HOLE RF ANTENNA DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION FUSE BATTERY
(+)
(-) FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE HORN/
LIGHT FUSE MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC CONTROL HEAD EMERGENCY SWITCH Figure 2-3 Radio Installation (Dash Mount)
(For complete rear accessory connector pin configuration, see Figure 3-2.) Installation Details for Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-3 GPS ANTENNA RED LEAD FIREWALL HOLE RF ANTENNA DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION FUSE BATTERY
(+)
(-) FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE HORN/
LIGHT FUSE SPEAKER EMERGENCY SWITCH MIC CLIP CONTROL HEAD MIC
(For complete rear accessory connector pin configuration, see Figure 3-2.) Figure 2-4 Radio Installation (Remote Mount) 2-4 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2 Radio Mounting DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic dashboard without first reinforcing the dashboard; the weight of the radio may crack or break the dashboard. DO NOT mount the radio on a flat or concave surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. This is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. C a u t i o n C a u t i o n C a u t i o n The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that will permit routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. For new or existing installations, use one of the mounting kits as specified in Table 2-1. Orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 2-5. Table 2-1. Mounting Kits Mounting Kit Motorola Part Motorola Part Number for XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Number for XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series Series Low Profile Trunnion Kit (ships as part of mobile radio package) RLN6076_ RLN6469_ Low Profile Trunnion Kit (ships in a box intended for resale) RLN6077_ RLN6466_ Standard Profile Trunnion Kit Key Lock Trunnion Kit DIN Mount Kit RLN6078_ RLN6467_ RLN6079_ RLN6468_ RLN5933_ RLN6465_ RADIO FRONT Figure 2-5 Trunnion Orientation for Above or Below Mobile Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-5 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion 1. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump (see Figure 2-6) or under the dash (see Figure 2-7). When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump take care the transmission housing is not affected. 2. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outermost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 3. Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 4. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the self-drilling screws provided. The number of screws used will depend on how the radio is mounted (see Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7). 5. Position the radio to align the trunnion with the trunnion mounting features on the radio (see Figure 2-6). Secure the radio with the two wing screws and lock washers (position the flat side of the washer to the thumbscrew and the washer sharp side to the trunnion) provided. Wing Screw Lock Washer Trunnion Threaded Hole for Wing Screw Lock Washer Tabs Wing Screw Figure 2-6 Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting Trunnion Wing Screw Lock Washer Lock Washer Wing Screw Figure 2-7 Below Dash Trunnion Mounting 2-6 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.2 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.2.1 All Radios If an optional locking kit is used (shown in Figure 2-8), position the lock bottom housing on the trunnion before installing the radio mounting screws. Then slip the top lock housing on and remove the key. You can install the lock on either side of the radio. Lock Figure 2-8 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.3 DIN Mount 2.2.3.1 To install the frame into the dashboard 1. Open up the radio cut-out in the dashboard to ISO7736 specification (182 mm x 53 mm). 2. Insert the mounting frame into the cut-out and retain it by bending back the relevant fixing tabs (using all 6 where possible). Check the orientation of the frame is correct by ensuring that the word TOP is uppermost. NOTE: The tabs are easily bent back by twisting a large flat-head screwdriver in the slot behind the tabs. NOTE: For a more secure installation the frame should also be secured with the appropriate number of screws to the mounting conditions (min. 1). NOTE: The demounting tool can be used as an aid to mounting as well as demounting. Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-7 2.2.3.2 To Mount the radio in the frame 1. Provide the electrical connections for the radio (power, antenna, accessories). 2. Plug in all the connectors and push the radio firmly into the mounting frame until the two springs snap into place (shown in Figure 2-9). Fixing Tabs Fix screws here to secure frame DIN Mount RLN5933_ Demounting Tool Figure 2-9 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Fixing Tabs Fix screws here to secure frame DIN Mount RLN6465_ Demounting Tool Figure 2-10 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries 2-8 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable 2.2.3.3 To Remove the radio from the frame 1. Push the two demounting tools through the openings in the frame until the two springs release the radio. 2. Slide out the radio. NOTE: The fixing tabs should be checked for tightness each time the radio is removed. The tabs are easily tightened by twisting a large flat-head screwdriver in the slot behind the tabs. NOTE: The frame is not designed for regular mounting and demounting. 2.2.4 Remote Mount with Trunnion Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual. C a u t i o n The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Before making any holes in the trunk for radio mounting, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual for restrictions (e.g. due to the gas tank location). For a remote mount installation, the transceiver may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, provided that the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance as well as cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola is the vehicles trunk. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same as for the dash mount installation. See publication 6878397A01 for the MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile radio remote mount control head installation instructions. 2.3 Power Cable Route the red radio power cable from the radio to the vehicles battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15-Amp (part number 6580283E06) or 20-Amp (part number 6580283E07) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 2-12. Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the batterys negative terminal. Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable 2-9 Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O
=
T N E M T R A P M O C O D A R I T N E M T R A P M O C I N O T U A C F O T R A P I E L C H E V I G N R W I T E M M O R G C C A N O
/
E S U F A 4 R O A 3 I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I I N O T N G I I I O D A R
) D E R n h i t
(
E L B A C
) D N U O R G K L B
/
(
E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I y r a m i r p k c a b l e h t i a v n o i t c e n n o c s s s a h c i d o o g A d n a n o i t a r e p o i o d a r r o f l a i t n e s s e s i l e b a c r e w o p
. t i k l e b a c d n a i o d a r e h t o t e g a m a d t n e v e r p o t
. l e b a r i s e d s i e m a r f l i e c h e v e h t o t n o i t c e n n o C
)
-
(
)
+
(
I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B E S U F A 0 2 R O A 5 1 E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I E T O N E E S E N O H P O R C M I H C I O D A R R E K A E P S r o t c e n n o c r a e R
) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R
/
(
:
E T O N i i
) g n n n u r r o t a n r e t l a
. e
. i
(
g n n n u r t o n s i n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t n e h w o d a r i e h t f o e s u s s e c x e
, y r e t t a b s r a c e h t o t y l t c e r i d e n i l I N O T N G I I s o d a r i e h t t c e n n o c o t e s o o h c u o y f i
:
n o i t u a C O
-
6 4 6 7 2
-
F P E A M
. N O d e n r u t s i h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t n e h w n o i t c n u l f y n o l l i i w o d a r e h t
, h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t o t d e r i w s i e n i l I N O T N G I I s o d a r i e h t f I t n u o M h s a D r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C 1 1
-
2 e r u g F i
. F F O r o N O h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t h t i w e t a r e p o o t i o d a r e h t s w o l l a n o i t a r u g i f n o c s h T i
. y r e t t a b s r a c e h t f o e g r a h c s d w o s l i a n i t l u s e r l d u o c 2-10 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable
)
-
(
)
+
(
E T O N E E S T E M M O R G I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B E S U F A 0 2 R O A 5 1 i i
) g n n n u r r o t a n r e t l a
. e
. i
(
g n n n u r t o n s i n o i t i n g i s
'
r a c e h t E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I
) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R
/
(
n e h w o d a r i e h t f o e s u s s e c x e
, y r e t t a b s
'
r a c e h t o t y l t c e r i d e n i l I N O T N G I
'
I s o d a r i INTERFACE I O D A R r o t c e n n o c r a e R e h t t c e n n o c o t e s o o h c u o y f i
:
n o i t u a C
:
E T O N Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O T N E M T R A P M O C I O D A R T N E M T R A P M O C I E L C H E V E N O H P O R C M I I H C T W S N O T N G I I I R E K A E P S F O T R A P I E L C H E V I G N R W I T E M M O R G E S U F A 4 R O A 3
) D E R n h t
(
i E L B A C C C A N O
/
I N O T N G I I I O D A R CONTROL HEAD I N O T U A C y r a m i r p k c a b l e h t i a v n o i t c e n n o c s s s a h c i d o o g A d n a n o i t a r e p o i o d a r r o f l a i t n e s s e s i l e b a c r e w o p
. t i k l e b a c d n a i o d a r e h t o t e g a m a d t n e v e r p o t
. l e b a r i s e d s i e m a r f l i e c h e v e h t o t n o i t c e n n o C T E M M O R G
) D N U O R G K L B
/
(
E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I
. F F O r o N O h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s
'
r a c e h t h t i w e t a r e p o o t i o d a r e h t s w o l l a n o i t a r u g i f n o c s h T i
. y r e t t a b s
'
r a c e h t f o e g r a h c s d w o s l i a n i t l u s e r l d u o c
. N O d e n r u t s i h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s
'
r a c e h t n e h w n o i t c n u l f y n o l l i i w o d a r e h t
, h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s
'
r a c e h t o t d e r i w s i e n i l I N O T N G I
'
i I s o d a r e h t f I t n u o M e t o m e R r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C 2 1
-
2 e r u g F i Installation Details for Standard Configurations Ignition Sense Cable 2-11 2.4 Ignition Sense Cable Motorola supplies an ignition sense cable and recommends that it be used with every mobile installation. The ignition sense cable allows the radio to be turned on and off with the vehicle ignition switch, and allows the radio to remember the state of the radio on/off switch, even if it is changed while the vehicle is off. For radio ON/OFF control independent of the ignition switch, connect the red ignition cable (pin 25 of accessory connector) to battery hot at the vehicle fuse block (dash mount only). For radio ON/OFF control via the ignition switch, connect the red ignition cable to ignition at the fuse block. The ignition sense cable uses either a 3-Amp (P/N 6500139764) or 4-Amp (P/N 6580283E02) fuse. For other considerations when connecting the ignition cable, see Basic Service Manuals in Related Publications on page 1-v. 2.5 Antenna Installation IMPORTANT NOTE: To assure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, these antenna installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. NOTE: For mobile radios with rated power of 7 watts or less, the only installation restrictions are to use only Motorola approved antennas (HAF4025_ and HAF4029_ for 800/900 band) and install the antenna externally on metal body vehicles. For mobile radios with rated power greater than 7 Watts, always adhere to all the guidelines and restrictions in Section 2.5.1 below. 2.5.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External Installation - Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof Top - For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety Standards, mount the antenna in the center of the roof. 3. Trunk Lid - On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sport utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center of the roof. BEFORE INSTALLING AN ANTENNA ON THE TRUNK LID,
- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid will be at least 85 cm (33 inches) from the front surface of the rear seat-back to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards.
- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis. NOTE: If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models:
For all VHF and UHF models, the 1/4 wave antenna, RAD4218_ & RAD4227_ antenna should be mounted only in the center area of the roof, not on the trunk lid, to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards. 2-12 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 5. Ensure the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from the vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. 7. Make sure the mobile radio antenna is installed at least 30 centimeters (1 foot) away from any other antenna on the vehicle. 8. For XPR Series Mobile Radio models with GPS using a GPS only or a combined RF/GPS antenna, ensure that the antenna has a clear view of the sky and that the antenna base with the GPS receiver is not covered by any metallic or radio frequency absorbing material. Any non-glass-mount GPS antenna should be positioned next to the RF antenna. Any other mobile radio antenna should be at least 30 centimeters (1 foot) away from the RF antenna. NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, etc.) in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. 2.5.2 Antenna Installation Procedure 1. Mount the antenna according to the instructions provided with the antenna kit. Run the coaxial cable to the radio mounting location. If necessary, cut off the excess cable and install the cable connector. 2. Connect the antenna cable connector to the radio antenna connector on the rear of the radio. 3. In case of a GPS model, connect the GPS antenna to the GPS antenna connector on the rear of the radio. Antenna Connector GPS-Antenna Connector Figure 2-13 Antenna connections on the back of the radio Installation Details for Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-13 2.5.3 Antenna Connection To ensure a secure connection of an antenna cable's mini-UHF plug to a radio's mini-UHF jack, their interlocking features must be properly engaged. If they are not properly engaged, the system will loosen. NOTE: Applying excessive force with a tool can cause damage to the antenna or the connector (e.g., stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break). Motorola recommends the following sequence to ensure proper attachment of the system (see Figure 2-14):
Mini UHF Jack Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange Cable Figure 2-14 Mini-UHF Connection 1. Make sure that there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. 2. Make sure that the collar of the antenna cable plug is loose and does not bind. 3. Slide the collar back against the flange. Insert the antenna cable plugs pin fully into the radio jack, but do not engage the threads. 4. Ensure that the plugs and jacks interlocking features are fully seated. Check this by grasping the crimp on the cable jack, rotating the cable, and noting any movement. If the features are seated correctly, there should be NO movement. 5. Finger-tighten the antenna cable plugs collar onto the radios jack. 6. Give a final tug, by hand, to the collar, and retighten by hand as firmly as possible. 7. Use the rubber-coated pliers to grip the plugs knurled collar, then turn clockwise to tighten the collar. It should take 1/4 turn or less. Turning counterclockwise loosens the collar. NOTE: Overtightening the collar can damage the connector and the radio. 2-14 Installation Details for Standard Configurations 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6.1 Standard Hang-Up Clip The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator(s). Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, the microphone can be mounted in any position. The microphone hang-up clip must be grounded. Use the hang-up clip as a template to locate the mounting holes. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw in the top clip hole. 2.7 Completing the Installation Complete the installation by connecting the power wires and plugging in the microphone cable to the mobile. Installation Details for Standard Configurations Completing the Installation 2-15 Notes Chapter 3 Options and Accessories Installation 3.1 Accessory Installation The accessories must be installed through the rear accessory connector that is located on the rear of the radio, adjacent to the power connector. Most of the Motorola-approved accessories are supplied with female terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire specifically designed to fit the plug of the rear accessory connector. Insert the female terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate locations. The accessory connector assembly is provided together with the accessory. Connect the accessory connector assembly to the rear accessory connector on the back of the mobile. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals can cause electrical intermittences and may cause damage to the plug. Rear Accessory Connector Figure 3-1 Location of the Rear Accessory Connector 3-2 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation Table 3-1 Rear Accessory Connector Pin Functions Pin Name Pin Function USB+
USB-
VBUS USB + (Data) USB - (Data) USB Power (5V from USB accessory/cable) USB/MAP_ID GND USB/MAP_ID Ground MAP_ID_2 MAP_ID_1 SW B+
PWRGND SPKR-
SPKR+
Tx Audio Accessory Identifier Accessory Identifier Switched Battery Voltage Ground Speaker - (3.2 ohm minimum impedance) Speaker + (3.2 ohm minimum impedance) Rear External Microphone Input4 Audio GND Audio Ground AUX Audio 1 PUBLIC Address 1 Pin No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Pin Name Pin Function Rx Audio AUX Audio 2 Receive Live Audio2 PUBLIC Address 2 GND Ground GP5-1 (PTT) 5V Level GPIO, PTT Input1 GND Ground GP5-2 (Monitor) 5V Level GPIO, Monitor Input3 GP5-6 GP5-3 GP5-7 5V Level GPIO 5V Level GPIO, Channel Activity Function 5V Level GPIO 23 EMERGENCY Emergency Switch Input 24 25 26 GP5-8 IGN SENSE VIP-1 5V Level GPIO Ignition Sense5 12V Tolerant, 5V GPIO, External Alarm 1 Pulling this line to ground will activate PTT function, activating the AUX_MIC input. 2 Fixed level (independent of volume level) received audio signal, including alert tones. Flat or de-emphasis are programmed by CPS. Output voltage is approximately 330 mVrms per 1kHz of deviation. 3 This input is used to detect when a rear microphone accessory is taken off-hook, to override PL to alert the user to busy traffic prior to transmitting. 4 This microphone signal is independent of the microphone signal on the front microphone connector. The nominal input level is 80mVrms for 60% deviation. The DC impedance is 660 ohms and the AC impedance is 560 ohms. 5 See Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-12 for wiring information. d n u o r G D _ P A M I
/
B S U 4
-
D 2 d n u o r G r e w o P 8 I 1 _ D _ P A M 6
+
r k p S 10 d n u o r G o d u A i i o d u A x R d n u o r G d n u o r G 12 14 16 18
) m r a A l t x E
(
1 _ P V I 26 6 _ 5 P G 20 7 _ 5 P G 22 8 _ 5 P G 24 1 3 5 7 9
+
D s u b V
+
B W S
-
r k p S I 2 _ D _ P A M 11 i o d u A x T 13 D x R
/
1 t i u O o d u A x u A 15 D x T
/
2 t i u O o d u A x u A 17 19 21 23 25 w S g r e m E e s n e S n g I
) T T P
(
1 _ 5 P G
) r o t i n o M
(
2 _ 5 P G
) t c A n a h C
(
3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-2 Pin Configuration of Rear Accessory Connector (as viewed from the rear of the radio) Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-3 3.1.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the emergency pushbutton (Motorola part number RLN5926A_) or the footswitch (Motorola part number RLN5929A_) using the hardware that comes with the kit. Press the terminal into the accessory connector housing. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 23 and 18 (see Figure 3-3). Route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. SPST NORMALLY OPEN EMERGENCY SWITCH d n u o r G D _ P A M I
/
B S U 4
-
D 2 d n u o r G r e w o P 8 I 1 _ D _ P A M 6
+
r k p S 10 d n u o r G o d u A i i o d u A x R d n u o r G d n u o r G 12 14 16 18 NOTE 1 PIN 23 PIN 18 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR
) m r a A l t x E
(
1 _ P V I 26 6 _ 5 P G 20 7 _ 5 P G 22 8 _ 5 P G 24 1 3 5 7 9
+
D s u b V
+
B W S
-
r k p S I 2 _ D _ P A M 11 i o d u A x T 13 D x R
/
1 t i u O o d u A x u A 15 D x T
/
2 t i u O o d u A x u A 17 19 21 23 25 w S g r e m E e s n e S n g I
) T T P
(
1 _ 5 P G
) r o t i n o M
(
2 _ 5 P G
) t c A n a h C
(
3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-3 Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram 3-4 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3.1.2 Horn and Lights (External Alarm) Relay Allows the user to be alerted to an incoming call when away from the vehicle. The vehicle's horn or lights or both are used depending on which option is connected to the accessory port. When the radio receives a call alert or emergency alarm/call, there is a delay before activating the horn and/or lights. The delay is programmable using the Horn & Lights Delay Time feature in the CPS. Once activated, the Horn and/or Lights remain active depending on the option selected. The Horn & Lights feature can be toggled between ON or OFF, via a short or long programmable button press (Horn &
Lights On/Off) or Horn/Lights (Utilities Menu) feature. For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting (normally under the dash) and, referring to Figure 3-4, perform the following procedure:
1. Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires (female pins) into locations 26 and 18 of the connector. 2. Lights Relay Connect the relay across the headlamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires (female pins) into locations 26 and 18 of the accessory connector. d n u o r G D _ P A M I
/
B S U 4
-
D 2 d n u o r G r e w o P 8 I 1 _ D _ P A M 6
+
r k p S 10 d n u o r G o d u A i i o d u A x R d n u o r G d n u o r G 12 14 16 18 Y
) m r a A l t x E
(
1 _ P V I 26 6 _ 5 P G 20 7 _ 5 P G 22 8 _ 5 P G 24 1 3 5 7 9
+
D s u b V
+
B W S
-
r k p S I 2 _ D _ P A M 11 i o d u A x T 13 D x R
/
1 t i u O o d u A x u A 15 D x T
/
2 t i u O o d u A x u A 17 19 21 23 25 w S g r e m E e s n e S n g I
) T T P
(
1 _ 5 P G
) r o t i n o M
(
2 _ 5 P G
) t c A n a h C
(
3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-4 Horn and Lights Wiring Diagram Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-5 3.1.3 External Speaker DO NOT ground the radio's speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output (dc voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit will result if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. C a u t i o n The external speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in a variety of ways. With the trunnion bracket, the external speaker can mount permanently on the dashboard or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the external speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the external speaker out of the way so that it will not be kicked or knocked around by the vehicle occupants. Mount the external speaker as follows:
1. Use the external speaker mounting bracket as a template to mark the mounting hole locations. 2. Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3. Attach the external speaker and fasten to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4. Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Be sure the wires are out of the way and will not be snagged and broken by the occupants of the vehicle. Dashboard Trunnion Bracket Firewall OR Figure 3-5 External Speaker Mounting 3-6 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation Notes Chapter 4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting In this section are Motorola recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues, including:
Radio circuit damage due to over voltage condition Radio/Accessories "lock up"
Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed Radio intermittently resets Alternator whine present when transmitting with engine running Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off 4.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off via the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control heads on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch (usually in the vehicles fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTE: Motorola recommends protecting or isolating the radios ignition sense input from voltage spikes in excess of +/- 40 VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (utility trucks, buses and etc.), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 msec). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (i.e. MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 and 40 volts will suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only via the control heads on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. This will mean the ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring will be necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 4-2 4.2 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Take care to scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where the ground connection is to be made, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. Verify that the A+ lead (red) is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the ground lead (black) is connected to the vehicles chassis using as short of a length of wire as is practical. For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed (lights, flashers, computers siren/PA and etc.), use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Make sure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI) from interfering with the radio and/or accessories. Do not coil up any excess length of the A+ (red) lead. Doing this may cause a large transient voltage to be produced when there is a high current drain (e.g. during transmit). This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable, if possible. It may affect the radios receive performance. 4.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC) from the radios ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radios ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. This is intended to filter the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter will introduce a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes and etc.), these relay circuits should be isolated as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, diode suppression should be used across the relay contacts to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is to be used, make sure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+ point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 volts when all accessories/air-conditioner, etc. are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6V +/- 20%. Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting 4-3 4.4 Jump-Start the Vehicle Do not jump-start vehicle with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. C a u t i o n The state of your radio prior to needing a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, Motorola recommends the following steps be taken before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. 1. Locate the ignition sense line and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTE: These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line) use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. 2. Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3. Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to insure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with any moving parts. 4. Proceed with the jump-start routine as described by your vehicle owners manual. 5. Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 4.5 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker 1. Refer to Section 2.1.2 for recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. 2. Refer to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. 4-4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Notes Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering A.1 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. See Related Publications on page 1-iv for the radio basic service manuals which consists the parts list and part numbers for ordering. A.2 Motorola Online Motorola Online users can access our online catalog at:
https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com To register for online access, please call 1-800-422-4210 (for U.S. and Canada Service Centers only). International customers can obtain assistance by go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com , select your region > SUPPORT. A.3 Mail Orders Mail orders are only accepted by the U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD):
Motorola 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive 3rd Floor - Order Processing Columbia, MD 21046 U.S.A. A.4 Telephone Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization*
(United States and Canada) 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM (Central Standard Time) Monday through Friday (Chicago, U.S.A.) 1-800-422-4210 1-847-538-8023 (United States and Canada) U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD) 1-877-873-4668 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Eastern Standard Time) A-2 Replacement Parts Ordering Fax Orders A.5 Fax Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization*
(United States and Canada) 1-800-622-6210 1-847-576-3023 (International) USFGMD
(Federal Government Orders) 1-800-526-8641 (For Parts and Equipment Purchase Orders) A.6 Parts Identification Radio Products and Solutions Organization*
(United States and Canada) 1-800-422-4210 A.7 Product Customer Service Radio Products and Solutions Organization (United States and Canada) 1-800-927-2744
* The Radio Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO) was formerly known as the Radio Products Services Division (RPSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD). Appendix B Motorola Service Centers B.1 Servicing Information If a unit requires further complete testing, knowledge and/or details of component level troubleshooting or service than is customarily performed at the basic level, please send the radio to a Motorola Service Center as listed below. B.2 Motorola Service Center 1220 Don Haskins Drive Suite A El Paso, TX 79936 Tel: 915-872-8200 B.3 Motorola Federal Technical Center 10105 Senate Drive Lanham, MD 20706 Tel: 1-800-969-6680 Fax: 1-800-784-4133 B.4 Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center 181 Whitehall Drive Markham, Ontario, L3R 9T1 Tel: 1-800-543-3222 Fax: 1-888-331-9872 or 1-905-948-5970 B-2 Motorola Service Centers Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center Notes Index I ignition Index A accessories installing dash mount
........................................................3-1 antenna cable, see Cables, antenna connection ...........................................................2-14 diagrams ..............................................................2-14 installing ...............................................................2-12 mounting ..............................................................2-12 B base stations .............................................................1-6 black lead ..................................................................2-9 C cables antenna .........................................................2-4, 2-14 connection .............................................................4-1 diagrams ............................. 2-2, 2-3, 2-10, 2-11, 2-14 ignition .................................................................2-12 ignition sense .......................................................2-12 power .....................................................................2-9 configurations dash mount control head
............................................................1-5 dash mount see also specific model names
............................................................1-5 control stations ..........................................................1-6 D dash mount accessories installations ........................................3-1 configuration ..........................................................1-5 installation .......................................................2-2, 2-3 radio dimensions ....................................................1-2 trunnion ..................................................................2-6 E emergency footswitch ................................................3-3 emergency pushbutton ..............................................3-3 F footswitch, emergency ...............................................3-3 cable ....................................................................2-12 installation examples ...............................................................2-1 J J2 pin configuration .............................................2-2, 2-3 L leads black ......................................................................2-9 light relay ...................................................................3-4 locking kit, installing ...................................................2-7 M microphone hang-up clip, standard .........................................2-15 S-hook ...................................................................2-6 mounting configurations ............................................2-4 dash ................................................................1-5, 2-6 O ordering replacement parts ...................................... A-1 P parts, ordering replacement pin
..................................... A-1 functions ................................................................3-2 removal tool
...........................................................2-1 pin configurations J2 ....................................................................2-2, 2-3 pushbutton, emergency .............................................3-3 R rear accessory jack, see J2 relays horn ........................................................................3-4
........................................................................3-4 light replacement parts, ordering ..................................... A-1 S speaker connecting ...........................................................2-15 mounting ................................................................3-5 H horn relay ..................................................................3-4 T tools, required ............................................................2-1 trunnion Index-2 bracket for speaker ................................................ 3-5 dash mount ............................................................ 2-6 locking kit ............................................................... 2-7 mounting bracket
................................................... 2-6 orientation .............................................................. 2-5 transmission hump mounting ................................ 2-6 W wiring diagrams ......................................................... 2-2 Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2006 201 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. November 201. www.motorolasolutions.com
*6880309T23*
6880309T23-FA
1 2 3 4 | C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 122.58 KiB | January 30 2019 |
Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 / IC: 109U-92FT7083
(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ492FT7083/109U-92FT7083) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: Ong Khye Siang SIGNATURE:
DATE: Nov 12, 2018 TITLE: Engineering Hardware Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 / IC: 109U-92FT7083 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C and ISED RSS 247 regulations. Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. NAME: Ong Khye Siang SIGNATURE:
DATE: Nov 12, 2018 TITLE: Engineering Hardware Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2
1 2 3 4 | Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 123.75 KiB | January 30 2019 |
FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST January 22, 2019 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 Dear Sir or Madam:
Motorola Solutions is requesting that Exhibit 5 (Schematic Diagrams), Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures), and Exhibit 12 (Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions considers the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 5, 10, and 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ____________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13B
1 2 3 4 | FCC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 401.17 KiB | January 30 2019 |
FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 January 22, 2019 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Class 2 Permissive Change to FCC Authorized Transceiver with FCC ID: AZ492FT7083. Dear Sir:
A permissive change is requested for the subject transceiver which is marketed in the United States and elsewhere. A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:
Current parts has been End of Life (EOL) and new parts has been implemented from approved supplier list (ASL) in order to continue supply, the component changes are made within the VCO, Synthesizer, Transmitter, Receiver and additional DC supply for Mic Bias. The component changes are :
1) pin-to-pin compatible (except Receiver front-end) 2) has the same basic function as the previous chip 3) no change in radio parameters Note: Theres no part change in the Bluetooth section. Hence, BT/BTLE/WIFI tests are waived. B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:
EME has been assessed and no degradation found. However, degradation was found in EMC compared to the original filing but still within the FCC limits. C. CONCLUSION:
This radio continues to meet all FCC emissions requirements for which authorization was granted. However, degradation was found in EMC compared to the original filing but still meet requirements of a Class-2 Permissive Change. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com EXHIBIT 13A _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida
1 2 3 4 | Frequencies Justification Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 108.28 KiB | January 30 2019 |
FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 Date: January 22, 2019 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch, Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7083 Dear Sir or Madam:
The MOTOTRBO Mobile 2-Way radio is designed to operate in the frequency band 806-824 MHz; 851-869 MHz;
896-902 MHz; 935-941 MHz. To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola is requesting that the FCC lists the frequencies under FCC Rule Parts 24 and 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Frequency Range (MHz) Part 24 Part 90 x x Emission Designator 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 7K60F1D, 7K60F1E, 7K60F1W, 7K60FXD, 7K60FXE 11K0F3E, 7K60F1D, 7K60F1E, 7K60F1W, 7K60FXD, 7K60FXE 10K0F3E, 7K60F1D, 7K60F1E, 7K60F1W, 7K60FXD, 7K60FXE x x x x 806-824 851-869 896-901 935-940 901-902 940-941 Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 Exhibit 13C- Page 1 of 1
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2019-01-30 | 935 ~ 940 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2016-01-12 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
3 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
4 | 940 ~ 941 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2019-01-30
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2016-01-12
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003778479
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
8000 West Sunrise Blvd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Ft Lauderdale, 33322
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Ft Lauderdale, Florida 33322
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
j******@tuvsud.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
j******@acstestlab.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
AZ4
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
92FT7083
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
D**** Z******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
Regulatory Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
95472********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
--********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 2-Way Portable Radio (with Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE and WIFI) | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Mobile 2-Way Radio | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | C2PC as described in this filing. Output power listed is rated conducted; maximum conducted output power as allowed by 47 CFR 90.205(s) is 42 W for 806-824 MHz and 851-869 MHz and 36 W for 896-901 MHz and 935-940 MHz. This transmitter must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational / Controlled RF exposure environment, not exceeding a maximum transmitting duty factor of 50%. All qualified end-users of this device must have the knowledge to control their exposure conditions and/or duration, and the exposure conditions and/or duration of their passengers and bystanders, to comply with the General Population / Uncontrolled MPE limit and requirements. A label, as described in this filing, must be displayed on the device to direct users to specific training information for meeting Occupational Exposure Requirements. Users/operators must be provided with the training information, antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide the vehicle-mounted (automobile) configurations and separation distances as described in this filing. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Power listed is Conducted. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as shown in this composite filing. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power listed is rated conducted; maximum conducted output power as allowed by 47 CFR 90.205(s) is 42 W for 806-824 MHz and 851-869 MHz and 36 W for 896-901 MHz and 935-940 MHz. This transmitter must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational / Controlled RF exposure environment, not exceeding a maximum transmitting duty factor of 50%. All qualified end-users of this device must have the knowledge to control their exposure conditions and/or duration, and the exposure conditions and/or duration of their passengers and bystanders, to comply with the General Population / Uncontrolled MPE limit and requirements. A label, as described in this filing, must be displayed on the device to direct users to specific training information for meeting Occupational Exposure Requirements. Users/operators must be provided with the training information, antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide the vehicle-mounted (automobile) configurations and separation distances as described in this filing. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Motorola Penang Advanced Communication Laboratory
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
TUV SUD PSB Pte Ltd
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
H**** H******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
J****** D****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
S******** H****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
604-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
65-68********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
60485******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
604 6********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
+65 6********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
604-6********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
h******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
j******@tuv-sud-psb.sg
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
c******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 12 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 13 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 14 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 15 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 16 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 17 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 18 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 19 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 21 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 22 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 23 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 24 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 25 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 26 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 27 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 28 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 29 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 31 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 32 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 33 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 34 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 35 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 36 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 37 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 38 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.003 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.019 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0083000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 7 | 9 | BF | 806 | 824 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 8 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 9 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 11 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 12 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 13 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 14 | 9 | BF | 851 | 869 | 35 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 15 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 16 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 17 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 18 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 19 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 9 | BH | 896 | 901 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 21 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 22 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 23 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 24 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 25 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 26 | 9 | BH | 935 | 940 | 30 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 27 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 10K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 28 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 29 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 31 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 32 | 24D | 901 | 902 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 33 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 10K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 34 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 35 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 36 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXD | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 37 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60FXE | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 38 | 24D | 940 | 941 | 8 | 0.5 ppm | 7K60F1W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC